SmartPlant P&ID

User’s Guide
June 2004 Version 4.1

DPID2-PE-200004E

Copyright
Copyright © 1999-2004 Intergraph Corporation. All Rights Reserved. Including software, file formats, and audiovisual displays; may be used pursuant to applicable software license agreement; contains confidential and proprietary information of Intergraph and/or third parties which is protected by copyright law, trade secret law, and international treaty, and may not be provided or otherwise made available without proper authorization.

Restricted Rights Legend
Use, duplication, or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph (c) of the Contractor Rights in Technical Data clause at DFARS 252.227-7013, subparagraph (b) of the Rights in Computer Software or Computer Software Documentation clause at DFARS 252.227-7014, subparagraphs (b)(1) and (2) of the License clause at DFARS 252.227-7015, or subparagraphs (c) (1) and (2) of Commercial Computer Software--Restricted Rights at 48 CFR 52.227-19, as applicable. Unpublished---rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States. Intergraph Corporation Huntsville, Alabama 35894-0001

Warranties and Liabilities
All warranties given by Intergraph Corporation about equipment or software are set forth in your purchase contract, and nothing stated in, or implied by, this document or its contents shall be considered or deemed a modification or amendment of such warranties. Intergraph believes the information in this publication is accurate as of its publication date. The information and the software discussed in this document are subject to change without notice and are subject to applicable technical product descriptions. Intergraph Corporation is not responsible for any error that may appear in this document. The software discussed in this document is furnished under a license and may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of this license. No responsibility is assumed by Intergraph for the use or reliability of software on equipment that is not supplied by Intergraph or its affiliated companies. THE USER OF THE SOFTWARE IS EXPECTED TO MAKE THE FINAL EVALUATION AS TO THE USEFULNESS OF THE SOFTWARE IN HIS OWN ENVIRONMENT.

Trademarks
Intergraph, the Intergraph logo, SmartSketch, FrameWorks, SmartPlant, INtools, PDS, and MARIAN are registered trademarks Intergraph Corporation. Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. Other brands and product names are trademarks of their respective owners.

Table of Contents

Table of Contents
Customer Support and Documentation Comments........................................................9 Introducing SmartPlant P&ID .......................................................................................10 SmartPlant P&ID Program Group ..............................................................................11 What's New in SmartPlant P&ID?..............................................................................12
SmartPlant P&ID Help Command.................................................................................... 12 Printable Guides Command .............................................................................................. 12 SmartPlant P&ID on the Web Command ......................................................................... 12 SmartPlant P&ID Web Forum Command ........................................................................ 13 About SmartPlant P&ID Command.................................................................................. 13 Display Help for Programming With SmartPlant P&ID................................................... 13

Navigating in the Software: An Overview .....................................................................14 Working With the Design Window: An Overview ....................................................15
Show Command................................................................................................................ 17 Options Command ............................................................................................................ 17 Previous Command........................................................................................................... 22 Save Settings Command ................................................................................................... 22 Zoom Area Command....................................................................................................... 22 Zoom In Command ........................................................................................................... 23 Zoom Out Command ........................................................................................................ 24 Fit Command .................................................................................................................... 24 Pan Command................................................................................................................... 25 Display Command ............................................................................................................ 26 Toolbars Command........................................................................................................... 26 Properties Command......................................................................................................... 28 New Command ................................................................................................................. 34 Cascade Command............................................................................................................ 36 Tile Horizontally Command ............................................................................................. 36 Tile Vertically Command ................................................................................................. 36 Active Window List.......................................................................................................... 36

Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview..............................................38
Engineering Data Editor Command.................................................................................. 39 Stockpile Menu: An Overview ......................................................................................... 41 Edit Menu: An Overview.................................................................................................. 43 Claim Command ............................................................................................................... 44 Release Claim Command.................................................................................................. 44 Claim Status Command .................................................................................................... 45 View Menu: An Overview................................................................................................ 45 Customizing the Display of the Engineering Data Editor: An Overview ......................... 59

Using Catalog Explorer: An Overview.......................................................................65
Catalog Explorer Command ............................................................................................. 65 Catalog Menu: An Overview ............................................................................................ 68 View Menu ....................................................................................................................... 77 Navigation Menu (Catalog Explorer) ............................................................................... 79

SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 3

Table of Contents
Customizing Catalog Explorer: An Overview .................................................................. 82

Working With the Properties Window: An Overview ...............................................83
Properties Window Command .......................................................................................... 84

Customizing the Software: An Overview...................................................................91
Customize Command........................................................................................................ 92 Custom Commands Command ......................................................................................... 97

Working with Drawings: An Overview .......................................................................102 Open Command ........................................................................................................104
Open Dialog Box ............................................................................................................ 104 Open Plant Structure Dialog Box ................................................................................... 105 Filter Dialog Box ............................................................................................................ 106 Customize Current View Dialog Box ............................................................................. 107 Open an Existing Drawing.............................................................................................. 108 Open a Drawing in a Different Database ........................................................................ 109 Customize the Open Dialog Box .................................................................................... 110

Recent Drawings.......................................................................................................111
Access a Recently Open Drawing................................................................................... 111 Switch to Another Open Drawing or View..................................................................... 111

File Properties Command .........................................................................................112
File Properties Dialog Box.............................................................................................. 112 View Document Properties ............................................................................................. 115 Set Document Properties................................................................................................. 116

Close Command........................................................................................................117
Close an Active Drawing ................................................................................................ 117

Exit Command ..........................................................................................................118
Close the Program........................................................................................................... 118

Creating Drawing Templates: An Overview ............................................................119
New Template Command ............................................................................................... 120 Create a Drawing Template ............................................................................................ 121 Edit a Standard Drawing Template Border..................................................................... 122

Saving Drawings: An Overview...............................................................................124
Save Command ............................................................................................................... 125 Save As Command.......................................................................................................... 125

Re-creating Drawings: An Overview .......................................................................127
Recreate a Drawing......................................................................................................... 129 Resolve a Re-create Drawing Error Condition ............................................................... 129

Using Filters: An Overview......................................................................................130
Add Filter Command ...................................................................................................... 131 Filter Tab Cut Command ................................................................................................ 138 Filter Tab Copy Command ............................................................................................. 139 Filter Tab Paste Command.............................................................................................. 139 Filter Tab Delete Command............................................................................................ 139 Filter Tab Use Alternate Symbology Command............................................................. 140 Filter Tab Properties Command...................................................................................... 140

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview ................................................141 Understanding Database Constraints........................................................................143 Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview...................................................................144 4 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide

Table of Contents
Select Tool Command..................................................................................................... 145 Select Tool Ribbon ......................................................................................................... 146 Configuration (PickQuick) Tool ..................................................................................... 146 Select an Item.................................................................................................................. 147 Select an Item Using the Configuration (PickQuick) Tool............................................. 148 Place an Item With the Configuration (PickQuick) Tool ............................................... 149

Placing Items on a Grid: An Overview.....................................................................150
Show Grid Command ..................................................................................................... 150 Snap Grid Command....................................................................................................... 151

Placing Equipment: An Overview ............................................................................152
Place Equipment ............................................................................................................. 153 Place Multiple Representations....................................................................................... 154

Routing Lines: An Overview....................................................................................156
Line Routing Ribbon....................................................................................................... 157 Route a Line.................................................................................................................... 158 Start a Line in Free Space ............................................................................................... 159 Start a Line from a Connect Point................................................................................... 160 Insert Line Segments into an Existing Line .................................................................... 161 Insert a Vertex into an Existing Line .............................................................................. 161 Branch from an Existing Line......................................................................................... 162 Branch to an Existing Line ............................................................................................. 162 Add a Manual Gap to a Line........................................................................................... 163 Assign Heat Tracing ....................................................................................................... 164

Break Run Command ...............................................................................................165
Break a Pipe Run ............................................................................................................ 165

Join Runs Command.................................................................................................166
Join Pipe Runs ................................................................................................................ 166

Using Piping Components: An Overview ................................................................167
Place a Piping Component .............................................................................................. 167 Using the PipeSpec Utility: An Overview ...................................................................... 169

Placing Instrumentation: An Overview ....................................................................174
Loop Tag Dialog Box (Properties Window)................................................................... 175 Place an Inline Instrument .............................................................................................. 175 Place an Offline Instrument ............................................................................................ 177 Add Instruments to a Loop ............................................................................................. 178 Updating Associated Instruments with Loop Properties (Properties Window) .............. 179 Remove an Instrument from a Loop ............................................................................... 180

Labeling: An Overview ............................................................................................181
Placing Labels: An Overview ......................................................................................... 182 Using the Types of Labels: An Overview....................................................................... 191 Using Off-Page and Utility Connectors: An Overview .................................................. 201 Calling Item Tag Validation ........................................................................................... 208

Using Annotations: An Overview ............................................................................210
Place an Annotation ........................................................................................................ 211 Place an Area Break........................................................................................................ 212 Place a Package............................................................................................................... 213 Place a Revision Cloud ................................................................................................... 214

Modifying and Moving Placed Items: An Overview ...............................................215
Undo Command .............................................................................................................. 216 Move Command ............................................................................................................. 217

SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 5

Table of Contents
Move To Drawing Command ......................................................................................... 222 Finding and Replacing Drawing Items: An Overview.................................................... 225 Manipulating Items With Component Handles: An Overview....................................... 238 Cutting or Deleting Items: An Overview........................................................................ 245 Copying Items: An Overview ......................................................................................... 253 Selecting Connected Items: An Overview ...................................................................... 254 Modifying Item Properties: An Overview ...................................................................... 258

Moving and Placing Stockpile Items: An Overview ................................................263
Move to Different Stockpile Dialog Box........................................................................ 264 Place an Item from the Stockpile .................................................................................... 264 Move a Stockpile Item to the Stockpile of Another Drawing......................................... 265 Using Reports to Import Items into the Stockpile........................................................... 265 Populate the Stockpile from a Spreadsheet..................................................................... 267 Modify a Pump by Importing a SmartPlant P&ID Report into the Stockpile................. 268

Gapping Lines: An Overview...................................................................................269
AutoGap Command ........................................................................................................ 269 Gap Now Command ....................................................................................................... 270

Updating Options Manager Settings: An Overview.................................................271
Update Symbology Command........................................................................................ 271 Update Symbology ......................................................................................................... 272 Update Line Settings....................................................................................................... 272

Linking and Embedding Objects: An Overview ......................................................273
Image Command............................................................................................................. 275 Object Command ............................................................................................................ 276 Paste Special Command.................................................................................................. 280 Links Command.............................................................................................................. 281

Working With Assemblies: An Overview................................................................284
Save As Assembly Command......................................................................................... 285

Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview ....................................................288 Claiming Items: An Overview..................................................................................289
Claim Command ............................................................................................................. 291 Release Claim Command................................................................................................ 300 Claim Status Command .................................................................................................. 301 Show Claims Command ................................................................................................. 303

Comparing and Refreshing Versions: An Overview ................................................304
Compare and Refresh Command .................................................................................... 305

Consistency Checking: An Overview ...........................................................................313 Show Inconsistencies Command ..............................................................................314
Show Inconsistencies ...................................................................................................... 314

Properties Command ................................................................................................315
Consistency Check Dialog Box ...................................................................................... 316 Review an Inconsistency................................................................................................. 317 Resolve an Inconsistency................................................................................................ 319

Reapply Rules Command .........................................................................................321
Reapply Placement Rules to Resolve an Inconsistency.................................................. 322

Importing Drawing Data: An Overview ......................................................................323 6 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide

Table of Contents Import Data File Command ......................................................................................324
Import Log Dialog Box................................................................................................... 324

Import SmartSketch Command ................................................................................325
Using the SmartPlant Migrator ....................................................................................... 325 Import a SmartSketch File .............................................................................................. 328

Importing Aspen Zyqad Stream Data .......................................................................329
Import Aspen Zyqad Stream Data .................................................................................. 329

Generating Reports: An Overview...............................................................................331 Plant Reports Command ...........................................................................................333
Plant Reports Dialog Box ............................................................................................... 333 Generate a Report ........................................................................................................... 334

My Reports Command..............................................................................................335
My Reports Dialog Box .................................................................................................. 335

Creating and Editing Report Templates: An Overview............................................337
Tabular Format Report.................................................................................................... 338 Fixed Format Report ....................................................................................................... 340 Composite Format Report............................................................................................... 341 New Command ............................................................................................................... 343 Edit Command ................................................................................................................ 345 Delete Command ............................................................................................................ 350 SmartPlant Reports Toolbar............................................................................................ 351

Printing Drawings: An Overview .................................................................................361 Print Command.........................................................................................................363
Print Dialog Box ............................................................................................................. 363 Settings Dialog Box ........................................................................................................ 364 Print a Drawing ............................................................................................................... 365 Print a Selected Area....................................................................................................... 366 Set Print Options ............................................................................................................. 367 Change Printer Properties ............................................................................................... 368 Print to a File................................................................................................................... 368

Page Setup Command...............................................................................................369
Page Setup Dialog Box ................................................................................................... 369 Set up a Page Layout....................................................................................................... 370

Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview ......................................371 Publishing to TEF: An Overview .............................................................................373
Publish Command........................................................................................................... 375 Find Documents to Publish Command ........................................................................... 379 Browser Command ......................................................................................................... 381

Retrieving from TEF: An Overview.........................................................................382
Retrieve Command ......................................................................................................... 385

Correlating Items: An Overview ..............................................................................387
Correlate Command ........................................................................................................ 387

Using the To Do List: An Overview.........................................................................390
To Do List Command ..................................................................................................... 391 Open the To Do List ....................................................................................................... 391

SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 7

Table of Contents
To Do List Dialog Box ................................................................................................... 392

Comparing SmartPlant P&ID with PDS: An Overview ............................................406 Comparing Code Lists and Select Lists....................................................................407 Grouping Equipment in SmartPlant P&ID ...............................................................408 Setting Construction Status.......................................................................................409 Comparing Consistency Check to Propagation ........................................................410 Comparing Graphics and Text in PDS 2D and SmartPlant P&ID ...........................412 Using Filters Versus Levels......................................................................................413 Glossary ..........................................................................................................................414 Index................................................................................................................................436

8 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide

Customer Support and Documentation Comments

Customer Support and Documentation Comments
For the latest support information for this product, use a World Wide Web browser to connect to http://www.intergraph.com/ppm/services/support.asp. Send documentation comments or suggestions to PPMdoc@intergraph.com.

SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 9

expensive CAD engine for P&ID creation. SmartPlant P&ID is vastly different from graphic-driven P&ID solutions of today. SmartPlant P&ID features a comprehensive. such as Intergraph PDS. such as process data from process simulation databases based on Aspen Zyqad from Aspen Technologies. all of which allow users to share data with third-party software. Intergraph INtools. Running on Microsoft Windows XP and Windows 2000. allowing faster. SmartPlant P&ID significantly cuts design and modification time and increases accuracy with its exclusive data-centric approach and use of design rules. and drag-and-drop capabilities. such as OLE automation. and feedback is immediate. Inc. The design rule-base confirms data consistency and compliance with plant and engineering standards. rules are executed. This method provides valuable information throughout the plant life cycle. The graphical representation of the P&ID is a view or a report of the data. data consistency. With quick access to supporting engineering data. rule-based solution for the P&ID life cycle. to provide integration with existing data and other systems. Data is entered directly into the database. or equipment and line lists. All data from the P&ID is stored in the plant database and adheres to plant standards. The strong data import and export facilities of SmartPlant P&ID allow users to populate the system with relevant plant data. SmartPlant P&ID incorporates the latest Microsoft technologies. SmartPlant P&ID does not require a traditional. and Aspen Zyqad. automatic checks. more efficient design with less iteration.Introducing SmartPlant P&ID Introducing SmartPlant P&ID SmartPlant P&ID creates intelligent P&IDs by populating the database with relevant plant data. The open architecture of SmartPlant P&ID permits integration with other systems. and standards compliance. As a data-centric. The rule-based and automation capabilities of SmartPlant P&ID also differentiate it from other P&ID systems. You can then use this information in the SmartPlant P&ID Stockpile to design the P&ID. SmartPlant P&ID helps users improve design quality. 10 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . userdefinable rule-based system that assists the engineer during the design phase of the plant and subsequent life cycle phases.

you can organize the information within the plant model to better understand and maintain the data. Options Manager also defines paths to SmartPlant files and directories. and formats. A view is a visual presentation of the data that composes the plant model and can be a schematic drawing or a table. The plant model is the computer representation of the conceptual design in its entirety. By manipulating model views. Rule Manager defines rules for placement and property copying on placement. or the SmartPlant P&ID Upgrade Guide. Options Manager defines plant-wide graphic standards for symbology. SmartPlant P&ID provides the design environment for SmartPlant. such as specifying user permissions. SmartPlant Engineering Manager performs higher-level data management tasks. unified data structure that represents the plant model. Drawing Manager allows you to create and delete P&IDs and drawing versions and print multiple drawings. Insulation Specification Manager allows you to create and modify lookup tables for insulation specifications and thicknesses. gapping. see SmartPlant Engineering Manager Help. and so forth. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 11 . For more information about SmartPlant Engineering Manager. SmartPlant has several programs and utilities for running and managing your plant data. designing plant hierarchies.Introducing SmartPlant P&ID SmartPlant P&ID Program Group SmartPlant P&ID provides multiple views of a central. including all plant components and their relationships. heat tracing. SmartPlant P&ID Installation Guide. Drawing Manager allows you to perform Workshare.and project-specific commands.

• SmartPlant P&ID Help Command Help > SmartPlant P&ID Help Opens the Help viewer where you can read topics about commands. Inconsistencies Report. dialog boxes. Printable Guides Command Help > Printable Guides Opens a page in your default browser that includes links to the user's guides in portable document format. procedures. SmartPlant P&ID on the Web Command Help > SmartPlant P&ID on the Web Activates your web browser and opens the SmartPlant P&ID World Wide Web page.A tabular report.Introducing SmartPlant P&ID What's New in SmartPlant P&ID? This version of SmartPlant P&ID contains the following new functionality and changes. Click a link. you can access registration and support information. On this page. provides a list of all inconsistencies. and other items to help you use SmartPlant P&ID more efficiently.xls. You can print it if necessary. learning tools. • Fit Command . and so forth. and the guide opens in the appropriate application. The user's guides contain the same information as the online Help.Functionality changes provide a variety of display options using the Fit command. 12 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Inconsistency Report . The report is available in the Engineering Data Editor by selecting View > Plant Reports.

and more. On this page you can learn about international and regional conferences. Display Help for Programming With SmartPlant P&ID On your desktop. structured product feedback. legal.Introducing SmartPlant P&ID SmartPlant P&ID Web Forum Command Help > SmartPlant P&ID Web Forum Opens your web browser to the Intergraph Process & Power Client Community web page. online forums. This documentation consists of a programmer's guide and reference guides for placement automation and the logical model. Note • Programming with SmartPlant P&ID is the method by which you can use the Automation layer to customize the software to meet your own particular requirements. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 13 . Follow the instructions and links on this web page to find your information. About SmartPlant P&ID Command Help > About SmartPlant P&ID Displays information about your copy of the software. and licensing notices. informal networking. click Start > Programs > Intergraph SmartPlant P&ID > Programming Help. including the version number and the copyright.

and it can also display items in the plant and drawing stockpiles. You can navigate through the nodes in a catalog by clicking the + or – icons by the selected node. Your system administrator defines customized properties and their defaults for each item in Data Dictionary Manager. Design Window The Design window displays Drawing views and the Engineering Data Editor. with the same capabilities for modifying the display. view and modify the properties associated with that item in the Properties window. page 264 • 14 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . The Catalog Explorer contains a hierarchical representation of the selected catalog. you can see the traditional diagram of a plant containing equipment. page 66 • Place an Item from the Stockpile. The Engineering Data Editor allows you to see the same information in a tabular format. Each of these views provides a way for you to enter information for the plant model into the database. Catalog Explorer The Catalog Explorer displays all available catalog items for you to use in drawings and plant models. and organizing data.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Navigating in the Software: An Overview The drawing interface is divided into four distinct parts: the Design window. and piping in a graphical representation. In addition. Properties Window When you select an item in a plant model. the Catalog Explorer. In the Drawing view. The two views also provide a way for you to view information in the database in different ways. page 67 • Place an Item from Catalog Explorer. Each part provides specific features that you need to create drawings in the software. you can double-click nodes in the tree view to open them. Related Topics Add an Item to the Stockpile from Catalog Explorer. and the Properties window. Engineering Data Editor The Engineering Data Editor is a modification of the stockpile display. instrumentation. This view is exactly the same tabular view that you can display in the Design window. editing properties. the Engineering Data Editor. you can enter.

You can open as many windows as needed to support a design. A tab scroll provides a way to view tabs hidden from display by the horizontal scroll bar. displays the model information for a design in a Drawing or Engineering Data Editor view. you can cascade or tile views to more easily navigate among them. you can specify filters and layouts to define the table information and even edit some item properties.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Working With the Design Window: An Overview The Design window itself consists of several parts. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 15 . You can add new tabs for additional filters as needed. By using commands on the Window menu. or Modeler. The title bar identifies the drawing name. too. The Engineering Data Editor displays drawing information in a table. You create your drawing In the Drawing view. Filter tabs provide a quick and easy way to choose what appears in the Drawing view. The Design window. display properties. and so forth. much like a Properties window. In the Engineering Data Editor. using vertical and horizontal scroll bars as well as Zoom and Pan commands to change the center point for the Drawing view. Each window has its own independent set of properties defining view range. You can define one or more Engineering Data Editors for a drawing. too.

For more information about the data model. for example. the database is up-to-date with changes that you posted to the drawing. page 108 • 16 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . the software does not update the drawing file until you actually save the file (when you click File > Save or when you quit the program).A tabular view that presents the plant data in a tabular format. (B) Engineering Data Editor . Occasionally. Click OK to re-create the drawing from the database. By manipulating model views. • SmartPlant P&ID provides multiple views of a central. page 53 • Open a New Drawing View.A graphical representation of the plant model. the software recognizes that the drawing file is different from the database and displays a message: One or more items in this drawing are inconsistent with the database. A view is a visual presentation of the data that composes the plant model and can be a schematic drawing or a table. Caution • The software continually updates the database as you edit a drawing. This view displays the common idea of a model: a diagram containing items such as equipment. see Using the Properties Glossary: An Overview Related Topics Customize a Filter Tab for the Drawing View. the software can end in an abnormal way. page 51 • Define a New Filter for an Engineering Data Editor View. due to power outage. As a result. When you re-open the drawing. unified data structure that represents the plant model. page 35 • Open an Existing Drawing. but the drawing file reflects the status when you last saved the drawing. piping. including all plant components and their relationships.Navigating in the Software: An Overview • (A) Drawing view . and instrumentation. page 138 • Define a New Engineering Data Editor View. page 52 • Define a New Layout for the Engineering Data Editor. The plant model is the computer representation of the conceptual design in its entirety. you can organize the information within the plant model to better understand and maintain the data. however.

grids. export formats. screen appearance. page 33 Options Command Tools > Options Changes settings that control recently used files. Display as printed . For example.Displays the drawing as it appears when you print it. page 21 • Customizing the Software: An Overview. Related Topics • Customize the Software With the Options Command. you can set the number of recently used files that appear on the File menu. page 273 Options Dialog Box Sets options for the current drawing. such as notes. labels. Opens the Options dialog box. see Related Topics.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Show Command Available on the Drawing View Shortcut menu. Related Topics • Change the Properties of a Drawing View. placement information. Update links automatically at open . The Options dialog box opens when you click Tools > Options.Updates links automatically when a drawing is opened.Sets the number of entries for the recently used files list on the File menu. page 91 • Linking and Embedding Objects: An Overview. page 21 General Tab (Options Dialog Box) Sets options for updating links in the drawing and displaying the drawing. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 17 . the status bar. the Show command allows you to choose to display drawing elements. For more information about linking. and so forth. Open this dialog box by clicking Tools > Options on the main menu bar. and recently used files. Related Topics • Customize the Software With the Options Command. and so forth. Recently used files list .

page 21 • Options Command.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Show status bar . Highlight . the line weight and color) for item types throughout a plant structure. page 283 • Change a Link. Also. The connect points in the drawing appear in this color. use Options Manager. Related Topics • Break a Link. page 17 18 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Use Defaults .Sets all the colors listed above to the default display value. the description appears in the status bar at the bottom of the window. selection.Sets the color of selected items. highlight. page 282 • Customize the Software With the Options Command.Sets the highlight color. Note • To set the symbology.Sets the default background color for all Drawing views in the active drawing. Handles . (for example. and messages about the operations the software is performing appear in the status bar. Related Topics • Customize the Software With the Options Command. prompts that explain what to do at each step of the command appear in the status bar. page 278 Colors Tab (Options Dialog Box) Allows you to select options for the background. Selected items . too. and handle colors in the drawing. page 277 • Link or Embed a Previously Existing Object. The Options dialog box opens when you click Tools > Options.Sets the color of handles when an item is selected. page 21 • Embed a New Object. Background . When you point at the command button on the toolbar.Displays the status bar at the bottom of the main window.

a pipe run can be a candidate item. page 21 • Options Command. and a valve can be an approaching item to that pipe run. the Set Stockpile Location of Partner OPC dialog box appears after you place a new OPC. the construction status can be set for individual drawing items by changing its value in the Properties window.Sets the number of pixels at which an item disconnects from its parent item. A candidate item is any item in the drawing that meets the placement rules of the approaching item. called the locate zone. Place partner OPC in Stockpile . Using this dialog box. This list contains the following options: New. and Future. OPC. Existing.Assigns the selected construction status to all placed items. If you clear this option.Indicates that when a new off-page connector. For example. the partner OPC is automatically stored in the Stockpile. The pipe is highlighted when the valve is within the locate tolerance. page 204 • Customize the Software With the Options Command. Locate . Also. to move a valve. you drag the valve.Specifies the range. page 17 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 19 . and tolerances for locating items and moving around in the drawing. you can indicate the drawing in which the partner OPC is stored until you place it in that drawing. the valve does not disconnect from the line. If you keep the pointer within the break-away tolerance from the line. The construction status for an item appears in the Properties window when the item is selected. at which a candidate item is highlighted when another item approaches. If you are not placing an item but only selecting drawing items. For example.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Placement Tab (Options Dialog Box) Sets the default construction status for the active drawing. Break-away . Default construction status . but this option allows you to change the default on a drawing-by-drawing basis. Related Topics • Change Default Storage Location for Partner Connector. is placed. the locate tolerance defines how close that the pointer must approach in order to select the item. The plant administrator sets the plant-wide default at setup. The Options dialog box opens when you click Tools > Options.

page 202 • Store a Partner Connector. Related Topics • Change Default Storage Location for Partner Connector.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Set Stockpile Location of Partner OPC Dialog Box Opens after you place a connector on a drawing. page 204 Files Tab (Options Dialog Box) Sets options for inserting objects in the drawing. Choose a stockpile from this view to associate your partner connector with. ready to be placed in the drawing. much like a catalog item during placement mode.Displays the hierarchical tree representation of the plant. Drawing list . For a 2:1 ratio.Displays all the drawings associated with the selected node on the Plant Hierarchy tree.Imports a reference file. 20 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . the drawings associated with that node appear in the Drawing list area. The reference file is at the end of the pointer. page 204 • Move a Partner Connector to Another Stockpile. page 204 • Move a Connector to Another Stockpile. These settings take effect in your next drawing session. When you select a node. Plant Hierarchy . the 2 represents the size of the drawing and the 1 represents the size of the real-world object. page 206 • Place an OPC or Utility Connector. Note • The Fit to Sheet option in the Select Scale list determines a drawing sheet scale that fits the reference file within the sheet but allows you to specify where the file is inserted by clicking on the drawing sheet. This tab is part of the Options dialog box.Sets a scale option for importing a drawing. unless you have selected the Place partner OPC in Stockpile option on the Placement tab of the Options dialog box. Coincident (1:1) . The specified ratio defines the size of the drawing in relation to the size of the real-world object. also known as an inserted object. Select Scale . The Set Stockpile Location of Partner OPC dialog box allows you to select the drawing stockpile into which the partner of the new connector is placed.Sets the drawing scale to a standard ratio. Scale reference files . which opens when you click Tools > Options on the main menu bar. at full scale (1:1). This setting causes the reference file to appear temporarily in the lower left of the drawing and determines a drawing scale that fits the reference file within the drawing.

Related Topics • Break a Link. page 282 • Customize the Software With the Options Command. page 91 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 21 . page 283 • Change a Link. page 21 • Edit an Embedded Object. page 17 Customize the Software With the Options Command 1. click the tab containing the information that you want to customize. page 282 • Embed a New Object.Opens the Browse dialog box.Sets the scale for a drawing that you insert. page 19 Files Tab (Options Dialog Box). Related Topics • Customizing the Software: An Overview. 2. Drives . • • • • General Tab (Options Dialog Box). the scale of the foreign drawing is one and one half times its original size. Related Topics • Customize the Software With the Options Command. page 20 3. For example. Open this dialog box by clicking Tools > Options > Files Tab > Browse.Specifies the folder where your user-defined. Browse .Lists the drives that are currently active on your computer. page 278 Browse Dialog Box Allows you to select a directory that contains your reports. Look in . page 277 • Link or Embed a Previously Existing Object. On the Options dialog box.Displays the currently selected folder and the available folders in the active drive. which allows you to select a local or network folder to store your user-defined reports and report templates.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Custom Scale . or personal. page 18 Placement Tab (Options Dialog Box). My Reports . page 21 • Options Command. when you type 3 and 2 in each of the respective boxes. Click Tools > Options. Select a different drive in order to see directories that reside on that drive in the Look in box. Select options on the dialog box to make the appropriate changes. page 17 Colors Tab (Options Dialog Box). report templates are stored.

This command is available only when a Drawing view is active. This action is convenient for large drawings. For example. if you zoom in and then click View > Previous. page 15 Restore a Drawing View Click View > Previous. and the software does not remember more than one view. • Related Topics • Working With the Design Window: An Overview. Related Topics • Save the Settings for the Active View. press Esc. Related Topics • Restore a Drawing View. page 37 • Working With the Design Window: An Overview.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Previous Command View > Previous Restores the previous view. To refresh the window. Notes • To stop the repainting of items in the window. press F5. Related Topics • Working With the Design Window: An Overview. page 15 Save Settings Command View > Save Settings Stores all display filters for the active Drawing view. page 15 Zoom Area Command View > Zoom Area Enlarges the display of an area in the active window by allowing you to draw a fence around that arbitrary area of the drawing. page 22 • Working With the Design Window: An Overview. the view changes to the view present before you zoomed in. page 15 22 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . This command is available only when a Drawing view is active.

To stop the repainting of items in the window. • Related Topics • Working With the Design Window: An Overview. To refresh the window. This action is convenient for large drawings. Notes • • To go back to the previous view. press F5. press Esc.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Zoom In on an Area 1. Notes • • To go back to the previous view. To stop the repainting of items in the window. The selection then fills the view. This action is convenient for large drawings. page 15 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 23 . right-click or press Esc. To refresh the window. click View > Previous. Click the view at the center of the area you want to zoom in on. press Esc. page 15 Zoom In on the Drawing 1. click Zoom In: . page 15 Zoom In Command View > Zoom In Enlarges the display of items around a specified point in the active window. 2. On the main toolbar. 2. click Zoom Area: . To quit the command. Related Topics • Working With the Design Window: An Overview. 3. use the pointer to fence the area that you want to zoom in on. On the main toolbar. On the Drawing view. • • Related Topics • Working With the Design Window: An Overview. This command is available only when a Drawing view is active. click View > Previous. press F5. To quit the command. press Esc or right-click in the drawing.

Click the Drawing view at the center of the area you want to zoom out from. Notes • • To go back to the previous view. If only one item is selected in the drawing. • • Related Topics • Working With the Design Window: An Overview. the command fits only the selected items in the active view. This command is available only when a Drawing view is active. On the main toolbar. page 15 Fit Command View > Fit Fits all items in the active view if no items are currently selected. page 25 • Working With the Design Window: An Overview. To stop the repainting of items in the window. if any items are selected in the drawing. press Esc. click Zoom Out .Navigating in the Software: An Overview Zoom Out Command View > Zoom Out Reduces the display of items around a specified point in the active window. right-click or press Esc. Related Topics • Fit All Items in the Active Drawing View. press F5. page 15 • Zoom Out from an Area. the command zooms to the selected item. However. To refresh the window. page 24 Zoom Out from an Area 1. This command is available only when a Drawing view is active. click View > Previous. To quit the command. Related Topics • Working With the Design Window: An Overview. This action is convenient for large drawings. page 15 24 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . 2.

2. page 15 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 25 . This action is convenient for large drawings.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Fit All Items in the Active Drawing View On the main toolbar. On the main toolbar. page 15 • Pan a Drawing View 1. To quit the command. page 15 Pan Command View > Pan Allows you to move the display in any direction from a specific point in a drawing to see other areas of the drawing by dragging the pointer across the view. press Esc or right-click in the Drawing view. Click in the view again to define how far you want to pan. • • Related Topics • Working With the Design Window: An Overview. Related Topics • Working With the Design Window: An Overview. Click in the view that you want to pan. Notes • • • You can click and drag the hand pointer to pan the view. page 25 • Working With the Design Window: An Overview. 3. To stop the repainting of items in the window. Related Topics Pan a Drawing View. click View > Previous. click Fit . To go back to the previous view. This command is available only when a Drawing view is active. press Esc. To refresh the window. click Pan: . too. press F5.

Reset . page 28 • Customizing the Software: An Overview. page 66 • Turn the Display of the Properties Window On or Off. hide. Open this dialog box by clicking View > Toolbars on the main menu bar. You can change toolbar color schemes and button sizes. Customize .Navigating in the Software: An Overview Display Command View > Display Allows you to specify the windows you want to see in your design session: • • • Catalog Explorer Properties Window Engineering Data Editor Related Topics • Display the Engineering Data Editor. Related Topics • Add a Button to a Toolbar. Clearing this option causes toolbar buttons to appear in black and white.Lists the available toolbars. or change.Accesses the New Toolbar dialog box. Toolbars . page 41 • Turn the Display of Catalog Explorer On or Off.Displays the name of the toolbar that you have selected. Toolbar Name . which allows you to create new toolbars and display or hide selected toolbars. page 28 • Working With the Design Window: An Overview. Color Buttons .Adds buttons to or removes buttons from built-in toolbars with the Customize dialog box. page 85 Toolbars Command View > Toolbars Opens the Toolbars dialog box. or changing toolbars.Resets the selected toolbar to the original icons.Adds color to the toolbar buttons. hiding. too. You can select the box next to the toolbar that you want to display. page 91 • Remove a Button From a Toolbar. 26 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . New . page 15 Toolbars Dialog Box Sets options for displaying.

7. 3. Click View > Toolbars. 5. page 28 • Remove a Command From a Menu. On the Toolbars tab of the Customize dialog box.Enlarges toolbar buttons so that they are easier to see.Displays on-screen descriptions of a toolbar button when the pointer pauses over one of them. Related Topics • Add a Button to a Toolbar. 4. You cannot choose a name for your new toolbar that is already used for another toolbar. page 28 • Remove a Command From a Menu. Related Topics • Customizing the Software: An Overview. Toolbar Name . Click OK. page 91 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 27 . page 28 • Remove a Button From a Toolbar. Click Tools > Customize.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Large Buttons . Drag the command button from the Buttons display area to the new toolbar.Type the name of the new toolbar in the box. Open this dialog box from the main menu bar by clicking View > Toolbars > New. Related Topics • Add a Button to a Toolbar. 6. click New. Show ToolTips . page 95 New Toolbar Dialog Box Creates a new toolbar. On the New Toolbar dialog box. On the Toolbars dialog box. page 28 • Remove a Button From a Toolbar. page 95 Create a New Toolbar 1. click the category that contains the command that you want to add. type the name of the new toolbar. 2.

page 91 Properties Command View > Properties Displays the View Properties dialog box. page 22 • Save the Settings for the Active View. you cannot reset it. Related Topics • Customizing the Software: An Overview. 2. Click View > Toolbars. page 91 Restore a Customized Toolbar to Its Default Settings 1. Related Topics • Customizing the Software: An Overview. drag the button that you want to remove from the toolbar into the Buttons area. These tabs logically organize the properties into sets that you can use for manipulating special view qualities. 3. click Tools > Customize. click the category that contains the command that you want to add. On the main menu bar. On the Toolbars tab. 2. select the toolbar that you want to restore. page 37 • Show Inconsistencies. page 314 • Working With the Design Window: An Overview. page 15 28 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Note • If you create a new toolbar. Related Topics • Customizing the Software: An Overview. Click the Reset button. 2. Click Tools > Customize on the main menu bar. which lets you define and control settings for the active view. page 91 Remove a Button From a Toolbar 1. Drag the command button from the Buttons area to the toolbar.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Add a Button to a Toolbar 1. 3. The set of property tabs that are available in the View Properties dialog box depends on the active view. On the Toolbars tab. In the Toolbars dialog box. Related Topics • Restore a Drawing View.

Properties .Contains information about how the software displays the filtered items in your Drawing view. You specify the name of the filter when you choose or create it.Allows you to specify the color of the filtered items. then View > Properties opens the Table Properties dialog box. • Related Topics Properties Command. This information is read-only. This dialog box allows you to edit a filter for your drawing. Filter .Displays the name of the filter that you want to use for your Drawing view.Allows you to specify the line width for your filtered items. page 138 View Properties Dialog Box Controls the display of information in the Drawing view. Related Topics • Customize a Filter Tab for the Drawing View.Opens the Select Filter dialog box. which allows you to choose or create a filter for your Drawing view. Color . You can name the new filter appropriately. Scroll down the list to choose a color.Opens the Filter Properties dialog box. Filter Name . Open this dialog box by clicking View > Properties on the main menu bar. Browse . you must right-click the drawing filter tab and select Use Alternate Symbology. Width . Scroll down the list to choose a line width.Contains information about the filter that you want to use for your Drawing view. Note • If the active view is the Engineering Data Editor. page 28 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 29 .Navigating in the Software: An Overview Properties Dialog Box Opens when you right-click the filter tab area at the bottom of the Drawing view and select Properties from the shortcut menu. You can modify the properties of the filter that you choose from the Select Filter dialog box. In order for the alternate symbology to take effect in your drawing. Alternate symbology .

notes. in any view. and readout category.Includes other options for the selection of items in your drawing. type. page 29 Display Tab (View Properties Dialog Box) Controls the display of items in a Drawing view. Items that you can display include labels. a Microsoft Word file. including the name.Turns the display of notes on or off. This information is read-only. Related Topics • Properties Command. Notes can contain links to a file. if you insert a file using Edit > Insert Object and do not want to accidentally select that file in the drawing. Description . Prevent selection of inserted objects . for example. When you select the check box. View type . Grids . page 28 • View Properties Dialog Box.Allows you to enter a description of the Drawing view. description. Drawing borders . 30 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .Turns the grid display on or off. Show . Select . Labels .Toggles the display of all labels on or off. Notes . and inconsistency indicators. Do not show labels for filtered items . The inserted file appears gray in the drawing. View name . For example.Navigating in the Software: An Overview General Tab (View Properties Dialog Box) Displays miscellaneous information about a Drawing view. Inconsistency indicators .Turns the display of inconsistency indicators on or off. the display toggles on for that item. select this box.Turns on the display of the options selected on the Claims tab. then the Do not show labels options is not available since all labels are no longer displayed regardless of the view tab that you are using.Allows you to name the Drawing view. If the display of labels is turned off here.Lists options for objects you want to appear in your Drawing view.Makes inserted foreign data non-locatable in a drawing. grids.Toggles the display of the drawing border on or off.Prevents the display of labels in filtered views of the design.Displays the type of view. drawing borders. Claims .

The choice of grid style affects the option that is available in the Spacing or Density box and the availability of the Index options. This option is available only with the Static grid style. Snap grid . page 29 Grid Tab (View Properties Dialog Box) Controls the behavior of the grid in the view. page 28 • Show Grid Command. or coarse levels when you choose the Dynamic grid style from the Style list. When you zoom in or out. View . and so you cannot change the Index list when using the Dynamic grid style. Grid lines are not printed.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Note • You can access the View Properties dialog box by right-clicking in space in your drawing and selecting Properties from the shortcut menu. too. solid grid lines. A static grid displays solid grid lines that do not move as you zoom in or out. page 28 • View Properties Dialog Box. the grid lines for a dynamic grid change with the level of magnification.Turns the grid display on or off. A dynamic grid displays index lines that intersect with the darker.Specifies the grid index. Show grid . page 150 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 31 .Turns the snap-to-grid feature on or off. Style .Specifies either Static or Dynamic grid style. which is the number of minor grid lines. You do not have to display the grid in order to snap items to it.Turns the grid display and grid snapping on or off. page 33 • Properties Command. medium. When you select this option. items always align with the grid lines or nearest intersection of the grid lines. Related Topics • Properties Command. Density . For a dynamic grid display the number of index lines varies depending on the zoom level. Index .Allows you to specify the space between the grid lines when you choose the Static grid style from the Style list. Spacing . Related Topics • Change the Properties of a Drawing View.Allows you to specify fine.

Invalid claiming can happen only for Plants that support shared claiming of database items. Warnings are marked with a . all errors with . Not claimed . severity of five or above appear. if you specify a severity level of five.Displays the possible claim states and combination of claim states for drawing items. Open the View Properties dialog box by clicking View > Properties. Invalidly claimed items are items which differ from the Plant items and which you cannot modify and check into the Plant without first establishing a valid claim. Status . Show . For example. The software verifies in real-time if the composition of a drawing and the underlying data model satisfy rules defined in Rule Manager. page 28 • Show Inconsistencies. which appears when you click View > Properties. page 314 Claims Tab (View Properties Dialog Box) Sets options for the display of items in the Drawing view according to their claim states. then these display options override all other options designated in the Claim area of this dialog box. You can specify the severity level. Approved warnings .Lists options for objects you want to appear in your Drawing view. Again. Related Topics • Properties Command.Specifies the display of invalidly claimed items in the Drawing view. Choose the indicators and severities that you want to view in your drawing. Claim . which signify the suitability of design work that you perform while creating the drawing. 32 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Approved warnings are marked with .Navigating in the Software: An Overview Inconsistency Indicators Tab (View Properties Dialog Box) Controls the display of inconsistency indicators. Invalid claims . If you specify a special display for invalidly claimed items in the Drawing view. Errors above severity . Errors are marked with a Warnings above severity . you can specify the severity level and control the warnings that you see. This tab is part of the View Properties dialog box.Turns the display of errors on or off.Displays the possible claim states for all items except invalidly claimed items.Turns the display of approved warnings on or off.Turns the display of warnings on or off.Specifies the special display of drawing items that are not claimed at all.

Drawing borders. you can choose special display colors for drawing items according to their claim status. if you specify 5. For errors and warnings.Specifies the special display of drawing items when the active project shares a claim on with another project or the Plant. then these display options will have no effect in the Drawing view. and Index options. page 292 • Display the Claim Status of a Drawing Item. see Related Topics. you can choose the Show grid or Snap grid option. Notes. 2. you can select from any of the Errors. project status. Grids. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 33 . select the General tab. errors with severity level of 5 or greater are displayed. Filter labels. On the Inconsistency Indicator tab. If your Plant is configured so that it honors only exclusive claiming. and options specified in SmartPlant Engineering Manager and Drawing Manager.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Claimed only by others .Allows you to select a color for items with the corresponding claim state. select the Prevent selection of inserted objects option if you want to prohibit the selection of linked or embedded objects in the drawing. Density. For example. Shared claims . On the Display tab. Claimed only by this project . Click View > Properties. 7. On the Grid tab. On the Claims tab. You can select any of the Labels. Tip • Claiming items is governed by projects. Related Topics Claim a Drawing Item. and you can enter a view name and description. Warnings. On the View Properties dialog box. 5. Also on the Display tab. 4.Allows you to select a line width for items with the corresponding claim state. The View type box is read-only.Specifies the special display of drawing items that are claimed solely by other projects or the Plant. and the properties of the grid. and Inconsistency indicators options. 3. if needed. page 301 • Change the Properties of a Drawing View 1. 6. select the items that you want to display in the view. in the Style.Specifies the special display of drawing items to which this project has the sole claim. Widths . page 302 • Release a Claim. Colors . you can specify the severity level of the displayed inconsistencies. For more information about claiming items. and Approved warnings options.

Creating a new Drawing or Engineering Data Editor view of a drawing does not create a new copy or version of the drawing. the graphical Drawing view is opened on top of the Engineering Data Editor when you select Window > New > Drawing. page 15 • 34 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Related Topics Claiming Items: An Overview. The same drawing data simply displays in the different views. page 34 New Drawing Window Command Window > New > Drawing Creates a new Drawing view within the active drawing. page 35 • Working With the Design Window: An Overview.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Important • If the active view is the Engineering Data Editor. Related Topics • New > Engineering Data Editor Command (Window Menu). The new view has the same filters as the previous Drawing view. page 91 • New Command Window > New Allows you to open a new Drawing or Engineering Data Editor window within the Design window. Notes • If only the Engineering Data Editor view of a drawing is open. This command copies the contents of the active Drawing view into a new window and displays the contents as graphical items. page 35 • New Drawing Window Command. You can change the view features for the new Drawing window using the commands on the View menu. page 289 • Customizing the Software: An Overview. • Related Topics Open a New Drawing View. then clicking View > Properties opens the Table Properties dialog box.

Tip A new Drawing view is not the same as a new drawing. For more information on the Windows Task Manager. quit all SmartPlant applications. see SmartPlant P&ID Drawing Manager Help. For more information.pid:3. and subsequent new Drawing views are Pipeline. If the software gives indications that a drawing is in use when it is not. • Notes • • You can have as many Drawing views open for a drawing as needed.pid) the new view is named Pipeline. When you open a new Drawing view (for example. You create new drawings in Drawing Manager.Navigating in the Software: An Overview New > Engineering Data Editor Command (Window Menu) Window > New > Engineering Data Editor Opens the Engineering Data Editor in the Design window and allows you to view and edit model data for a drawing in a tabular format. see Microsoft Windows Help. and so forth. 2. Pipeline. Edit the drawing as needed. Select it and click End Task.exe process. Related Topics New Drawing Window Command. page 34 • Open a New Drawing View 1. which you can access from the Help > Printable Guides command. • Related Topics • Working with Drawings: An Overview.pid:2.pid:1. Pipeline. In Task Manager search for an extra draft. page 102 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 35 . Click Window > New > Drawing. and then open the Windows Task Manager.

All the windows appear at an even distance from each other on the screen. Related Topics • Switch to Another Open Drawing or View. page 111 • Working With the Design Window: An Overview.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Cascade Command Window > Cascade Overlaps windows diagonally across in the Design window. Related Topics • Switch to Another Open Drawing or View. page 23 • Zoom In on the Drawing. page 24 Tile Horizontally Command Window > Tile Horizontally Arranges windows to fit horizontally in the Design window. page 111 • Working With the Design Window: An Overview. All the windows appear at an even distance from each other on the screen. Related Topics • Switch to Another Open Drawing or View. page 15 Active Window List Displays an alphabetical list of open document windows below the commands on the Window menu. page 15 • Zoom In on an Area. page 23 • Zoom Out from an Area. page 111 • Working With the Design Window: An Overview. You can easily access another open document by clicking one of the window names on the list. page 15 36 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Related Topics • Switch to Another Open Drawing or View. page 15 Tile Vertically Command Window > Tile Vertically Arranges windows to fit vertically in the Design window. page 111 • Working With the Design Window: An Overview.

Your settings are automatically saved upon quitting the software.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Save the Settings for the Active View Click View > Save Settings or right-click a tab at the bottom of the active view and select Save Settings. Related Topics • Working With the Design Window: An Overview. page 15 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 37 . Notes • • This command saves all display filters for the active Drawing view.

You can use the Display Settings command. of the type chosen in the list. that exist in the database. for instance. to color code items according to the stockpile that they are currently in. Customizing the EDE Commands on the Edit menu allow you to customize the display of the EDE further. Finally a summary box displays a comparison between the number of items in the view and the total number of items. Use Edit View to display the Table Properties dialog box. You can also filter the display by using the buttons that correspond to different stockpiles and drawings: • • • • Active Drawing Active Drawing Stockpile Stockpile Other Drawings By default. If you want to list all items select Plant Item from the list.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview The Engineering Data Editor (EDE) uses a grid or tabular format to display the query results for the database. The list on the toolbar contains filters that query the database and display the corresponding items in the EDE. and you can also open the EDE to appear in the Design window. initially only the Active Drawing and Active Drawing Stockpile buttons are selected. The EDE Toolbar At the top of the EDE is the EDE toolbar. You can re-query and thereby refresh the EDE display by clicking the Refresh button . The menu buttons are found here: • • • Stockpile Edit View Click the down-arrow next to the menu button to expose the available commands. You customize a filter and layout for the display on the Advanced Table Properties dialog box. which allows you to define the items that you want to see in the EDE. The EDE is automatically displayed in the lower left of the main window. 38 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .

if the cell contents are compatible. too. • Related Topics • Define a New Engineering Data Editor View. Related Topics Display the Engineering Data Editor.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Editing Properties in the EDE You can edit some of the properties viewed in the table by selecting a table cell and filling in the appropriate information. page 54 • Moving and Placing Stockpile Items: An Overview. page 263 Engineering Data Editor Command View > Display > Engineering Data Editor Turns on or off the display of the Engineering Data Editor. page 38 • SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 39 . page 51 • Define a New Filter for an Engineering Data Editor View. then you choose the value from the select list. the Query Results dialog box opens. If the property has a select list associated with it. page 41 • Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview. For more information. click Related Topics.537. If your database query results in more than this number. page 52 • Define a New Layout for the Engineering Data Editor. You can then choose to refine your query in order to generate fewer items or to enter report-only mode and run a report on your query results. Then you can view the properties in the Properties window and edit item properties there. The contents of cells can be copied to other cells. you cannot edit that cell. The EDE is where you view items in the Stockpile or in a drawing stockpile. You can select a entire row by clicking the corresponding icon in the left-most column of the table. If the cell is populated by a readonly property or a property that is only automatically generated by validation. Notes • The maximum number of items that can be displayed in the EDE is 65. page 53 • Modify the Table Properties of an Existing Engineering Data Editor View.

equal to. you must select a line in the list and then define or edit the property in the Edit group. Instrument Loop Item Tag. and Plant Reports. Relationships include. Additional Filter Criteria . and Estimated Length.Displays a list of all properties for a certain item type. 40 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .Allows you to use the Additional Filter Criteria list in this dialog box to refine your query in order to display an allowed number of items in the view.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Query Results Dialog Box Displays options for continuing your work in the Engineering Data Editor when you have requested more information than can appear in the interface. Examples of properties include Equipment Type.Specifies the relationship between the property and its value. Match any is the default matching method. Refine Query Definition . This option is useful when creating a report for large data sets such as an entire plant database. To add to or modify the definition list. Edit . You can either refine your query or run a report with your query results.Displays the number of items that your query returned. <>. Rows Returned . Options . and a value. Delete . Continue with this query so that I can generate a plant or personal report Causes the Engineering Data Editor to enable only these commands: Edit view. and so forth. Maximum Allowed . Property .Specifies that items matching ALL of the filtering criteria pass through the filter. for example.Allows you to choose between refining your query or entering report-only mode. Match any . an operator.Removes the selected criterion from the definition list.Specifies that items matching any one or more of the filtering criteria pass through the filter. Operator .Displays the currently allowed number of items in the Engineering Data Editor. My Reports. You define or modify filtering criteria by selecting a property. Add . not equal to. Save view.Displays all new criteria to add to the current filter. =. Match all . greater than. >. This button is available only when you select a criterion in the definition list.Places a new entry at the end of the existing definition list and enables the options in the Edit group so that you can edit the new entry.Allows you to define or edit a single line of filter definition criteria. Delete view.

click View > Display > Engineering Data Editor again. Related Topics Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview. page 15 • Stockpile Menu: An Overview Engineering Data Editor > Stockpile Contains commands for moving and deleting items. Related Topics • Customizing the Display of the Engineering Data Editor: An Overview. ?. page 59 • Define a New Engineering Data Editor View. page 58 Display the Engineering Data Editor Click View > Display > Engineering Data Editor. If a list of attributes is not already associated with the Value box. Tip • To close the Engineering Data Editor. as a wildcard character to find multiple characters. page 154 • Remove an Item from a Drawing. *. page 38 • Working With the Design Window: An Overview. page 250 • Remove an Item from the Model. as a wildcard character for a single character. or type a question mark.Lists appropriate values for the property specified in the Property column. %. you must type a value. You can type a percent sign. in the Value box. page 265 • Place Multiple Representations. page 251 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 41 . page 38 • Update the Engineering Data Editor. or choose null. Related Topics • Move a Stockpile Item to the Stockpile of Another Drawing. page 54 • Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Value . Do not use an asterisk. page 51 • Modify the Table Properties of an Existing Engineering Data Editor View. Click the down-arrow next to the Stockpile menu to display the available commands. which can be free text.

page 251 Move to Different Stockpile Command Engineering Data Editor > Stockpile > Move to Different Stockpile Allows you to move a stockpile item from one stockpile to another.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Place Multiple Representation Command Engineering Data Editor > Stockpile > Place Multiple Representation Allows you to place a second instance of an equipment item in a second drawing. Similarly you can move an item in the Drawing Stockpile to the Stockpile so that it can be used in other drawings. The Move to Different Stockpile dialog box opens. Related Topics • Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview. For instance. page 245 • Remove an Item from the Model. Related Topics • Cutting or Deleting Items: An Overview. Multiple representations are available only for some types of equipment. page 38 • Place Multiple Representations. page 265 • Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview. you can move an item from the Stockpile into the stockpile for your active drawing if you know the item belongs in that drawing but are not yet ready to place the item. You can even move items from one drawing stockpile to another. Related Topics • Move a Stockpile Item to the Stockpile of Another Drawing. page 38 42 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . page 152 Delete Stockpile Item Command Engineering Data Editor > Stockpile > Delete Stockpile Item Removes the stockpile item from the plant model completely. regardless of symbol settings in Options Manager or Catalog Manager. That is the item and its properties are deleted from the database and can no longer be placed in a drawing. page 154 • Placing Equipment: An Overview. This multiple representation allows the depiction of an item from another drawing in a detailed or alternate view.

page 289 • Copy Command. page 43 • Review and Edit Item Properties. then the Paste command is not available. page 87 Paste Command Engineering Data Editor > Edit > Paste Places the value from the Clipboard into the selected cell. You can also release a claim at any time and you can determine the validity of a claim.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Edit Menu: An Overview Engineering Data Editor > Edit Allows you to copy and paste values from one cell to another cell in the Engineering Data Editor and to select all the items in the view in order to create a select set. page 258 • Review and Edit Item Properties. If the cell is read-only. Related Topics • Modifying Item Properties: An Overview. page 44 • Select an Item. page 43 • Paste Command. page 87 • Select All Command. page 258 • Review and Edit Item Properties. Values placed on the Clipboard remain there until newer values are copied over them. page 147 Copy Command Engineering Data Editor > Edit > Copy Places the value in the currently selected cell onto the Clipboard so that you can paste it somewhere else. You can also invoke a claim at any time to expand the scope of your project. This command does not remove the value from the selected table cell. Related Topics • Claiming Items: An Overview. page 87 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 43 . Related Topics • Modifying Item Properties: An Overview. Click the down-arrow next to the Edit menu button to display the available commands. You must have previously placed a value on the Clipboard in order to paste it. and any new item created in a project is automatically claimed by that project.

page 289 Release Claim Command Engineering Data Editor > Edit > Release Claim Allows you to relinquish control by your project of the selected items. Claim comments can be viewed later by anyone in the Plant when the claim status is displayed. Related Topics • Claim a Drawing Item. allowing you to confirm the "claim-ability" of the items and enter claim comments. You can create a select set using this command. Related Topics Modifying Item Properties: An Overview. page 87 • Select an Item. Claims must be released before projects can be completed or for other projects to be able to check in drawings with changes. The Claim dialog box opens. page 301 44 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Related Topics • Claiming Items: An Overview. page 289 • Release a Claim. A confirmation message is displayed so that you can confirm the release-claim action.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Select All Command Engineering Data Editor > Edit > Select All Chooses all the items in the active Engineering Data Editor. page 292 • Claiming Items: An Overview. page 147 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview. page 258 • Review and Edit Item Properties. page 144 • Claim Command Engineering Data Editor > Edit > Claim Gives control of the selected items to the current active project.

page 289 • Display the Claim Status of a Drawing Item. You must select the items in the Drawing view or the Engineering Data Editor before using this command. page 64 • Delete a Saved Engineering Data Editor View. release the claims to items. page 54 • Save an Engineering Data Editor View. page 61 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 45 . which displays the details of the claimed state of the selected items and enables you to claim items. page 58 • Use AutoFilter in the Engineering Data Editor. Click the down-arrow next to the menu button to display the commands. page 56 • Update the Engineering Data Editor. and so forth. page 302 View Menu: An Overview Engineering Data Editor > View Displays the commands that help you customize and manipulate the layout and content of the Engineering Data Editor. page 57 • Modify the Table Properties of an Existing Engineering Data Editor View. Related Topics • Customize the Display of the Engineering Data Editor. Related Topics • Claiming Items: An Overview.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Claim Status Command Engineering Data Editor > Edit > Claim Status Opens the Claim Status dialog box.

see Default Table Layouts. too.Lists all of the layouts that have been saved for the selected item type. where you can access options to specify the tabular display. If you click Advanced on this dialog box. page 50. You can specify the default filter and layout for a certain item type also. Related Topics • Define a New Engineering Data Editor View. page 54 • Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview. Specify brief and bulk properties in this dialog box. filters. Brief and bulk properties appear in the Properties window when you select the Show Brief Properties. page 38 Table Properties Dialog Box Enables you to select the item types. page 51 • Modify the Table Properties of an Existing Engineering Data Editor View. page 52 • Define a New Layout for the Engineering Data Editor. Layout .Lists all of the filters that have been saved for the selected item type. equipment or motors). Filter . where you can define and save filters or layouts for the Tabular or Engineering Data Editor. page 53 • Edit View Command.Lists all the item types that you can select (for example. Related Topics Define a New Filter for an Engineering Data Editor View. Advanced . and you can further modify the layout and create custom filters for your Engineering Data Editor. page 46 • 46 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Note • The Engineering Data Editor is where stockpile items are displayed.Displays the Advanced Table Properties dialog box. Item type .Navigating in the Software: An Overview Edit View Command Engineering Data Editor > View > Edit View Opens the Table Properties dialog box. For a list of default layouts. This dialog box appears when you right-click an existing table and select Edit View. or Paste Bulk Properties commands from the Properties window toolbar. and layouts for the Tabular or Engineering Data Editor. the Advanced Table Properties dialog box opens. Copy Bulk Properties.

Match all .Displays the name of the filter. as it is defined in Filter Manager. Related Topics • Define a New Filter for an Engineering Data Editor View. Name . Edit . select. select. and save filters and layouts for the Tabular or Engineering Data Editor. Definition .Displays the name of a saved filter.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Advanced Table Properties Dialog Box Allows you to define. and a value. page 52 • Define a New Layout for the Engineering Data Editor.Displays a list of all properties for a certain item type. Match any is the default matching method. Add . Base filter .Places a new entry at the end of the existing definition list and enables the options in the Edit group so that you can edit the new entry.Specifies that items matching ALL of the filtering criteria pass through the filter. This dialog box opens when you click Advanced on the Table Properties dialog box. Default . Match any .Indicates if the named filter is the default filter for the item type selected on the Table Properties dialog box.Displays options that allow you to define or edit a single line of filter definition criteria. an operator. page 46 Filter Tab (Advanced Table Properties Dialog Box) Allows you to define. remove. or edit filter criteria. Examples of properties include revision number and name. This button is available only when you select a criterion in the definition list. Delete . and save a filter for the Tabular or Engineering Data Editor. page 53 • Edit View Command. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 47 .Opens the Select Filter dialog box. which allows you to select a base filter. Browse . You can change a filter to the default by selecting this box. Property .Includes areas to add.Removes the selected criterion from the definition list. You define or modify filtering criteria by selecting a property.Specifies that items matching any one or more of the filtering criteria pass through the filter.

or type a question mark. Relationships include. or choose null. as a wildcard character to find multiple characters. you must exit and reenter the design software. Layout names must be unique. Save . as a wildcard character for a single character. Delete (Name) .Displays the name of a saved layout. Or. which can be free text. =.Lists the property display types associated with the Properties window. and so forth.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Operator .Saves the data in this dialog box as a named layout. Do not use an asterisk. Usage . If a list of attributes is not already associated with the Value box. and Brief/Bulk. you can select any of the layouts in the list. Value . Options include a blank value. Copy Bulk Properties. and save a layout for the Tabular or Engineering Data Editor. You can type a percent sign. select. page 54 Layout Tab (Advanced Table Properties Dialog Box) Define. For more information about saving views. Default . *. see Save an Engineering Data Editor View 48 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . In order for your choice in the Usage box to take effect. Bulk. equal to.Removes the named layout. You can designate a layout as the default by checking this box and then clicking Save. for example. Brief. %. <>. Name . Note • Saving a layout is not the same as saving a view in the Engineering Data Editor. page 51 • Define a New Filter for an Engineering Data Editor View.Indicates whether the named layout is the default layout for the item type on the Table Properties dialog box.Specifies the relationship between the property and its value. greater than. >.Lists appropriate values for the property specified in the Property column. Related Topics • Define a New Engineering Data Editor View. not equal to. ?. The selected item type and display properties define what appears in the Properties window when you select the Show Brief Properties. or Paste Bulk Properties commands from the Properties window toolbar. in the Value box. You can enter a new layout name and then click Save to save the layout for re-use. page 52 • Modify the Table Properties of an Existing Engineering Data Editor View. you must type a value.

Insert . Property . Up . page 35 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 49 . the Edit group allows you to edit the property and the caption. page 47 • Define a New Layout for the Engineering Data Editor. Display Property . the Edit group allows you to edit the property. If you select an entry in the Display Property view. Order . Caption (Edit) . If you select an entry in the Sort Property view.Moves the currently selected entry down one line. and its type. page 53 • Modify the Table Properties of an Existing Engineering Data Editor View. Moving a row down either moves a display column to the right or moves a sort order down. its order.Removes the currently selected entry. select it and modify the property in the Edit group.Displays all defined criteria associated with the selected layout. In order to add to or modify either list. You can select one. Related Topics • Advanced Table Properties Dialog Box.Lists the properties that apply to the item type specified in the Table Properties dialog box. Edit .Lists the columns that appear in the Engineering Data Editor. The buttons to the right act upon the active list view. depending on the row you have selected. you can specify the property and its caption. you can specify the property.Allows you to edit a single entry selected in either the Display Property or Sort Property list views.Moves the currently selected entry up one line.Lists the sort orders Ascending and Descending.Lists the sort types Numeric and Alphanumeric. depending on the row you have selected. If you select an entry in the Display Property view. This group contains two list views.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Definition . Moving a row up either moves a display column to the left or moves a sort order up. Sort Property .Displays the caption for each column in the Engineering Data Editor. Add . If you select an entry in the Sort Property view. Down . page 54 • New > Engineering Data Editor Command (Window Menu). order and type.Adds a new entry at the end of the existing entries and enables the options in the Edit group so that you can edit the new entry. Type . you must select a line in the list and then define or edit the property in the Edit group. Caption (Definition) .Displays the caption for each column in the Engineering Data Editor. To edit an entry.Places a new entry above the currently selected entry and enables the options in the Edit group so that you can edit the new entry. You select one.Displays a list of all the properties that apply to the item type defined in the Table Properties dialog box. Delete (Definition) .

and saving under a new name.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Default Table Layouts The software includes several default layouts. SmartPlant Electrical • • • • • • • • • • • • Default Battery Bank List Default Bus List Default Cable List Default Circuit List Default Circuit Breaker List Default Control Stations List Default Document List Default Generator List Default Load List Motor List Default PDB List Default Reference Cable List Area Break Drawing Equipment Equipment Component Exchanger Mechanical Equipment Other Vessel Instrument Instrument Loop Item Note Nozzle OPC Package SmartPlant P&ID • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 50 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Different layouts are included with SmartPlant Electrical and SmartPlant P&ID. You can use them to base your own layouts on by changing the layout name. adding or deleting properties.

2. 4. you can define a layout on the Layout tab of the Advanced Table Properties dialog box. select an item type from the Item Type list. Select a layout from the Layout list. Click Window > New > Table. page 53 Define a New Engineering Data Editor View 1. right-click the table and select Edit View. 3. Open the Advanced Table Properties dialog box by clicking Advanced on the Table Properties dialog box. Select a filter from the Filter list. page 38 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 51 . you can define a filter on the Filter tab of the Advanced Table Properties dialog box. Open the Advanced Table Properties dialog box by clicking Advanced on the Table Properties dialog box. The Table Properties dialog box opens. If you do not find a layout that you want under Layout. Notes • If you do not find a filter that you want under Filter. To modify an existing table. On the Table Properties dialog box. • • Related Topics • Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview.Navigating in the Software: An Overview • • • • • • • • Pipe Run Piping Component Plant Item Plant Item Group Other Representation Safety Class Signal Run System Related Topics • Define a New Layout for the Engineering Data Editor.

you can save that definition: Save an Engineering Data Editor View.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Define a New Filter for an Engineering Data Editor View 1. 9. if necessary. • 7. 8. such as greater than and not equal to. Click Advanced on the Table Properties dialog box. To further define a filter. To add more entries. Tip • After you have defined a specific filter for your Engineering Data Editor. 5. the Operator list displays all the possible relationships. the Value list displays the specific properties that you can filter for. operator. • Tip Check Default if you want this filter to be the default for the item type that you selected on the Table Properties dialog box. You can click Add to add another line to the Definition box. Click OK on the Advanced Table Properties dialog box and again on the Table Properties dialog box so that the software can populate your table. 2. populate the Definition box with properties and values. Click Delete if you want to delete the current row in the Definition box. 3. page 56 52 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . repeat steps 4 and 5. Select a property. Tip The Property list displays properties that apply to your item type. • 4. On the Filter tab of the Advanced Table Properties dialog box. and value in the Edit group. Click either Match all or Match any. 6. Tip You can open the Table Properties dialog box by right-clicking the Engineering Data Editor and choosing Edit View from the shortcut menu. specify a name for the filter in the Base filter box. Click Browse if you want to search for a filter or create a new filter (either simple or compound) using the Select Filter dialog box.

• Tip Select Default if you want this layout to be the default table layout for the item type. In the Sort Property list. select a row in the Sort Property box and click Move Up or Move Down. you can always create My Filters in the Filter Manager environment. populate the Definition box with display and sort properties. click Add to add an entry. Click Add to add a blank line to the Display Property list. Related Topics • Customizing the Software: An Overview. Tip • To change the sort order of the properties in the Engineering Data Editor. • 8. Project Filters should not be created at a satellite site because when you synchronize reference data. 6. click Delete if you want to delete the layout. repeat step 7. page 38 Define a New Layout for the Engineering Data Editor 1. Tip You can right-click an existing Engineering Data Editor and select Edit View to open the Table Properties dialog box. page 91 • Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview. and then specify the property and caption in the Edit group at the bottom of the dialog box. On the Layout tab of the Advanced Table Properties dialog box. 5. Tip To change the display order of the columns in the Engineering Data Editor. • 4. 2. specify a name for the layout. select a row in the Display Property box and click Move Up or Move Down. 7.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Note • If you are using a workshare environment and you are at a satellite site. Click Advanced on the Table Properties dialog box. To add and define more sort properties. which you specify on the Table Properties dialog box. To further define a layout. Then select the property. 3. repeat step 5. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 53 . To add and define more display properties. order. you lose that information. Click Save if you want to save the layout in order to apply it to another Engineering Data Editor. and type in the Edit group at the bottom of the dialog box. However.

page 52 Define a New Layout for the Engineering Data Editor. filter. If you want to customize a filter or layout click Advanced on the Table Properties dialog box. • Related Topics • Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview. For more information. For more information. Notes • After defining a layout. Insert. click the View menu and select Edit View. you should not store custom layouts for the Engineering Data Editor because when you synchronize reference data. 2. page 38 54 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . which can be either Display Property or Sort Property. and layout on the Table Properties dialog box. layout and all. page 53 4. 3. and Move Down buttons apply to the active list view. you can save it if you want to apply it to another view of the Engineering Data Editor. you lose that information. Click OK to display the modified view. Review and edit the item type. page 56 • Related Topics • Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview. see Save an Engineering Data Editor View. specify a name in the Name box and click Save on the Layout tab of the Advanced Table Properties dialog box. You can also name and save the entire Engineering Data Editor. If you are using a workshare environment and you are at a satellite site. Delete. page 38 Modify the Table Properties of an Existing Engineering Data Editor View 1. To save the view layout.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Important • The Add. Move Up. see Define a New Filter for an Engineering Data Editor View. In the Engineering Data Editor.

This name.Provides space for you to type in the name of your custom view. page 56 • Save View Command. page 56 Save View Dialog Box Allows you to specify a name for your custom Engineering Data Editor.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Save View Command Engineering Data Editor > View > Save View Opens the Save View dialog box. These custom views appear at the bottom of the filter list on the Engineering Data Editor toolbar. page 38 • Save an Engineering Data Editor View. Open this dialog box by clicking View > Save View in the EDE. Name . page 55 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 55 . page 54 • Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview. which allows you to name and save the current Engineering Data Editor. Related Topics • Save an Engineering Data Editor View. is displayed at the bottom of the filter list on the Engineering Data Editor toolbar with other saved views. which applies to the currently active EDE. Related Topics • Modify the Table Properties of an Existing Engineering Data Editor View.

2.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Save an Engineering Data Editor View 1. click View > Save View on the EDE toolbar. Related Topics • Customizing the Display of the Engineering Data Editor: An Overview. For more information. page 38 56 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . filter. and the new layout is reflected in both views of the EDE. and layout. page 64 • • • The EDE is where you can display stockpile items. you can change a layout that applies not only to a standard view but also to a saved view. There are several ways to customize your EDE: Modify the Table Properties of an Existing Engineering Data Editor View. Tip • You can reactivate your saved view any time from the bottom of the filter list on the EDE toolbar. page 59 • Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview. You can delete a saved view. That is. page 54 Customize the Display of the Engineering Data Editor. After you customize the Engineering Data Editor (EDE). Enter a name for your view in the Name box. page 57. You can change filters and layouts by using the Advanced Table Properties dialog box. and this action applies to any EDE that refers to those table properties. see Delete a Saved Engineering Data Editor View. Notes • An EDE view is a combination of item type. too.

page 57 • Delete View Command. Related Topics • Delete a Saved Engineering Data Editor View. Related Topics • Customizing the Display of the Engineering Data Editor: An Overview. page 57 Delete a Saved Engineering Data Editor View 1. 2. It no longer appears in the filter list in the Engineering Data Editor toolbar. Open this dialog box by clicking View > Delete View in the EDE. Name . and you can choose the view that you want to delete from a list of saved views. page 57 • Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview. Related Topics • Delete a Saved Engineering Data Editor View. • Note • The Engineering Data Editor is where stockpile items can be displayed. Click View > Delete View on the Engineering Data Editor toolbar.Lists the saved views. Select the view that you want to delete from the Name list in the Delete View dialog box.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Delete View Command Engineering Data Editor > View > Delete View Allows you to delete a view if you have stored a custom Engineering Data Editor view. page 38 Delete View Dialog Box Lets you choose a saved custom Engineering Data Editor and delete it. page 59 • Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview. The Delete View dialog box opens. Choose one and click OK to delete that view. These custom views appear at the bottom of the filter list on the Engineer Data Editor toolbar under Saved Views. Tip Saved views are displayed at the bottom of the filter list on the Engineering Data Editor toolbar. page 38 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 57 .

Related Topics • Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview. The Engineering Data Editor is not updated automatically: you must update it by using the Refresh command manually.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Refresh Command Engineering Data Editor > View > Refresh Updates the display in the Engineering Data Editor. page 38 58 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . page 38 • Update the Engineering Data Editor. The database can change all the time. This command queries the database and builds a new view with new results. Related Topics Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview. page 58 • Update the Engineering Data Editor Click Refresh Note • on the Engineering Data Editor toolbar.

Several methods to customize the look of the Engineering Data Editor exist. in exactly the order that you want to see them. You can create your own filters to narrowly define the contents of the view. you can quickly limit the number of items that are displayed in the Engineering Data Editor. you can save it and also delete it later. if necessary. you can define the font that Stockpile items appear in. Related Topics Customize the Display of the Engineering Data Editor. Once you have defined and edited a view. and you can create unique layouts with exactly the properties that you want to see.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Customizing the Display of the Engineering Data Editor: An Overview You can change the content and layout of the Engineering Data Editor rather extensively. By using the AutoFilter feature. You can clarify the cells that are read-only and the cells that allow you to enter new property information or modify existing information. page 64 • Define a New Engineering Data Editor View. page 54 • Use AutoFilter in the Engineering Data Editor. By specifying the display settings. page 51 • Modify the Table Properties of an Existing Engineering Data Editor View. page 61 • SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 59 . too. You can control the scrolling of the Engineering Data Editor with the Freeze Panes command. for instance.

page 38 • Use AutoFilter in the Engineering Data Editor. And . does not equal. To create more elaborate filters and displays. but you want to see only vertical drums. arrows appear at the top of each column. Open this dialog box by clicking View > AutoFilter > Custom in the EDE. When you click AutoFilter.Allows you to add another comparison using the Boolean operator sense of and: this means all criteria must be met. Comparison operator . you need to use the Edit View command and enter options on the Table Properties dialog box and the Advanced Table Properties dialog box. and so forth. page 64 • 60 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Click the arrow at the top of the column that contains the data that you want to filter on and choose the value from the list that appears. page 60 • Customize the Display of the Engineering Data Editor. Select this command again to deactivate it. begins with.Lists the available values currently stored in the column. Related Topics AutoFilter Command. use the AutoFilter command (click the arrow at the top of the Eq Subclass column and choose vertical drums). Related Topics • Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview. is greater than.Allows you to add another comparison in the Boolean sense of or: this means any one of the criteria must be met.Navigating in the Software: An Overview AutoFilter Command Engineering Data Editor > View > AutoFilter Allows you to filter the items displayed in the Engineering Data Editor. page 61 Custom AutoFilter Dialog Box Sets options for the behavior of the AutoFilter as it controls the display of items in the Engineering Data Editor. The Boolean or is less restrictive than the and. equals. Or . Value .Lists the available comparisons: for example. For instance. if the Engineering Data Editor displays Equipment: Vessels.

• • • Related Topics • Customize the Display of the Engineering Data Editor. and then click the Or button on the Custom AutoFilter dialog box. The Custom AutoFilter dialog box opens. enter the comparison operator and value that you want. and then click the And button. enter the operator and value that you want. choose Custom from the list. Enter the comparison operator and value that you want. page 59 • Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Use AutoFilter in the Engineering Data Editor 1. respectively. To display rows that meet either one condition or another condition. In the second comparison operator and value boxes. 2. To display rows that meet two conditions. Do one of the following: • • To match one criterion. You can choose Blanks or NonBlanks from the list in order to display items that either have no value in the column or do have a value in the column. page 38 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 61 . Click the down-arrow at the top of the column you want to filter values for. Tip Click View > AutoFilter again to turn the AutoFilter feature off. enter the operator and value that you want. choose that criterion from the list that is displayed. In the second comparison operator and value boxes. page 64 • Customizing the Display of the Engineering Data Editor: An Overview. Turn AutoFilter on by clicking View > AutoFilter on the Engineering Data Editor toolbar.

but you want to always see the item tag as you scroll to the right end of the rows to view the supplier. which allows you to specify various display options for the Engineering Data Editor. page 64 • Customizing the Display of the Engineering Data Editor: An Overview. page 59 • Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview. You can accomplish this layout by using the Freeze Panes command. You can choose that read-only cells are filled with a special background color. page 38 Display Settings Command Engineering Data Editor > View > Display Settings Opens the Display Settings dialog box. and you can specify the font that items in the Stockpile are listed in. For instance. page 38 62 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . For example. page 64 • Customizing the Display of the Engineering Data Editor: An Overview. you can choose the size of icon that is displayed in the view. Related Topics • Customize the Display of the Engineering Data Editor.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Freeze Panes Command Engineering Data Editor > View > Freeze Panes Allows you to scroll through the Engineering Data Editor while keeping the display of specified rows and columns constant. the first column can contain the item tag. Related Topics • Customize the Display of the Engineering Data Editor. page 59 • Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview.

Read-only properties .Allows you to choose a background color for read-only table cells.Allows you to specify either the font or background color.Causes large icons to appear in the view. You can subsequently select another option from the Item list and define fonts and colors for those items and so on until you have specified the appearance for all locations in the Item list. these settings apply to individual items. Row . page 64 • Display Settings Command. that is.Sets the font for the items selected from the Item list. Italic Bold . Related Topics • Customize the Display of the Engineering Data Editor. these settings apply to item properties. depending on Color whether you are specifying this property in the Row area or the Column area. the remaining options in the Row area then pertain to that location. When you select one of these options.Causes the font to be italicized for items selected from the Item list. Item .Allows you to specify large or small icons for the display in the far left column of the view. Small .Contains settings that apply to columns in the view. Font . .Navigating in the Software: An Overview Display Settings Dialog Box Sets options for the display of icons and rows and columns in the Engineering Data Editor.Contains settings that apply to rows in the view. Icon size in table . Read/write properties .Causes small icons to appear in the view.Causes the font to be bold for items selected from the Item list.Lists the different locations of items: Active Drawing. Column . or Other Drawings. Open this dialog box by clicking View > Display Settings in the EDE. Active Drawing Stockpile. that is. Large . page 62 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 63 . . Stockpile. respectively.Allows you to choose a background color for the table cells that you can edit in the Engineering Data Editor.

page 54 • • Related Topics • Customizing the Display of the Engineering Data Editor: An Overview. too. if you want. 3. see Use AutoFilter in the Engineering Data Editor. page 61 You can use the Freeze Panes feature. 4. select the row below where you want the split to appear. • 5. choose large or small icons.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Customize the Display of the Engineering Data Editor 1. For more information. Choose an item type in the Item list. To freeze the top horizontal pane. Click View > Freeze Panes on the Engineering Data Editor toolbar. and color that you want these items to be displayed in. Notes • You can also customize the Engineering Data Editor by using the AutoFilter feature. page 38 64 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . too. For more information. select the column to the right of where you want the split to appear. To freeze the left vertical pane. you can totally redefine the content and layout of your Engineering Data Editor. follow these steps: 1. style. On the Display Settings dialog box. click the cell below and to the right of where you want the split to appear. 2. Click View > Display Settings on the Engineering Data Editor toolbar. To freeze both the upper and left panes. 2. Specify a special background color for read-only properties. Tip You can specify this display information for each of the four types of items in the Item list. and the specify font. To do so. page 59 • Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview. see Modify the Table Properties of an Existing Engineering Data Editor View. And by clicking View > Edit View on the Engineering Data Editor toolbar. Specify a special background color for read/write properties.

You can browse the catalog tree view for drawing items that you need and create bookmarks for important categories. You can create a navigation bar in the region between the tree and list views for shortcuts to places throughout the catalog. Catalog Explorer replaces the paper catalog with an electronic equivalent. page 72 • Place an Item from Catalog Explorer. These toolbar buttons are located at the top of the tree view. Related Topics • Add a Shortcut Button to the Catalog Explorer Navigation Bar. page 65 • SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 65 . Conceptually. The paper catalog contains many items arranged in sections. You also use the List view to select catalog items before placing them in a drawing or in a stockpile. Catalog Explorer consists of two main views: the Tree view and the List view. page 66 Catalog Explorer Command View > Display > Catalog Explorer Turns the display of Catalog Explorer on or off. you can view the nodes of the catalog file system and open or close the nodes to see the contents. page 66 • Rename a Catalog Node. In the List view. the Catalog Explorer resembles a manufacturer catalog with pictures of parts to build a plant. Related Topics Turn the Display of Catalog Explorer On or Off. page 75 • Turn the Display of Catalog Explorer On or Off. you see the contents of the opened node. page 66 • Using Catalog Explorer: An Overview.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Using Catalog Explorer: An Overview Catalog Explorer is an interface to view and manipulate an electronic catalog containing drawing symbols and their associated properties. page 80 • Create a Custom Catalog. you can search for items or browse through the catalog and bookmark certain pages and sections. In the Tree view. Toolbar buttons carry out commands and allow you to customize the tree and list views to suit your work session.

• Notes • The procedure for placing items from the Catalog Explorer list view is similar to that of placing items from a stockpile. Or. Tip Or. Find the catalog node in the Tree view. However. depending on the label. Select and place the item in the appropriate place in the drawing. In the Catalog Explorer list view. 2. you can use the Configuration tool. 3. they disappear from the stockpile. • Related Topics • Customizing the Software: An Overview. You can enter values for properties of the placed item by clicking the item. page 65 Place an Item from Catalog Explorer 1. 4. click the symbol that you want to place. page 188 • • • 66 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . If the item that you place has multiple possible orientations in relation to other items. page 91 • Using Catalog Explorer: An Overview. click View > Toolbars and select Catalog. Click Esc to quit placement mode. Place a One-Point Label. items placed from the Catalog Explorer list view remain in that view.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Turn the Display of Catalog Explorer On or Off 1. and then selecting Edit > Properties to display the Properties window. 2. or PickQuick. when you place items from the stockpile. You can place labels with one-point placement or two-point placement. Tips • You can also right-click the empty area in the main toolbar and then select Catalog from the shortcut menu. you can drag the required item from Catalog Explorer into the Drawing view. Labels are a special class of item in Catalog Explorer. Use Catalog Explorer to view the symbol catalog and its contents and manipulate catalog items. whereas. Click View > Display > Catalog Explorer. page 186 Place a Two-Point Label. to select the appropriate placement for the item.

click "+" by the node containing the appropriate symbol library. choose either Send to Stockpile or Send to Drawing Stockpile. You can move an item into the stockpile of a specific drawing. Notes • You can import a spreadsheet in a recognized format into a stockpile to populate it. see Move a Stockpile Item to the Stockpile of Another Drawing. From the shortcut menu. page 184 • Placing Items on a Grid: An Overview. right-click the symbol that you want to add to the stockpile. Tip Or you can double-click a node name in the Catalog Explorer tree view to expand the node. For more information. In the Catalog Explorer list view. In the Catalog Explorer tree view.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Related Topics • Configuration (PickQuick) Tool. depending on the stockpile that you want to place the item in. page 267. 2. Items remain in the stockpile until you place them in a drawing or delete them from the stockpile. Select the appropriate node in the symbol library in order to display catalog symbols in the Catalog Explorer list view. page 265. page 238 • One-Point Label Placement. too. see Populate the Stockpile from a Spreadsheet. page 14 • Using Reports to Import Items into the Stockpile. For more information. page 265 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 67 . page 187 • Using Catalog Explorer: An Overview. page 150 • Two-Point Label Placement. page 146 • Manipulating Items With Component Handles: An Overview. • • Related Topics • Navigating in the Software: An Overview. page 65 Add an Item to the Stockpile from Catalog Explorer 1. • 3. Deleted stockpile items automatically go into the Stockpile. 4.

Tips • Or use the menu command Close when you right-click in the tree view of Catalog Explorer. you can search for catalog items. Or toggle the display of Catalog Explorer back off by clicking the icon on the main toolbar: • Related Topics • Using Catalog Explorer: An Overview. page 75 • Search for an Item in Catalog Explorer. page 65 68 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . page 68 • Rename a Catalog Item. Related Topics • Assign a Command to a Catalog Explorer Toolbar Button. page 70 • Using Catalog Explorer: An Overview. page 82 • Customizing Catalog Explorer: An Overview. Also. page 82 • Search for an Item in Catalog Explorer. and cancel the selection of the Catalog Explorer option. The Find dialog box allows you to search the catalog for a specific item or group of items. page 76 • Rename a Catalog Node. page 65 Catalog Menu: An Overview Catalog Explorer > Catalog The Catalog menu in Catalog Explorer provides access to commands that allow you to manipulate list view items and tree view nodes in the Catalog Explorer.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Close the Catalog Explorer Window Right-click the main toolbar area. Note • The list of commands that are available on the Catalog menu depends on whether the Tree view or the List view is active. page 70 Find Command Catalog Explorer > Catalog > Find Displays the Find dialog box. Related Topics • Close the Catalog Explorer Window.

or select a drive from this list and use the tree that is displayed below to find the location you want. as a wildcard character for a single character.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Catalog Explorer Find Dialog Box Allows you to search the active catalog for a specific item based on user-defined search criteria. page 68 • Search for an Item in Catalog Explorer. as a wildcard character to find multiple characters. "?". Browse .Opens the Explore Elsewhere dialog box.Specifies the class of item for which you want to search.Ends the current search. page 70 Explore Elsewhere Dialog Box Opens when you click Browse on the Catalog Explorer Find dialog box. Stop . You can type a percent sign. Related Topics Find Command. "?".Enter the location from which you want to view symbol information.Lists the items that met the defined search criteria. Class . Named . allowing you to search any network drives or the local directory structure for a symbol library to display in the Look In box. You can drag catalog items from this area into a My Catalog set of items in the Catalog Explorer tree view. or type a question mark. "%". as a wildcard character for a single character. or type a question mark. Open this dialog box by clicking File > Find in the Catalog Explorer. Look In . Look in . "*".Starts a search of the symbol library defined in the Look In: box. page 70 • SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 69 . Find Now . Results List . allowing you to search any network drives or the local directory structure for a symbol library.Specifies the name of the item for which you want to search.Specifies the drive or folder that contains the symbol library that you want to search. You can type an asterisk. as a wildcard character to find multiple characters. Related Topics • Explore Elsewhere Dialog Box. page 69 • Search for an Item in Catalog Explorer.Clears all search criteria in preparation for a new search. New Search .

3. However. You can select one or more items by using the Ctrl or Shift keys. page 68 New Command Catalog Explorer > Catalog > New Creates a new item or adds a node under the selected node in the Catalog Explorer. Tip You can use the asterisk. On the Catalog Explorer Catalog menu Tip The Tree view must be the active view in Catalog Explorer for the Find command to be available on the File menu. as a wildcard in either the Named or Class options to broaden the scope of your search. page 82 • Delete a Catalog Item. Click Find Now to start the search with the defined criteria. fill in the Name & Class options. page 74 • Using Catalog Explorer: An Overview. page 69 • Catalog Menu: An Overview. Note • Clicking the down-arrow of the File menu button accesses a list of the associated commands. Related Topics Assign a Command to a Catalog Explorer Toolbar Button. page 75 • Delete a Catalog Node. 2.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Search for an Item in Catalog Explorer 1. click Find. On the Find dialog box. but you cannot place an item directly onto a design from this results window. page 65 • 70 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Related Topics • Catalog Explorer Find Dialog Box. you can save the set of current search results to use later by dragging them into a My Catalog folder or subfolder in the Catalog Explorer Tree view. • Note • Items found by the search appear at the bottom of the Find dialog box. *. Clicking the File menu button itself repeats the last command that you used from the File menu. • .

Drag symbols from the list view and drop them into the new toolbar in the tree view. and under Vessels you can create Vertical and Horizontal. Plant-level symbol toolbars are created in Catalog Explorer. With the most often used equipment. page 65 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 71 . Name the new toolbar. 4. Notes • • You can dock the symbols toolbars on any side of the main window. • • Related Topics • Designing Symbol Toolbars. page 71 Define a User-Level Symbol Toolbar 1. 3. Related Topics • Activate Symbol Toolbars. You must have the proper permissions. or piping symbols. for example. You create plant-level toolbars in Catalog Manager. Tip • The new toolbar appears on the left side of the window. Symbol toolbars can be plant-level or user-level.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Designing Symbol Toolbars Symbols toolbars allow you to create toolbars that contain the symbols you use most frequently. You can define up to two levels of toolbars. whereas. When you add all the new symbols you want to the new toolbar. 2. find symbols you want to place on your new symbol toolbar. A divider appears in the symbol toolbar between levels. keeping them conveniently located for easy access. open the My Catalog node. In the Catalog Explorer list view. you can create a Vessels node under Toolbars. page 76 • Define a User-Level Symbol Toolbar. Right-click the Toolbars node under My Catalog. In the Catalog Explorer tree view. your symbol toolbars can streamline your work considerably. granted in SmartPlant Engineering Manager. instrumentation. 7. Click New on the shortcut menu. For example. right-click the tree view and click Refresh Symbol Toolbar. page 71 • Using Catalog Explorer: An Overview. 6. The symbol toolbars can be docked on any side of the main window. to create symbol toolbars. 5. you create user-level toolbars in either Catalog Manager or SmartPlant P&ID.

Drag the selected items from the list view to the appropriate category or subcategory of the My Catalog portion of the tree view. Type a new name for the node. click New. 6. Type a name for the category. Navigate through the tree view to display in the list view a group of items that you want to add to the custom catalog.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Create a Custom Catalog 1. Tip The software adds a subcategory called New Category to the My Catalog node. Related Topics • Close the Catalog Explorer Window. Click the My Catalog node in the Catalog Explorer tree view. page 65 Open Command Catalog Explorer > Catalog > Open Opens the Catalog Explorer window. From the shortcut menu. 2. page 68 72 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . New Category is selected so that you can rename it. 3. • 5. Right-click the tree view. If the symbols reside on your computer. Notes • To rename a node. On the shortcut menu. You can drag selected items to a custom catalog from the Find dialog box. which opens when you click Find on the Catalog Explorer File menu. page 68 • Using Catalog Explorer: An Overview. select it in the tree view and right-click. 7. Use the My Catalog folder only for shortcuts to symbols in the plant catalog. 4. click Rename. Caution • Do not move symbols to the My Catalog folder on your computer using Windows Explorer. • Related Topics • Catalog Menu: An Overview. Select the items that you want to add to the custom catalog from the list view. other users cannot view the symbols when they open that drawing on another workstation.

you must define all of the graphics and properties for the new symbol.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Clone Command Catalog Explorer > Catalog > Clone Creates a copy of the selected catalog item. you may or may not be able to clone items from certain catalogs. page 73 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 73 . Related Topics • Clone a Catalog Item. When you create a new symbol. You can then modify the properties of the cloned symbol. On Catalog Explorer File menu. cloned symbol. Important • Depending on your editing privileges. Related Topics • Clone Command. 2. When you clone an existing symbol. the software copies all of the graphics and associated properties for the original symbol to the new. click Clone. page 73 Clone a Catalog Item 1. See your system administrator for information regarding your current editing privileges. Note • Cloning symbols differs from creating new symbols. Click the item you want to copy in the Catalog Explorer List view. The software places a copy of the selected item in the List view.

On the File menu . 3. Important • Depending on your editing permissions. you are able to delete nodes in certain catalogs. Important • Depending on your editing privileges. page 74 Delete a Catalog Node 1. Click OK on the confirmation box to delete the selected node. See your system administrator for information regarding your current privileges. page 65 74 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . 2. You must first delete all sub-nodes and catalog items that populate a node before you can delete the node itself. Note • You must first delete all sub-nodes and catalog items that reside under a node before you can delete the node itself. page 75 • Delete a Catalog Node. which are specified in SmartPlant Engineering Manager. See your system administrator for information regarding your current editing privileges. click Delete. • Related Topics • Using Catalog Explorer: An Overview. you are able to delete items from certain catalogs. Click the custom catalog node that you want to delete in the Catalog Explorer Tree view.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Delete Command Catalog Explorer > Catalog > Delete Removes the selected item from the Catalog Explorer list view or catalog node from the tree view. which are specified in SmartPlant Engineering Manager. Related Topics • Delete a Catalog Item.

2. page 65 Rename Command Catalog Explorer > Catalog > Rename Allows you to type a new name for the item or node. On the File menu .Navigating in the Software: An Overview Delete a Catalog Item 1. Click OK on the confirmation box to delete the selected item. On the File menu . click Rename. Important • Depending on your editing privileges. Related Topics • Using Catalog Explorer: An Overview. you can rename nodes in certain catalogs. which are specified in SmartPlant Engineering Manager. See your system administrator for information regarding your current editing privileges. In the Catalog Explorer List view. click Delete. 2. 3. page 65 Rename a Catalog Node 1. Related Topics • Using Catalog Explorer: An Overview. you can delete items from certain catalog. page 68 • Using Catalog Explorer: An Overview. click the custom catalog item that you want to delete. Important • Depending on your editing permissions. Related Topics • Catalog Menu: An Overview. 3. page 65 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 75 . which are specified in SmartPlant Engineering Manager. See your system administrator for information regarding your current privileges. Type the new name for the custom catalog node. Click the custom catalog node that you want to rename in the Catalog Explorer tree view.

page 76 • Define a User-Level Symbol Toolbar. page 65 Refresh Symbol Toolbar Command Catalog Explorer > Catalog > Refresh Symbol Toolbar Activates plant. Related Topics • Catalog Menu: An Overview. which are specified in SmartPlant Engineering Manager. Related Topics • Close the Catalog Explorer Window. page 65 • Close Command Catalog Explorer > Catalog > Close Closes the Catalog Explorer window. 2.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Rename a Catalog Item 1. click Rename. In the Catalog Explorer list view. page 71 • Using Catalog Explorer: An Overview. page 68 • Using Catalog Explorer: An Overview. Enter the new name for the catalog item. On the File menu . 3. Related Topics • Activate Symbol Toolbars. click the custom catalog item that you want to rename. page 68 76 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . page 71 Activate Symbol Toolbars 1. On the shortcut menu. page 71 • Designing Symbol Toolbars. 2. Right-click in the Catalog Explorer tree view. you can rename items in Catalog Explorer. See your system administrator for information regarding your current editing privileges. Related Topics Designing Symbol Toolbars.or user-level symbol toolbars or updates the symbol toolbars to incorporate any modifications to a toolbar. click Refresh Symbol Toolbar. Important • Depending on your editing privileges.

Related Topics • Add Instruments to a Loop. This command is particularly useful for instrument loops and packages and other items that reside in a stockpile but generally are not depicted graphically in a drawing. page 178 • Place a Package. Related Topics • Add Instruments to a Loop. page 78 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 77 . Related Topics • Customize the Catalog Explorer List View. page 213 View Menu Catalog Explorer > View The Catalog Explorer View menu provides commands that allow you to control the display format of catalog items within the Catalog Explorer list view. Related Topics • Customize the Catalog Explorer List View. page 178 • Place a Package.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Send to Stockpile Command Catalog Explorer > Catalog > Send to Stockpile Sends the catalog item selected in the list view to the Stockpile. page 78 Large Icons Command Catalog Explorer > View > Large Icons Displays larger icons and names horizontally in the list view and does not list details. This command is particularly useful for instrument loops and packages and other items that reside in a stockpile but generally are not depicted graphically in a drawing. page 213 Send to Drawing Stockpile Command Catalog Explorer > Catalog > Send to Drawing Stockpile Sends the catalog item selected in the list view to the Active Drawing Stockpile.

page 65 • View Menu. name. Related Topics • Customize the Catalog Explorer List View. page 78 Details Command Catalog Explorer > View > Details Displays smaller icons with names and source information vertically in a single column in the list view.Displays the icon for an item in the list view in a larger format. page 78 • Using Catalog Explorer: An Overview. Choose the display of items in your list view. page 77 78 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .Navigating in the Software: An Overview Small Icons Command Catalog Explorer > View > Small Icons Displays smaller icons with names horizontally in the list view and does not list file locations. Related Topics • Customize the Catalog Explorer List View. In Catalog Explorer click the down-arrow on the View menu 2.Displays the icon and name for an item in the list view in a simple list. Details . Large Icons . page 65 Customize the Catalog Explorer List View 1.Displays the icon. Small Icons . List . Related Topics • Customize the Catalog Explorer List View.Displays the icon for an item in the list view in a smaller format. Options include • . and file location for an item. page 78 List Command Catalog Explorer > View > List Displays smaller icons with names vertically using multiple columns in the list view and does not list details. • • • Related Topics • Using Catalog Explorer: An Overview.

page 81 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 79 .Navigating in the Software: An Overview Navigation Menu (Catalog Explorer) Catalog Explorer > Navigation The Navigation menu in Catalog Explorer provides commands that allow you to control the display and assignment of shortcut buttons within the Catalog Explorer. These buttons reside on the navigation bar between the tree and list view in the Catalog Explorer window. The software does not limit the number of shortcut buttons that you can create. All of the commands for managing your shortcut buttons are found on the Catalog Explorer Navigation menu. Shortcut buttons provide shortcuts that bookmark a node in the active Tree view of Catalog Explorer. you open the node for the piping and all the piping types appear in the list view. For example. page 82 • Remove a Shortcut Button from the Catalog Explorer Navigation Bar. Also. Related Topics • Add a Shortcut Button to the Catalog Explorer Navigation Bar. If you want to make a shortcut to a particular symbol that you use a lot. if your workflow requires you to route a lot of piping. page 80 • Display Shortcut Buttons in Catalog Explorer. Then when you open Catalog Explorer and click this shortcut button. Consequently you save the time and effort of browsing the catalog node structure in the tree view in order to find the node that you want to open in the list view. you want to make a shortcut button to the Process Lines node. but you are limited by the size of the Catalog Explorer window. you can use the symbol toolbar. shortcut buttons are shortcuts to catalog nodes only.

you can add a shortcut button to the nozzles node of the Catalog Explorer tree view by selecting Nozzles in the tree view and then choosing Add Button from the menu that appears when you click the downarrow of the Navigation menu. page 80 • Customizing the Software: An Overview. and show buttons.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Add Button Command Catalog Explorer > Navigation > Add Button Adds a shortcut button to Catalog Explorer for the active tree view node. Related Topics • Customizing the Software: An Overview. page 65 80 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . On the Navigation menu. page 91 • Display Shortcut Buttons in Catalog Explorer. click Add Button to create a shortcut button for the currently selected node. In the tree view. Related Topics • Add a Shortcut Button to the Catalog Explorer Navigation Bar. 2. select the node that you want a shortcut to. page 82 • Remove a Shortcut Button from the Catalog Explorer Navigation Bar. page 81 • Using Catalog Explorer: An Overview. page 91 • Using Catalog Explorer: An Overview. Verify that shortcut buttons are set to appear on the navigation bar between the tree and list views of Catalog Explorer by clicking the down-arrow on the Navigation menu and making sure that Show Buttons is selected. You must also select the Show Buttons option in the menu in order for your shortcut button to appear between the tree view and list view windows of Catalog Explorer. remove. 3. if you frequently select nozzles. page 65 Add a Shortcut Button to the Catalog Explorer Navigation Bar 1. Note • Clicking the down-arrow of the Navigation menu button above accesses a list of the associated commands. Note • You can right-click any shortcut button to display options to add. For example. Clicking on the Navigation menu button itself repeats the last command that you used from the menu.

click Remove Button to delete the active shortcut button from the navigation bar.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Remove Button Command Catalog Explorer > Navigation > Remove Button Removes the active shortcut button from the list of shortcut buttons in Catalog Explorer. page 65 Remove a Shortcut Button from the Catalog Explorer Navigation Bar On the Catalog Explorer Navigation menu . page 65 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 81 . page 80 • Using Catalog Explorer: An Overview. page 65 Show Buttons Command Catalog Explorer > Navigation > Show Buttons Causes shortcut buttons to appear on the navigation bar between the tree view and the list view of Catalog Explorer. Tip • Or you can right-click any shortcut button and select Remove Button from its shortcut menu. page 80 • Using Catalog Explorer: An Overview. page 79 • Using Catalog Explorer: An Overview. Related Topics • Navigation Menu (Catalog Explorer). Related Topics • Add a Shortcut Button to the Catalog Explorer Navigation Bar. Related Topics • Add a Shortcut Button to the Catalog Explorer Navigation Bar.

Click the toolbar button itself. Click the down-arrow portion of a Catalog Explorer toolbar button to open the associated menu. View. click an available command. and that most recent command from the menu is carried out. A check mark next to the menu item indicates that shortcut buttons appear in Catalog Explorer. Related Topics • Assign a Command to a Catalog Explorer Toolbar Button. for example. click on the File menu button (not the down-arrow) and the Find command is carried out again. Related Topics • Customizing Catalog Explorer: An Overview. After customization you can control the content and display of components in the Catalog Explorer window. The commands on these menus allow you to customize the Catalog Explorer. The buttons appear on the navigation bar between the tree and list views.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Display Shortcut Buttons in Catalog Explorer On the Catalog Explorer Navigation menu Tip • . On the menu. page 65 82 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . page 82 • Using Catalog Explorer: An Overview. the Find command on the File menu. page 80. page 65 Customizing Catalog Explorer: An Overview The Catalog Explorer toolbar buttons access the Catalog Explorer File. For more information. page 80 • Navigation Menu (Catalog Explorer). For example. For example. 2. The software assigns the selected command to the Catalog Explorer toolbar button. Related Topics • Add a Shortcut Button to the Catalog Explorer Navigation Bar. 3. page 79 • Using Catalog Explorer: An Overview. Note • You must first define a shortcut button in order to display it. the icon located next to the menu button. you can control the display of icons in the list view and define shortcut buttons that allow you easy access to user-defined groups of catalog items. see Add a Shortcut Button to the Catalog Explorer Navigation Bar. and Navigation menus. click Show Buttons. page 82 Assign a Command to a Catalog Explorer Toolbar Button 1.

or Edit > Cut to modify property values in this grid. then only the common properties appear. page 88 • Customize the Properties Window. You can display and edit relationships that involve components. Notes • The software includes a default set of bulk properties. but you can change those properties specified as bulk in the Usage box on the Layout tab of the Advanced Table Properties dialog box. You can only have one Properties window open. all the properties of that type of component appear. or when you must apply changes to more than one item. You can modify the values for properties in the Properties window. Do not use the Edit > Copy. • • • Related Topics Copy Bulk Properties. If more than one item is selected in the Design window. which itemizes all of the selected objects individually and as a select set. page 86 • Display Null Values in the Properties Window. the value box is blank. Edit > Paste. page 89 • Paste Bulk Properties. giving the name of the button. The active items always determine the content of the Properties window. then the Selected Items list contains the choice Select Set as well as individual items in the set.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Working With the Properties Window: An Overview The Properties window display is a two-column table that provides the common properties of the current selection in the active Design window. At the top of the Properties window is the Selected Items list. This action can be particularly useful when correcting inconsistencies. page 90 • SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 83 . page 89 • Show Brief Properties. as well as by selecting an item in the Design window. a ToolTip appears. If the selected items have different values for their common properties. When you pause your pointer over the buttons on the Properties window toolbar. You can use the Copy Bulk Properties and Paste Bulk Properties buttons to copy properties from one item to another. component types. or all components are of the same type. for instance. If your select set contains components of different types. An item and the properties that belong to it are associated when the item is created in Catalog Manager. If only one component is selected. You can display item properties by locating the appropriate item in the Selected Items list. or assemblies. If you copy or paste values in the grid area. use Ctrl+C and Crtl+V.

Copies the bulk properties of a selected item. Case data includes both process cases and control cases. The applicable properties of an item are defined when it is created in Catalog Manager. Note • You can display the Properties window by clicking View > Display > Properties Window. temperatures. page 144 Properties Window Toolbar You can customize the display of the Properties window by using the following Properties window toolbar buttons: Alphabetic .Displays properties grouped by specific categories. look in Data Dictionary Manager.Pastes copied bulk properties onto the newly selected item or items. You must have previously selected an item or items and copied bulk properties. too. The properties are then available to paste onto other items. according to relevance. Show Brief Properties . see Paste Bulk Properties. Copy Bulk Properties . which are displayed for equipment.Displays a list of case conditions. Show Case Data . Related Topics • Review and Edit Item Properties. Categorized . Categories are defined and properties are assigned to those categories in Data Dictionary Manager.Lists properties in alphabetical order.Displays those properties that have been previously specified as brief on the Advanced Table Properties dialog box. Paste Bulk Properties . 84 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .Navigating in the Software: An Overview Properties Window Command View > Display > Properties Opens the Properties window and displays characteristics for a selected item or a select set. For more information. see Copy Bulk Properties. for example. pipe runs or instruments. You can review and edit the properties. For more information. This option helps avoid confusion between empty cells and cells containing a zero. To see the case data that appears for corresponding items. and so forth. page 87 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview. pressures. Display Null .Displays a null value in blank properties that currently contain no value.

Tip • Another method for displaying the Properties window is to right-click the empty area in the main toolbar and then select Properties from the shortcut menu. Use the Properties window to view and edit item properties. page 83 • SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 85 . page 86 • Display Null Values in the Properties Window. page 89 • Show Brief Properties. The item characteristics appear in the Properties window. • Related Topics Properties Window Toolbar. and select Properties. but you can change those properties in the Usage box on the Layout tab of the Advanced Table Properties dialog box. 2. Or right-click an item. page 90 Turn the Display of the Properties Window On or Off 1. page 84 • Working With the Properties Window: An Overview. page 89 • Paste Bulk Properties. Related Topics • Copy Bulk Properties. Click View > Display > Properties Window.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Note • The software includes a default set of bulk and brief properties. page 88 • Customize the Properties Window.

empty property values for a select set do not necessarily mean that no value has been assigned for any of the items in the set. Consequently. and only common values are displayed for those properties.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Customize the Properties Window 1. page 84 • Working With the Properties Window: An Overview. a ToolTip displays the name of the corresponding command. Display case data by clicking Show Case Data . page 83 86 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . only properties that all items have in common appear. Open the Properties window. When you point to a button on the Properties window toolbar and pause over it. Click to display properties alphabetically. only that either no value has been assigned or that the different items have different values for the property. For the select set. Display properties alphabetically or by categories by clicking the corresponding display mode button on the Properties window toolbar. page 85. see Turn the Display of the Properties Window On or Off. Related Topics • Properties Window Toolbar. 3. . • Tips • The properties that are subsequently displayed in the window belong to the chosen item or the select set. 6. 2. you can choose single items from that set by using the Selected Items list at the top of the Properties window. Display a null character in empty property cells by clicking Display Null Note • . • 4. Tip For more information on opening the Properties window. use the Selected Items list at the top of the Properties window choose a single item or the select set of all listed items. click to display properties by categories. A single item chosen in a select set this way is highlighted in a different color in the Drawing view. If more than one item is selected in the Drawing view or in the Engineering Data Editor. Whenever you have constructed a select set. Display only brief properties by clicking Show Brief Properties 5.

page 271 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 87 . you can enter free text into a formatted property and no units of measurement are assigned. • Tips • You can review and edit item properties in the Engineering Data Editor. • • Or you can click View > Toolbars and select Properties. Or you can right-click an item. 3. Tips • You can also display the Properties window by right-clicking the empty area of the main toolbar and then selecting Properties from the shortcut menu. Use a single quote. page 215 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview. '. • Related Topics • Modifying and Moving Placed Items: An Overview. or you can select an item by clicking the icon in the left-most column and then edit its properties in the Properties window. 2. Select the item or items whose properties you want to review. Or you can click View > Display > Properties Window on the main menu bar. Enter or edit information in the cell next to the appropriate property.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Review and Edit Item Properties 1. too. In this way. such as estimated length or maximum operating temperature. For formatted properties. and select Properties from the shortcut menu. You can edit the contents of some cells directly in the table if the corresponding property is not read-only or generated strictly by validation. at the beginning of your entry. you can enter a value without a format. page 144 • Updating Options Manager Settings: An Overview. Click Edit > Properties to display the Properties window.

Navigating in the Software: An Overview Associate an Item with a Plant Group 1. Note • The software includes a default set of bulk properties. You can now paste these properties onto another item. but you can change those properties specified as bulk in the Usage box on the Layout tab of the Advanced Table Properties dialog box. Related Topics • Customizing the Software: An Overview. page 215 • Modifying Item Properties: An Overview. For more information. but you want simply to associate it with a different unit. In the Design window or Engineering Data Editor. your item can already be associated with the plant group type of unit. • Related Topics Modifying and Moving Placed Items: An Overview. 2. 3. Tips • The default plant group is the node in the plant hierarchy immediately under which the drawing resides. page 89. Then modify the plant group name in the Plant Group Name property box. page 258 • Copy Bulk Properties 1. Select the item that you want to associate with a different plant group. Go to the last step if this is the case. select the item whose bulk properties you want to copy. • Tip It is possible that you do not want to modify the plant group type. In the Properties window. select the plant group type in the Plant Group Type property box. Not all item types support the plant group property. For instance. see Paste Bulk Properties. page 83 88 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Click Copy Bulk Properties Tip • . page 91 • Working With the Properties Window: An Overview. 2.

and is not the same as a zero value. Related Topics • Properties Window Toolbar. page 86 • Working With the Design Window: An Overview. page 83 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 89 . click Paste Bulk Properties Tip • . For more information. Null means that the property is not defined. Related Topics • Customize the Properties Window. Right-click and select Properties. You must first have copied the bulk properties of a different item in order to paste them onto your current selection. page 15 • Working With the Properties Window: An Overview. page 88. 2.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Display Null Values in the Properties Window 1. page 84 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview. Select the item or items that you want to paste bulk properties onto. or is empty. see Copy Bulk Properties. 3. Select an item in your drawing. page 144 Paste Bulk Properties 1. but you can change bulk properties in the Usage box on the Layout tab of the Advanced Table Properties dialog box. 2. Note • The software includes a default set of bulk properties. Click the null button Note • to display a null value in blank properties. On the Properties window toolbar.

or instruments. page 84 • Working With the Properties Window: An Overview. • Related Topics • Customize the Properties Window. Notes • If the Properties window is not displayed. page 90 • Working With the Properties Window: An Overview. pipe runs. Related Topics • Customize the Properties Window. click the Show Case Data button Tip • . but you can change that set on the Layout tab of the Advanced Table Properties dialog box. case data remains displayed for the current design session. page 86 • Properties Window Toolbar.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Show Brief Properties On the Properties window toolbar. page 83 90 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . The software includes a default set of brief properties. click the Show Brief Properties button Note • . page 86 • Show Brief Properties. Case data includes both process cases and control cases. page 83 Show Case Data • On the Properties window toolbar. Once you display case data in the Properties window. look in Data Dictionary Manager. according to relevance. which are displayed for equipment. you can select an item and click Edit > Properties. To see the case data that appears for corresponding items.

Visual C++ Delphi. properties. Click Help > Programming with SmartPlant P&ID to access the SmartPlant P&ID Programming User's Guide. From there. Visual Basic. The Previous View button is listed on the Toolbars tab of the Customize dialog box. if you frequently use the View > Previous command. see a list by using the Tools > Custom Commands command. you can start by clicking View > Toolbars. and so forth. methods. which provides a complete reference to the objects. Or. You then click New and type the name of the new toolbar on the New Toolbar dialog box. and methods available with the product. you click Tools > Customize. The software includes a type library. The Tools > Customize command allows you to add macros to the standard menus and toolbars in the software. such as Microsoft® Visual Basic®. You can create the macros in Visual Basic or other OLE-aware programming applications. You can view the type library with the type library browser of Visual Basic or the browser for an OLE-aware programming application.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Customizing the Software: An Overview Customization allows you to modify and enhance the software to meet your specific needs. but you can also create your own macros and add them to menus and toolbars in the same manner. To add a button to a toolbar or a command to a menu. You can use standard Windows programming tools and languages that are OLE-aware. and properties. Some of the OLE-aware programming applications are Visual Basic for Applications. If you want to create a new toolbar that does not exist in the software. the Customize dialog box automatically appears so that you can add buttons to the new toolbar. After you click OK. you can click the Menu or Toolbars tab and click the options that you want. Customizing with Macros Not only can you add built-in commands or buttons to the software. you could add the Previous View button to the main toolbar. Some macros also are delivered with the software. For example. you can run the macros directly by clicking Tools > Custom Commands and selecting the macro. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 91 . which contains all the objects. Several ways to customize the software are available: Customizing with Built-In Commands You can add commands to a menu or a menu command to a toolbar.

page 78 Customize a Filter Tab for the Drawing View. or you can create new toolbars and menus. page 86 Define a User-Level Symbol Toolbar. and so forth. Related Topics • Create a New Menu. page 96 • Create a New Toolbar. page 138 Customize the Properties Window. page 80 Customize the Catalog Explorer List View. page 71 Related Topics • Add a Button to a Toolbar. creating shortcut buttons to access your most commonly used items. which allows you to customize toolbars or menus to fit your workflow.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Customizing Interface Elements You can customize many of the various ways of interfacing with the software. see these examples Add a Shortcut Button to the Catalog Explorer Navigation Bar. For more information about some of these options. page 95 • Add a Shortcut Button to the Catalog Explorer Navigation Bar. Some customization options include displaying small or large icons. page 28 • Add a Command to a Menu. page 27 • Customizing the Software: An Overview. page 27 • Run a Macro. creating filter tabs. page 101 Customize Command Tools > Customize Opens the Customize dialog box. page 96 • Create a New Toolbar. page 91 92 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . page 80 • Create a New Menu. You can add commands to toolbars or menus.

To see all the commands on a menu. you can type the name that you want in the tree view and then enter it by clicking any other location on the dialog box.Displays a description of the command that you selected before you add it to a menu. you can click the title of a command in the Commands list.Lists the menus and their associated commands or macros. Description . page 28 • Add a Command to a Menu.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Customize Dialog Box Changes the display of toolbar buttons and menus according to your needs. Categories .Allows you to specify the command that you want to add to the menu. double-click a menu name or click the "+" next to the SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 93 . Browse . page 95 • Menu Tab (Customize Dialog Box) Adds or removes commands from menus or the main menu bar.Places a command on a menu. Or you can add a single command to the main menu bar. the Macros list displays the macros for the folder that you selected. Add Command .Allows you to specify the macro that you want to add to the menu. you create a cascading menu.Opens the Select Macro Directory dialog box. Add Menu . Then you can add the command or macro to the menu or main menu bar. page 28 • Remove a Command From a Menu. page 96 • Create a New Toolbar. Menu Tree . The Browse button appears only when you choose Macros in the Categories list. If you select a macro. you can select a macro from the Macros list. This dialog box opens when you click Tools > Customize on the main menu bar. This button is available only when you select a command or macro in the Commands box or Macros box. When you select the title of a group of commands in this box. After you click this button. You can add a command to an existing menu or build a custom menu with the commands that you want.Allows you to specify the category that you want to select a command or macro from. Commands . Macros . When you add a menu with this option.Places a menu at the level currently open on the menu tree. you can click Browse to change the folder for macros. page 95 • Create a New Menu. Related Topics Add a Button to a Toolbar. page 27 • Remove a Button From a Toolbar. Descriptions do not appear for macros. When you select a folder and click OK. When you select Macros in the Categories list. If you add a menu to an existing menu. you can add commands to the new menu later.

Description . When you click Add Command. page 95 • Restore All Built-In Menus to their Original Settings. page 28 • Add a Command to a Menu. or Remove. Reset All . Categories . Choose one and the corresponding buttons appear in the Buttons area. Remove .Restores all menus and the main menu bar to the original settings. If you do not set this option. page 96 • Create a New Toolbar. then the macros. page 26 94 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . You can drag a button from this area onto a toolbar. page 95 • Create a New Menu. page 27 • Remove a Button From a Toolbar.Removes the command or menu that you selected in the menu tree. you edit menu and command names in this view. Also. Related Topics Add a Command to a Menu. page 95 • Create a New Toolbar.Describes the button selected in the Buttons area. Buttons .Lists the categories of the toolbars that you can customize.Lists the buttons available in the active category. or menus are added at the level that is currently open in the menu tree. Related Topics • Add a Button to a Toolbar.Overrides the default placement and places a command or macro on the menu that is currently selected in the menu tree. page 96 • Toolbars Tab (Customize Dialog Box) Adds or removes commands from toolbars.Navigating in the Software: An Overview menu name. Add Menu. the changes show up on the menu tree. commands. page 28 • Toolbars Dialog Box. Place Into Selected Menu . page 27 • Remove a Command From a Menu.

double-click the name of the existing menu that you want to add a command to. • SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 95 . page 28 • Remove a Command From a Menu 1. click the name of the command that you want to add. • Related Topics Customizing the Software: An Overview. double-click a menu in the menu tree. This dialog box opens when you drag a macro from the Toolbars tab of the Customize dialog box to the toolbar. 3. which allows you to look for an icon on your local computer or on the network. In the Commands or Macros box. 3. then the Macros box is displayed. the view contains the Commands box. select the command category that you want. page 28 • Create a New Toolbar. Click Remove. Tip The menu tree expands to show the commands on the existing menu. 2.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Custom Button Dialog Box Allows you to assign an toolbar button icon to a macro. 2.Opens the Select Bitmap File dialog box. • 4. In the Categories list on the Menu tab. Click Tools > Customize. Click Tools > Customize. Related Topics Add a Button to a Toolbar.Displays the available icons. Browse .Specifies the icon for your button and closes the dialog box. In the menu tree. Buttons . page 91 Add a Command to a Menu 1. Click the name of an existing menu or command that you want to remove from the main menu bar or the existing menu. otherwise. On the Menu tab. page 27 • Remove a Button From a Toolbar. Tip If you choose Macros from the Categories list. 4. Assign .

• Related Topics Customizing the Software: An Overview. In the Categories box on the Menu tab. 4. 5. On the Menu tab. page 91 Restore All Built-In Menus to their Original Settings 1. The software places the new command on the main menu bar after the existing menu that you select in the menu tree. On the menu tree. Click Add Command. Click the Add Menu button. 2. Select the Place Into Selected Menu option. 7. Click the name of the command that you want the new command to appear after. Click Tools > Customize. • Related Topics • Customizing the Software: An Overview. 3. you can restore the command. Tip If you want to add the new command to the main menu bar. clear the Place Into Selected Menu option. 96 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . page 91 Create a New Menu 1. Tips • The new menu is added after the existing menu that you selected in step 3. click the Reset All button. Click Tools > Customize. Notes • If you remove Customize from the Tools menu. click the name of an existing menu.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Tip The menu tree nodes expand to show the commands on the existing menus. • 6. Right-click the empty area of the main toolbar and click Customize on the shortcut menu in order to open the Customize dialog box. 2. click the command category that you want.

Some macros are delivered with the software. Related Topics • Customize Dialog Box. To enter the new menu. page 93 • Customizing the Software: An Overview. page 91 • Display Help for Programming With SmartPlant P&ID. • 6. you can add commands to it. thereby creating a cascading menu. You can also record your own macros and store them wherever you want to. Related Topics • Customizing the Software: An Overview.Navigating in the Software: An Overview If you want to add a menu to an existing menu. select the Place Into Selected Menu option before you click the Add Menu button. 5. For more information. type the name of the menu. You can choose a macro and run it. page 91 • Restore All Built-In Menus to their Original Settings. generally in the C:\Program Files\Smartplant\P&ID Workstation\Program directory. page 101 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 97 . see Add a Command to a Menu. Note • After you create a new menu. page 96 Custom Commands Command Tools > Custom Commands Opens the Custom Commands dialog box. page 95. click anywhere away from the name. page 13 • Run a Macro. On the menu tree.

page 100 Repair OPCs Dialog Box Opens when you click Tool > Custom Commands to run DelOrpModItems.Fixes the reference to the mated OPC that you have selected in the OPC list.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Clean Data Dialog Box This utility opens when you click Tool > Custom Commands and run the DelOrpModItems.Cleans orphaned records from the plant database. Model Items .dll. You can choose OPCs to repair or delete from the plant database.Corrects gaps with the wrong representation in the database. OPC Types .Allows you to choose to list either the repairable or the non-repairable OPC pairs that have lost links to their partner OPCs either one-way or both ways. Related Topics • Delete Orphan Model Items. For more information. OPCs . which allows you to delete obsolete model items.dll and click OPCs. Fix .Deletes the non-repairable OPC pair that you have chosen in the OPC list. Clean DB . You use this utility to delete obsolete model items from the database.Opens the Delete Orphan Model Items dialog box.Opens the Repair OPCs dialog box. This dialog box is part of the Delete Orphan Model Items Utility. page 100 98 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Delete . Gaps . Related Topics • Delete Orphan Model Items. see Related Topics. This dialog box is part of the Delete Orphan Model Items Utility. which allows you to fix or delete OPC pairs with incomplete reference information.

The utility works on an item type basis and repairs the following model item types: Vessel. the utility updates the identity information for the first OPC. Update gaps in the representation record with the proper item type. This need occurs only in rare instances. If one OPC has lost the identity of its mated OPC. Area Break. but the mated OPC still has the identity of the first OPC. then the OPC is considered repairable. Signal Run. Instrument. this dialog box can be used to accomplish the following tasks. and OPC. if both the OPC and its mated OPC have lost the identities of each other. and you are given the option to delete them. • • Item Type Names . Find and delete any model item in the database that does not have a corresponding entry in the T_Representation table. You need to perform this operation if you have gapping problems in your drawings. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 99 . Equipment Component. Nozzle. Piping Component.dll and then click Model Items.Allows you to choose the type of orphaned model items that you want to display in the Item list.Removes the orphan items selected in the Item list from the plant database. you can select any or all of the items and choose to delete them. Pipe Run. Part of the Delete Orphan Model Items Utility. You can choose the orphan model items that you want to delete from the plant database. Mechanical. Exchanger. Once the orphan model items for an item type are found. Equipment: Other. • • Clean orphaned records from the plant database. However.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Delete Orphan Model Items Dialog Box Opens when you click Tool > Custom Commands and run DelOrpModItems. then the OPCs are considered non-repairable. Find and repair off-page connectors (OPCs) that have lost their associations with the OPC that they were originally paired with. To repair the OPC. Delete .

Non-repairable OPC pairs retain neither link. 9. 6. In the list view. and click Tools > Custom Commands to open the Custom Commands dialog box. 1. On the Repair OPCs dialog box. click Clean DB. select the model orphan items to delete and click Delete. Tip You can find this macro in \Program Files\Smartplant\P&ID Workstation\Program. The buttons on the utility are arranged appropriately.dll. • 4. and click Fix if it is a repairable pair or Delete if it is non-repairable. Choose the OPC pair that you are interested in from the OPC list. 5. Open a drawing. Tip Repairable OPC pairs retain one link out of two between the mates. page 100 Delete Orphan Model Items Important • Verify that the plant user has full permissions to the tables. Tip You can also click Delete All to select and delete all the items in the list view. choose the model item type from the Item Type Names list. • 2. 7. On the Clean Data dialog box. Browse the drawing software program directory and open DelOrpModItems. It is very important that you perform the steps in the sequence that they are presented.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Delete All . Click OPCs. • 8. Click Gaps to find and repair gaps that do not have the correct representation in the database. For information on setting table permissions. • 10. choose either repairable or non-repairable from the OPC Type list. T_Representation and T_ModelItem. refer to your database documentation. Related Topics • Delete Orphan Model Items.Selects and deletes all the orphan model items of the type specified in the Item Type Names list. 100 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Click Model Items. 3. On the Delete Orphan Model Items dialog box.

The log file contains information about deleted items including the item type and sp_id. Log messages are placed in SPDelOrpModItems. page 91 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 101 . Related Topics • Customizing the Software: An Overview. Click Run.txt file in the directory assigned to the Temp environment variable. Click Tools > Custom Commands.log file in the directory assigned to the Temp environment variable. Click Close to return to the design software. 3. page 127 Run a Macro 1. 2. • • Related Topics • Re-creating Drawings: An Overview. Note • You can create macros with any programming tool that supports OLE automation. select the macro that you want to run.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Tip Follow the prompts on message boxes if you see any. 11. such as Visual Basic. • Notes • The Delete Orphan Model Item Utility must be run from within the drawing environment. Log messages generated when orphaned records are deleted from the plant database are written to the DBCleanup. On the Custom Commands dialog box.

You can use the commands on toolbars and in menus to add information to your drawing.pid for SmartPlant. and you can create new templates in SmartPlant P&ID. Any changes that you make to the drawing data are automatically saved in the database. When you create and open a drawing.dwg and . Several standard templates are delivered with SmartPlant P&ID. and styles used to produce a new drawing.dgn for MicroStation®. Your plant administrator can edit the property set of the template to include default values for some of the properties. In the Properties window. You can save drawings in different formats. . If you want to create custom border files for your drawing templates. If you link a border file.Working with Drawings: An Overview Working with Drawings: An Overview An administrator uses Drawing Manager to create a new drawing on a pre-formatted template. piping. The only way to use a template is to have a plant administrator select a template at drawing creation in Drawing Manager. A plant model consists of components. . 102 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . A template is a file that provides tools such as text. geometry. any changes to the border file are not reflected in drawings created prior to the change. A component is any piece of equipment. You cannot save a drawing as a template. You can then embed your border file in the new templates you create in SmartPlant P&ID. You select symbols from Catalog Explorer and then select the appropriate placement location in the drawing. units of measurement. Once you embed a border file into a drawing template and a drawing is created in Drawing Manager using that template. including . instead of embedding it. Symbols represent components in Catalog Explorer and Engineering Data Editor. and .dxf for AutoCAD®. or other item used to create a plant model. The template that your plant administrator selects depends on the type of information that is wanted in the drawing. Using Templates as a Starting Point You use a template as a starting point for creating the drawing. and then subsequently change that border in SmartSketch. as well as the additional custom properties that you need to manage your drawings. dimensions. Drawings are graphical representations of plant models using standard symbols and conventions.cgm for CGM Metafile. use Intergraph SmartSketch. you enter appropriate values into the database for each property of the component. and you can use edit commands to modify the information in your drawing. formats. changes are reflected automatically in your drawing. the drawing is displayed in a Drawing view in the Design window. instrumentation.

Note • Renaming a drawing file in Windows allows the drawing to be opened with all graphics pointing to the database. renaming a drawing file in Windows does not update the drawing table in the plant schema where the drawing name is stored. The software keeps track of the drawings that you worked on last. the software updates statistics automatically. The Options command on the Tools menu allows you to set the number of entries displayed in that list. You can use the Cut. Each drawing can have more than one view. too. However. To open one of these drawings.Working with Drawings: An Overview Opening Existing Drawings The Open command on the File menu opens existing drawings. Working with Several Open Drawings Several drawings can remain open in the same session but only if they all belong to the same plant. and keywords that identify important information. Related Topics • Embed a New Object. With the Properties command on the File menu. page 108 • Review and Edit Item Properties. Copy. You can also change databases by using this command so that you can open drawings in other plants. page 87 • Save a Drawing or a Drawing Template. page 277 • Open an Existing Drawing. Drawing properties can include the title. you can select it from that list. Setting Up Properties for a Drawing An administrator sets up drawing properties such as units of measure in Options Manager and Format Manager. and Paste commands to move or copy information between the drawings or within one open drawing. you can view. the author. page 125 • Set Document Properties. such as drawing size and the date that a drawing was created and last modified. page 116 • Switch to Another Open Drawing or View. and save properties for a drawing. edit. These properties include drawing statistics. These drawings appear at the bottom of the File menu. page 111 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 103 . You can change the size of a drawing by using the Page Setup command on the File menu. The drawing information is stored in a database associated with the drawings in a plant. and you can change the name of a drawing in Drawing Manager. You can use commands on the Window menu to arrange all the open drawings and views so that you can see them easily.

This dialog box appears when you click File > Open on the main menu bar. Details . which lists existing plants and their drawings. 104 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .Working with Drawings: An Overview Open Command File > Open Opens the Open dialog box. Include Subnodes . An administrator creates the hierarchy of plants and projects in SmartPlant Engineering Manager.Deactivates any ad hoc filter you have applied to the list of drawings that appears in the list view of the Open dialog box.Displays in the right-hand view of the Open dialog box all the drawings and node names that reside in the currently selected node.Opens the Open Plant Structure dialog box.Opens the Filter dialog box. For more information on the toolbar commands. Pause over a toolbar button in order to display a ToolTip. You cannot open two drawings from different databases at the same time. which allows you to specify a different SmartPlant initialization file so that you can work in a different database. Using the detailed view allows you to view and sort drawings by several attributes. the first item in the Selected Properties list is the descriptor that appears in the list view. which allows you to specify the drawings that are displayed in the list or detailed view. and allows you to open a drawing and to choose the database that you access. page 111 • Working with Drawings: An Overview. Open Database . see Filter . You can specify that descriptor by clicking Customize View. page 102 • Open Dialog Box Displays the active plant hierarchy and lists its drawings. The detailed view displays all the properties specified in the Selected Properties list of the Customize Current View dialog box. The list view only displays one property for each drawing. which names the corresponding command. Related Topics Customize the Open Dialog Box. page 110 • Open an Existing Drawing.Displays the list view in the right-hand window. List . page 108 • Switch to Another Open Drawing or View.Displays a detailed view in the right-hand window. Cancel Filter .

Working with Drawings: An Overview Customize View . page 109 • Open an Existing Drawing. page 108 • Open Command.Allows you to specify the application that you want to associate with this plant structure. The Open command also checks to make sure you have the correct access privileges for the selected plant structure and passes your access information back to the software. This dialog box opens when you click Open Database on the Open dialog box. which allows you to specify the information about each drawing that is displayed in the report or list view of the Open dialog box. Related Topics • Open a Drawing in a Different Database. allowing you to select a SmartPlant initialization file from local and network directories. Open .Connects you to the selected database. Application Type . page 111 Open Plant Structure Dialog Box Sets options for connecting to a site and plant structure and passes user access information to the application. Site Server . page 72 • Switch to Another Open Drawing or View. page 108 • Open Command.Lists those plant structures found on the network. Related Topics • Customize the Open Dialog Box. Available plant structure . page 110 • Open an Existing Drawing.Opens the Open Site Server dialog box. page 72 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 105 . You can select only one item from this list view at a time.Opens the Customize Current View dialog box. Plant structures that correspond to the initialization file that you choose are subsequently displayed in the list of available plant structures.

You define or modify filtering criteria by selecting a property. page 108 • Open Command. Edit . equal to.Specifies that items matching ALL of the filtering criteria pass through the filter. as a wildcard character for a single character. page 72 106 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . or choose null. *. >.Removes the selected criterion from the definition list. Delete . which can be free text. you must select a line in the list and then define or edit the property in the Edit group. in the Value box. Definition . ?. You can type a percent sign.Specifies that items matching any one or more of the filtering criteria pass through the filter. This dialog box opens when you click Filter Add . To add to or modify the definition list. or type a question mark. an operator.Displays a list of all properties for a certain item type. Match all . and so forth. greater than. you must type a value. %. This button is available only when you select a criterion in the definition list. box. Examples of properties include revision number and name. and a value. for example. page 110 • Open an Existing Drawing. Relationships include. not equal to.Lists appropriate values for the property specified in the Property column. <>.Specifies the relationship between the property and its value.Working with Drawings: An Overview Filter Dialog Box Sets options for the display of drawings in the list or report view of the Open dialog on the Open dialog box. Operator . Match any . Related Topics • Customize the Open Dialog Box. as a wildcard character to find multiple characters. Do not use an asterisk. Value .Allows you to define or edit a single line of filter definition criteria.Displays all defined criteria associated with a filter. Property . Match any is the default matching method. =. If a list of attributes is not already associated with the Value box.Places a new entry at the end of the existing definition list and enables the options in the Edit group so that you can edit the new entry.

Related Topics • Customize the Open Dialog Box. page 108 • Open Command. This dialog box opens when you click Customize View on the Open dialog box. Add .Moves the selected property up in order in the list. Drawing properties . Selected properties . page 110 • Open a Drawing in a Different Database. which changes the order of display in the detailed view of the Open dialog box. Move Up .Lists the properties that are available to be displayed in the detailed view of the Open dialog box. which changes the order of the display in the detailed view of the Open dialog box. page 109 • Open an Existing Drawing. Remove .Displays the properties that are currently available for the detailed view in the Open dialog box.Moves the selected property down in order in the list.Moves the selected items in the Drawing properties list into the Selected properties list so that those properties are available in the detailed view of the Open dialog box.Working with Drawings: An Overview Customize Current View Dialog Box Allows you to specify what drawing property or properties are displayed in the list view of the Open dialog box.Moves the chosen items in the Selected properties list back into the Drawing properties list so that they are no longer available in the detailed view. page 72 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 107 . Move Down .

page 109. On the main toolbar. Notes • You can open one of the last edited drawings by selecting it from the list of recently opened files at the bottom of the File menu on the main menu bar. page 102 108 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . confirm that the plant hierarchy is correct. • Related Topics • Working with Drawings: An Overview. You need to have the correct permissions to open or save certain drawings. You can change the database you are working in. click Open . Your plant administrator has set the plant hierarchy and has identified user names and tasks for those plants and related drawings.Working with Drawings: An Overview Open an Existing Drawing 1. see Open a Drawing in a Different Database. 2. Double-click the drawing that you want to open. Tip • If you do not see the drawing that you want to open. User roles are assigned in SmartPlant Engineering Manager. For more information.

click Open Database Tip The Open Database command is not available if you already have a drawing open because you cannot open drawings from different databases during the same P&ID session.Working with Drawings: An Overview Open a Drawing in a Different Database 1. 6. page 102 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 109 . 3. select the correct SmartPlant . On the main menu bar. On the Open dialog box. click File > Open. Navigate to the correct drawing in the Open dialog box and double-click it. On the Open Plant Structure dialog box. 4. 2. 5. Tip The Open command checks to make sure that you have the correct access privileges for the selected plant structure and passes your access information back to the software. • Related Topics • Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview. click Site Server. page 141 • Working with Drawings: An Overview. On the Open Site Server dialog box. Select the correct plant on the Open Plant Structure dialog box and click Open.ini initialization file and click OK. • .

6. and you can change the order that drawing properties appear in. The detailed view displays all the properties specified in the Selected Properties list of the Customize Current View dialog box. To further manipulate the properties that are available to view in the right-hand window. To cancel a filter that you have already applied to the Open dialog box. 5. you can see Drawing Manager Help for more information. 8. click Include Subnodes . page 102 110 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . On the Filter dialog box. you can add and remove drawing properties from the display. the first item in the Selected Properties list is the descriptor that appears in the list view. click Include Subnodes again. To cancel the display of subnodes. To display a detailed view in the right-hand window. . To apply a filter to the drawings displayed in the right-hand view of the Open dialog box. click Customize View . click Details Tip • . 2. click List Tip The list view displays only one property for each drawing. • Tip • On the Customize Current View dialog box. 3. To display all the drawings and node names that reside in the currently selected node. 7. Related Topics • Working with Drawings: An Overview. click Clear Filter . To display a list view in the right-hand window. 4. define your ad hoc filter criteria. Using the detailed view allows you to view and sort drawings by several attributes. click Filter . You can specify that descriptor by clicking Customize View. Note • Because the Open dialog box is similar in nature to the Drawing Manager interface.Working with Drawings: An Overview Customize the Open Dialog Box 1.

The file names are listed near the bottom of the File menu. page 102 Switch to Another Open Drawing or View If you can see a portion of the drawing or view that you want to switch to. The view then appears on top of other open views. Or. select the view that you want to work in from the list. You can change the number of files listed on the menu by using the Tools > Options command. if you cannot see any portion of the drawing or view. on the Window menu.Working with Drawings: An Overview Recent Drawings File > Recent Drawings Opens one of the drawings that you worked on most recently. Related Topics • Working with Drawings: An Overview. 2. page 111 • Working with Drawings: An Overview. click its window. Related Topics • Working With the Design Window: An Overview. Click File on the main menu bar. Related Topics • Access a Recently Open Drawing. page 15 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 111 . page 102 Access a Recently Open Drawing 1. Select the drawing from the list of recently opened drawings.

You can review and edit the drawing summary and statistics. kilobytes.Displays the date that the document was last opened or copied. Modified . Note • You must save the drawing before you can access the Statistics and Summary tabs of the File Properties dialog box. page 115 General Tab (File Properties Dialog Box) Displays general information about the current document.Working with Drawings: An Overview File Properties Command File > Properties Opens the File Properties dialog box. Type . Open this dialog box by clicking File > Properties on the main menu bar.Displays the name of the document as it would appear in a Windows file naming system. 112 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . MS-DOS Name . Related Topics • File Properties Command. Size . page 116 • View Document Properties.Displays the directory containing the document. Related Topics • Set Document Properties.Displays the type of document. Accessed . The type is based on the application used to create the document. Created . page 102 File Properties Dialog Box Tracks information about the properties of a drawing.Displays the size of the document in bytes. which displays general information about the current drawing.Displays the date and time that the document was created or copied. page 115 • Working with Drawings: An Overview.Displays the date and time that the document was last modified. and megabytes. Location . page 116 • View Document Properties. page 112 • Set Document Properties.

Indicates that the document is a hidden document.Shows that the document is an archive document.Specifies the current drawing template.Displays the properties of the current document. Read-Only . You usually cannot see this document unless you change the view options in Windows Explorer. page 112 • Set Document Properties. You cannot create a file with the same name as a read-only file. Subject .Gives a general description of the current document. page 116 • View Document Properties. Archive . Related Topics • File Properties Dialog Box. The software generates the author and template information when you create.Indicates that the document is read-only. Hidden . or print the document. if available.Specifies comments about the current document. save. with the exception of the template. page 115 Summary Tab (File Properties Dialog Box) Displays the title and author. Title . These settings are readonly. You cannot open a read-only file for writing. Note • If some of the above information is not available. Template . You can edit these properties.Working with Drawings: An Overview Attributes . System .Displays a list of words that identify the document when you browse or search documents. unless the document is write-protected.Shows that the document is a system document. Related Topics • File Properties Dialog Box. the dialog box displays Unknown. Comments . page 115 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 113 . page 116 • View Document Properties. You usually cannot see this document in the Windows.Displays the name of the person who created the document. along with keywords and comments for the current document.Specifies the title of the current document. page 112 • Set Document Properties. Author . Keywords .

Related Topics • File Properties Dialog Box.Sets the unit of measure and precision readout for the length values in a document. if the precision readout is . or print the document. Creating Application . page 112 • Set Document Properties. The precision setting does not alter the numbers that you type into a property. 114 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . page 115 Units Tab (File Properties Dialog Box) Sets up units of measure and precision readout for the length.Displays the name of the person who has the document open.Displays the date and time the document was created or copied.1056 inches long. Last Saved By .Displays the name of the application that most recently saved the document. page 116 • View Document Properties. Values ending in 5 are rounded up. Modified . Created . The precision readout sets the number of significant figures to appear. Area Readout . Accessed . Saving Application . Length Readout . It represents the accuracy of the unit readout value. only the display of the numbers. Currently Opened By . or angle values in a drawing. The software automatically generates these properties when you create.Displays the date and time the document was last modified.Working with Drawings: An Overview Statistics Tab (File Properties Dialog Box) Displays detailed information about the current document.Displays the date that the document was last opened or copied.Displays the name of the person who last saved the document.Displays the name of the application that created the document. Angle Readout .Sets the unit of measure and precision readout for the angle values in a document. area.Sets the unit of measure and precision readout for the area values in a document. then the line value length is rounded up to 2. For example.123 and you draw a line that is 2.106 inches. save.

and so labels do not always display the units selected in the Properties window. page 115 View Document Properties 1. page 116 • View Document Properties. Tip • You must save the document before you can view the document statistics or summary information on the Statistics and Summary tabs of the File Properties dialog box. Note • The File Properties dialog box displays information about the current condition of the active document. Click File > Properties. which are defined in the Options Manager. increase the precision. SmartPlant supports round-trip conversion of units without loss of precision. • • Related Topics • File Properties Dialog Box. All delivered labels use plant default units. Change the Unit definition in the SmartText Editor dialog box in Catalog Manager to see a different unit of measure in a label. If the document has unsaved changes. Related Topics • Saving Drawings: An Overview. you can convert centimeters to meters and back and retain the originally entered value of centimeters with no round-off loss. On the File Properties dialog box.Working with Drawings: An Overview Notes • To avoid loss of precision in units when switching between small and large types of a particular unit. 2. of the larger unit through Format Manager. page 124 • Working with Drawings: An Overview. increase decimal places. you must save the document to update the property information. click the tab that contains the information that you want. That is. page 102 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 115 . page 112 • Set Document Properties. that is.

You can also change the size for an existing drawing. 2. page 102 116 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Click File > Properties.Working with Drawings: An Overview Set Document Properties 1. see Set up a Page Layout. set the options that you want. page 370 • Related Topics • Working with Drawings: An Overview. such as summary information or keywords. For more information. you must save the document . On the File Properties dialog box. Notes • Before you can set or view the document statistics or summary information on the Statistics and Summary tabs of the File Properties dialog box.

Related Topics • Close an Active Drawing.Working with Drawings: An Overview Close Command File > Close Closes the active drawing. page 117 • Working with Drawings: An Overview. The software saves your changes automatically. Note • Any changes are automatically saved upon closing. page 124 • Working with Drawings: An Overview. page 102 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 117 . Related Topics • Saving Drawings: An Overview. page 102 Close an Active Drawing Click File > Close.

The software checks for unsaved changes when you close the software. Any changes are automatically saved. Note • The software saves any changes since the last time you saved your changes.Working with Drawings: An Overview Exit Command File > Exit Closes the active drawing and the program. page 102 Close the Program Click File > Exit. Related Topics • Close the Program. Related Topics • Saving Drawings: An Overview. page 118 • Working with Drawings: An Overview. page 124 118 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .

pid A2-Size.Working with Drawings: An Overview Creating Drawing Templates: An Overview The software includes several standard drawing templates. any changes to the border file are not reflected in drawings created prior to the change. save it in this default location in order for it to be available for drawing creation.pid C-Size.pid A4-Size. You usually create a new drawing based on one of these existing templates.igr E-Wide. Once you embed a border file into a drawing template and a drawing is created in Drawing Manager using that template.igr A4 Wide (297mm x 210mm) A5border.igr D Wide (34in x 225in) SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 119 . instead of embedding it.igr A0 Wide (1189mm x 841mm) A1border. and then subsequently change that border in SmartSketch. If you create a new template. however. changes are reflected automatically in your drawing.pid A5-Size.igr B Wide (17in x 11in) C Wide (22in x 17in) E Wide (44in x 34in) D-Wide.pid A1-Size.igr A Wide (11in x 8.pid Page size A0border. You can then embed your border file in the new templates you create in SmartPlant P&ID. it is possible to customize a drawing template to meet your particular needs.igr A3 Wide (420mm x 297mm) A4border. The pre-defined size choices for a new template are extensive.pid D-Size. The default storage location for templates is specified in Options Manager. If you want to create custom border files for your drawing templates.pid A3-Size. Standard Template Size Information Template file Border file A0-Size.pid B-Size. If you link a border file.5in) B-Wide.igr A5 Wide (210mm x 148mm) Template file Border file Page size A-Size. This task is accomplished inside the design software by using commands on the File menu. use Intergraph SmartSketch.pid E-Size. you can also create a new title block label that fits the title block of your template correctly and that contains the appropriate information. The software also includes a set of title block labels that fit the delivered drawing templates. You create labels in Catalog Manager. If you create a new template.igr C-Wide.igr A1 Wide (841mm x 594mm) A2border.igr A2 Wide (594mm x 420mm) A3border.pid A-Wide.

Related Topics • Create a Drawing Template. see Drawing Manager Help. page 102 120 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . page 125 • Set Document Properties. You can specify properties for the new template and embed border files. page 116 • Set up a Page Layout. page 370 • Working with Drawings: An Overview.Working with Drawings: An Overview Related Topics • Create a Drawing Template. an administrator uses Drawing Manager. page 370 New Template Command File > New Template Creates a new blank template. For more information about creating new drawings. page 278 • Set up a Page Layout. The path to the plant-level drawing templates is defined in Options Manager. page 121 • Edit a Standard Drawing Template Border. To create new drawings. page 277 • Link or Embed a Previously Existing Object. Caution • Templates created at the user level instead of the plant level are not available to other users or to Drawing Manager for creating subsequent drawings. page 122 • Embed a New Object. page 119 • Save a Drawing or a Drawing Template. page 121 • Creating Drawing Templates: An Overview.

Click File > Save As and specify a name for your template on the Save As dialog box. . 6. Click File > Properties. On the main toolbar. find the border file. Angle. Tip If you want to create custom border files for your drawing templates. use Intergraph SmartSketch. Quit the design software. 14. • 13. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 121 .igr file. an administrator uses Drawing Manager. specify the unit in the Length. make sure that the Link option is selected. page 109. You can also add general identifying information on the Summary tab. Click OK. choose a standard size or define a custom size for this template. click New Template 2. Click Edit > Insert > Object. Save it in this default location in order for it to be available for drawing creation. a . • Notes • To create a new drawing using a plant template. Type the path to the border file. and Area readout boxes in order to define default units of measurement. 11. 10. or click Browse. 9. 7. For more information about connecting to a database. you must verify that you are connected to the correct database and that you do not have any drawings open. 8. in the Create from file box. On the Units tab of the File Properties dialog box. see Open a Drawing in a Different Database. In the Sheet size box on the Page Setup dialog box. 3.Working with Drawings: An Overview Create a Drawing Template Important • Before you can edit one of the standard templates included with SmartPlant software. Click OK. 5. Tip The default storage location for templates is specified in Options Manager. 12. Click File > Page Setup. Click OK. On the Insert Object dialog box. 1. and click Open. 4.

any changes to the border file are not reflected in drawings created prior to the change. Once you embed a border file into a template and a drawing is created using that template. If you link a border file. 5. see Open a Drawing in a Different Database. 1. • Tip Be sure to select a template that matches not only the page size requirements for drawings but also the units of measurement. find the template you want to edit and drag it into the Design window. for the plant. find the border file. and then subsequently change that border in SmartSketch. Tip • If you want to create custom border files for your drawing templates. a . Related Topics • Creating Drawing Templates: An Overview. page 109. or click Browse. page 119 • Embed a New Object. Type the path to the border file. page 102 Edit a Standard Drawing Template Border Important Before you can edit one of the standard templates included with SmartPlant software. metric or English. • 4. and click Open. For more information about connecting to a database.igr file. 122 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . On the Insert Object dialog box. instead of embedding it. Open the design application. 2. in the Create from file box. make sure that the Link option is selected. 6. page 277 • Working with Drawings: An Overview. • Tip You can do this by opening the product from the Start menu or by closing all open documents in the design software if it is already running. In Windows Explorer. 3.Working with Drawings: An Overview • You can also embed your border file in the drawing template if you want to. changes are reflected automatically in your drawing. Click Edit > Insert > Object. use Intergraph SmartSketch. but do not open a drawing. you must verify that you are connected to the correct database and that you do not have any drawings open. Select the existing border file and click Delete while the pointer is in the Drawing view.

page 119 • Embed a New Object.Working with Drawings: An Overview 7. If you link a border file. Once you embed a border file into a template and a drawing is created using that template. 8. For more information about editing other properties of a drawing template or creating a new template. Click OK. • Notes • You can also embed your border file in the drawing template if you want to. see Create a Drawing Template. page 277 • Working with Drawings: An Overview. Save it in this default location in order for it to be available for drawing creation. Quit the design software. Tip The default storage location for templates is specified in Options Manager. page 102 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 123 . any changes to the border file are not reflected in drawings created prior to the change. and then subsequently change that border in SmartSketch. 9. changes are reflected automatically in your drawing. Click File > Save. instead of embedding it. page 121 • Related Topics • Creating Drawing Templates: An Overview.

Then. use the Save As command. the changes that you make to the drawing appear on your screen. After you have saved a drawing. You can use the Save As command to save drawings in . or you can use File > Exit to close the drawing and quit the software.cgm format. You can save your drawing by clicking Save on the toolbar. page 111 124 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Saving Drawings to . These changes are saved in the database automatically. When you open an existing drawing. allowing quick access to information outside the drawing. the software copies the drawing from the disk or network and displays it on the screen. Assemblies are saved in a specific folder specified in Options Manager. page 125 • Switch to Another Open Drawing or View. However. you can place the graphics on a Web page and view them with a browser. You can retrieve assemblies from Catalog Explorer to place in a drawing. the software uses the name and folder location specified in Drawing Manager during drawing creation.pid. You can use File > Close to close the drawing and clear it from your screen. CGM is an efficient format for publishing 2D vector drawings on the Web because it uses little storage space. As you work.cgm Format The Computer Graphics Metafile (. you probably feel more comfortable saving it at least once yourself.cgm) format provides an efficient way to make information available on the Internet. Related Topics • Save a Drawing in a Different Format. Saving Assemblies You can save a group of items in a drawing as an assembly.Working with Drawings: An Overview Saving Drawings: An Overview Whenever you save a drawing using File > Save. because changes to the drawing post to the database as you make them. and has the ability to zoom and achieve more detail. Closing Drawings You can close a drawing without saving your work. If you want to save the drawing in a format other than . page 126 • Save a Drawing or a Drawing Template. it remains displayed on the screen. These types of drawings can contain embedded hyperlinks. renders quickly.

page 126 • Saving Drawings: An Overview. page 124 • Working with Drawings: An Overview. If you have not already named a template. Plant location and paths are set in SmartPlant Engineering Manager and Options Manager. You can save the active document to a new format. You can type a name and choose a format and location for your template. the Save As dialog box appears. page 124 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 125 . page 102 Save As Command File > Save As Opens the Save As dialog box. An administrator must click File > New Template to create a new template. Note When using AutoCAD. The graphics will display incorrectly. • If you have not named a template before clicking Save. the Save As dialog box opens. Related Topics • Save a Drawing in a Different Format. page 124 Save a Drawing or a Drawing Template • Click Save Notes on the main toolbar.Working with Drawings: An Overview Save Command File > Save Stores the active drawing or template. your parametric symbols should not be scaled. You cannot open an existing drawing and then decide to save it as a template. Related Topics • Saving Drawings: An Overview. • Related Topics • Saving Drawings: An Overview.

The location of this Microsoft Excel workbook is specified in Options Manager. In the Save As Type box. 9. run the ExportLayer. In the design software click Tools > Custom Commands. On the Save As dialog box. Tips • You can choose more filters for the Filter column of this worksheet from filters in Filter Manager. page 124 126 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . When the Custom Commands dialog box opens. 2.xls.xls. select the drive and folder for the new drawing.Working with Drawings: An Overview Save a Drawing in a Different Format 1.dll macro. select the document format that you want to use. open ExportLayer. you can name layers with any combination of alphanumeric characters. Assign level or layer numbers between 10 and 63 to ensure that graphics appear in the designated levels or layers. 3. Save ExportLayer. 5. If you save your drawing to the AutoCAD format. • 4. This macro is delivered in \Program Files\SmartPlant\P&ID Workstation\Program. page 125 • Saving Drawings: An Overview. You can edit the Microsoft Excel workbook again if you need to add filters and layers. Click File > Save As. type a new name for the drawing. In the File Name box. Tip When the macro finishes running. Related Topics • Save a Drawing or a Drawing Template. 8. a message appears that tells you if all items were assigned layers successfully or if any items lacked the appropriate layer specification. In Microsoft Excel. • 7. 6.

is created in your Temp folder. however. When you re-open the drawing. the status bar at the bottom of the main window keeps you informed about the particular elements currently reconciling with the database. when you click File > Save or when you quit the program). the software does not update the drawing file until you actually save the file (for example. During the re-create process. After the re-create process is completed. Occasionally. Also. As a result. the database is up-to-date with changes that you posted to the drawing. You can check this file for irregularities that occur during the re-create process. but the drawing file reflects the status when you last saved the drawing. the software can end in an abnormal way (for example.Working with Drawings: An Overview Re-creating Drawings: An Overview The software continually updates the database as you edit a drawing. a log file. The software displays a message box that states One or more items in this drawing are inconsistent with the database. due to power outage). Caution • Do not interfere with the re-create process once started because the drawing can become unusable. the software reinitializes your drawing and displays the message Re-create drawing is complete. Click OK to re-create the drawing from the database. the software recognizes that the drawing file is different from the database. Recreate-DrawingName. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 127 .

Related Topics • Resolve a Re-create Drawing Error Condition. The heavy orange line segment is the error condition. Error conditions are always associated with a pipe or signal run. Then re-route your runs and replace connections and components as required.Working with Drawings: An Overview If a section of the drawing could not re-create successfully an error condition appears on your drawing. Delete the heavy orange line segment and components connected directly to it. page 129 128 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . and the symbology is a heavy orange line segment. This portion of the drawing must be updated manually.

Replace connectors and components that you deleted in step 1. For more information about recreating drawings. 5. Re-route your pipe or signal run. • Note • Error conditions are not required items and therefore do not move to the stockpile when you delete them. • Related Topics • Re-creating Drawings: An Overview. 3. Open the drawing that you want to recreate. 2. and then click Task Manager. Click End Process. 2. In SmartPlant P&ID. When the software prompts you that a recreate is necessary. 4. 9. click draft. Click the Processes tab. Right-click an empty space on your Windows taskbar. In the list. page 127 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 129 . 7. Place an item in the drawing. Delete all connectors and components that are directly connected to the error condition.Working with Drawings: An Overview Recreate a Drawing 1. Notes • Normally SmartPlant P&ID recreates drawings automatically when it detects a discrepancy between the drawing and the database. Delete the item that you placed in step 2. see the Re-creating Drawings section in the SmartPlant P&ID Installation and Upgrade Guide. open the drawing that you opened in step 1. page 127 Resolve a Re-create Drawing Error Condition 1. click OK to recreate the drawing from the database. 4. 8. Save the drawing. Delete the heavy orange lines that make up the error itself.exe. Related Topics • Re-creating Drawings: An Overview. 3. 6. 10. Tip Keep property breaks in mind as you re-route your lines.

That same filter applied to the Engineering Data Editor displays a list of pumps and their characteristics in a tabular format.Working with Drawings: An Overview Using Filters: An Overview You can use filters in many ways throughout the software and its stand-alone applications and utilities. And you can use filters to find and replace items. where you can edit the properties of the pumps also. For example. page 138 • Define a New Filter for an Engineering Data Editor View. After applying the filter. you see all pumps in the drawing as graphical symbols. page 136 • Customize a Filter Tab for the Drawing View. you can use a filter to display an operational design. you want to delete items of a certain type. for example. You can use filters when you create report templates to display particular items on a report. page 357 130 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . For example. You can show all items added after a certain date or after a certain revision number. However. You can use filters in Rule Manager to define how items interact within a view. You can create filters to control the display of hierarchy items in Drawing Manager. Note • If you are using a workshare environment and you are at a satellite site. These filters are not saved to any folder in Filter Manager. but the methods of creating these filters are the same as those for creating filters saved in Filter Manager. Related Topics • Create a Simple Filter. You can then select all the pumps and edit their properties one-by-one or as a select set in the Properties window. or an under construction design. You can use filters if. You can apply filters to either Drawing views or the Engineering Data Editor. Filters can help you show different views of the same drawing and can make your workflow more efficient. You can associate filters with the source or target properties in rules. you can always create My Filters in the Filter Manager or Select Filter dialog box environment. page 52 • Define the Contents of Your Report Template. you could filter all pumps in a Drawing view. do not create Project Filters at a satellite site.

Choose Filter in the Find what list on the Find tab of the Find and Replace dialog box. Related Topics • Create a Simple Filter. page 357 • Find an Item by Using a Filter. page 136 • Customize a Filter Tab for the Drawing View.Allows you to edit the properties of the selected filter. page 15 Select Filter Dialog Box Allows you to associate different filters with tabs in the different views. This button displays the Filter Properties dialog box or the Compound Filter Properties dialog box. page 226 • Replace Multiple Drawing Items Using Filters.Displays the New Filter dialog box. which contains a subset of the commands in Filter Manager. page 138 • Define the Contents of Your Report Template. page 230 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 131 . Click Browse on the Filter tab of the Define Report Items dialog box when you are choosing your report item type. you can create a new filter or modify an existing filter. or reports or to search for items using definitions associated with a filter. Properties . This command displays the Select Filter dialog box. Related Topics • Customize a Filter Tab for the Drawing View. to choose item types for tables. Access this dialog box using one of the methods described below: • Click Browse on the Add Filter Tab dialog box when you want to add a filter to the Drawing view. page 138 • Working With the Design Window: An Overview.Working with Drawings: An Overview Add Filter Command View > Add Filter Adds a filter tab to the drawings in the Design window. which allows you to specify a new simple or new compound filter. select the individual simple filters that compose a compound filter and click Properties to view the Filter Properties dialog box for those simple filters. If you create a compound filter. depending on your selection in the filter list. Using this dialog box. • • New .

Returns a collection of items based on the filter definition and criteria of a single filter. Scroll down the list to choose a line width. You specify the name of the filter when you choose or create it. Compound filter .Allows you to specify the color of the filtered items. page 52 132 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . page 138 • Define a New Filter for an Engineering Data Editor View. which allows you to choose or create a filter for your Drawing view.Working with Drawings: An Overview Add Filter Tab Dialog Box Opens when you right-click the filter tab area at the bottom of the Drawing view and select Add Filter from the shortcut menu. This dialog box allows you to specify a filter for your drawing. You can modify the properties of the filter that you choose from the Select Filter dialog box. Alternate symbology . Browse . Properties . Scroll down the list to choose a color. Filter .Opens the Filter Properties dialog box. you must right-click the drawing filter tab and select Use Alternate Symbology.Displays the name of the filter that you want to use for your Drawing view.Combines two or more simple filters to return a collection of items based on the criteria of the combination of simple filters. page 131 • Customize a Filter Tab for the Drawing View. In order for the alternate symbology to take effect in your drawing. Simple filter .Opens the Select Filter dialog box.Contains information about how the software displays the filtered items in your Drawing view.Contains information about the filter that you want to use for your Drawing view. This information is read-only.Allows you to specify the line width for your filtered items. Filter Name . Related Topics • Add Filter Command. page 138 New Filter Dialog Box Allows you to specify compound or simple filter when you create a new filter. You can name the new filter appropriately. You can activate this dialog box by clicking New on the Select Filter dialog box. Color . Width . Related Topics • Customize a Filter Tab for the Drawing View.

Specifies the filter name. Property . and the other properties that you want to filter for. Relationships include. for example. Match any is the default matching method.A phrase or sentence about the filter. This name appears as the filter name on the Filter Manager interface. Add . description. Examples of properties include revision number and name.Specifies that items matching any one or more of the filtering criteria pass through the filter. You define or modify filtering criteria by selecting a property. and Estimated Length. Definition . you must select a line in the list and then define or edit the property in the Edit group.Contains the top-level items from the data dictionary.Places a new entry at the end of the existing definition list and enables the options in the Edit group so that you can edit the new entry. This button is active only when you select a criterion in the definition list. Match all .Specifies the relationship between the property and its value. and examples of properties for these item types are Equipment Type. The name can be any combination of characters and has no length limit. The description appears as a ToolTip when you point to the filter name on the Filter Manager interface. Examples of item types are Equipment.Removes the selected criterion from the definition list.Working with Drawings: An Overview Filter Properties Dialog Box Specifies properties of a filter.Specifies that items matching ALL of the filtering criteria pass through the filter. >. <>. Match any . Delete . The description can be any combination of characters and has no length limit. respectively.Loop Item Tag.Displays a list of all properties for a certain item type. Instr. equal to.Allows you to define or edit a single line of filter definition criteria. Instrument. Edit . greater than. including the name. Specifies available properties in the Definition grid. and a value. Description . =. and PipeRun. Operator .Displays all defined criteria associated with a filter. Each item type owns a set of properties. Name . SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 133 . not equal to. Filter for . and so forth. Filter names within a project must be unique. If you are defining the Engineering Data Editor. the criteria that you enter on the Filter tab on the Advanced Table Properties dialog box are combined with the base filter that you select. To add to or modify the definition list. an operator.

If a list of attributes is not already associated with the Value box. For example. ?. Related Topics Create a Simple Filter. which is specified in Data Dictionary Manager.Working with Drawings: An Overview Value . You can type a percent sign. which can be free text.Allows you to choose the correct year. page 136 • 134 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . %. page 138 Calendar Dialog Box Use this dialog box to specify a date in Value on the Filter Properties dialog box. Dates . Do not use an asterisk. The option of choosing a date for Value is available only for those properties that are date formatted. or type a question mark. Select the date you want and click OK. you can view only pumps whose Revision Approval Timestamp is after a particular date. you must type a value. as a wildcard character to find multiple characters. Related Topics • Customize a Filter Tab for the Drawing View.Allows you to choose the correct month. or choose null.Allows you to specify the date of the month. *.Lists appropriate values for the property specified in the Property column. as a wildcard character for a single character. Month . Year . in the Value box.

description. page 131 • Customize a Filter Tab for the Drawing View.Specifies a phrase or sentence about the filter. and whether to match all or any of the simple filter criteria. This dialog box specifies properties of a compound filter.Specifies that items matching ALL of the filtering criteria pass through the filter. Match all .Specifies the filter name. Match any is the default matching method. Match any . The simple filters are added to the compound filter by dragging the simple filter or by creating new simple filters under the compound filter in the filter hierarchy. including the name. The name can be any combination of characters and has no length limit. Related Topics • Add Filter Command. Description .Working with Drawings: An Overview Compound Filter Properties Dialog Box A compound filter consists of more than one simple filter. This name appears as the filter name on the Filter Manager interface. page 138 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 135 . Filter names within a plant must be unique.Allows you to choose either Match all or Match any. The description appears as a ToolTip when you point to the filter name on the Filter Manager interface. Name . The description can be any combination of characters and has no length limit.Specifies that items matching any one or more of the filtering criteria pass through the filter. Compound filters apply only to homogeneous item types. Filter Method .

Notes • If you select a date-formatted property. select the filter property. operator. On the New Filter dialog box. type a name for the new filter. this filter description displays as a ToolTip. Open the Select Filter dialog box. Match any means that items matching any one or more of the filtering criteria pass. If you have the Select Filter dialog box open. page 137 • Customizing the Software: An Overview. and corresponding value for the first filter criterion. and click OK. • Tip Match all means that only those items matching ALL of the filtering criteria pass through the filter. 2. 4. Click the Filter for drop-down list and specify the item type for the new filter. • 8. if needed. Type a description in the Description box. 3. do not open Filter Manager and make changes to filters in that utility also. you can specify a date for that property. page 91 • Using Filters: An Overview. select Simple filter. and repeat step 6. Tip When you point to the name of a filter in the tree view on the Select Filter dialog box. In the Definition area. Click the ellipses in the Value box in the Edit group and select a date on the calendar. click either Match all or Match any. Click Add to add a line for another filter definition. In the Edit area. 7.Working with Drawings: An Overview Create a Simple Filter 1. 5. Tip • You can click Delete to remove a filter definition if it is currently selected. and click New. On the Filter Properties dialog box. 6. • Tip The type in the Filter for box determines the properties that are available in the Edit area. page 130 136 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . • Related Topics • Create a Compound Filter.

Select either Match all or Match any. page 91 • Using Filters: An Overview. because all of the simple filters under one compound filter must be of the same item type. • 7. On the New Filter dialog box. drag one or more simple filters into the compound filter. 3. the filter description displays in a ToolTip. and click New. Type a description in the Description box. Tips • All of the filters that make up the new compound filter need to be of the same item type. type a name for the new compound filter in the Name box. • Related Topics • Create a Simple Filter. 2. For example. On the Compound Filter Properties dialog box. all of the simple filters making up a compound filter can be of type Equipment: Mechanical. If you have the Select Filter dialog box open. Or you can select the compound filter and create a new simple filter under it. and click OK. You set the filter description in the Description box in the Compound Filter Properties dialog box. page 130 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 137 . This is. 5. Open the Select Filter dialog box. 6. • Note • When you point to the name of a compound filter in the tree view in Filter Manager. which displays in the Filter for list on the Filter Properties dialog box. Once one simple filter has been assigned to a compound filter. if wanted. Match any means that items matching any one or more of the filtering criteria return. Tip Match all means that only those items matching ALL of the filtering criteria specified are returned. select Compound filter. You cannot mix Equipment: Mechanical with Equipment: Heat Transfer or any other item type.Working with Drawings: An Overview Create a Compound Filter 1. To add filter criteria to the compound filter. Click OK. page 136 • Customizing the Software: An Overview. 4. if you create a new filter under that compound filter. the Filter for property is specified and you cannot change it. do not open Filter Manager and make changes to filters in that utility also. of course. Match Any is the default.

• Related Topics • Customizing the Software: An Overview. Note • You must select a filter tab in order for this command to be available. As long as the cut filter tab remains on the Clipboard you can reapply the filter by using the Paste command on the shortcut menu. For more information. page 138 138 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . • Notes • To define a new filter. select Add Filter. page 83 Filter Tab Cut Command Available on the Filter Tab shortcut menu. Click OK to apply the filter to the Drawing view. In order for your alternate symbology to affect the Drawing view. 4. you can choose a filter from the Select Filter dialog box. On the Add Filter Tab dialog box. You can see the properties of a filter by selecting it in the Select Filter dialog box and clicking Properties. type a filter name. 3. 2.Working with Drawings: An Overview Customize a Filter Tab for the Drawing View 1. Related Topics • Customize a Filter Tab for the Drawing View. see Create a Simple Filter. You can create and then select that filter for the view. Tips • If you click Browse. you must right-click the filter tab area and select Use Alternate Symbology. too. the Cut command allows you to remove a filter tab from the Drawing view and place it on the Clipboard. page 137. page 136 or Create a Compound Filter. Right-click the filter tab area at the bottom of the Drawing view. From the shortcut menu. The Filter Tab shortcut menu opens when you right-click the filter tab area at the bottom of a Drawing view. page 91 • Working With the Properties Window: An Overview. Click OK. click New on the Select Filter dialog box. You can choose alternate symbology on this dialog box.

Note • The Filter Tab shortcut menu opens when you right-click the filter tab area at the bottom of a Drawing view. the Copy command allows you to place a filter tab from the Drawing view onto the Clipboard. Note • The Filter Tab shortcut menu opens when you right-click the filter tab area at the bottom of a Drawing view.Working with Drawings: An Overview Filter Tab Copy Command Available on the Filter Tab shortcut menu. You must have placed a filter tab on the Clipboard in order for this command to be available. page 138 Filter Tab Delete Command Allows you to remove a filter tab from the Drawing view. page 138 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 139 . You must select a filter tab in order for this command to be available. the Paste command allows you to place a filter tab from the Clipboard onto the Drawing view. Related Topics • Customize a Filter Tab for the Drawing View. Related Topics • Customize a Filter Tab for the Drawing View. Related Topics • Customize a Filter Tab for the Drawing View. Note • You must select a filter tab in order for this command to be available. As long as the copied filter tab remains on the Clipboard you can reapply the filter by using the Paste command on the shortcut menu. The Filter Tab shortcut menu opens when you right-click the filter tab area at the bottom of a Drawing view. page 138 Filter Tab Paste Command Available on the Filter Tab shortcut menu.

page 138 Filter Tab Properties Command Available on the Filter Tab shortcut menu. which allows you to edit the options for the selected drawing filter. Note • The Filter Tab shortcut menu opens when you right-click the filter tab area at the bottom of a Drawing view. Note • The Filter Tab shortcut menu opens when you right-click the filter tab area at the bottom of a Drawing view. this command opens the Properties dialog box. page 138 140 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .Working with Drawings: An Overview Filter Tab Use Alternate Symbology Command Applies any alternate symbology you defined for a filter tab on the Add Filter or Properties dialog box. Related Topics • Customize a Filter Tab for the Drawing View. Related Topics • Customize a Filter Tab for the Drawing View.

for example Filter Manager. A view can be a schematic drawing. You can resolve inconsistencies using solutions from the Consistency Check dialog box. As you work on your drawing. You can place components such as equipment. Note • When SmartPlant P&ID or any associated stand-alone application. These indicators appear in your drawing as soon as an inconsistency occurs in the design. In the Properties window. Also. including all plant components and their relationships. unified data structure that represents the plant model. or a report. solve the error by making sure your internet options are set to allow internet access using a proxy server and also to bypass the proxy server for intranet addresses. you can monitor any inconsistencies in your design by reviewing the inconsistency indicators. The standard modeling environment lets you place items from the catalog into the appropriate model views. and the error message in SPError. After you finish the drawing. you can save the group of items as an assembly. Assemblies appear as symbols in the Catalog Explorer list view so that you can place them exactly as you place other symbols in your drawing. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 141 . If you repeatedly place particular groups of items. too. Format Manager.log is Error Problem:Common::GetDatabasePathAndServerLocS:\SmartPid\bin\ SmartPlant. you can easily perform the tasks required to create a detailed plant model. Also.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview With SmartPlant® P&ID. you can add values for various properties of each item after you place it in your drawing. SmartPlant P&ID provides multiple views of a central. you can generate order lists for the components in the drawing. you can generate reports to help you keep track of information in the drawing. for example. cannot establish a connection with the database on the server. you can organize the information within the plant model to better understand and maintain the data. A view is a visual presentation of the data that composes the plant model. a table. you can annotate your drawing with labels as you design the drawing. and instrumentation from Catalog Explorer or the stockpile into graphical representations of your plant model in the drawing. One key feature of SmartPlant P&ID is using catalogs to create instances of components within the plant model. By manipulating model views. The plant model is the computer representation of the conceptual design in its entirety.ini. piping. You can print the drawing. Options Manager or Rules Manager.

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Related Topics • Create an Assembly. page 334 • Open a New Drawing View. page 35 • Print a Drawing. page 365 • Review an Inconsistency. page 286 • Define a New Engineering Data Editor View. page 317 142 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . page 51 • Generate a Report.

Enforces group relationships. already exists in the database or is created during your transaction. but does not allow null values to persist. the constraints are satisfied without changing the scope of your transaction. • Check . SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 143 . This constraint is similar to the Foreign Key constraint described above.Used for more complex data integrity controls. Another candidate for a Check constraint is the enforcement of certain values for one or more items. such as the pairing of OPCs. unless it is null. but does not allow null values to persist and requires that all values be unique. A Check constraint is defined to enforce this condition by using comparisons and exclusions.Insures that the corresponding value. This constraint is similar to the Foreign Key constraint described above. but not both of them. exists in the table referenced by the foreign key. This type of constraint is used to enforce logical relationships.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Understanding Database Constraints The following database constraints improve the integrity of the data associated with your design. Since the relationship. such as the case to model item relationship. Foreign Key with Not Null and Unique .Enforce all subclass and one-toone relationships. History records can pertain to either a drawing or the model. Either of these objects can be null. For example. the object and the foreign key it points to. • Foreign Key . invalid null or zeroes assigned to properties are tested against Check constraints. Foreign Key in conjunction with Not Null . such as monitoring conditions on multiple items. For example. • • The constraints so far described serve to enforce relationship integrity. such as the plant item to plant group relationship.

Move. and you can select item groups. You can also select drawing items by first selecting them in the Engineering Data Editor. You can use the Select Tool ribbon to choose if you want to select only items completely enclosed by the fence or any item that is partly enclosed by the fence. you can click to select it. If the item is linked or embedded into the current drawing. You can select pipe routes. Handles are solid squares at significant positions on a selected item. labels. the items change to the selection color. When an item is highlighted. can act upon all items in the select set. Although you can select more than one item at a time. You can construct a select set using the Engineering Data Editor in this way. if they reside there. like Delete. you can click the Select Tool and then drag to fence items. these items are also selected in the active drawing. you can use the Select Tool on the main toolbar. Many manipulation commands. click the Select Tool on the main toolbar.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview To select an item. The handles of the item appear if the item has handles. or embedded or linked objects. such as dragging a handle to change the shape of the item. assemblies. only one item can have handles at a time. equipment. If you select multiple items in the Engineering Data Editor. and so forth. Selecting Multiple Items and then You can select more than one item at a time by clicking Select Tool holding Shift or Ctrl as you click the items that you want to select. The corresponding items are selected in the Drawing view if they reside in the active drawing. Selecting Single Items To select an item. valves. • • When you select multiple items or grouped items. When you select an individual item. You can change the selection color with the Options command on the Tools menu. the pointer changes to an arrow with a locate zone . Copy. such as end points and center points. Handles allow you to directly modify the item. selecting it allows you to double-click it for editing. As you pause on items in a drawing. Or. and Rotate. 144 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . the items appear in the indicator at the end: highlight color. the following things happen: • The item changes to the selection color. When you click the Select Tool.

page 218 • Select an Item. you can select another item or press Esc to quit placement mode. you can choose single items from that set by using the Selected Items list at the top of the Properties window. Related Topics • Move an Item With the Select Tool. you can escape placement mode by right-clicking. the Select Tool ribbon is displayed. You cannot select more than one item for placement in a drawing at a time. page 254 • Modify an Item With the Select Tool. modify. you can click any empty point on the drawing. page 218 • Select an Item. and manipulate items. you select it in Catalog Explorer or the stockpile. Then you click to select the position in the drawing to place the item. A single item chosen in a select set this way is highlighted in a different color in the Drawing view. Or. Related Topics • Copy an Item With the Select Tool. Selecting Items for Placement To place an item in a drawing. page 144 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 145 . page 147 Select Tool Command Changes the pointer to the arrow-shaped selection pointer so that you can select. The circle at the end of the pointer arrow is the locate zone. page 147 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview. page 248 • Move an Item With the Select Tool. While the Select Tool is active.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Whenever you have constructed a select set. Canceling the Selection of Items To cancel selection of an item or group of items. After placement.

page 147 • Select Tool Command. Related Topics • Copy an Item With the Select Tool. Pausing after you drag the item to the appropriate place in the drawing activates the Configuration tool. pause the pointer over an option and read the ToolTip. Overlapping . are recognized in the locate zone as opposed to the whole symbol. such as check valves or flow arrows or other inline items. page 248 • Move an Item With the Select Tool. if it is available for the selected item. page 254 • Modify an Item With the Select Tool. the Select Tool ribbon is replaced with a ribbon for editing the selected item.Specifies that symbols are recognized in the locate zone as opposed to individual elements in a symbol. Top Down . you can use PickQuick to select the orientation of some items. page 145 Configuration (PickQuick) Tool In addition to using the manipulation handles to orient an item after you place it. page 194 • Place an Item from Catalog Explorer. Bottom Up .Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Select Tool Ribbon Appears when nothing is selected.Specifies that items inside the fence are selected. After you select an item. and allows you to select the proper orientation for the item. page 149 146 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .Specifies that individual elements. which make up symbols. page 66 • Place an Item from the Stockpile. Inside . page 218 • Select an Item. when you are placing them.Specifies that items both overlapped by the fence and inside the fence are selected. page 264 • Place an Item With the Configuration (PickQuick) Tool. Note • To find out the name of an option on the ribbon. Related Topics • Place a Flow Arrow.

3. too. To clear the selection of an item or items. Click Tools > Options to change the item highlight and selection colors and locate and break-away tolerances. To select one item. Also. On the main toolbar. click the item while holding Shift or Ctrl. To select more than one item. click the Select Tool: 2. Right-click in an empty portion of the drawing. drag to fence the objects. right-click a blank area in the drawing and click Select All on the shortcut menu. click to select it. Notes • When the Select Tool is active. hold Shift or Ctrl and click each item. click it. When the item that you want to select is highlighted. you can select items in the Engineering Data Editor.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Select an Item 1. to accomplish the same thing. Do one of the following: • • • • . use PickQuick. or. selectable items are highlighted as you pass the pointer over them. they are selected in the Engineering Data Editor. If they reside in the active drawing. To select one of several overlapping items. page 148 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview. To select more than one item at once. To clear the selection of one item and leave other items selected. You can build up a select set using this method. press Ctrl + A or click Edit > Select All. page 144 • SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 147 . Select another item without holding Shift or Ctrl. To select all items in a drawing. do one of the following: • • • • Click in an empty portion of the drawing. • • • Related Topics Select an Item Using the Configuration (PickQuick) Tool.

PickQuick also helps you place items when multiple possible placement configurations exist. move the pointer over the numbered PickQuick buttons. 4. The second item is highlighted. 2. click the corresponding button on the PickQuick toolbar. click. without clicking. On the PickQuick toolbar. Note • PickQuick helps you to select items that overlap each other. The first item is highlighted. 3. to highlight the corresponding items. see Place an Item With the Configuration (PickQuick) Tool. For more information. Pause the pointer over the item that you want to select.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Select an Item Using the Configuration (PickQuick) Tool 1. which appears near the pointer. page 144 148 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . When the pointer appears with ellipses. page 149 Related Topics • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview. When the item that you want to select is highlighted.

3. or you can close it by clicking X in the upper right corner of the toolbar. page 14 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 149 . Related Topics • Configuration (PickQuick) Tool. click the corresponding button on the Configuration toolbar to place the item in that orientation. Note • You can right-click in an empty portion of the drawing or press Esc to close the Configuration toolbar. Drag the item to the appropriate position on the line or equipment.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Place an Item With the Configuration (PickQuick) Tool 1. Pause until ellipses appear beside the pointer: . When the appropriate orientation is displayed. page 146 • Navigating in the Software: An Overview. 4. Click to display the Configuration toolbar near the pointer. 2. Move the pointer over each toolbar button to preview the available orientations. 5.

or coarse levels. The grid is not considered part of the drawing and does not print. page 116 • View Document Properties. The grid lines for a dynamic grid move as you zoom in or out in a view. they do not appear when you print the drawing. Related Topics • Placing Items on a Grid: An Overview.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Placing Items on a Grid: An Overview The grid and its grid lines allow you to place items in the drawing by aligning them with the grid lines or nearest intersection of the grid lines. You can specify the increment settings on the Grid tab of the View Properties dialog box. which opens when you click View > Properties. A static grid displays solid grid lines that do not move as you zoom in or out. items always align with the grid lines or nearest intersection of the grid lines. The grid is an set of imaginary lines in the drawing. solid grid lines. To view grid lines at a finer level. page 150 • Set Document Properties. You can change the display of the grid from static to dynamic by setting options on the Grid tab of the View Properties dialog box. Related Topics • Change the Properties of a Drawing View. When you click View > Snap grid. set the style to dynamic and adjust the density. page 115 150 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . You can set dynamic grid lines to appear at fine. A dynamic grid displays index lines that intersect with the darker. page 33 Show Grid Command View > Show Grid Displays a grid so that you can place items with precision. medium. Note • You do not have to display the grid in order to snap items to it. You can use the grid if you want the items to line up at regular intervals in the drawing. You can view the grid by clicking View > Show grid. The grid lines appear at common major measurement increments. Note • You can change the grid display from static to dynamic by setting options on the Grid tab of the View Properties dialog box.

The grid is a set of lines in the drawing background that helps you align items. items always align with the grid lines or nearest intersection of the grid lines. When you set the Snap grid option. page 116 • View Document Properties. set the style to Dynamic and adjust the grid line width with the Density control.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Snap Grid Command View > Snap Grid Aligns items with the grid. Grid lines do not print. To view grid lines at a finer level. Note • You can change the grid display by setting options on the Grid tab of the View Properties dialog box. page 115 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 151 . Related Topics • Placing Items on a Grid: An Overview. page 150 • Set Document Properties. which opens when you click View > Properties.

However. you can only associate an equipment component with a single piece of equipment. As you place equipment components. As a group. you can have limits to the possible placements for the equipment. creating an equipment group. and reactors. you or your plant administrator can change and add to these symbols as needed for your plant. Equipment components are items associated with pieces of equipment. page 164 • Place Equipment. specific trays can be flagged for placement inside the piece of equipment. page 153 • Place Multiple Representations. You also place equipment components in drawings.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Placing Equipment: An Overview You can place various types of equipment in your drawing. the software automatically creates a group relationship between the equipment and the component. heat exchangers. Related Topics • Assign Heat Tracing. the component is associated with the last selected or highlighted piece of equipment. The software includes a standard group of equipment and equipment component symbols. However. and nozzles can be flagged for placement outside the piece of equipment. such as towers. boilers. For example. such as nozzles and trays. the components move when you move the equipment. When you place an equipment component. Rule Manager defines rules that determine the way that model items interact during manipulation. page 154 152 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Depending on the rules defined for the equipment or equipment component.

In other words. you can escape placement mode by right-clicking. In the Properties window. page 244 Move an Item Using the Move Button. You can use the same steps for placing equipment. • SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 153 . in a tank). In the Catalog Explorer list view. enter values for the equipment properties in the appropriate rows in the table. 4. see Mirror an Item About an Existing Mirror Axis or Linear Element. Flanged Nozzle-Internal. Press Esc to quit placement mode. For internal placement of equipment. Notes • After you place items. For more information.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Place Equipment 1. page 242 Rotate an Item Using Its Rotate Handle. Drag the item to the appropriate place in the drawing. or move most items using their component handles. you can mirror. you can display it by selecting the item and then selecting Edit > Properties on the main menu bar. see Assign Heat Tracing. If you want the nozzle opening facing to the right. and Pump Nozzle-Internal can all be placed internally (for example. Nozzle-Internal. Tip In addition. approach the tank from the right when placing the nozzle. Position the item and release to place it. you drag the nozzle to the interior of a tank and place it. For more information. rotate. the opening of the nozzle will be placed in the direction that you approach the tank during placement. Or. 2. you can click the item in the Catalog Explorer list view and then click the appropriate point in the drawing to place the item. 3. page 219 • If the Properties window is not displayed. • Tip • You can assign heat tracing to equipment. click the equipment that you want to place.

drag the nozzle an arbitrary distance away from the equipment. Open the drawing that is a target for your multiple representation (parent-child representations) of an item.Vessels).Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview • If you need to place a nozzle so that it is associated with equipment but not attached to it. 2. You can think of a multiple representation as a child item associated with the parent item that already exists in another drawing. Attach the nozzle to the equipment that you want it related to. 1. 4. Be sure the drawing used in step 1 is closed. 2. 3. While holding down the Alt key. • Tips • You can find the parent item in the Engineering Data Editor by clicking the Other Drawings button . Save your work and exit the drawing. page 408 • Modifying and Moving Placed Items: An Overview. 154 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . you can do the following. You can choose a filter from the list using the Engineering Data Editor. Open a drawing and place an item of equipment. page 152 • Place Multiple Representations 1. Select the nozzle. page 215 • Placing Equipment: An Overview. Tip A multiple representation allows the depiction of an item from another drawing in a detailed or alternate view. Related Topics Grouping Equipment in SmartPlant P&ID. 3. Select a filter that best describes the type of item you want to represent (for example. Display the parent item in the Engineering Data Editor. Equipment .

In the Engineering Data Editor. • • Related Topics • Placing Equipment: An Overview. Notes • You can use the Replace command or the Find and Replace dialog box to replace a multiple representation symbol providing the definition attributes for the source (parent) and target (child) are identical. right-click the icon at the far left of the parent item. 5. The definition attributes are Equipment Class. Select Place Multiple Representation from the shortcut menu. If you are working in a project. page 152 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview. page 144 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 155 . and Equipment Type. be aware that multiple representations are constrained because of claiming and moving drawings between projects and the Plant. • 6. You are permitted only a single representation of an item in any one drawing.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview You can also open a tabular view of your target drawing in the Design window by clicking Window > New > Engineering Data Editor. Click the location in the drawing where you need to place the multiple representation. Equipment SubClass. 7.

Right-click a line and choose from several commands. represented by black squares or dots. or connect lines. You can use these vertex handles to move. The zero length pipe run that gets created when one inline component is placed directly up against another inline component is automatically joined to the existing pipe run.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Routing Lines: An Overview Whether you are routing pipe or signal lines. Similarly. The software also provides a shortcut menu associated with lines. Of course when two pipe runs with differing properties are joined into one. the new pipe run is automatically joined with the existing pipe run. those pipe runs are automatically joined together if they have the same properties. at each segment vertex along the line route. You can add vertices to add segments to the line using the commands on the Line Routing ribbon. You can also use this menu to construct select sets of pipe runs. At the time that the connection is made. The symbol placement command creates a new line when an inline component is placed directly up against an existing nozzle or other inline component. 156 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . the two pipe runs are tested for compatibility. then the pipe run must be broken. If you want them joined together. The software places handles. If they pass the property criteria. The Break Run command is still available for this purpose. the properties for pipe runs with zero length connectors need not match. the properties of the surviving pipe run are retained and the others are lost. the Join Runs command is still available for this purpose. they are not automatically joined together. If two pipe runs have different properties. Line Connectivity When a new pipe run is placed such that it connects to existing pipe runs at either end. After you select a type of line route from the Catalog Explorer list view. they are automatically joined together. Pipe runs that only have zero length connectors are aggressively joined up with the pipe runs they attach to. you can manipulate all lines by using the same basic procedures. When a new pipe run is placed that starts or ends at a component that belongs to an existing pipe run. the two pipe runs are joined and the new connector is actually merged with the existing connector. You use this menu to break runs or join runs. The automatic joining takes place in the same way for both placement and modification of connectors. reroute. use the commands on the Line Routing ribbon to help construct or modify the line. Lines consist of a series of line segments. too. if you must define two different properties for two parts of a single pipe run. When a new pipe run is placed that starts or ends at the endpoint of an existing connector. The pipe run created in this way has a zero length connector that attaches the two symbols.

page 220 • Start a Line in Free Space. page 160 • Start a Line in Free Space. Related Topics • Assign Heat Tracing. page 165 • Insert Line Segments into an Existing Line. You can dock the Line Routing ribbon in the main toolbar. page 164 • Branch to an Existing Line. instead of the usual constraint of horizontal or vertical line routing. page 162 • Break a Pipe Run. but you can use it for any line routing. Related Topics Branch from an Existing Line. Reducers are always located at the end of a pipe run and never in the middle. page 161 • Move a Line. it remains there for the current design session unless you move it again.Allows you to route lines in any direction. This procedure is usually popular with signal and utility lines. Placing a pipe run that branches off of an existing pipe run does not cause them to be joined together. Alter Segment . page 162 • Insert Line Segments into an Existing Line. page 159 Line Routing Ribbon Appears when you select a line element from the Catalog Explorer list view or the Engineering Data Editor or when you select an existing line in a drawing. Placing a new pipe run that connects to a reducer does not cause the pipe runs to be joined.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Pipe runs always consist of a linear sequence of members and never include any branches.Causes the software to insert line segments instead of routing new lines or instead of moving existing lines. Note • All of the above information about pipe runs also applies to signal runs. page 161 • Move a Line. page 159 • SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 157 . Insert Segment . page 220 • Start a Line from a Connect Point.

5. page 156 158 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Press Alt while routing a line or click Alter Segment on the Line Routing ribbon to override the current line vector and allow routing in any direction and at any angle. Tips • This action displays the Line Routing ribbon and starts line placement mode. • 4. • Tip You can click an empty point in the drawing to start the line. In the Catalog Explorer list view select the line that you want to place. 3. 2.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Route a Line 1. too. Related Topics • Routing Lines: An Overview. Click a connect point on an item in the drawing. Continue clicking to place the vertices of the line in the drawing. When the line is complete. right-click to confirm the placement. Tip • You can escape line placement mode by right-clicking two more times. Click to place the vertex at the next point in the line.

Tip • If you want to route the line to a connect point of an existing item. click the connect point of the appropriate item to place the line. 2. page 156 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 159 . • 3. 4. Click the location for each vertex of the line. If the Properties window does not appear. you can display it by clicking the line and then selecting Edit > Properties. • Related Topics • Routing Lines: An Overview. including the termination point.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Start a Line in Free Space 1. click the starting point for the line route. Tip Press Alt while routing a line or click Alter Segment on the Line Routing ribbon to override the current line vector and allow routing in any direction. In the Catalog Explorer list view or the Engineering Data Editor. When you complete the line route. Notes • You can define values for the properties of a line by clicking the line and then entering the values in the appropriate rows in the Properties window. In the drawing. right-click to place the line. click the line that you want to place.

2. When you complete the line route. In the Catalog Explorer list view. click the connect point from which you want to start routing your line. Click the location for each vertex of the line route. page 156 160 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . right-click to place the line. Notes • To stop placing lines in the drawing. you can display it by clicking the line and then selecting Edit > Properties on the main menu bar. press Esc to quit line placement mode. In the drawing. • • • Related Topics • Routing Lines: An Overview. 4. Press Alt while routing a line or click Alter Segment on the Line Routing ribbon to override the current line vector and allow routing in any direction and at any angle. Or. you can escape line placement mode by right-clicking two more times after the final right-click in the last step above. You can define values for the properties of a line by clicking the line and then entering the values in the appropriate rows in the Properties window. 3. If the Properties window is not displayed. click the type of line that you want to place.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Start a Line from a Connect Point 1.

see Break a Pipe Run. 2. Press Esc to stop adding segments. select the existing line that you want to insert a segment into. you can display it by clicking the line and then selecting Edit > Properties on the main menu bar. see Insert Line Segments into an Existing Line. Select the line that you want to add a vertex to. press Alt and drag the new vertex You can also insert line segments into an existing line. You can join two pipe runs that have different property values. For more information. If the Properties window is not displayed. For more information. 2. 3. You can also break a line at a point. page 165. • • • Related Topics • Routing Lines: An Overview. Notes • . Notes • The line remains selected until you click another item or command. When the pointer turns into a double arrow to the appropriate location. The resulting pipe run has the properties of the pipe run that you selected first. • Related Topics • Routing Lines: An Overview. On the Line Routing ribbon. click Insert Segment Tip Instead of clicking Insert Segment. 3. page 156 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 161 . you can hold Shift while moving a line to insert segments. • . page 156 Insert a Vertex into an Existing Line 1.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Insert Line Segments into an Existing Line 1. page 161. Drag the selected line to the new position. In the drawing. You can change values for properties of the line by clicking the line and then entering the values in the appropriate rows in the Properties window. Point near the center of the line where you want the new vertex.

a point on an existing line. you can display it by selecting the line and then clicking Edit > Properties on the main menu bar. press Esc to quit line placement mode. click a point on the existing line where you want to end the branch. Click to place each vertex of the line branch. In the Catalog Explorer list view.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Branch from an Existing Line 1. You can change values for the properties of the line by clicking the line and then entering the values in the appropriate rows in the Properties window. In the drawing. 3. page 156 Branch to an Existing Line 1. press Esc to quit line placement mode. 2. To stop placing lines in the drawing. right-click to place it. 3. If the Properties window is not displayed. To complete the line route. Click to place each vertex of the line branch. 4. 2. • • 162 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . To stop placing lines in the drawing. • • • • Related Topics • Routing Lines: An Overview. click the type of line that you want to place. or a connect point on an item in the drawing. In the Catalog Explorer list view. you can escape line placement mode by right-clicking two more times after the last step above. Notes • Press Alt while routing a line or click Alter Segment on the Line Routing ribbon to override the current line vector and allow routing in any direction and at any angle. Or. 4. When you complete the line. click a point on an existing line route to begin placing the branch. you can escape placement mode by right-clicking two more times after the final right-click in the last step above. click the starting point for the branch. Or. click the type of line that you want to place. You can extend a line to an existing line to create another branch point. Notes • The starting point for a branch can be a point in free space. In the drawing. Press Alt while routing a line or click Alter Segment on the Line Routing ribbon to override the current line vector and allow routing in any direction and at any angle.

On the line. You can resize the gap by dragging the parametric handles. • Related Topics • Routing Lines: An Overview. 3. Note • Gaps are parametric symbols. page 156 Add a Manual Gap to a Line 1.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview • You can change values for the properties of the line by clicking the line and then entering the values in the appropriate rows in the Properties window. page 156 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 163 . Related Topics • Gapping Lines: An Overview. click the position for the other side of the gap. page 239. page 269 • Routing Lines: An Overview. If the Properties window is not displayed. see Scale a Parametric Item. Select the appropriate gap from the Catalog Explorer. 2. Then on the same line. click the position for one side of the gap. you can display it by clicking the line and then selecting Edit > Properties on the main menu bar. For more information on resizing parametric symbols.

page 258 • Placing Equipment: An Overview. specify values for the HT Medium. HT Medium Temp. Format Manager contains definitions for temperature units. You choose the units for the HT Medium Temp property when you assign the temperature value. page 164 • Modifying Item Properties: An Overview. • • Related Topics Assign Heat Tracing. page 174 • Routing Lines: An Overview. 2.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Assign Heat Tracing 1. and HT Requirement properties. page 156 • 164 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . page 152 • Placing Instrumentation: An Overview. pipe run. Tips • If you have already specified insulation properties for the item. piping component. In the Properties window. Select the equipment. Select list values are defined in Data Dictionary Manager. or instrument that you want to specify heat tracing for. your choices of insulation properties and specifications are restricted. then you cannot subsequently assign heat tracing properties. You choose the HT Medium and HT Requirement properties from select lists. If you assign heat tracing to an item before you assign insulation properties.

In the drawing. page 156 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 165 . then you can display it by clicking the line and then selecting Edit > Properties. click Break Runs. In the drawing. On the shortcut menu. 3.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Break Run Command Line Shortcut Menu > Break Run Enables you to break a pipe run at an arbitrary location. After selecting this command from the Line shortcut menu. click the line at the point you want the break it. page 166 • Routing Lines: An Overview. page 156 • Break a Pipe Run 1. right-click the pipe run that you want to break. page 165 • Routing Lines: An Overview. Tip • The software breaks the selected pipe run into two separate runs at the selected point. Related Topics Break a Pipe Run. click the point where you want to break the run. 2. Notes • You can change values for the properties of the new run by clicking it and then entering the values in the appropriate rows in the Properties window. • Related Topics • Join Pipe Runs. If the Properties window is not displayed.

Related Topics • Join Pipe Runs. see Break a Pipe Run. In the drawing. page 165. You can change values for the properties of the new run by clicking the pipe run and then entering the values in the appropriate rows in the Properties window. • • Related Topics • Routing Lines: An Overview. 3. you can display it by clicking the line and then selecting Edit > Properties on the main menu bar. the resulting pipe run has the properties of the pipe run that you selected first. page 156 166 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . If the Properties window does not appear. 2. click Join Runs. For information about breaking runs. Notes • If you join two pipe runs with different properties. In the drawing. After selecting this command from the Line shortcut menu. page 156 Join Pipe Runs 1. page 166 • Routing Lines: An Overview. right-click the first pipe run that you want to join. click on the line that you want to join to the selected line. click the second pipe run to join the two runs.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Join Runs Command Line Shortcut Menu > Join Runs Enables you to join two lines together into one pipe run. On the shortcut menu.

2.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Using Piping Components: An Overview Piping components are graphic elements that represent processes or functions within a particular piping segment. For example. Tip • If the Properties window does not appear. 3. Position the item and release. your plant administrator can change and add to these symbols in Catalog Manager as needed. In the Catalog Explorer list view. page 167 Place a Piping Component 1. Piping components include valves. piping components are connected with lines. piping components automatically orient themselves when you drag them near an existing pipe segment. page 164 • Place a Piping Component. The software includes a standard group of piping component symbols. 4. Rule Manager defines rules that determine the way that model items interact during manipulation. Your plant administrator can modify the relationships between piping components and piping in Rule Manager. the pipe route and the associated piping components both move. In the Properties window. and strainers. In drawings. if you drag a horizontal valve to a vertical pipe. enter values for the properties of the piping component in the appropriate rows in the table. you can use the Configuration tool. reducers. As you place piping components. the valve automatically orients itself vertically. or PickQuick. to review the possible placements for the component and select a final orientation for the item. If several possible orientations exist for the piping component. When you move the pipe run. click the piping component that you want to place. Generally. Drag the item to the appropriate pipe run in the drawing. Related Topics • Assign Heat Tracing. However. you can display it by selecting the component and then selecting Edit > Properties. flanges. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 167 . the software automatically creates a relationship between the pipe route and the component to create a pipe run.

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Notes • As you drag piping components over a pipe run. you can use the Configuration tool. or PickQuick to select the appropriate placement for the item. Place the first component in the line. drag one component along the line away from the other leaving the desired distance between the two. Place the second component into the line and connected to the connect point of the first component on the end that you want to attach to. • If you want to move a piping component but preserve its connection to the pipe run. you must drag one off of the segment to disconnect it and then move it back to get the connect points attached. regardless of minimum distance settings in Options Manager. While holding down the Alt key. If the components are already close to each other but not connected at coincident connect points. page 167 168 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . do the following. If you place a piping component when a pipe segment is not highlighted. If the item that you place has multiple possible orientations in relation to other items. Then even if you drag the component away from the line. you can use the Alt key as you drag the component. or the pointer passes over runs while you are in placement mode. 1. If you want to be able to place two inline components an arbitrary distance apart. page 156 • Using Piping Components: An Overview. You can see that the connect points are actually joined by the black rectangle in the Drawing view: • • 3. Related Topics • Routing Lines: An Overview. 2. the line routes itself so as to preserve its connection to the component. the piping component is placed in free space if the placement rules allow the action. the pipe run is highlighted.

t .dll Performing Service Limits Validation The Piping Specification utility verifies that the temperatures and pressures assigned to a pipe run comply with the service limits associated with the selected Piping Materials Class. pdpjsx. alternate design. and alternate operating cases.pdtable_201 and pdtable_202 tables library files .dll.l. and ValidateServiceLimits. us_pjstb.l. operating.pdtable_102 table ra schema .ForeignCalc program ID. see Options Manager Help. and us_pjstb. The database tables and library files in the 3D product provide source information for the validation and search. The service limits validation and automatic commodity code lookup can be disabled simultaneously using a switch in Options Manager. This warning appears in the design software by appending an error string to the name of the PMC.dll files . In Data Dictionary Manager. If any temperature-pressure pair violates the service limits of the selected Piping Materials Class. PDS 3D Files Used For PipeSpec • • • • pd schema .r. pdpjs. The Service Limits validation requires at least one complete temperature-pressure pair from among design.dll. which is assigned to the Nominal Diameter property. and diameters assigned to the pipe run and to search commodity codes and fabrication categories for piping components.l. For more information about modifying the PipeSpec settings.PipeSpec. In continuous validation mode.dll. starts the Piping Specification utility and triggers the commodity code and fabrication category lookups when a nominal diameter is changed. For more information about assigning program IDs.us_pjstb.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Using the PipeSpec Utility: An Overview The Piping Specification utility works with PDS 3D or SmartPlant 3D to validate the piping materials class with the temperatures. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 169 . pressures. see Data Dictionary Manager Help. which is activated by assigned settings in Options Manager. a warning displays the appropriate pairs. the ValidateNomDiam. this verification occurs each time that you modify either the Piping Materials Class or a temperature – pressure pair in the process case data of the pipe run.

In PDS 3D. then the lookup encompasses every piping component on that run. The minimum requirements to cause a lookup are that the piping component must be in a pipe run. If the PMC is assigned but does not comply with the service limits. this lookup occurs each time the Piping Materials Class or any of the four case Max temperatures (Design. and Alternate Operating) are modified on the pipe run. and that the nominal diameter of the piping component must be specified. The PipeSpec utility uses process case temperatures of the run during the commodity code lookup only if the code for that component has a maximum temperature limit value in the 3D database. an error is recorded in the error-log file with the appropriate message. A relationship between the fabrication category and the commodity name can be defined in the 3D databases. Note • The units for the PDS 3D maximum temperature are those specified in Options Manager. this unique name is the AABBCC Code property. and the process case temperatures on the pipe run are ignored for the lookup. In the continuous validation mode. If the modification occurs on a property of a piping component. For example. a value of -9999 for maximum temperature in pdtable_202 indicates a null value. SmartPlant symbols are assigned the same AABBCC Code properties in Catalog Manager. If a maximum temperature exists for that component. If not. Validation also occurs each time the Option Code or Nominal Diameter of the component is modified. then the lookup is restricted to that particular component. then the lookup insures this value is larger than all of the process case temperatures assigned to the pipe run in which the piping component resides. then the utility returns a commodity code only if all of the records have the same code value. The Commodity Name is a unique name for every symbol. then the Commodity Code property displays an error message. If multiple records are obtained in the lookup. Operating.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Performing Commodity Code and Fabrication Category Look Up The Piping Specification utility looks up the Commodity Code and Fabrication Category properties of inline piping components. then a value of zero Deg-K is assumed for each of the unspecified temperatures. that the PMC of the pipe run must be populated and comply with service limits. If any temperature values for the pipe run are unspecified. The Fabrication Category property of inline piping components is a select-listed property in SmartPlant P&ID. in PDS 3D. but if the modification occurs on a property of a pipe run. 170 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Alternate Design.

while it is a set of code numbers or indices in PDS 3D. For more information about Piping Specification configuration. the Option Code property is a select list of text values in SmartPlant P&ID. Related Topics • Assign a Commodity Code to a Piping Component Using PipeSpec. the missing properties are listed in the log file. Related Topics • Assign a Commodity Code to a Piping Component Using PipeSpec. page 173 • Assign a Piping Materials Class to a Pipe Run Using PipeSpec. Error messages help you identify the cause of failure when the utility does not complete the tasks as expected. Choose one. you can refer to the SmartPlant P&ID Installation Guide by clicking Help > Printable Guides. The PipeSpec utility uses the entries in the Short Value box of the Option Code list to obtain the Option Code used in the PDS 3D database tables. page 172 Piping Specifications Dialog Box Opens when you click the Calc button for the Piping Materials Class property (PMC) for a pipe run in the Properties window.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Similarly. This can include checking service limits. property validation for piping segments and inline components is run.Lists the PMCs in your piping specification. For example. Short Value for the Option Code select list contains the PDS 3D indices corresponding to the appropriate Option Code text in SmartPlant P&ID. and allows you to choose a PMC from a piping specification. page 173 • Assign a Piping Materials Class to a Pipe Run Using PipeSpec. if minimum requirements are not met for the lookup. and depending on the settings in Options Manager. page 172 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 171 . This functionality is not available unless the proper settings are defined in Options Manager and the applicable Program IDs are assigned in Data Dictionary Manager.log file in the directory assigned to the TEMP environment variable. Piping materials class . Note • Error messages are placed in the PipeSpecError.

and so forth. If you choose temperature-pressure limits for process cases that do not agree with the assigned PMC. you can manually assign commodity codes to inline components. Notes • If you subsequently assign nominal diameters to inline valves or other components. including inline components. Select the Piping Materials Class property for the pipe run in the Properties window. SmartPlant P&ID assigns commodity codes and fabrication categories to them that correspond to the PMC of the pipe run and the specifications in your 3D databases. the PipeSpec utility copies properties and checks limits in the entire run. choose the appropriate PMC from the list and click OK. Click the Calc button . On the Piping Specifications dialog box. see those Help files. see Assign a Commodity Code to a Piping Component Using PipeSpec. page 173. If you choose a diameter. for instance. Maximum Design Pressure. 3. page 169 172 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Select the pipe run. then the commodity code property becomes Not In Spec. respectively. Maximum Design Temperature. 1. For more information. 4. Given the appropriate settings in Options Manager and Data Dictionary Manager. such as Nominal Diameter. • • Related Topics • Using the PipeSpec Utility: An Overview. Tip • Based on the chosen PMC and other assigned properties. that does not exist for the assigned PMC. then the error Service Limits Error is added to the PMC for the run. For more information.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Assign a Piping Materials Class to a Pipe Run Using PipeSpec Important The PipeSpec utility is not available unless the appropriate settings and program IDs are assigned in Options Manager and Data Dictionary Manager. and the PipeSpec utility looks up accepted diameters and validates the assignment. • 2.

if the relationship is defined in your 3D database. For information about the settings required for continuous service limits validation. In the Properties window. Tip • You can verify that a commodity code and fabrication category have been assigned in the Properties window. However this does not verify that the component agrees with a piping specification.log. If continuous validation is not activated but other appropriate settings and program IDs are assigned. you can still click the Calc button for the Commodity Code property and choose a code. then a pipe run with temperature-pressure limits that do not agree with its PMC produces the error Error in PMC in the commodity code for an inline component. but so it the Fabrication Category property for the inline components. click Related Topics. page 169 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 173 . Adding or changing the option code can change the commodity code. given that the relationship exists in the 3D databases. or you can open the error log. define the Nominal Piping Diameter property for the component. • 2. see those Help files.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Assign a Commodity Code to a Piping Component Using PipeSpec Important The PipeSpec utility is not available unless the appropriate settings and program IDs are assigned in Options Manager and Data Dictionary Manager. if properties have not been assigned as expected. For more information on assigning a PMC. • • • Related Topics • Using the PipeSpec Utility: An Overview. Notes • If continuous validation is turned on for the PipeSpec utility. For more information. respectively. PipeSpecError. page 172. see Options Manager Help. not only is the commodity code defined automatically. see Assign a Piping Materials Class to a Pipe Run Using PipeSpec. 1. Select an inline component that belongs to a pipe run whose piping material class has been defined. With continuous validation. For more information about the error log.

page 178 • Assign Heat Tracing. Inline instruments include instrument valves. such as pressure regulator valves. the pipe segment appears selected. in a plant process. Offline Instruments Offline instruments are components that you do not insert into a piping segment. such as orifice plates. page 180 • 174 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . or electrical switches. Instruments loops are a group of one or more instruments or control functions arranged so that signals can transfer from one function to the next to measure and control a process variable. Offline instruments include flow controllers. page 177 • Remove an Instrument from a Loop. however. If you place an inline instrument when a pipe segment is not selected. and other instrument components. these instruments monitor and control inline instruments. Related Topics Add Instruments to a Loop. inline instruments. and system functions such as digital control stations or computers. your plant administrator can change and add to these symbols as your plant requires. flow controllers. page 175 • Place an Offline Instrument. flow indicators. The software includes a standard group of instrument and instrument loop symbols. page 164 • Place an Inline Instrument. computing devices. such as flow or temperature.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Placing Instrumentation: An Overview You can place various types of instrumentation in your drawing. and piping. Inline Instruments Inline instruments are components that you can insert into a piping segment. level gauges. Two types of instruments exist: inline instruments and offline instruments. Instruments are devices used directly or indirectly to measure or control a variable. Instrument Loops You can create instrument loops containing any combination of inline and offline instruments. Signal lines are intelligent line strings that connect offline instruments. As you drag inline instruments over a pipe segment. Instruments can be items such as flow control elements. Typically. the instrument is placed in free space. flow controllers. and pressure regulators. such as orifice plates.

. limited by parameters that you enter here. click the inline instrument that you want to place. Notes • As you drag inline instruments over a pipe run. Tip • If the Properties window is not visible. to select the appropriate placement for the item. page 178 • Place an Inline Instrument. Related Topics • Add Instruments to a Loop.) button next to the loop tag cell. For example.. You can choose a tag from the main window and click OK in order to assign the tag to the item whose properties currently appear in the Properties window. the pipe run appears selected.Allows you to type in descriptors to display the available loop tags. This dialog box opens when you click the ellipses (. page 177 • Remove an Instrument from a Loop. %. Drag the item to the appropriate line in the drawing. If you want to display all available loop tags. Position the item and release it. Search Now . 4. In the Catalog Explorer list view or the stockpile. page 180 Place an Inline Instrument 1. 2. you can display it by selecting the instrument and then selecting Edit > Properties on the main menu bar. page 175 • Place an Offline Instrument. The percent character. simply type %. specify properties of the inline instrument in the appropriate rows in the table. if you want to list only loop tags that contain the letter F. the instrument is placed in free space if rules defined in Rule Manager allow such a placement. If you place an inline instrument when a pipe segment is not selected. If the item you place has multiple possible orientations in relation to other items. is a wildcard. 3. • SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 175 . you could type %F% in the Search for box.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Loop Tag Dialog Box (Properties Window) Allows you to search for and specify the loop tag for the item whose properties currently appear in the Properties window.Finds and displays the loop tags that match the criteria in the Search for box. In the Properties window. you can use the Configuration tool. or PickQuick. Search for .

page 174 • Routing Lines: An Overview.ForeignCalc is not delivered as part of our sample validation. You can use Data Dictionary Manager to sort the properties by Validation ID using the Piperun table. The way this works with the attributes that have that ID is that the software is watching the pipe run and the inline components. By keeping the pointer either above or below the piping.ForeignCalc in the Validation ID field for the PipeRun Property. You may determine which properties should be copied. Also. page 156 176 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . MaterialOfConstClass. updating the pipe run will not affect the inline component. then an update to the pipe run will update the inline component. CoatingReqmts. When a value for one of the affected attributes changes on the pipe run. This is configurable by adding the ProgID called UpdInlineCompProp. They are CleaningReqmts. Validation takes place between the pipe run and the inline components on that pipe run with the result that you may see some properties values being copied from the pipe run to the inline component. and it was previously equivalent to the value on the inline component. • Related Topics • Placing Instrumentation: An Overview. if the pointer is below the pipe run. Nominal diameter is also included although it does not have that particular Validation ID specified. Notice the only attributes that are delivered with this validation ID. the routine UpdInlineCompProp.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview • While placing an inline instrument on a pipe run with associated heat tracing. This copying behavior is based upon the pipe run properties that should have their values copied to the in-line components. You must specify that particular validation id in order to use the functionality. then the heat tracing appears above the instrument and vice versa – regardless of the heat tracing orientation on the piping. It has the one involved in the pipe spec access. you can decide the orientation for the heat tracing on the inline instrument at placement time. If the values were different. and ScheduleOrThickness.

After you place offline instruments. you can escape placement mode by rightclicking. you can connect them to piping segments or inline instruments using signal lines. Tip You can click an item from Catalog Explorer and then place it by clicking the appropriate location in your drawing. You can assign heat tracing to offline instruments. or move them. page 174 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 177 . Press Esc to quit placement mode. click the offline instrument that you want to place. page 215 • Placing Instrumentation: An Overview. Or. In the Catalog Explorer list view. Drag the item to the appropriate place in the drawing. • Notes • If you place an offline instrument over an existing signal line. In the Properties window. 2. enter values for the properties of the instrument in the appropriate rows in the table. too. • • Related Topics • Modifying and Moving Placed Items: An Overview. After you place items. 4. see Assign Heat Tracing. 3.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Place an Offline Instrument 1. rotate. then you can display it by selecting the instrument and then selecting Edit > Properties on the main menu bar. just as piping components are inserted into pipe runs. • Tips • If the Properties window is not visible. page 164. the software inserts the offline instrument in the signal line. Position the item and release to place it. For more information. you can mirror.

The software automatically generates a unique item tag for the instrument. • • • • • • 178 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Moving the instrument loop itself to another stockpile has special limitations. placing the loop in the stockpile adds the loop to the model. On the Loop Tag dialog box. clear selection of the instrument and then select it again. enter characters in the Search for box in order to display the available loop tags. 8. If you need to refresh the instrument Loop Tag Suffix display in the Properties window. From the Catalog Explorer tree view Loops node. 4. you can create a customized loop report to generate lists of items in specific loops in your drawing or plant. you do not need to place the loop symbol in the drawing itself to create an occurrence. The software automatically generates an item tag when you enter a tag suffix. 5. Define properties for the loop by entering values in the Properties window. 6. page 265.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Add Instruments to a Loop 1. Select Send to Drawing Stockpile or Send to Stockpile from the shortcut menu. Choose the appropriate loop from the resulting list. You can assign the Loop Tag qualifier to instruments that you have already placed in your drawing or that reside in the stockpile. Since loops are logical collections of instruments rather than physical groupings. Select the item tag of the loop from the Loop Tag select list in the Properties window. Instrument loops normally reside in a stockpile with their members residing on drawings. see Move a Stockpile Item to the Stockpile of Another Drawing. Or you can open the Engineering Data Editor to display elements of the loop. 7. 2. Select the item that you want to associate with the instrument loop. Click Search Now. Instead. right-click the instrument loop that you want to place. After you create instrument loops. You can assign a group of instruments and other elements to a loop by creating a select set of them and assigning the correct loop tag for the set. 3. and you can either place instruments then create the loop or create the loop and assign instruments to it as you place them. For more information about moving plant item groups from one stockpile to another. or you can click the Calculation button next to the Loop Tag box in the Properties window. Notes • Selecting the item tag of the loop for an instrument triggers the Item Tag Validation program.

Click OK. page 83 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 179 . page 175 • Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview. page 83 • Updating Associated Instruments with Loop Properties (Properties Window) 1. page 38 • Placing Instrumentation: An Overview. page 174 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview. 2. page 331 • Loop Tag Dialog Box (Properties Window). page 174 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview • If the Properties window is not visible. Related Topics • Generating Reports: An Overview. you can display it by selecting the instrument or loop and then selecting Edit > Properties on the main menu bar. page 175 • Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview. page 331 • Loop Tag Dialog Box (Properties Window). Click in a checkbox to select and update the instrument associated to the displayed loop. Related Topics Generating Reports: An Overview. page 38 • Placing Instrumentation: An Overview. page 144 • Working With the Properties Window: An Overview. page 144 • Working With the Properties Window: An Overview.

Then you must point to the Drawing view before you press Delete. you can display it by selecting the item and then clicking Edit > Properties. • • • Related Topics • Placing Instrumentation: An Overview. validation automatically creates an instrument item tag.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Remove an Instrument from a Loop 1. page 174 180 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . remove the value for the Loop Tag property for the selection. Notes • When an instrument is assigned to a loop. The Delete command is not carried out if the pointer is located anywhere outside the Drawing view. select the item or items in the drawing. In the Properties window. You can remove an instrument from a loop by deleting the item from the model. First. 2. the instrument item tag remains the same until the instrument is assigned to a new loop. too. If the Properties window is not visible. You can press Delete on the keyboard to remove an item or a group of items from the drawing. In the drawing. select the item or items that you want to remove from the loop. If you remove the loop tag property.

you have an easier method to find to the label properties. Nonetheless. Labels that do not overwrite the property at placement are called driven labels. Since only the label properties appear when the label is selected. The following table identifies some of the label properties that are defined during label creation in Catalog Manager. The same properties appear in the long list of properties when you select the item itself. you cannot edit text such as OLL= on the OLL Elevation Equipment label. these properties dictate label placement behavior. you are entering data into the database. By adding or editing text. Note If you enter text with a recognized unit of measure using a quotes or double-quotes. At label creation time. the corresponding labeled properties for its item appear in the Properties window. the predefined property value in the label overwrites the current property value on the item that it labels.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Labeling: An Overview Your main tool to add or edit text content that appears in a label is the Properties window. In other words. Different labels have different label properties. A label always reflects the current property values of the item that it labels. After the creation of a label. the software parses the UOM and ignores the double-quotes (or tick marks).or 2-Point Not applicable Not applicable Yes Not applicable Not applicable Yes Not applicable Not applicable Yes Not applicable Not applicable Yes Not applicable Not applicable Yes Not applicable Not applicable Yes Not applicable Yes Fit Graphics to Text Yes SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 181 . Break Labeled Item Type Placement Type Leader Line Terminator Type Offset Distance Offset Source Behavior Area Break Title Block Yes 1-Point Flow Arrow Yes 1-Point Component Yes 1. Labels are defined as driven or driving in Catalog Manager. you can place free text in an item note. Labels that populate a property at placement are called driving labels. these properties perform their function in the background and are invisible to you. Whenever you select a label. You do not see label properties while using the design software. the plant administrator can define text content inside the label with the SmartText editor in Catalog Manager. When placing a label later.

indicate that the property applies under certain conditions. If you place a leader line with the label. the first click also identifies the end of the leader. flow arrow. Since there is no symbology associated with this type of label. However. and break) appear in columns. that is. page 186 • Place a Two-Point Label. like 1. Labels can have two-point placement or one-point placement. Yes indicates that the property applies to that type of label. you select the label that you want from Catalog Explorer and then identify the item in the drawing that you want to label. they contain text only (for example. Label properties appear in rows. you have an empty label. 182 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . component. You use one-point placement when a single point in the drawing identifies both the item to label and the location of the label. page 184 • Place a One-Point Label. You set the placement type of a label at its creation in Catalog Manager. Special notes. it would be essentially invisible on the drawing. empty labels display a question mark so that you can find them more easily and not unnecessarily repeat work. If you place such a label. the Short Description label for Equipment). but the properties that normally appear have not been entered yet. page 188 • Place an Annotation. Labels can be moved by selecting the label and dragging the black square at the center of the label. First. Afterwards. • • • Related Topics • Manipulate a Leader Line. you cannot change the placement type in the design software.Point for one-point placement. You can add a leader line to a label by right-clicking on the label and choosing Leader line display. Not applicable indicates that the property does not apply to that type of label. page 211 Placing Labels: An Overview You can place a label in a few basic steps.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Table notes: • The four types of labels (title block. Drag the label to the location that you want it to occupy in the drawing. You use two-point placement when you need one click to identify the item to label and a second click to indicate a different location for the label. page 190 • Place a Label from Catalog Explorer. Some labels have no symbology associated with them.

When you place a property break label. A line label follows a line when you change its angle. A label and its assigned leader line follow when you move a line. the software automatically creates and stores a matching connector in either a plant or project stockpile or the stockpile of another drawing. When you place an off-page connector (OPC). In other words. changing temperature from K to °C) does not change labels that are already placed in drawings. page 186 • Place a Two-Point Label. After you place the matching connector from the stockpile into the related drawing. changing from horizontal to vertical. where the number corresponds to the drawing.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Notes • Changing default label formats in Options Manager (for example. you break the pipe run. for example. • • • • Related Topics Place a Label from Catalog Explorer. and so labels do not always display the units selected in the Properties window. the software stops the sharing of data between segments of pipe. page 184 • Place a One-Point Label. When you recalculate a line. the software does not delete the label but repositions it in an associated location on the line. From Drawing 123. for example. the software automatically updates the matching connector in the original drawing (To Drawing 122. page 188 • SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 183 . Change units in the SmartText Editor dialog in Catalog Manager to specify a different unit of measure in a label. All delivered labels use plant default units. The matching connector receives the value. which are defined in Options Manager. for example). You must replace those labels individually to see the change whether those labels use the plant default setting or have the value set uniquely.

If the label is designed for two-point placement. 3.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Place a Label from Catalog Explorer 1. and it is highlighted indicating that you can place a label. You can edit the database properties for the labeled item after you have placed the label. Depending on the definition of the label. Select the label that you want from the Catalog Explorer list view. 184 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . page 182 • Two-Point Label Placement.5 inch. These properties are set in Catalog Manager during label creation. If the properties of the label require two-point placement. you must use item placement mode instead of the drag method. page 184 • Placing Labels: An Overview. a Cursor Location value of above midpoint. click again to place the label where you want it in relation to other items in the drawing. • Related Topics • One-Point Label Placement. You point to the valve. 2. you place labels with one-point or two-point placement. An example of twopoint placement is placing an equipment label on a pump. page 187 One-Point Label Placement To illustrate placing a label with this placement method. When you click the valve. consider placement of a Tag ID label on a valve. Click the item in the drawing that you want to label. no leader line. An example of onepoint placement is placing an ID label on a valve. Properties include an Offset Distance value of . and an Offset Source value of local. This valve received a label with one-point placement. Notes • Labels are a special class of item in Catalog Explorer. the software places the component label.

Pointer position determines if you place the label above or below the component. The tolerance for the Select command determines the distance above and below the pipe run. Offset is always a positive value. the y coordinate is a positive value) you are placing the label above the item. page 184 • Place a One-Point Label. Midpoints align at the y-axis of the local coordinate system of the symbol with the label.0). When you point to locations in the drawing and locate a valid target. If the pointer appears below the center (that is. This action allows you to place labels on a line and at the center of symbols. Related Topics • Customize the Software With the Options Command. For a pipe run. the center is the point where the pointer touches the line. the software aligns the center of the label at the center of the item receiving the label. Label Offset options can be universally applied by inputting a value in the Distances option in Options Manager. page 188 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 185 . If the value for offset source is None. page 186 • Place a Two-Point Label. the local origin. the software uses the default offset distance. The dots represent the center of the bounding box. designated in Options Manager. if a label offset is designated for the label during creation in Catalog Manager. A value of Zero offset distance aligns the bounding boxes. the y coordinate is a negative value) you are placing the label below the item. the label immediately moves to this position. If the pointer appears above the center (that is.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview The dots on the valve and label are not part of these drawing items. page 190 • Place a Label from Catalog Explorer. This y-axis alignment line crosses the center of the labeled item. These midpoints always align when you place a label with one-point placement. The property for offset source also affects label placement. however. The center of the bounding box is (0. The alignment axis is perpendicular to the line at this point. page 21 • Manipulate a Leader Line. that value overrides the Options Manager setting. In this example. The label remains in dynamics (you can move the label to a different location before you place it) so you can confirm correct placement.

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview

Place a One-Point Label
1. In the Catalog Explorer list view, click the label that you want to place. 2. Drag the label to the appropriate place in the drawing. 3. Release the label when the target is highlighted. Tips

When you drag a label over an appropriate target, the target is highlighted.

The pointer position, in relation to the item when you place the label, determines if you place the label above or below the item in the drawing. 4. In the Properties window, select or type values for the properties of the label in the appropriate rows in the table, if needed.

Notes

Title blocks, flow arrows, off-page connectors, and some component labels use one-point placement. A label display always reflects the values of the item with which it is associated. Labels that populate the item values at placement time are called driving labels. In other words, the predefined properties in the label overwrite current item properties when the label is placed. Labels that do not overwrite the item properties are called driven labels. Labels are defined as driven or driving in Catalog Manager. If you place flow arrow labels on a pipe run, the direction of the arrow changes depending on the flow direction of the pipe run. If the pipe run has no direction defined for it, the direction of the flow arrow label defines the flow direction of the pipe run. You can use the Configuration Tool, or PickQuick, to select the direction of a flow arrow as you place it. If you place an off-page connector on a pipe in the drawing, the software fills in the connector number and automatically adds a second off-page connector to either the Stockpile or the stockpile of another drawing. When you place the second connector in a drawing, the software automatically updates the number and name of the drawings in both offpage connectors. To display a leader line for the label, right-click the label, and then select Leader line display on the shortcut menu. If the Properties window is not visible, you can display it by selecting a label and then clicking Edit > Properties on the main menu bar.

186 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Related Topics • Configuration (PickQuick) Tool, page 146 • Placing Labels: An Overview, page 182 • Using Off-Page and Utility Connectors: An Overview, page 201 • Using the Types of Labels: An Overview, page 191

Two-Point Label Placement
To illustrate placing a label with this placement method consider placement of an Equipment ID label on a pump. When you point to the pump, it is highlighted, indicating that you can place the label. When you click the pump, the software recognizes the pump as a target for the label. That action is the first point of two-point placement. At the location on the drawing that you want actually to place the label, click again. That action is the second point of two-point placement. After the first click, the pointer changes from a northwest arrow, , to a four-headed arrow, , until you place the label with your second click. During the time between the first and second clicks, the label is attached to the pointer.

This pump received a label by using two-point placement. (1) and (2) illustrate the two pointer positions and clicks required to place this label. Properties include a Rotation value of false and a Leader line value of true. These properties are set through Catalog Manager during label creation. With two-point placement, the software does not use properties for offset distance or pointer location. You can place the first point anywhere on the item to receive the label. The leader line points to this location. Related Topics • Manipulate a Leader Line, page 190 • Place a Label from Catalog Explorer, page 184 • Place a Two-Point Label, page 188

SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 187

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview

Place a Two-Point Label
1. In the Catalog Explorer list view, click the label that you want to place. 2. In the drawing click the item that you want to label. Tip As the pointer passes over an appropriate target item for the label, the software highlights the item. To label the item, click the item when the software highlights it. 3. Click the location in the drawing for the label.

4. Quit label placement mode by pressing Esc. Tip Or, you can escape placement mode by right-clicking. 5. In the Properties window, specify the properties of the label in the appropriate rows.

Tip

If the Properties window is not displayed, you can display it by selecting the label and then clicking Edit > Properties.

Notes

After you place a label, you can move it and manipulate its leader line. For more information, see Modifying and Moving Placed Items: An Overview, page 215 Manipulate a Leader Line, page 190

Property break labels and various types of component labels require twopoint placement.

Related Topics • Labeling: An Overview, page 181 • Place a Break Label, page 196 • Placing Labels: An Overview, page 182 • Two-Point Label Placement, page 187 • Using the Types of Labels: An Overview, page 191

188 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview

Copy Labels
1. In the Drawing view, select the label that you want to copy. 2. Right-click the label and select Place New from the shortcut menu. 3. Associate the new label icon that appears at the end of the pointer with the new item by highlighting the item and clicking. Related Topics • Copying Items: An Overview, page 253 • Labeling: An Overview, page 181 • Place a One-Point Label, page 186 • Placing Labels: An Overview, page 182

Align Labels
1. In the Drawing view, select the labels that you want to align. Tip In order to align labels, you must be sure not to select any drawing items other than labels. You can remove an item from a select set by pressing Ctrl and clicking the item. 2. Click the appropriate alignment button on the main toolbar:
• • • • • • •

Align labels so that their bottom lines match Align labels so that their center points agree on a vertical line Align labels so that their center points agree on a horizontal line Align labels so that their left-most lines match Align labels so that their right-most lines match Align labels so that their top lines match

Related Topics • Labeling: An Overview, page 181 • Modifying and Moving Placed Items: An Overview, page 215 • Placing Labels: An Overview, page 182 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview, page 144

SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 189

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview

Manipulate a Leader Line
1. Display the handles of the leader line by clicking the label that it belongs to. Tip In order to manipulate a leader line, you must display it. Right-click the label and then click Leader line display on the shortcut menu. 2. Click a handle and drag the line to a new location.

Related Topics • Labeling: An Overview, page 181 • Placing Labels: An Overview, page 182

Update Label Settings
1. Click Tools > Custom Commands. 2. On the Custom Commands dialog box, double-click UpdateLabelsCmd.dll. Tip

You can find this macro in \Program Files\Smartplant\P&ID Workstation\Program.

Note

The UpdateLabelsCmd.dll refreshes the value of the currently placed label properties as displayed on the drawing. The command does not update the label based on modifications made to the label using Catalog Manager. To update the label if changes have been made using Catalog Manager, the label must be replaced in the drawing using Edit > Replace.

Related Topics • Labeling: An Overview, page 181

190 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview

Using the Types of Labels: An Overview
The type of label that you place determines the workflow that you follow. You define the label type when you create a label in Catalog Manager. As defined in Rule Manager, rules apply when you are placing a label. The following four types of labels are Title Block, Flow Arrow, Component, and Break. Title Block The title block label is unique among label types because you do not have to identify the item to receive the label. The title block usually displays general information about a drawing. After you select the label in the list view, you can drag it to the location in the drawing where you want to assign the label. You cannot modify label properties for a title block. The different template files, which create new drawing files, contain different title blocks. Therefore, you can automatically place standard title blocks in standard drawings, which are built on standard templates. Or, you can create custom title block labels to fit your custom templates.

Flow Arrow You place flow arrows in process piping lines. When you place the label, the arrow orients itself with the flow in the pipe run if you have already defined flow direction. If you have not specified a flow direction, then the direction you place the flow arrow defines it for you (that is, a flow arrow is a driving label). As you drag the label from the list view of Catalog Explorer, pipe runs in the Drawing view are highlighted when you pause over them. Click a highlighted pipe run to place the label. Flow arrows require only one click to place them.

SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 191

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview After placing the label, you can change the flow direction of the pipe run in the Properties window, and the flow arrow reorients itself accordingly. You cannot change label properties that appear in the Properties window for a flow arrow.

Component This type of label identifies physical commodities in the model. A typical example is an Equipment ID label. Properties assigned to the label affect its behavior. Component labels have a unique property: Label Behavior. The values are defined in a select list in Data Dictionary Manager and are chosen in Catalog Manager when you create a label. The default value is Follow. Values for this property can include the following:

Follow (no rotate) - The label does move but does not rotate, corresponding to changes to the labeled item. Follow - The label does move and rotate, corresponding to changes to the labeled item. Fixed - The label does not move if you move the labeled item.

This illustration shows component labels that you use to label vessels, nozzles, and piping components. It also depicts both fixed and rotated orientations of labels.

192 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Break A break label, or property break label, graphically shows that a change occurs or can occur in a property at some point in the process. This label indicates to the software that an inconsistency for that property is acceptable. As a result, the software does not issue a warning, or an existing inconsistency resolves itself when you place the break. Break labels do not set properties but note that a value change is acceptable for the property at the indicated point. Text included in the label reflects the property at that point. You can associate multiple property breaks with one point on the drawing.

You place property break labels, in the Segment Breaks node of Catalog Explorer, with two-point placement. Notes

You can turn on or off the Is Leader Visible property in Catalog Manager. After you place the label, you can right-click the label, and then click Leader line display on the shortcut menu to control the display of the leader line in the drawing software. Use care when you assign leader lines. You can place several break labels at one point, and multiple leader lines can be confusing.

Related Topics • Place a Label from Catalog Explorer, page 184

SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 193

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview

Place a Title Block
1. Find the title block that corresponds to your drawing template in the Catalog Explorer List view. 2. Click the label and position it over the pre-defined title area on the drawing so that the elements of the label fall within the cells of the title area. 3. Click to place the title block. 4. Press Esc to quit placement mode. Tips

You can review the properties of the title block label in the Properties window, but for title blocks, you cannot modify those properties. If you want to modify drawing properties, which are displayed in the title block label, you can do so in Drawing Manager. For more information, see Drawing Manager Help. You can move the title block if you need to position it more carefully within the title area of the drawing. For more information, see Move an Item With the Select Tool, page 218.

Related Topics • One-Point Label Placement, page 184 • Using the Types of Labels: An Overview, page 191

Place a Flow Arrow
1. Find the flow arrow in the list view of Catalog Explorer and select it. 2. Position your pointer over the process line that you want to label. 3. If a flow direction has not been specified, then choose an orientation for the arrow so that it reflects the correct direction. Tips

If a flow direction has already been specified for the line, then the flow arrow orients itself so that it reflects that property.

If you pause over a line whose flow direction has not been defined, you can use PickQuick to position the flow arrow. 4. Click to place the flow arrow on the process line.

5. Continue placing flow arrows, or click Esc to quit placement mode. Note

You must change the flow direction of a line by changing the property in the Properties window. Do not rotate a flow arrow by using the Rotate command or the rotate handle in order to change the flow direction; flow direction is a property.

194 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide

3. page 191 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 195 . page 182 • Two-Point Label Placement. 4. choose the label that you want to place. page 188. page 197 • One-Point Label Placement. page 182 • Using the Types of Labels: An Overview. page 197 • One-Point Label Placement. Place the label using either one-point or two-point placement methods. page 187 • Using the Types of Labels: An Overview. depending on the label. see Place a One-Point Label. page 186 and Place a Two-Point Label. From the list view in Catalog Explorer. page 191 Place a Component Label 1. For more information. page 184 • Placing Labels: An Overview. page 184 • Placing Labels: An Overview.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Related Topics • Labeled Item Type. Related Topics • Labeled Item Type. Place the pointer over the component that you want to label. Continue placing the same label or click Esc to quit placement mode. 2.

the second click (2) designates the location for the break label itself. Notes • You can turn on or off the Is Leader Visible property in Catalog Manager. The first click (1) specifies the junction in the process line. you can right-click the label. select the break label that you want to place. Continue placing the same break label at other junctions in the drawing.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Place a Break Label 1. After you place the label. page 191 196 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . page 182 • Two-Point Label Placement. • Related Topics • Consistency Checking: An Overview. 2. page 313 • Placing Labels: An Overview. You can place several break labels at one point. or press Esc to quit placement mode. and then click Leader line display on the shortcut menu to control the display of the leader line in the drawing software. Use care when you assign leader lines. page 187 • Using the Types of Labels: An Overview. Place the break label using two-point placement. From the List view in Catalog Explorer. • 3. and multiple leader lines can be confusing. Tip The Catalog Explorer Tree view node where break labels are located is called Segment Breaks.

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview

Label Properties: An Overview
The following label properties are available for specifying your labels.

Labeled Item Type
This property defines the type of item that your label is used with. When you create a label in Catalog Manager, you must specify this property; you cannot change it in the design software. The property must be defined correctly to allow you to place labels. When you create a label in Catalog Manager, you choose the labeled item type from the Item list in the SmartText Editor. That list is defined in Data Dictionary Manager, where all the valid item types are defined and stored. Examples of labeled item types include pipe run, instrument, piping component, equipment, and so forth. If you specify that the labeled item type is a pipe run, then you can place your label on a pipe run and not on any other type of item in your drawing. Related Topics • Place a Label from Catalog Explorer, page 184

Offset Distance
This property defines the distance from the labeled item to the label. Offset distance applies for labels that are defined with one-point placement. This property also applies for two-point label placement if the property for offset source is set to Local. The property must be defined correctly in Catalog Manager to allow you to place your label. The actual plant-wide offset distance is specified in Options Manager. The software measures the distance from the bounding box of the item to receive the label and the bounding box of the label itself. Consider the offset as the clearance distance between the bounding boxes. Notes

The bounding box in SmartPlant P&ID differs from the SmartSketch definition of range. SmartSketch (A) uses the x-y coordinate range around an item. SmartPlant P&ID (B) uses a rectangular area.

For a line segment, the bounding box is the line itself.

SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 197

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Related Topics • Place a Label from Catalog Explorer, page 184

Offset Source
This property specifies the origin for the offset distance. The possible values for offset sources are None - The label does not have an offset. This value indicates placement at the center of the labeled item. Project Settings - Plant-level parameters determine the offset distance. You can use Options Manager to define the plant settings distance. Local - The label does have an offset, and the value for the Offset Distance property, which is specified in Catalog Manager, defines the offset to use. You set this property when you create a label in Catalog Manager. Afterwards, you cannot change the offset source property in the drawing software. Likewise, you set the local offset distance when you create a label, and you cannot change the property in the drawing software. Related Topics • Place a Label from Catalog Explorer, page 184

Is Mirrorable
The value of this property is set to True to indicate that you can mirror the item. The value of this property is set to False to indicate that you cannot create a reverse image. You define this property when you create a label in Catalog Manager. Related Topics • Place a Label from Catalog Explorer, page 184

Disable Flip Text
This value allows you to rotate or orient text for readability. By default, the software displays text in a readable manner and will not allow it to display upside down. For example, if you move a label in a direction that would effect the readability of the text, the software automatically flips the text so that it can still be read. Using Catalog Manager, you can disable this option and allow the text to display upside down if needed. Related Topics • Placing Labels: An Overview, page 182 • Working With the Properties Window: An Overview, page 83

198 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview

Is Rotatable
The value of this property is set to True to indicate that you can rotate the item. The value of this property is set to False to indicate that you cannot change the angular orientation. You set this property when you create a label in Catalog Manager. Related Topics • Place a Label from Catalog Explorer, page 184

Is Fit To Text
The value of this property is set to True if the label graphics must fit around the text when you place the label. The value of this property is set to False if the label graphics do not need to fit around text. You can change the designation in Catalog Manager. You can set the value to True only for enclosures that are circles, ellipses, rectangles, or parametrics. You set the Is Fit To Text property when you create a label in Catalog Manager. The following illustration is an example of a label with the Is Fit To Text property set to False. The rectangle appears at the same size when you created it:

This illustration is an example of a label with the Is Fit To Text property set to True. The rectangle resizes to fit around the text:

Related Topics • Place a Label from Catalog Explorer, page 184 • Place a One-Point Label, page 186 • Place a Two-Point Label, page 188 • Place an Annotation, page 211

Is Leader Visible
The value of this property is set to True to indicate that the label includes a leader line. The value of this property is set to False to indicate that the label does not include a leader line. You set this property when you create a label in Catalog Manager. You can turn on or off the display of the leader line after you place the label.

SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 199

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Note

To turn on or turn off the display of the leader line, right-click the label, and click Leader line display.

Related Topics • Manipulate a Leader Line, page 190 • Place a Label from Catalog Explorer, page 184

Label Terminator Styles
The Terminator Style property specifies the terminator, if any, to place at the end of a leader line. Choices include None, Arrow, Solid Dot, and so forth. This property applies only to labels whose value of the Leader Line property is set to True. You specify these properties when you create a label in Catalog Manager. Afterwards, you cannot change the terminator type property in the design software. Related Topics • Place a Label from Catalog Explorer, page 184

200 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview

Using Off-Page and Utility Connectors: An Overview
A connector is not actually a label but more like a component that includes a label. Placement behavior for a connector is very similar to a standard piping component label. OPCs, utility connectors, and piping components are inserted into a line. The drawing needs a connector when a line run continues on another drawing. The minimum information in the label portion is the drawing name to which the connector points and the connector number. Connectors do not have a property for flow direction, although most connectors use an arrowhead to indicate direction. When you place a connector, it does not set or respond to flow direction. The connector represents continuation, not connectivity or flow. During document creation, when you place the first connector of the pair, the software places the partner in either the Stockpile or the stockpile of another drawing of your choice. The default placement for the partner is into the Stockpile. When you create a connector and place it in a drawing, the property for the drawing name is not defined. The partner in the stockpile reflects the drawing name in which its match was located. When you place the partner from the stockpile, the first connector is updated to reflect the drawing name where you placed the partner connector. As a result, you never need to type a drawing name, and the software guarantees a valid match. OPC pairs have a to and from orientation. The software does not use the graphical to and from distinctions, but reading the drawing is easier for you with this differentiation.

1. The OPC is a to connector if its connected point appears at the finish end of the connector. 2. The OPC is a from connector if its connected point appears at the start end of the connector. In order to switch between to and from orientations, you must disconnect the OPC from the line and then rotate or mirror it. Then you can reconnect the line to the other end of the OPC. At the time of placement, you can pause when placing the OPC and wait for the PickQuick toolbar in order to choose the correct orientation.

SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 201

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview You can delete a connector from the drawing, and the software moves it to a stockpile and updates the properties of its partner. To delete a connector from a stockpile, both must reside there, and you delete both from a stockpile. After you delete a connector, you cannot reuse the same number. You cannot change the connector number or drawing name in these labels. However, you can change other properties. If you copy a connector, the software must generate new connector numbers and add a partner to a stockpile. The property for drawing name changes to Null or Undefined for the copy. These properties exist for connectors:
• • •

Offset source is set to None. Rotation is set to True. Leader line is set to False.

In Catalog Explorer, Off-Drawing or Off-Unit OPCs are available for instruments. Two types of connectors are available for process lines: Off-Drawing or Off-Unit OPCs or Utility Connectors. The correct symbology differentiates OPCs. You define symbology with Options Manager. Related Topics • Change Default Storage Location for Partner Connector, page 204 • Place a Label from Catalog Explorer, page 184 • Place a One-Point Label, page 186 • Place an OPC or Utility Connector, page 202 • Store a Partner Connector, page 204

Place an OPC or Utility Connector
1. From the list view in Catalog Explorer or from a stockpile, select the connector that you want to place. Tip In Catalog Explorer, Off-Drawing or Off-Unit OPCs are available for instruments. Two types of connectors are available for process lines: Off-Drawing or Off-Unit OPCs or Utility Connectors. The correct symbology (for example, line weight and color) differentiates OPCs. You define symbology with Options Manager. 2. Click the location in the drawing where you want to place the connector.

Tips

You can place a connector in free space on the drawing and route a line to it, or you can place it at the end of a line that already is drawn. If you are placing a connector in free space, rotate or mirror the OPC after placement in order to get the correct orientation. Then route the line to it.

202 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview If you are placing a connector at the end of an existing line, you can wait for the PickQuick toolbar so that you can choose the correct orientation. 3. Modify the properties of the connector in the Properties window.

Tip

If you placed a new connector from Catalog Explorer, you can display and select the partner in the Engineering Data Editor and modify its properties, too.

Notes

Utility connectors support only one-to-one relationships. In other words, they come in pairs only. When you place a utility connector and its partner goes to a stockpile, that partner connector is of the same type as the first connector you placed. In order to change the partner connector to the other type of utility connector, you must place the partner in its drawing and then replace the symbol. For more information on replacing symbols, see Replace an Item Using Replace Mode, page 233.

Related Topics • One-Point Label Placement, page 184 • Placing Labels: An Overview, page 182 • Using Off-Page and Utility Connectors: An Overview, page 201

ToFromText Dialog Box (Properties Window)
Opens when you click To / From in the Properties window when an OPC or other connector is selected, and allows you to enter a text value to be displayed in the connector. Click the ellipses to open the ToFromText dialog box. Description - Allows you to enter to or from information for the connector. You can enter drawing names or numbers or other pertinent information about the connected drawing or the direction of flow. Related Topics Properties Window Command, page 84 • Review and Edit Item Properties, page 87

SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 203

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview

Change Default Storage Location for Partner Connector
1. Click Tools > Options. 2. Go to the Placement tab. 3. Select or clear the Place partner OPC in Stockpile option. Note

If the Place partner OPC in Stockpile option is not selected, the Set Stockpile Location for Partner OPC dialog box appears whenever you place a connector. This dialog box allows you to place each partner OPC in the stockpile of a specific drawing.

Related Topics Place an OPC or Utility Connector, page 202 • Store a Partner Connector, page 204

Store a Partner Connector
1. Place a connector in a drawing. 2. On the Set Stockpile Location of Partner OPC dialog box, choose the stockpile in which you want the partner stored. Tip

If you have not deactivated the default storage for connectors, this dialog box does not appear because the partner connector is placed directly into the Stockpile. However, you can change the default storage location. For more information, see Change Default Storage Location for Partner Connector, page 204

Related Topics • Change Default Storage Location for Partner Connector, page 204 • Using Off-Page and Utility Connectors: An Overview, page 201

Move a Connector to Another Stockpile
1. In the Engineering Data Editor, select the connector that you want to move. 2. On the Engineering Data Editor toolbar, click File > Move to Different Stockpile. Tip

If you select a connector that you do not have write privileges for, then the Move to Different Stockpile command is not available. That is, you cannot move a connector that belongs to a different drawing, for instance.

204 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview 3. On the Move to Different Stockpile dialog box, select the plant hierarchy element that contains the drawing whose stockpile you want to assign the connector to. Tip If you do not want to place the connector in a stockpile of a specific drawing, you can select Stockpile at the bottom of the Plant hierarchy tree. 4. In the Drawing list area, select the drawing whose stockpile you want to add the partner to.

Related Topics • Using Off-Page and Utility Connectors: An Overview, page 201

Move Partner OPC Command
Connector Shortcut Menu > Move Partner OPC Opens the Move Partner OPC dialog box, from which you can move the selected connector to the stockpile of any drawing in the active plant. This command is available only when the partner connector is located in the Stockpile. Related Topics • Move a Partner Connector to Another Stockpile, page 206 • Using Off-Page and Utility Connectors: An Overview, page 201

Move Partner OPC Dialog Box
Opens when you click Move Partner OPC on the Connector shortcut menu. This dialog box allows you to move a partner connector from the Stockpile into the stockpile of a specific drawing, or vice versa. Plant Hierarchy - Displays the hierarchical tree representation of the plant. When you select a node, the drawings associated with that node appear in Drawing list. Drawing list - Displays all the drawings associated with the selected node on the Plant Hierarchy tree. Related Topics Move a Partner Connector to Another Stockpile, page 206 • Move Partner OPC Command, page 205

SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 205

For more information. In the Drawing list area. This command is not available if the partner connector is not located in the drawing stockpile. Tip If you select a connector that you do not have write privileges for. • Note • If the partner connector is in a stockpile and is displayed in the Engineering Data Editor. select the plant hierarchy element that contains the drawing whose stockpile you want to assign the connector to. then the Move Partner OPC command is not available. page 201 Open Continuation Drawing Command Connector Shortcut Menu > Open Continuation Drawing Opens the connected drawing when the partner of the selected off-page or utility connector is in a drawing or a drawing stockpile. page 204. • Tip If you do not want to place the connector in a stockpile of a specific drawing. see Open a Continuation Drawing. you cannot move it. 2. right-click the connector whose partner you want to move. if the partner connector belongs to another drawing. select the drawing whose stockpile you want to add the partner to. page 207. you can use the Open Partner Drawing command on the shortcut menu to open the other drawing and move the connector from its stockpile. That is. 4. Related Topics • Open a Continuation Drawing. you can select Stockpile at the bottom of the Plant hierarchy tree. page 201 206 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . On the Move Partner OPC dialog box. page 207 • Using Off-Page and Utility Connectors: An Overview. 3. However. see Move a Connector to Another Stockpile. click Move Partner OPC. you can move it from there. In the Drawing view. for instance. For more information about opening the partner drawing.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Move a Partner Connector to Another Stockpile 1. From the shortcut menu. Related Topics • Using Off-Page and Utility Connectors: An Overview.

if you are deleting a connector. then its partner is deleted from the stockpile as well. Right-click the connector. the command is not available unless the partner connector is in the Stockpile. page 207 • Using Off-Page and Utility Connectors: An Overview.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Open a Continuation Drawing 1. • Note • The selected connector and its partner in the Stockpile are removed from the model. 2. page 201 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 207 . page 201 Delete From Model Command Connector Shortcut Menu > Delete From Model Deletes the selected item from the database. which moves the selected item to the Stockpile. Tips • This command is available only when the partner of the selected connector is stored in the Stockpile. Related Topics • Using Off-Page and Utility Connectors: An Overview. If you want to move the connector to the Stockpile instead of deleting it completely from the database. page 201 Delete a Connector From the Model 1. Notes • Unlike the standard Delete command. 3. this command removes the selected items or connector and its partner from the model completely. • Related Topics • Delete a Connector From the Model. click Delete From Model. 2. Related Topics • Open Continuation Drawing Command. In the case of the connector. From the shortcut menu. Right-click the connector that you want to remove from the model. Select the OPC or utility connector whose connected drawing you want to open. page 206 • Using Off-Page and Utility Connectors: An Overview. click Open Continuation Drawing. click Delete on the shortcut menu. From the shortcut menu.

connect to process. mechanical equipment. and tag reformatting. signal runs with a plant item type pipe run (hydraulic. Instrument Item Tag Structure Format Instrument Type Modifier Measured Variable Code Tag Sequence Number Loop Tag Suffix Tag Suffix (Instrument Type Modifier)(Measured Variable Code)-(Tag Sequence Number) Loop Tag Suffix(Tag Suffix) Instrument Loop Item Tag Structure Format Instrument Loop Function Tag Sequence Number Tag Suffix (Instrument Loop Function)-(Tag Sequence Number)(Tag Suffix) Pipe Run Item Tag Structure Format Unit Code Tag Sequence Number Tag Suffix Fluid Code (Unit Code)(Tag Sequence Number)(Tag Suffix)-(Operating Fluid Code) 208 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Property validation is triggered when any property that comprises the Item Tag value is added or modified. The following tables list item types that are validated or calculated by the ItemTag project.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Calling Item Tag Validation The ItemTag project performs calculations and validations for unique tag checking. Legend Italics: Required for checking item tag uniqueness. pipe runs. The ItemTag project deals specifically with the following item types: instrument loops. Bold Italics: Required for the item tag. This project disregards all other item types. and vessels). This project generates unique Item Tag values and maintains consistency between the Item Tag value and the properties used in its calculation. automatic tag generation. and equipment (other equipment. instruments. equipment components. exchangers. but can be generated automatically. Calculation can be triggered by the Item Tag property for any of the items shown in the tables below. and the database tables and column names where modifications trigger calculation and validation. and so forth).

page 13 • Modify a Pump by Importing a SmartPlant P&ID Report into the Stockpile. and Item Tag properties for instruments are not read-only so that implied instruments can have item tags that are assigned manually. clear the selection of the instrument and then select it again. page 178 • Display Help for Programming With SmartPlant P&ID. • • Related Topics • Add Instruments to a Loop. Item Tag cells for these item types are read-only except for those of signal runs. see the SmartPlant P&ID Programmer's Guide or click Related Topics. page 268 • Review and Edit Item Properties.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Equipment Item Tag Structure Tag Prefix Tag Sequence Number Tag Suffix Format (Tag Prefix)-(Tag Sequence Number)(Tag Suffix) Equipment Component Item Tag Structure Format Nozzle Item Tag Structure Item Tag Signal Runs (Plant Item Type Pipe Run) Item Tag Structure Format Unit Code Operating Fluid Code Tag Sequence NumberTag Suffix Unit Code(Operating Fluid Code)-(Tag Sequence Number)(Tag Suffix) Tag Prefix Tag Sequence Number Tag Suffix (Tag Prefix)-(Tag Sequence Number)(Tag Suffix) Notes • To refresh the instrument loop tag suffix in the Properties window. For information on customizing the software. including item tag formats. page 87 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 209 .

When you place an annotation. remarks. and other information to your drawing. you can then place a label on the item note. Placing annotations works like placing any other component in a drawing. Because annotations are frequently parametric. Note • Annotations are a way to place free remarks in a drawing. often you can resize them to fit your needs. page 211 210 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . there is one item in the Labels folder with an annotation point built into it. which has an item type of item note. making the drawing unusable.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Using Annotations: An Overview Annotations are model items used to add notes. Item note Related Topics • Place a Revision Cloud. These labels allow you to enter the remarks. on a drawing. and it looks like this: 1. You can use annotations to include any type of information previously inserted into a drawing using primitive commands. however. The plain annotation point is located in the Graphics folder under the Annotation node. page 214 • Place an Annotation. Most of these labels require placing an annotation point or other design graphic on the drawing first and then attaching a label to the graphic. Caution • You cannot annotate drawings by opening them in SmartSketch and adding dumb graphics to the drawing. Opening and saving a . Annotation point 2.pid file in SmartSketch can corrupt the file. There are several design labels of different formats available in Catalog Explorer. It is called Item Note & Label. and other information that you need to effectively annotate your drawings. notes. Annotations include everything from geometric shapes to extension and dimension lines.

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Place an Annotation 1. it automatically displays that text. Click to place the annotation at the appropriate place in the drawing. page 210 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 211 . page 239. Assign text to the annotation in the Note Text property box in the Properties window. see Scale a Parametric Item. To add text to the annotation. In the Catalog Explorer list view. Most of these labels require placing an annotation point or other design graphic on the drawing first and then attaching a label to the graphic. page 182 • Using Annotations: An Overview. 4. The plain annotation point is located in the Graphics folder under the Annotation node. Item note Related Topics • Placing Labels: An Overview. 2. Tip • You can also assign text to the graphic in the Note Text property box for the graphic. Annotation point 2. there is one item in the Labels folder with an annotation point built into it. For more information. select the annotation that you want to place from the Graphics folder. Press Esc to quit placement mode. For more information. and when you add a label. page 188 and Place a One-Point Label. however. 5. The symbol is called Item Note & Label. 3. page 186. and it looks like this: • 1. place a design label on the annotation. as in the procedure above. Note • You can resize annotations by dragging their parametric handles. There are several design labels of different formats available in Catalog Explorer. see Place a Two-Point Label.

The value for the inside area break overrides the value for the outside area. Press Esc to quit placement mode. Create a select set of the items that you want to include in the area break.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Place an Area Break 1. 3. In the Properties window. specify the properties for the select set. Or you can place a multi-sided area break by clicking at a starting point and then clicking for each vertex of the shape. You can nest area breaks that have different values for the same property with one restriction: one area break must completely enclose the other area break. • 4. you can designate a portion as Supply By Contractor and a smaller portion as Supply By Owner. For example. 5. for a group of items. page 83 212 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . page 144 • Working With the Properties Window: An Overview. Notes • • An area break is a logical grouping of design items. • Related Topics • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview. including the area break shape itself. Tips • You can place a rectangular area break by dragging the pointer in the Drawing view. You can place area breaks that do not have common properties within or overlapping other area breaks. Place the area break shape around items in the Drawing view for which this area break applies. like fencing items with the Select Tool. Select the area break in Catalog Explorer in the Design node. 2.

7. choose Select Set from the Properties box. In the Drawing view. Press Esc to quit placement mode. Tip • Some catalog items do not possess the Pkg Item Tag property. • Related Topics • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview. 2.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Place a Package 1. 3. 5. In the Properties window. For more information about moving plant item groups from one stockpile to another. 8. page 265. see Move a Stockpile Item to the Stockpile of Another Drawing. 6. Notes • Packages normally reside in a stockpile with their members residing on drawings. whichever is appropriate. select items to be part of the package. Select the package in the stockpile. enter a value for the Item Tag property. Moving the package itself to another stockpile has special limitations. you can display it by selecting an item and then selecting Edit > Properties on the main menu bar. Right-click the package symbol in Catalog Explorer in the Design node. If the Properties window is not visible. In the Properties window. 4. Do not include those items in your select set because the package item tag does not appear in the Properties window if any member of the select set does not possess that property. In the Properties window. click in the Pkg Item Tag box and select the appropriate value displayed list. select either Send to Stockpile or Send to Drawing Stockpile. page 144 • Working With the Properties Window: An Overview. page 83 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 213 . From the shortcut menu.

page 210 214 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .Small. 4. In a clockwise direction. Set the Area Break Style property to either a Cloud . Related Topics • Using Annotations: An Overview. Notes • You can change the symbology. continue clicking to place vertices on the revision cloud.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Place a Revision Cloud 1. 3. Click the starting point in the drawing for the revision cloud area. select the Symbols > Design > Revision Cloud nodes.Large or Cloud . Using the Catalog Explorer tree. Right-click to complete the revision cloud. the line width and line style using the Symbology option in Options Manager. 5. 2.

You can select a entire row by clicking on the corresponding row number to the left of the table and then viewing the properties in the Properties window and editing them there. as well as as you place them. You can also move groups of items to another open drawing in the same plant hierarchy. Many items are now scalable. Depending on the rules defined for particular items in the drawing. while it allows modification of other characteristics of the item. and you can only move these inside the equipment. If you want to change the orientation of items. you can move items or groups of items from one location to another in the drawing. If you want to remove an item from a drawing. If the Properties window is not open. it disappears from the drawing completely. and can be resized by using their scale handles. Rule Manager defines rules that determine the way that model items interact during manipulation. Resizing parametric items maintains certain characteristics of the item. The software processes rules defined for items as you move them. Notes • When modifying the fluid code properties of a line. To redisplay a complete list of available fluid code values. too. You can permanently remove required items from the plant model using the Delete from Model command.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Modifying and Moving Placed Items: An Overview After you place items in a drawing. If the plant model requires the deleted item. the item appears in the stockpile for later placement. You can resize or scale parametric items by using their parametric handles. limits exist for possible placements. you can mirror and rotate most items. Obviously. such as the length of its sides. specific trays can be flagged for placement inside a piece of equipment. you can display it by selecting an item and then selecting Edit > Properties. and then the complete list of fluid code values appears. If the plant model does not require the item. you can delete the item. The fluid code list displays only codes beginning with the first letter of any previously selected fluid code for that line. For example. you can modify the items in several ways. such as angles between elements of the symbol. You can modify the properties of each item by selecting the item and changing individual properties in the Properties window. • SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 215 . you select a fluid code from the select list. Also you can edit some item properties in the Engineering Data Editor in the Design window by selecting a table cell and filling in the appropriate information. delete the property for the fluid system.

The Undo command does not reverse view manipulations. page 217 216 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Related Topics • Mirror an Item Using Its Mirror Handle. The undo list is cleared if you perform any of the following actions: • Change the properties of the Drawing view on the View Properties dialog box Turn the display of inconsistency indicators off or on by clicking View > Show Inconsistencies Add a filter tab to the Drawing view Click File > Save Open a different drawing or toggle to another open drawing Open a new Drawing view or new Engineering Data Editor (EDE) Using commands in the EDE or on the Connector shortcut menu. however. This definition of an action holds true for select sets. Related Topics • Modifying and Moving Placed Items: An Overview. page 241 • Move a Select Set to Another Open Drawing. Up to ten operations are saved in the undo list. Modifying item properties is an action. move a connector to another drawing stockpile Changing or viewing the claim status of drawing objects • • • • • • • An undoable action is defined in several ways. and for multiple items selected in the EDE. Running a command is usually an action. page 239 • Scale a Parametric Item. page 215 • Undo Your Last Action. and you can undo them by repeated use of the Undo command. page 87 • Scale a Drawing Item. page 239 Undo Command Edit > Undo Allows you to reject the last action that you completed. page 219 • Review and Edit Item Properties. and the action ends when another item is selected. the View > Previous command is still available for that purpose. not one action for each member of the set. modifying the properties of a select set is one action in and of itself. page 223 • Move an Item Using the Move Button. too. That is.

When you finish manipulating the view. page 219 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 217 . If the Undo button is not available. If you move an item that owns other items. Fit. You can move one or multiple items at a time. such as Zoom. the owned items move also. and you can move select sets. and you can no longer undo your last action.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Undo Your Last Action Click Undo Tips • • . move it to the Stockpile. open the second drawing and place the item from the stockpile. if you move a vessel that owns trays and nozzles. the View > Previous command is still available for that purpose. Note • • The Undo command does not reverse view manipulations. however. • • Related Topics • Move an Item Using the Move Button. Notes • If you want to move an item to another drawing. Pressing Ctrl + Z also undoes your last action. You can specify the locations by clicking the drawing sheet or by entering relative values in the Move ribbon. page 216 Move Command Edit > Move Moves items from one location to another. the software returns you to the Move command at the point where you were when you started manipulating the view. Related Topics • Modifying and Moving Placed Items: An Overview. You can access this command from the Edit menu or the main toolbar. page 144 • Undo Command. You can use other view manipulation commands. then the undo list has been cleared. page 215 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview. and Pan. The Undo command stores up to 10 actions making this command available repeatedly. while you are using the Move command. the trays and nozzles move with the vessel. For example.

click the Select Tool . Y . page 219 • Move Command. page 238 • Modifying and Moving Placed Items: An Overview.Increases or decreases the value in the ribbon boxes. typing a step value of 0. or you can simply observe the value as you drag the object. Drag the item to its new position.Allows you to enter an explicit value for the distance to move in the y-coordinate. Tip The pointer snaps to the keypoint thereby making it easier for you to control the exact locus of the move. On the main toolbar. Position the pointer over the item that you want to move. • Related Topics • Manipulating Items With Component Handles: An Overview. Step Distance . page 217 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview. page 144 218 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . On the main toolbar.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Move Ribbon Specifies the from point and to point when you move items.Allows you to enter an explicit value for the distance to move in the x-coordinate. X .5. 3. Copy .75. For example. page 215 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview. from 0. Tip Dragging a handle modifies the item instead of moving it. Position the pointer over the item but not over any of the handles of the item. or you can simply observe the value as you drag the object. 3. click Select Tool. 2. at a location where the software recognizes a keypoint . and so forth. Related Topics • Move an Item Using the Move Button. • Move an item with precision 1. 0. 2. Drag the item to its new position. page 144 Move an Item With the Select Tool 1.25 and pointing away from the from point increases the distance in discrete steps.25 to 0.Copies the items in the select set when you move them.

and y-axis. If you want to copy the item. 2. 4. such as Zoom. Click to define the to point. move it to the Stockpile. press Ctrl when you place the item. Tip • . and you must click in the appropriate portion of the drawing to specify to which quadrant you want to move or copy the item or items. the software returns you to the Move command at the point where you were when you started manipulating the view. the owned items move also. page 152 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 219 . Select the item and then drag it to its new location. You can use other view manipulation commands. You can use the Move ribbon to specify the to point. while you are using the Move command. click Move 3. and Pan. open the second drawing.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Move an Item Using the Move Button 1. You can drag an item without using Move. Notes • If you move an item that owns other items. press Ctrl while you drag. If you want to copy the items. Fit. The values are relative distances along the x. and place the item from the stockpile. Click to define the from point. On the main toolbar. When you finish manipulating the view. • • • • Related Topics • Placing Equipment: An Overview. Select one or more items. If you want to move an item to another drawing. if you move a vessel that owns trays and nozzles. For example. the trays and nozzles move with the vessel.

3. When you move a line segment. You can change values for the properties of the line by clicking the line and then selecting or typing the new values in the appropriate rows in the Properties window. you can display it by clicking the line and then selecting Edit > Properties on the main menu bar. select the line that you want to move. If the Properties window is not open. Press Esc at any time to stop changing the selected line. If you want to override those rules. In the Drawing view.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Move a Line 1. Point near the center of the appropriate line. or press Alt while routing a line or click Alter Segment on the Line Routing ribbon to override the current line vector and allow routing in any direction and at any angle. • • • Related Topics • Move a Line Using Vertex Handles. drag the segment to the new The software applies geometrical line routing rules as you move a line. press Shift as you move the line. 2. Notes • . page 221 • Routing Lines: An Overview. the software changes the length of attached line segments to accommodate the move. When the pointer turns into a double arrow location and release. page 156 220 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .

Notes • While moving the vertex handle to modify the line segment. 2. 3. Press Esc at any time to stop changing the selected line. • • Related Topics • Routing Lines: An Overview. click Alter Segment on the Line Routing ribbon or press Alt to allow the line segments to move freely at any angle. Click an existing line in the drawing.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Move a Line Using Vertex Handles 1. page 156 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 221 . Click the vertex handle of the line route that you want to move. you can display it by clicking the line and then selecting Edit > Properties on the main menu bar. Drag the vertex to a new position in the drawing and release. If the Properties window is not open. You can change values for the properties of the line by clicking the line and then specifying the new values in the appropriate rows in the Properties window.

or item note) not in the select set but they are dependent on objects in the select set. If there is a label in the select set and the item that it labels is not in the select set. the Move To Drawing dialog box appears. equipment component. and neither of these drawings can be read-only.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Move To Drawing Command Edit > Move To Drawing Allows you to move a select set of drawing items into another open drawing. these objects are automatically added to the select set. If there are dependent objects (such as a nozzle. or item note) in the select set. page 223 • 222 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . • • • If more than one possible destination drawing is open. actuator. equipment component. If there is a dependent object (such as a nozzle. and if the parent object that it is dependent upon is not in the select set. The drawing objects to be moved must be selected. page 215 • Move a Select Set to Another Open Drawing. Related Topics Modifying and Moving Placed Items: An Overview. these labels are automatically added to the select set. • OPCs cannot be moved from one drawing to another using this command. actuator. that label is removed. You must have the appropriate permissions to modify the items in the select set. The Move To Drawing command manipulates the select set in order to make sure the selected items are appropriate items to move. it is removed. These conditions must be met in order for this command to be available: • The source and destination drawing must be open. • The command expands the select set to include the following objects: • If there are labels that are not in the select set but are attached to objects in the select set. Title blocks are automatically removed from the select set. The command removes these objects from the select set: • • • Inserted OLE objects are automatically removed from the select set. and you can select the appropriate destination drawing. The selected items must not have a connection to any items outside the select set.

The Move to Drawing dialog box displays. Those drawings that are not included in the list are the source drawing. 4. open read-only drawings. Available drawings . • 6. 5. Select the items that you want to move into the destination drawing. the following conditions must be met: The source and destination drawing must be open. • • • SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 223 . page 222 Move a Select Set to Another Open Drawing 1. Related Topics • Move a Select Set to Another Open Drawing. Tips • For the purposes of placement in the destination drawing. Notes • In order for the Move To Drawing command to be available. and neither of these drawings can be read-only. The selected items must not have a connection to any items outside the select set. While you are using a from point (or to in the destination drawing). 3. the from point becomes the origin of the select set.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Move To Drawing Dialog Box Allows you to choose the destination drawing that you want to place a item(s) into. 2. In the Drawing view of the destination drawing. page 223 • Move To Drawing Command. Then. Click Edit > Move To Drawing. In the Drawing view. click the to point. You must also have the item(s) selected that you want to move. open drawing templates. the pointer is a crosshair. Open the destination drawing if it is not already open. It contains a list of possible drawings that your item(s) can be moved to. then select the desired destination drawing from the Available Drawings list on the Move To Drawing dialog box. Select the drawing and click OK. click Edit > Move To Drawing and click in the drawing to define the Select from point. If more than one possible destination drawing is open. This dialog box displays only when you have more than one possible destination drawing open. The drawing objects to be moved must be selected. click the from point. and open assemblies.Lists the open drawings that are available to be a destination for the Move To Drawing command.

Also. page 215 224 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Logical relationships are preserved (for example. whose members are all moved to the new drawing. resides in the source drawing stockpile.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview • You must have the appropriate permissions to modify the items in the select set. • • • Related Topics • Modifying and Moving Placed Items: An Overview. if a logical group such as an instrument loop. the Undo command is not available for moving a select set to another drawing. loop or package relationships or plant group relationships). then that logical group moves to the stockpile of the destination drawing. OPCs cannot be moved from one drawing to another using this command. Since you have to switch to a different drawing.

page 229 • Replace Multiple Drawing Items Using Catalog Items. Or. page 226 • Find an Item by Using an Existing Drawing Item. page 228 • Find Drawing Inconsistencies. page 226 • Find an Item by Using an Existing Drawing Item. page 226 • Replace a Single Drawing Item. Having found all drawing items of a certain type. Replacing drawing items is straightforward. the selected items are added to a select set. replace many items one-by-one. page 231 Find Command Edit > Find Displays the Find and Replace dialog box. page 227 • Find an Item by Using a Filter. You can replace items by using the options on this dialog box. The software also searches your drawing for inconsistency indicators so that you can review and correct inconsistencies systematically. Related Topics • Find a Drawing Item by Using a Catalog Item. too. you can modify their properties or reposition them or even replace them with an item of a compatible type. or even replace all items of one type at the same time. You have the capability to replace a single drawing item with a comparable item. and so you can view the common properties of the select set items in the Properties window and edit them if appropriate. which allows you to search a drawing for items by using catalog items or a filter or to find inconsistencies in your drawing. The Find and Replace commands are not available in the Engineering Data Editor. You can define search criteria based on a catalog item or an item type already in place in your drawing.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Finding and Replacing Drawing Items: An Overview The software has the ability to find items and inconsistency indicators in your drawing. they are added to a select set. too. page 228 • Find Drawing Inconsistencies. page 226 • Finding and Replacing Drawing Items: An Overview. page 225 • SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 225 . you can define criteria based on a delivered filter or on a user-defined filter. Related Topics Find a Drawing Item by Using a Catalog Item. As drawing items are found. When you find or replace drawing items. page 227 • Find an Item by Using a Filter.

2. Notes • For detailed information about all your drawing inconsistencies one-byone. right-click the selected inconsistency and click Properties.. Use the Direction options to change the order in which drawing items are found. • 226 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Select an option from the Search in list. • • Related Topics • Consistency Checking: An Overview. Selecting Active Document enables the Scroll mode option. Click Edit > Find. page 225 Find an Item by Using a Filter 1. Use the Scroll mode options to control how the Drawing view changes when an inconsistency is selected. On the Find and Replace dialog box. Selecting Active Document enables the Scroll mode option. Choose an option from the Search in list. 4.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Find Drawing Inconsistencies 1. Click Find to search for and select the next item match in your drawing or click Find All to select all matches in the drawing items that meet the selected filter. 3. Click Edit > Find.. 4. Tip Selecting Active window disables the Scroll mode option.> from the Find what list. On the Find and Replace dialog box. select a filter to locate your drawing items. and click OK. and click Find on the Find and Replace dialog box to display information on the next drawing inconsistency. page 313 • Finding and Replacing Drawing Items: An Overview. 2. 5. select <Inconsistency> from the Find what list. Click Find to select the first inconsistency. On the Select Filter dialog box. • 5. Leave the Consistency Check dialog box open. select <Filter. Tip Selecting Active window disables the Scroll mode option. 3. Continue clicking Find to advance through the drawing inconsistencies.

• Related Topics • Finding and Replacing Drawing Items: An Overview. • Notes • Use the Scroll mode options to control how the Drawing view changes when a drawing item is found. and you can view the common properties of the set in the Properties window. select the catalog item type to search for. page 225 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 227 . and click OK. Tip Selecting Active window disables the Scroll mode option. 4. All the items are in the select set. • Related Topics • Finding and Replacing Drawing Items: An Overview. 5. On the Select Catalog Item dialog box. Select an option from Search in.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Notes • Use the Scroll mode options to control how the Drawing view changes when a drawing item is found. 3. Selecting Active Document enables the Scroll mode option. Use the Direction options to change the order in which single drawing items are found. select <Catalog Item> from the Find what list. Use the Direction options to change the order in which drawing items are found. Click Find to select the first match in the drawing or click Find All to select all matches in the drawing. page 225 Find a Drawing Item by Using a Catalog Item 1. Click Edit > Find 2. On the Find and Replace dialog box.

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview

Find an Item by Using an Existing Drawing Item
1. Select an item in your drawing. 2. Click Edit > Find. 3. On the Find and Replace dialog box, select an option from the Search in list. Tips

On the dialog box, the Find what option is automatically defined according to the drawing item you selected in the first step.

Selecting Active window disables the Scroll mode option. Selecting Active Document enables the Scroll mode option. 4. Click Find to search for and select the next matching item in the drawing or click Find All to select all matches in the drawing.

Notes

Use the Scroll mode options to control how the Drawing view changes when a drawing item is found. Use the Direction options to change the order in which drawing items are found.

Related Topics • Finding and Replacing Drawing Items: An Overview, page 225 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview, page 144

Replace Command
Edit > Replace Displays the Find and Replace dialog box, which allows you to replace some or all of the drawing items that match the search criteria defined by the options on the Find tab. Related Topics • Finding and Replacing Drawing Items: An Overview, page 225 • Replace a Single Drawing Item, page 229 • Replace an Item Using Replace Mode, page 233 • Replace Multiple Drawing Items Using Catalog Items, page 231 • Replace Multiple Drawing Items Using Filters, page 230

228 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview

Replace a Single Drawing Item
1. Select an existing item in your drawing. 2. Click Edit > Replace. 3. On the Find and Replace dialog box, select <Browse> from the Replace with list. 4. On the Select Catalog Item dialog box, select the catalog item to replace the selected drawing item, and click OK. 5. Choose an option from the Search in list. Tip Selecting Active window disables the Scroll mode option. Selecting Active Document enables the Scroll mode option. 6. Click Find to search for and select the first matching drawing item. If the selected item can be replaced with the item specified in Replace with, the Replace command is available.

7. Click Replace to replace the selected drawing item and to find and select the next matching item. Tip

Click Replace All to replace all instances of the selected drawing item with the item specified in the Replace with box.

Note

Use the Scroll mode options to control how the Drawing view changes when a drawing item is replaced.

Related Topics • Finding and Replacing Drawing Items: An Overview, page 225 • Replace Multiple Drawing Items Using Filters, page 230 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview, page 144

SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 229

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview

Replace Multiple Drawing Items Using Filters
1. Click Edit > Replace. 2. On the Find and Replace dialog box, select <Filter> from the Find what list. 3. On the Select Filter dialog box, choose the filter that you want to use to find drawing items, and click OK. 4. Select <Browse> from the Replace with list. 5. On the Select Catalog Item dialog box, choose the catalog item that you want to replace the drawing items you find with your filter, and click OK. 6. Select an option from the Search in list. Tip Selecting Active window disables the Scroll mode option. Selecting Active Document enables the Scroll mode option. 7. Click Find to search for and select the first match and to make the Replace All button available.

8. Click Replace All to replace all instances of the selected drawing item with the item defined in the Replace with box. Note

Use the Scroll mode options to control how the Drawing view changes when a drawing item is found.

Related Topics • Finding and Replacing Drawing Items: An Overview, page 225 • Replace a Single Drawing Item, page 229 • Replace Multiple Drawing Items Using Catalog Items, page 231

230 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview

Replace Multiple Drawing Items Using Catalog Items
1. Click Edit > Replace. 2. On the Find and Replace dialog box, select <Catalog Item> from the Find what list. 3. On the Select Catalog Item dialog box, select the item type from the catalog that you want to find in your drawing, and click OK. 4. On the Replace with list select <Browse>. 5. On the Select Catalog Item dialog box, select the item type that you want to replace the found item type with, and click OK. 6. Select an option from the Search in list. Tip Selecting Active window disables the Scroll mode option. Selecting Active Document enables the Scroll mode option. 7. Click Find to search for and select the first match and to enable the Replace All command.

8. Click Replace All to find and replace all matching items. Note

Use the Scroll mode options to control how the Drawing view changes when a drawing item is found.

Related Topics Finding and Replacing Drawing Items: An Overview, page 225

SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 231

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview

Replace Mode Command
Tools > Replace Mode Controls whether catalog items are placed as substitutions for existing drawing items or placed normally. When this mode is active, the software places catalog items only when they replace an existing drawing item. When this mode is not active, the software places catalog items as usual. The Replace Mode command works for like objects only. The item that you want to replace in the drawing must be of the same class: equipment class, instrument class, and so forth. For instance, you can replace a vessel with another vessel, but you cannot replace a vessel with a pump. The software also takes into consideration the connect points that are in use on the currently placed item. This stipulation means you cannot replace an angled item for a straight item when the straight item is already connected at both ends. For example, you cannot replace a Flanged Nozzle with an Angle Parametric Nozzle if the nozzle is already connected to a pipe run, likewise for angled valves. The replace mode functions very much like Edit > Replace. However, the replace mode works for only one item at a time and is not activated from inside a dialog box. The Replace Mode command copies properties of the current item onto the new item. You cannot use the replace mode for pipe runs or signal lines. You also cannot use this mode to replace items that are multiple representations. Related Topics Cutting or Deleting Items: An Overview, page 245 • Finding and Replacing Drawing Items: An Overview, page 225 • Place Multiple Representations, page 154 • Replace an Item Using Replace Mode, page 233

232 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview

Replace an Item Using Replace Mode
1. Click Tools > Replace Mode or click Replace Mode on the main toolbar. 2. In Catalog Explorer, select the item that you want to place in the drawing. Tip You cannot use this mode to replace drawing items with items from the Engineering Data Editor. 3. Move the selected catalog item over the drawing item that it is to replace.

Tips

The Replace Mode command works for like objects only. The item that you want to replace in the drawing must be of the same class: equipment class, instrument class, and so forth. For instance, you can replace a vessel with another vessel, but you cannot replace a vessel with a pump. The software also takes into consideration the connect points that are in use on the currently placed item. This stipulation means you cannot replace an angled item for a straight item when the straight item is already connected at both ends. For example, you cannot replace a Flanged Nozzle with an Angle Parametric Nozzle if the nozzle is already connected to a pipe run, likewise for angled valves. If the drawing item can be replaced with the catalog item, the replace is displayed, and the drawing item is selected. icon appears, click to replace the drawing item with the

4. When the replace icon selected catalog item.

5. Continue to replace more items with your currently selected catalog item, or press Esc to quit placement mode. 6. Click Tools > Replace Mode again to turn Replace Mode off. Notes

You cannot use the Replace Mode option for pipe runs or signal lines. You also cannot use this mode to replace items that are multiple representations. The Replace Mode command also copies properties of the current item onto the new item.

Related Topics • Cutting or Deleting Items: An Overview, page 245 • Finding and Replacing Drawing Items: An Overview, page 225 • Place Multiple Representations, page 154 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview, page 144

SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 233

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview

Find and Replace Dialog Box
Sets options for searching for and replacing drawing items. This dialog box opens when you click either Edit > Find or Edit > Replace. Depending on your command choice, you access one of the following tabs. Related Topics Find a Drawing Item by Using a Catalog Item, page 227 • Find Command, page 68 • Find Drawing Inconsistencies, page 226 • Replace a Single Drawing Item, page 229 • Replace Command, page 228

Find Tab (Find and Replace Dialog Box)
Allows you to search the drawing for specified items. Find what - Lists search criteria, and allows you to enter new search criteria or select from a list of the five most recently used criteria. The items listed above the dashed line in the list are used to set new search criteria by searching using the Catalog Item, Filter, or Inconsistency options. Selecting the Catalog Item option opens the Select Catalog Item dialog box. Selecting the Filter option opens the Select Filter dialog box. Search in - Defines the scope of the search. You can search the active drawing or just the contents of the active window. If the Active Window option is selected, the Scroll mode feature is not available. If the Active Drawing option is selected, the Scroll mode feature is automatically set to Zoom, and you can select a preferred scroll mode. Scroll mode - Defines how the active view should be changed when a drawing item is found. If you select Zoom, the active view is zoomed to a multiple of the range of the found drawing item. If you select Pan, the active view is shifted without changing the view scale so that the center of the drawing item is in the center of the view. If Scroll Mode feature is turned off, then the active view is left unchanged. Direction - Specifies the direction of the search. Because drawing objects are stored linearly in the database, using either Next or Previous moves forward or backward through the document. Find - Initiates a search for a single item that is part of the specified search scope. Each time you click Find, the software searches for and highlights the next drawing item that matches the defined search criteria in the defined direction. Each time a item is found that matches the Find what criteria, the active view is changed based on the Scroll mode setting. Find All - Initiates a search for all items matching the search criteria and adds them to the select set. The active view is updated based on the Scroll mode setting. 234 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Related Topics • Find a Drawing Item by Using a Catalog Item, page 227 • Find an Item by Using a Filter, page 226 • Find an Item by Using an Existing Drawing Item, page 228 • Find Command, page 68 • Find Drawing Inconsistencies, page 226 • Replace Command, page 228

Replace Tab (Find and Replace Dialog Box)
Sets options for searching for and replacing drawing items. This tab is on the Find and Replace dialog box. Find what - Lists search criteria, and allows you to enter new search criteria or select from a list of the five most recently used criteria. The items listed above the dashed line in the list are used to set new search criteria by searching using the Catalog Item, Filter, or Inconsistency options. Selecting the Catalog Item option opens the Select Catalog Item dialog box. Selecting the Filter option opens the Select Filter dialog box. Since you cannot replace an inconsistency, if you select the Inconsistency option from the Find what list, the Replace with option is not available. Replace with - Allows you to enter a new replacement item or select a replacement item from a list of the five most recently used items, which are listed below the dashed line. You can define a new replacement item by selecting Browse and picking a catalog item from the Select Catalog Item dialog box. Search in - Defines the scope of the search. You can search the active drawing or just the contents of the active window. If the Active Window option is selected, the Scroll mode feature is not available. If the Active Drawing option is selected, the Scroll mode feature is automatically set to Zoom, and you can select a preferred scroll mode. Scroll mode - Defines how the active view should be changed when a drawing item is found. If you select Zoom, the active view is zoomed to a multiple of the range of the found drawing item. If you select Pan, the active view is shifted without changing the view scale so that the center of the drawing item is in the center of the view. If Scroll Mode feature is turned off, then the active view is left unchanged. Direction - Specifies the direction of the search. Because drawing objects are stored linearly in the database, using either Next or Previous moves forward or backward through the document. Find - Initiates a search for a single item that is part of the specified search scope. Each time you click Find, the software searches for and highlights the next drawing item that matches the defined search criteria in the defined direction. Each time a item is found that matches the Find what criteria, the active view is changed based on the Scroll mode setting. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 235

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Replace - Replaces the item selected when you clicked Find. The Replace button is available only when the item found can be replaced by the item defined in the Replace with box. Each time you click Replace, the located item is replaced, and the Find command continues based on the Direction setting. As each drawing item is found, the active view is updated based on the Scroll mode setting. Replace All - Replaces all items that match the Find what criteria with the item defined in the Replace with box without prompting you. After all of the replacements are completed, the software reports the number of matches found and the number of replacements that were made. The active view is also updated depending on the Scroll mode setting. Related Topics Find Command, page 68 • Replace a Single Drawing Item, page 229 • Replace Command, page 228 • Replace Multiple Drawing Items Using Catalog Items, page 231 • Replace Multiple Drawing Items Using Filters, page 230

236 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide

click the minus sign to the left of the node name. This dialog box is constructed much the same as the Catalog Explorer window. page 230 • Select Catalog Item Dialog Box Allows you to select a catalog item type for the search criteria when you use the Find or Replace commands.Displays the New Filter dialog box. Related Topics Create a Simple Filter. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 237 .Displays a hierarchy of nodes that contain catalog items. Using this dialog box.Displays the symbols that are associated with the active node in the tree view. Tree View . the software displays them in the list view. page 357 • Find an Item by Using a Filter. which allows you to specify a new simple or new compound filter. you can create a new filter or modify an existing filter. page 136 • Customize a Filter Tab for the Drawing View. page 138 • Define the Contents of Your Report Template. Click Browse on the Filter tab of the Define Report Items dialog box when you are choosing your report item type. Access this dialog box using one of the methods described below: • Click Browse on the Add Filter Tab dialog box when you want to add a filter to the Drawing view. select the individual simple filters that compose a compound filter and click Properties to view the Filter Properties dialog box for those simple filters.Allows you to edit the properties of the selected filter. List View . Navigation Bar . Choose Filter in the Find what list on the Find tab of the Find and Replace dialog box. Properties . To open a node. If you create a compound filter. depending on your selection in the filter list. click the plus sign to the left of the node name. • • New . You can navigate through the tree view by clicking the different nodes. If the selected node contains any drawing symbols.Allows you to see and use Catalog Explorer shortcut buttons to navigate to catalog items more quickly. or reports or to search for items using definitions associated with a filter.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Select Filter Dialog Box Allows you to associate different filters with tabs in the different views. page 226 • Replace Multiple Drawing Items Using Filters. Only the contents of one node appear. to choose item types for tables. To close a node. This button displays the Filter Properties dialog box or the Compound Filter Properties dialog box.

left center. The rotate handle provides a mechanism for rotating components around their origin. and the symbol scales either larger or smaller depending on the direction that you drag the handle. page 228 • Find Command. The software shows you the result of the operation dynamically so that you can be sure to rotate the item correctly. Scale handles allow you to change the scale of a drawing item. Parametric handles can be located in four standard positions: top center. Catalog Manager defines these properties for items when the symbols for the items are created. A handle is displayed at each corner of the range of the symbol. You can mirror items by dragging the mirror handle in the appropriate direction. Items can have several different types of component handles. The software shows you the result of the operation dynamically so that you can be sure to mirror the item correctly. Note also that select sets cannot be mirrored or rotated with component handles. page 228 Manipulating Items With Component Handles: An Overview Many components allow you to change their shape or orientation using component handles. page 68 • Find Drawing Inconsistencies. Parametric handles allow you to modify different parts of parametric items.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Related Topics • Find a Drawing Item by Using a Catalog Item. • • • Not all drawing items in can be mirrored. Component handles allow you to rotate or mirror a component around axes. and you can use component handles to scale or resize parametric items in a drawing. page 226 • Replace Command. defined in relation to the origin of the item. 238 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . The Mirror and Rotate commands on the toolbar can be used for select sets. rotated. • The mirror handle allows you to mirror about the horizontal and vertical axes. Standard parametric handles represent up to four driving dimensions that have been applied to an item. A scalable symbol displays four solid square scale handles. or scaled. page 226 • Find an Item by Using an Existing Drawing Item. and right center of the range of an item. You can drag any one of the handles. The software shows you the result of the operation dynamically so that you can be sure to scale the item correctly. You can rotate items by dragging the rotate handle in the appropriate direction. page 227 • Find an Item by Using a Filter. bottom center. You can scale the item parametrically by dragging any parametric handle.

page 239 • Scale a Parametric Item. 2. Select your scalable item in the Drawing view. page 244 • Scale a Drawing Item. page 215 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 239 . Drag one of the parametric handles change the size of the item.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Related Topics • Mirror an Item About an Existing Mirror Axis or Linear Element. Scalable symbols are created by setting the IsScalable property of the symbol to True in Catalog Manager. page 244 • Rotate an Item Using Its Rotate Handle. Related Topics • Modifying and Moving Placed Items: An Overview. Continue dragging the parametric handles until the item is the size that you want. page 241 • Rotate an Item About an Axis You Define. page 238 • Modifying and Moving Placed Items: An Overview. Tips • A scalable symbol includes four solid square scale handles . 2. in the middle of each side of the item to 3. depending on the direction that you drag the handle. page 242 • Mirror an Item Using Its Mirror Handle. page 215 Scale a Drawing Item 1. Drag any one of the handles to make the symbol either larger or smaller. such as angle values. remain the same when you resize it. Select the parametric drawing item that you want to resize. Note • Certain properties of the parametric item. • Related Topics • Manipulating Items With Component Handles: An Overview. page 239 Scale a Parametric Item 1. A handle is displayed at each corner of the range of the symbol.

click Mirror on the main toolbar. For example. You can mirror without copying. page 240 240 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . pause over an option and read the ToolTip. page 241 • Mirror Command. The mirror handle appears at the upper right of the item. dragging a mirror handle across an x.Copies the item or items when you mirror them. page 242 • Mirror an Item Using Its Mirror Handle. 180 extends the axis horizontally to the left. page 241 Mirror Ribbon Appears on the main toolbar when the Mirror command is active. 90 extends the axis vertically to the top.Sets the angle of the mirror axis. Position Angle . The software reflects one or more selected items about that axis. and 270 extends the axis vertically to the bottom. You can also use mirror handles. Related Topics • Mirror an Item About a Mirror Axis That You Define. Note • To determine the option name on the ribbon. You can mirror the item itself. and allows you to either specify mirroring options or to observe mirroring options.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Mirror Command Edit > Mirror Reflects one or more selected items about a line or axis that you define. Setting the position angle to zero extends the axis horizontally to the right of the screen. or mirror and copy. Mirroring is displayed dynamically so that you can see the result of your action before you release the item to place it. Copy . Related Topics • Mirror an Item Using Its Mirror Handle. The origin of the angle measurement is the point that you clicked for the beginning of the mirror axis. or you can make a copy of the item in the mirrored position. page 241 • Mirror an Item About an Existing Mirror Axis or Linear Element.or y-axis causes the item to appear mirrored about its center. To mirror an item using a defined mirror axis.

page 215 Mirror an Item About a Mirror Axis That You Define 1. and then click. Select an item in the drawing. If an actuator is upside down when placed on an instrument valve. click Mirror . the software returns you to the Mirror command at the point where you were when you started manipulating the view.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Mirror an Item Using Its Mirror Handle 1. as you move your pointer). On the main toolbar. Select one or more items. such as Zoom and Pan. page 253 • Modifying and Moving Placed Items: An Overview. Related Topics • Copying Items: An Overview. then use Rotate or Mirror to align the actuator in the appropriate position. 3. • • SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 241 . 2. 3. 2. you can use the Position Angle box on the Mirror ribbon. Drag the mirror handle in the direction that you want to mirror the item. while you are using the Mirror command. You can use other view manipulation commands. The software displays the mirror axis and the mirrored items dynamically (that is. When you finish manipulating the view. 4. Notes • Instead of positioning the mirror axis dynamically. hold Ctrl when you click to place your items. Position the pointer so that the mirrored items appear where you want them. Define one end of the mirror axis by clicking in an appropriate empty portion of the drawing or by clicking a keypoint . Tip • If you want to copy the mirrored items. Click the mirror handle or click Mirror on the main toolbar.

the rotation is displayed in 30 degree increments. while you are using Mirror. The software then dynamically displays a reference axis for the rotation. the software returns you to Mirror at the point where you were when you started manipulating the view. When you finish manipulating the view. By dragging the pointer over the item. • Related Topics • Modifying and Moving Placed Items: An Overview. The Rotation Angle box on the ribbon displays the angle of change between the old and new position. select the item and then click Rotate.Defines the rotation handle. hold down Ctrl when you click to place your items. it can take on any value. Select one or more items. Second Click . 2. such as Zoom and Pan. and then click. The default setting is 0 degrees so that the rotation is fully dynamic. click Mirror . If an actuator is upside down when placed on an instrument valve. For example. You can enter increments in the Step Angle box if you want to control the increments of the rotation. If you want to define a precise location for the rotation. Tip • If you want to copy the mirrored items. 4. page 215 Rotate Command Edit > Rotate Rotates one or more items a precise distance or angle about a specified point. Notes • You can use other view manipulation commands. 3. locate a mirror axis. To define the rotation axis. The mirrored items are displayed dynamically on the other side of the mirror axis.0. you can use Mirror to align the actuator in the appropriate position. On the main toolbar. you must specify two points by clicking in the drawing. 242 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . that is.Defines the rotation point. Position the pointer so that the mirrored items appear where you want them. To rotate and item. First Click . Angles are always displayed as a positive value. you can enter values in the Rotate ribbon.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Mirror an Item About an Existing Mirror Axis or Linear Element 1. if the box is set to 30.

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Third Click - Completes the rotation of the item. Also, you can rotate an item about its center with the rotate component handle . Keeping the rotate component handle close to the center of an item causes the item to rotate at 90 degree increments. Dragging the rotate component handle further away from the center of the item causes the item to rotate at smaller angles. The angle increments become smaller the farther away your pointer is from the center of rotation. Related Topics • Rotate an Item About an Axis You Define, page 244 • Rotate an Item Using Its Rotate Handle, page 244

Rotate Ribbon
Appears when the Rotate command is active, and allows you to either observe rotation options as you rotate an item or specify rotation options. Copy - Creates a copy of the item that you are rotating. Position Angle - Displays the angle between the horizontal axis through the center of rotation (A) and the point that you rotate from (B). Then, if you rotate the item, the position angle (C) changes to become the angle between the horizontal axis and the point to which you rotate. The position angle is always a positive value measured counter-clockwise from the axis.

Rotation Angle - Defines the rotation angle. The rotation angle is the angle between the point from which you rotate and the point to which you rotate. In the following picture, the center of rotation (A) shows the point (B) from which you rotate the item.

SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 243

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview The rotation angle (C) is the angle of change between the old and new positions of the rotated item. The value is always positive. Step Angle - Specifies the rotation step angle. The step angle specifies the increments, in degrees, that an item rotates on a rotation axis. You can enter increments in the Step Angle box. For example, if the box is set to 30.0, the rotation is displayed in 30 degree increments. The default setting is 0 degrees so that the rotation is fully dynamic. Related Topics • Rotate an Item About an Axis You Define, page 244 • Rotate an Item Using Its Rotate Handle, page 244 • Rotate Command, page 242

Rotate an Item Using Its Rotate Handle
1. Select an item in the drawing. 2. Click the rotate handle . 3. Drag the rotate handle in the direction that you want to rotate the item. Notes

You can click the rotate handle closer to or further from the center of the item to change the step angle for the rotation. You can rotate items using the Rotate button on the main toolbar, too.

Related Topics • Modifying and Moving Placed Items: An Overview, page 215 • Rotate an Item About an Axis You Define, page 244

Rotate an Item About an Axis You Define
1. Select one or more items. 2. On the main toolbar, click Rotate 3. Click at the center of rotation. 4. Then, click to define the other end of the rotation axis. Tip The software dynamically displays the rotation axis and items being rotated. The location and position of the rotation axis defines the rotation from point. 5. Rotate the items into position by dragging the rotation axis.

.

6. Click to define the rotation to point.

244 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Notes

To rotate by arbitrary increments, type a value in the Step Angle box on the Rotate ribbon. In order to copy the rotated items into the new position, you can hold Ctrl while you click to define the to point. You can use other view manipulation commands, such as Zoom and Pan, while you are using the Rotate command. When you finish manipulating the view, the software returns you to the Rotate command at the point that you were when you started manipulating the view.

Related Topics • Copying Items: An Overview, page 253 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview, page 144

Cutting or Deleting Items: An Overview
You can delete items from a drawing by selecting them and clicking Cut on the main toolbar or by pressing Delete on the keyboard. Clicking Cut places the selected item on the Clipboard. This action allows you to paste the item in the same location in the drawing and then move it to another location as appropriate. The properties of an item affect what happens when you cut or delete it. If the item has a TagReqdFlag property of True, which you set in Catalog Manager, and is included in the StockpileItems group, which you set in Options Manager, cutting or deleting the item from the drawing places the item in the Stockpile. The data associated with the item remains in the database. If the TagReqdFlag property is False, when you cut or delete the item, it is removed from the database as well as the drawing. Notes

You can press Delete on the keyboard to remove an item or a select set from the drawing. First, select the item or group of items in the drawing. Then you must point to the Drawing view before you press Delete. The software does not delete the item or group of items if the pointer is located anywhere outside the Drawing view. You can delete an item by selecting and right-clicking it. On the shortcut menu click Delete. If you select Delete from Model, the selected item is not only deleted from the drawing but also from the database. In other words, it is not placed in the Stockpile, regardless of its properties. Deleted stockpile items automatically go into the Stockpile. You can move an item into the stockpile of a specific drawing. For more information, see Move a Stockpile Item to the Stockpile of Another Drawing, page 265.

SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 245

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Related Topics • Cut an Item from the Drawing, page 246 • Delete an Item from the Drawing, page 249 • Move a Stockpile Item to the Stockpile of Another Drawing, page 265 • Remove an Item from a Drawing, page 250 • Remove an Item from the Model, page 251

Cut Command
Edit > Cut Cuts selected items from the drawing and pastes them to the Clipboard. The selected items replace the previous contents of the Clipboard. When you cut items, they go to the Stockpile, given appropriate stockpile settings. Related Topics • Cut an Item from the Drawing, page 246 • Cutting or Deleting Items: An Overview, page 245 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview, page 144

Cut an Item from the Drawing
1. Select the item. 2. Click Cut Notes

.

After you cut an item and its associated properties, they are placed on the Clipboard. You can then use Paste or Paste Special to paste the item and its properties into the current drawing or into other drawings or documents. The properties of an item affect what happens when you cut or delete it. If the item has a TagReqdFlag property of True, which you set in Catalog Manager, and is included in the StockpileItems group, which you set in Options Manager, cutting or deleting the item from the drawing places the item in the Stockpile. However, the data associated with the item remains in the database. If the TagReqdFlag property is False, when you cut or delete the item it is removed from the database as well as the drawing. However, off-page and utility connectors are always placed in the Stockpile when deleted regardless of the TagReqdFlag property and settings in Options Manager. Deleted stockpile items automatically go into the Stockpile. You can move an item into the stockpile of a specific drawing. For more information, see Move a Stockpile Item to the Stockpile of Another Drawing, page 265.

246 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Related Topics • Cutting or Deleting Items: An Overview, page 245 • Linking and Embedding Objects: An Overview, page 273 • Move a Stockpile Item to the Stockpile of Another Drawing, page 265

Paste Command
Edit > Paste Inserts the Clipboard contents at the same location that the items occupied in the source document or drawing. The command is not available if the Clipboard is empty. Related Topics • Cutting or Deleting Items: An Overview, page 245 • Paste an Item With a Different Format, page 280 • Paste an Item, page 247

Paste an Item
1. Open the drawing in which you want to paste the contents of the Clipboard. 2. On the main toolbar, click Paste then select Paste. Notes

or right-click a blank area in the drawing and

The contents of the Clipboard remain unchanged until you use the Copy or Cut command again. Equipment components cannot be pasted back into the drawing after they have been removed using the Cut command. You cannot paste items if the Clipboard is empty (that is, if you have not previously used the Copy or Cut commands). Pasted text and items remain selected after you use the Paste command.

Related Topics • Cutting or Deleting Items: An Overview, page 245

SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 247

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview

Select All Command
Edit > Select All Selects all visible items in a view. Note

You can access this command when you right-click a blank area in a drawing or table, too. On the shortcut menu click Select All.

Related Topics • Select an Item, page 147 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview, page 144

Modify an Item With the Select Tool
1. Click the Select Tool 2. Select an item. 3. Position the pointer over one of the item handles. 4. Drag the item handle to modify the item. For example, you can rotate an item with its rotate handle, mirror an item with its mirror handle, scale an item with its scale handle, or resize an item with its parametric handle. Related Topics • Manipulating Items With Component Handles: An Overview, page 238 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview, page 144 .

Delete Command
Edit > Delete Removes the selected item. You cannot paste items that you delete; however, if the item moves to the Stockpile on deletion, then you can place that item again from the stockpile. Notes

The properties of an item affect what happens when you cut or delete it. If the item has a TagReqdFlag property of True, which you set in Catalog Manager, and is included in the StockpileItems group, which you set in Options Manager, cutting or deleting the item from the drawing places the item in the Stockpile. However, the data associated with the item remains in the database. If the TagReqdFlag property is False, when you cut or delete the item it is removed from the database as well as the drawing.

248 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview

However, off-page and utility connectors are always placed in the Stockpile when deleted regardless of the TagReqdFlag property and settings in Options Manager. Also, you can press Delete on the keyboard to remove an item or a group of items in a fence from the drawing. First, select the item or group of items in the drawing. Then you must point to the Drawing view before you press Delete. The software does not delete the item or group of items if the pointer is located anywhere outside the Drawing view. Deleted stockpile items automatically go into the Stockpile. You can move an item into the stockpile of a specific drawing. For more information, see Move a Stockpile Item to the Stockpile of Another Drawing, page 265.

Related Topics • Cutting or Deleting Items: An Overview, page 245 • Delete an Item from the Drawing, page 249 • Move a Stockpile Item to the Stockpile of Another Drawing, page 265 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview, page 144

Delete an Item from the Drawing
1. Select an item. Tip To delete a large group of similar items, use a filter to display items to delete, then select the items displayed by your filter. For more information on using display filters, see Customize a Filter Tab for the Drawing View, page 138. 2. Click Edit > Delete or press Delete on the keyboard.

Tip

When you use the Delete key on the keyboard to remove an item or items from the drawing, you must point to the Drawing view before you press Delete. The software does not delete the item if the pointer is located anywhere outside the Drawing view.

Notes

If you want to delete the item, its location in the drawing, and its properties in the database, right-click the item and select Delete From Model from the shortcut menu. The item is not placed in the stockpile regardless of its settings or properties. Deleted stockpile items automatically go into the Stockpile. You can move an item into the stockpile of a specific drawing. For more information, see Move a Stockpile Item to the Stockpile of Another Drawing, page 265.

SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 249

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Related Topics • Cutting or Deleting Items: An Overview, page 245 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview, page 144

Remove an Item from a Drawing
1. Right-click the item that you want to remove. 2. On the shortcut menu, click Delete. Tips

You can press Delete on the keyboard to remove an item or a group of items from the drawing, too. First, select the item or items in the drawing. Then you must place the pointer in the Drawing view and press Delete. The software does not delete the item if the pointer is located anywhere outside the Drawing view. Or you can select Edit > Delete on the main menu bar after you select the items. You can also delete an item from the model when it is already in a stockpile. Select the item in the Engineering Data Editor, and click the Delete Stockpile Item command on the Stockpile menu of the Engineering Data Editor.

Notes

The properties of an item affect what happens when you cut or delete it. If the item has a TagReqdFlag property of True, which you set in Catalog Manager, and is included in the StockpileItems group, which you set in Options Manager, cutting or deleting the item from the drawing places the item in the Stockpile. However, the data associated with the item remains in the database. If the TagReqdFlag property is False, when you cut or delete the item it is removed from the database as well as the drawing. For more information on deleting items from the model, see Remove an Item from the Model, page 251. When you delete inline components, the software automatically mends the pipe or signal run. A stockpile item that is deleted automatically goes to the Stockpile. You can move it to a drawing stockpile from the Stockpile.

Related Topics • Cutting or Deleting Items: An Overview, page 245 • Modifying and Moving Placed Items: An Overview, page 215 • Move a Stockpile Item to the Stockpile of Another Drawing, page 265

250 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview

Delete From Model Command
Connector Shortcut Menu > Delete From Model Deletes the selected item from the database; if you are deleting a connector, then its partner is deleted from the stockpile as well. Notes

Unlike the standard Delete command, which moves the selected item to the Stockpile, this command removes the selected items or connector and its partner from the model completely. In the case of the connector, the command is not available unless the partner connector is in the Stockpile.

Related Topics • Delete a Connector From the Model, page 207 • Using Off-Page and Utility Connectors: An Overview, page 201

Remove an Item from the Model
1. In the Drawing view, right-click the item that you want to delete in order to display the shortcut menu. Tips

You can delete a select set from the model by choosing the items and then right-clicking on any member of the set to display the shortcut menu.

You can also delete an item from the model when it is already in a stockpile. Select the item in the Engineering Data Editor, and click the Delete Stockpile Item command on the Stockpile menu of the Engineering Data Editor. 2. On the shortcut menu, click Delete from Model to delete the item from the drawing and from the plant model. That is, the item is not placed in the stockpile, and when you save the drawing, no data associated with the item remains in the database.

Notes

You can only remove items from the plant model that do not share a relationship with another drawing. You can permanently remove items that are not flagged as required for the model by selecting Delete from the shortcut menu.

SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 251

see Move a Stockpile Item to the Stockpile of Another Drawing. when you cut or delete the item it is removed from the database as well as the drawing. You can move an item into the stockpile of a specific drawing. If the item has a TagReqdFlag property of True. However.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview • The properties of an item affect what happens when you cut or delete it. cutting or deleting the item from the drawing places the item in the Stockpile. page 265. page 265 • Remove an Item from a Drawing. When you delete inline components. the software automatically mends the pipe or signal run. which you set in Options Manager. Deleted stockpile items automatically go into the Pant Stockpile. page 250 252 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . and is included in the StockpileItems group. If the TagReqdFlag property is False. which you set in Catalog Manager. • • Related Topics • Modifying and Moving Placed Items: An Overview. page 215 • Move a Stockpile Item to the Stockpile of Another Drawing. the data associated with the item remains in the database. For more information.

too. click Move on the toolbar. Several methods exist for doing this. page 253 • Paste an Item With a Different Format. Then you can use Paste to place it on the current drawing. So a copied nozzle must be placed on a piece of equipment.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Copying Items: An Overview Copying an item makes it possible to use a drawing item that is already in place as a starting point for placing a new item. mirror. or rotate a drawing item. page 280 • Paste an Item. page 254 • Copy an Item. and press Ctrl as you place the item in the drawing. for instance. page 244 Copy Command Edit > Copy Copies selected items to the Clipboard. drag it to its new location in the drawing. just as they are when you originally place an item from a stockpile or from Catalog Explorer. the software frequently pastes it on top of the item that you copied. This command replaces the previous contents of the Clipboard with the new contents. When you paste the item. After you copy an item. click Copy Notes • . without removing the current item from the drawing. page 247 • Rotate an Item About an Axis You Define. such as using the Copy button on the main toolbar or using Ctrl while you move. Related Topics • Copy an Item With the Select Tool. page 254 • Copy an Item. Select an item. it is placed on the Clipboard. Related Topics • Copy an Item With the Select Tool. Remember that placement rules are in effect when you are copying an item to a new location. 2. You can copy an item with the Move command. page 253 • Cutting or Deleting Items: An Overview. To see the pasted item. page 245 Copy an Item 1. You can do the same with a select set. Select the item. On the main toolbar. • SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 253 .

Once the items are selected in the drawing. but also lines and networks and all runs included in the drawing. Related Topics • Copying Items: An Overview. In cases where you want the software to continue constructing a select set beyond a break in a line. 3. and so you must place the copy in an allowed position as if it were a new catalog item. this command makes it possible to accomplish that goal. Note • The properties that define a run are specified in Options Manager. Position the pointer over the item. Related Topics • Create a Select Set From a Line. Select an item. page 144 Copy an Item With the Select Tool 1. for example. but not over any of the handles of the item. page 256 • Customize the Properties Window. page 147 254 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Selecting Connected Items: An Overview You can use the Select Connected Items command to navigate the line connectivity from a selected line segment to add components and other runs to a select set based on matching properties. a nozzle. Click Select Tool 2. Placement rules are in effect. page 144 on the main toolbar. Hold Ctrl and drag the copy to its new location. page 86 • Select an Item. page 253 • Linking and Embedding Objects: An Overview. This functionality is useful for finding branches from runs and finding all the runs and components on an entire drawing that have a common property value. 4. page 273 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Related Topics • Copying Items: An Overview. page 253 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview. it is then a simple matter to choose the select set in the Properties window and continuing editing properties for not only runs.

Include Components . you can change the selected item in the drawing and change the scope of the select set freely. page 148 • Selecting Connected Items: An Overview. which appears both on the Edit menu and on the Line Shortcut menu. one or the other or both is always active. however.Allows you to choose from Run.Adds inline components into the select set. This command is available only when either a single line segment or a single component is selected on the drawing. page 256 • Routing Lines: An Overview. is available only when either a single line segment or a single component is selected. This dialog box remains open until you dismiss it. including components. and the Include Runs and Include Components buttons allow you to incorporate different items into the select set. The default value for this list is Line.Incorporates lines into the select set. page 254 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview. Scope . which allows you to create a select set that includes the active line and disconnected lines and inline components in any network. The Scope List allows you to choose extent. even if there are breaks in a network.Provides options for defining the extent of your select set. and you can highlight items in the drawing and manipulate members of the select set while the dialog is active. once the dialog box is open. and the Drawing option selects all the runs and inline components in the open drawing. Notes • The Run option means that lines in a single run are selected. page 144 • Select Connected Items Dialog Box Allows you to construct a select set from lines and inline components. Related Topics Create a Select Set From a Line.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Select Connected Items Command Edit > Select Connected Items Opens the Select Connected Items dialog box. Line. Network. Drawing. Scope List . The Select Connected Items command. Include Runs . SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 255 . that is. The Line option selects runs that are connected at end points. At no time can neither the Include Runs nor Include Components buttons be selected. page 156 • Select an Item Using the Configuration (PickQuick) Tool. The Network option adds branches.

too. At any time. Click Edit > Select Connected Items. The properties for the originally selected item are displayed by default. You can select more than one property in this list by using the Ctrl or Shift keys. too. by using the Include Runs and Include Components buttons.Displays properties grouped by specific categories. On the Select Connected Items dialog box. Select a single line segment or inline component in the drawing. • 256 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Alphabetic . 2.Allows you to choose common properties for your select set. select those properties from the Properties list in the Matching properties area of the dialog box. You can choose an empty property value for matching criterion. Tip The properties for the new selection are displayed in the Select Connected Items dialog box. Preview . you can change the scope of the select set by changing the display in the Scope list. you can select a different line segment or component in the drawing in order to change the properties displayed in the dialog box. 3. but the display of the Properties window itself is not updated until you click OK. You can change the scope to include inline components or exclude lines.Lists properties in alphabetical order.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Matching Properties . Categorized . 4. Categories are defined and properties are assigned to those categories in Data Dictionary Manager. page 255 Create a Select Set From a Line 1. 5. page 147 • Select Connected Items Command. 6. Related Topics • Create a Select Set From a Line. If you want to construct a select set based on common properties. Properties List .Highlights in the Drawing view the items that are selected according to common properties in the Properties List of this dialog box. By default the properties are displayed categorically.Displays options for defining the select set according to common properties. • Tips • You can use the Ctrl or Shift buttons to select more than one property value. page 256 • Select an Item.

click OK. the Select Connected Items dialog box closes. The matching items are highlighted in the Drawing view. The selected items are centered in the Drawing view. 9. Use the Selected Items list in the Properties window to display the common properties for the select set. page 254 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 257 . Once you have selected the items you want for your select set. 7. Related Topics • Select an Item. see Customize the Properties Window.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview If no properties are displayed in the dialog box. page 147 • Selecting Connected Items: An Overview. For more information. Click the Preview button to see the items that qualify according to the matching criteria chosen in the previous step. • 8. select a line segment or component in the drawing that already has a property value you know you are interested in. page 86. Notes • If you click Cancel. and the original item is selected in the drawing.

it is important to be able to specify and change the properties of the items that you place in your diagram. page 83 258 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . too. or create filters and control Drawing views so that only items with specified properties are displayed. page 329 • Modify an Item With the Select Tool. In the Properties window you are also constrained to edit only those properties that are not read-only. Once you have populated the properties of an item you can. you can copy. page 54 • Paste Bulk Properties. items that belong to another drawing cannot be edited. You can edit the contents of some cells directly in the table if the corresponding property is not read-only or generated strictly by validation. Or you can open the Engineering Data Editor of the drawing data and edit properties in the cells of the table. or label items so that their properties are displayed graphically. Related Topics • Copy Bulk Properties. run reports that display the items and their properties. page 87 • Working With the Properties Window: An Overview. with the same restriction. page 89 • Review and Edit Item Properties. for instance.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Modifying Item Properties: An Overview When you use the design software to produce drawings. and paste properties. page 248 • Modify the Table Properties of an Existing Engineering Data Editor View. In the Engineering Data Editor. page 88 • Import Aspen Zyqad Stream Data. cut. You can review and edit the properties of an item in the Properties window.

allowing you to enter long text descriptions for items. and allows you to enter a Description . page 84 • Review and Edit Item Properties.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Description Dialog Box Opens when you click the ellipses next to the Description property in the Properties window.intergraph. page 87 Hold Status Text Dialog Box Opens when you click the Hold Text calculation button text value. This box can contain a link to a Web address.Allows you to type a description for the item. Related Topics • Properties Window Command. This box can contain a link to a Web address. and so forth.Allows you to type a description for the item. You can also link to a file on your file system by entering the path like this: file://UNC_path/share/document.com. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 259 .extension. You can also link to a file on your file system by entering the path like this: file://UNC_path/share/document. formatted like this http://www. formatted like this: http://www. Description .com.intergraph.extension. reports. Note • Very long descriptions are not displayed in their entirety in labels.

Any modifications to insulation specifications are carried out in Insulation Specification Manager. All . Related Topics • Assign an Insulation Specification. Matching . allowing you to specify an insulation specification for the selected item or items. Note • The path to the plant insulation specification file is defined in Options Manager. page 84 • Review and Edit Item Properties.Lists all insulation specifications that match any already chosen values. page 87 Insulation Spec Dialog Box Opens when you click the ellipses for the Insulation Spec property in the Properties window. Related Topics • Properties Window Command.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Note • Labels do not display very long descriptions in their entirety.Lists all the insulation specifications in the plant insulation specification file. You can choose a specification from either of the following lists. such as Insulation Type or Insulation Purpose. page 261 260 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .

page 144 Note Text Dialog Box Opens when you click the Note Text calculation button and allows you to enter a text value in an item note. 2. Related Topics • Modifying Item Properties: An Overview. Click the Insulation Spec property box in the Properties window. you can choose a specification from the All list. Note • Very long descriptions are not displayed in their entirety in design labels. Related Topics • Properties Window Command. This box can contain a link to a Web address. Select the item that you want to add an insulation specification to. You can also link to a file on your file system by entering the path like this: file://UNC_path/share/document.com. page 258 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview. page 84 • Review and Edit Item Properties. nonetheless. choose a specification from either the Matching or the All lists. Description . On the InsulationSpec dialog box. Note • If you assign a heat tracing to an item before you assign insulation properties. Tip • If you have already specified other insulation properties. formatted like this: http://www. page 87 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 261 .intergraph. such as the insulation temperature.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Assign an Insulation Specification 1.Allows you to type a description for the item. Click the Calculation button . type.extension. in the Properties window. your choices of insulation properties and specifications are restricted. 3. then the Matching list contains only those insulation specifications that agree with the properties already chosen. or purpose. 4.

Allows you to type a description for the item. You can click Browse to find the file on your computer or the network. Related Topics Import Aspen Zyqad Stream Data. page 87 Stream Number Dialog Box Opens when you click the ellipses next to the Stream Number property in the Properties window. File Name . This box can contain a link to a Web address. page 175 • Review and Edit Item Properties. and allows you to Description . Stream data is generally imported from an Aspen Zyqad stream data file.Specifies the file from which stream data is imported.intergraph. formatted like this: http://www. Browse .extension.com.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Revision Text Dialog Box Opens when you click the Revision Text calculation button enter a text value. Related Topics • Place an Inline Instrument.Allows you to search for a file on your computer or network. page 267 • 262 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . allowing you to specify the stream number for your pipe run. You can also link to a file on your file system by entering the path like this: file://UNC_path/share/document. Stream ID List .Lists the values found in the text file specified in the File Name box. page 329 • Populate the Stockpile from a Spreadsheet. Note • Labels do not display very long descriptions in their entirety.

page 265 • Place an Item from the Stockpile. or drawing stockpiles) from one stockpile to another. You can also access some of these commands from the Engineering Data Editor shortcut menu. page 264 • Place Multiple Representations. or click Active Drawing Stockpile to view items in the stockpile of the active drawing. You have the capability to place an item from a stockpile directly onto an open drawing. In particular click Stockpile to view items in the Stockpile. page 267 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 263 .Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Moving and Placing Stockpile Items: An Overview You can move the items that reside in stockpiles (the Stockpile. which belongs to the Plant or the active project. You can import items into the Stockpile. the Active Drawing or Other Drawings buttons) are not active when you want to view stockpile items alone. the Stockpile menu contains the commands for manipulating stockpile items. In the EDE. or you can place them in a drawing or delete them from the model altogether. These commands make it possible to place or move or delete stockpile items. Related Topics • Move a Stockpile Item to the Stockpile of Another Drawing. You enter placement mode when you click the icon associated with a stockpile item in the left-most column of the EDE. too. page 154 • Populate the Stockpile from a Spreadsheet. which opens when you right-click in the EDE. Be sure that the other item buttons on the Engineering Data Editor toolbar (that is. by importing reports with the File > Import > Data File command on the main toolbar. You view the items in a stockpile in the Engineering Data Editor (EDE).

You cannot use Replace Mode mode to replace drawing items with items from the Engineering Data Editor. • • Related Topics • Configuration (PickQuick) Tool. page 265 Place an Item from the Stockpile 1. Click the appropriate position in the drawing for the item. You can enter values for properties of the placed item by selecting the item. • Notes • If the item you place has multiple orientations in relation to other items. Related Topics • Move a Connector to Another Stockpile. 2. page 149.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Move to Different Stockpile Dialog Box Opens when you right-click a stockpile item icon in the Engineering Data Editor and select Move to Different Stockpile. You can move your selected stockpile item into the drawing stockpile of another drawing. page 146 • Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview. click the icon in the left most column for the stockpile item that you want to place. page 38 264 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . and then clicking Edit > Properties to display the Properties window. List view .Displays a list of available drawings that can accept the selected stockpile item. page 204 • Move a Stockpile Item to the Stockpile of Another Drawing. you can use the Configuration tool to select the appropriate placement for the item. not a drawing item. Tip Be sure you have chosen a stockpile item in your Engineering Data Editor. see Place an Item With the Configuration (PickQuick) Tool. In the Engineering Data Editor.Allows you to navigate in the plant hierarchy in order to display the drawing into which stockpile you want to move the selected item. For more information. Tree view .

Equipment Nozzle List. From the shortcut menu. • 3. In the left-most column of the Engineering Data Editor. select Move to Different Stockpile. From the Stockpile to a drawing stockpile . • • • Plant item groups are listed in Data Dictionary Manager. On the Move to Different Stockpile dialog box. safety classes. not a drawing item. Tip Be sure you have chosen a stockpile item in your Engineering Data Editor.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Move a Stockpile Item to the Stockpile of Another Drawing 1. and then import the items back into the drawing. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 265 . this action is allowed. Note • Plant item groups. This capability allows you to define values for an item that does not yet exist in the database.No constraints apply. You must first run the report. and so forth. Both of these reports have hidden columns that store some key information that is necessary for importing this information. you can use a report to import information for items that already exist in the database.If the plant item group contains only items in the destination drawing or does not contain items in any drawing. and Pipe Run List. Valid reports are Equipment List. frequently reside in a stockpile with their members residing on drawings. right-click the icon of the stockpile item that you want to move. add or edit property values for the items returned in the report. This action can occur at anytime. Moving the plant item group itself to another stockpile has special limitations: From a drawing stockpile to the Stockpile . choose a drawing from the list and click OK. Also. such as instrument loops. The property values for the items are updated. Related Topics • Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview. 2. packages.Same constraint as above applies. page 38 Using Reports to Import Items into the Stockpile You can use the Equipment List and the Pipe Run List to import new items into the stockpile. From a drawing stockpile to another drawing stockpile .

not the display name. AttributeUnits . page 268 • Populate the Stockpile from a Spreadsheet. page 267 266 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview XML Tags and Descriptions Tag <?xml version="1. </Identification> <ContextSpecificIdentifier ContextId <Item Attributes> <Item Attribute> Notes • The log file for import activities is called SPImport.must be one of the properties listed.Must be in double quotes. even for select-listed values.Path to symbol to be created in stockpile Ignored by SmartPlant P&ID. page 329 • Modify a Pump by Importing a SmartPlant P&ID Report into the Stockpile. click Related Topics.Database Item Type. and must have corresponding </Items> tag Defines Classification and Symbol File: Classification .Specify if the property has units of measure.log and is saved to your local Temp directory. For examples of importing pumps into the database using the Equipment List.0"?> <Preamble> <Items> Description Identifies the XML file and the version used Ignored by SmartPlant P&ID Indicates beginning of the list of all item types and properties to be imported. page 334 • Import Aspen Zyqad Stream Data. and must be a valid format. Symbol File . not the index number. ITEMTAG . and must be in double quotes. page 67 • Generate a Report. Attribute Value . Indicates the beginning of the list of properties to be imported for the item type Imported property for the item type: AttributeName Derived from the Data Dictionary Manager property name. • Related Topics • Add an Item to the Stockpile from Catalog Explorer. and specify the actual value.

or you can click Close. 3. and Exchangers. Browse to the location of your spreadsheet. See the SmartPlant P&ID Programmer's Guide Help file for more information on import code and other importing parameters. 2. Pipe Run List. Notes • Aspen Zyqad spreadsheets in either Microsoft Excel or XML format are supported. Importing Aspen Zyqad XML data files allows greater flexibility when importing data into the software. Previously imported items. whether they remain in the stockpile or have already been placed in the drawing. Stockpile items that come from importing Aspen Zyqad data can be easily updated by re-importing a data file. These spreadsheets include the Vessel Equipment List. Click File > Import > Data File. • Important • If a format change is made to an exported Aspen Zyqad report. Equipment. Items must have an assigned item tag prior to definition or modification of properties. you must make modifications the import code to accommodate the changed report layout. are included in a single XML report so that only one file has to be imported. In addition. You can populate the stockpile with items from Aspen Zyqad exported spreadsheets and some SmartPlant reports. You can use the Equipment List.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Populate the Stockpile from a Spreadsheet 1. these reports can create occurrences of items in the stockpile. and Equipment Nozzle List Reports from SmartPlant to define properties of items already placed in the drawing. All three reports. and click Open. page 265 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 267 . Tips • The status bar at the bottom of the SmartPlant P&ID window displays the progress of the import activity. and Heat Exchanger Equipment. you can click Report in order to open the log file and view notes on the import process. Pumps. are updated with data from the newly imported file. On the Import Log dialog box. select it. Pump Equipment List. Click Help > Programming with SmartPlant P&ID. • • • • Related Topics • Using Reports to Import Items into the Stockpile. too.

7. Run the Equipment List report. 8. The path name of the associated symbol is available in column T. change the value in the Item Tag cell (for example.fluid code. • Related Topics • Importing Aspen Zyqad Stream Data. Browse to the Equipment List report that you just created and modified. respectively. page 265 268 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . For more information on generating reports. Notes • Importing new pipe runs using the Pipe Run List report is a little different because it also includes SP_ID and Fluid Code columns. and Tag Suffix properties. Place a pump in a drawing and assign an item tag. 3. click File > Import > Data file. you must clear the SP_ID value. In the resulting report. Additionally. then clicking Format > Column > Unhide. respectively. Click File > Close. Click Open.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Modify a Pump by Importing a SmartPlant P&ID Report into the Stockpile 1. page 329 • Using Reports to Import Items into the Stockpile. The delivered Item Tag format for pipe runs is unit code . Columns Y. 6. these should be updated to P. 2. In SmartPlant P&ID. page 334. and D. Tag Sequence Number. P-100A.tag suffix . but you must be careful with row copy and paste because the layout is a little different. change P-100A to P-101D) by highlighting the last column in the report and the column right next to it. The method above is valid. 4. and AA display the Tag Prefix. Z.tag sequence number . Click File > Save. for example. see Generate a Report. 101. In this example. 5.

improves the performance of the software. when you print. or you can choose when the software performs gapping on your drawing by using the Gap Now command. page 270 AutoGap Command Tools > AutoGap Turns automatic gapping on or off in the drawing. Related Topics • Perform Line Gapping in Your Drawing Now. and the software gaps your lines automatically as you route them. The Gap Now command does not affect the setting for AutoGap. you can specify that lines show a gap at these non-physical intersections. or when you save a file. When AutoGap is on. page 270 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 269 . By default. the software automatically gaps drawings during the working session each time that you modify an item. Using the Gap Now command. A progress indicator at the bottom of the window alerts you to avoid selecting another command while the software completes the gapping. Gapping refers to the condition that exists when two lines intersect graphically on the drawing but do not physically intersect in the plant. the software does not automatically gap drawings. When AutoGap is off. page 269 • Turn AutoGap On or Off. for turning AutoGap on and • Related Topics • Gapping Lines: An Overview. instead of turning on auto-gapping. In order to portray this condition. instead of leaving AutoGap on. You can either turn auto-gapping on. This procedure can improve the clarity of your drawing considerably. can increase the efficiency of your design session. automatic gapping is off. page 270 • Turn AutoGap On or Off. Notes • Using Gap Now. Symbology and priority for your line gaps is set in Options Manager.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Gapping Lines: An Overview A gap in a drawing is a condition that exists when two lines intersect graphically in the drawing but not physically in the plant. The toolbar contains an AutoGap button off.

Related Topics • Gapping Lines: An Overview. Using the Gap Now command does not affect any setting for the AutoGap command. Notes • Using the Gap Now command does not affect any setting for the AutoGap command. page 156 270 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . gaps appear automatically. page 269 • Routing Lines: An Overview. on the entire drawing. The status bar at the bottom of the window alerts you to avoid selecting another command while the software completes the gapping. page 156 Gap Now Command Tools > Gap Now Performs gapping on the current drawing. page 270 Perform Line Gapping in Your Drawing Now Click Tools > Gap Now. that is. Notes on • • When you route lines and AutoGap is on. Related Topics • Routing Lines: An Overview. Gapping refers to the condition that exists when two lines intersect graphically on the drawing but do not physically intersect in the plant. Tip • You can turn the automatic gapping on or off by clicking AutoGap the main toolbar. • Related Topics • Gapping Lines: An Overview.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Turn AutoGap On or Off Click Tools > AutoGap. Using Gap Now instead of leaving AutoGap on improves the performance of the software. too. page 269 • Turn AutoGap On or Off.

by using the Update Symbology command. which are assigned in SmartPlant Engineering Manager. you can always override plant-wide symbology choices in your drawing by using drawing filters and choosing alternate symbology for items. the drawing. you cannot revert to previous definitions. Minimum Connector Segment and Routing Self-Avoidance. Once you load the current plant-wide definitions into your drawing. You can force changes in Options Manager to appear in the current drawing by updating Options Manager settings. to find out if you can make changes to the plant-wide symbology in Options Manager. Related Topics Update Symbology. page 271 • SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 271 . page 272 Update Symbology Command Tools > Update Symbology Updates the line width and color symbology for your active drawing. However. page 190 • Update Line Settings. The ApplySettingsCmd macro also updates the line settings. This command refreshes the graphic symbology of symbols in your drawing based on the current settings in Options Manager. Redefining symbology in Options Manager usually only affects drawings created after the change. The symbology and other settings defined in Options Manager usually only take effect in those drawings that are created after those values are defined. However. check your permissions. • Related Topics • Customize a Filter Tab for the Drawing View. Notes • Any user can update drawings using these commands. so that the current values in Options Manager are reflected in the drawing. page 272 • Updating Options Manager Settings: An Overview. regardless of when the drawing was created. The Update Symbology command makes it possible to override this constraint.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Updating Options Manager Settings: An Overview You can force the software to redraw the graphic representation of your data. page 272 • Update Symbology. page 138 • Update Label Settings.

unless Options Manager symbology changes again. 2. The ApplySettingsCmd. Related Topics • Updating Options Manager Settings: An Overview.dll macro applies the latest settings to all runs on the current drawing. • • Related Topics Updating Options Manager Settings: An Overview. Redefining symbology in Options Manager usually only affects drawings created after the change. page 271 272 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . in Options Manager control the behavior of pipe and signal runs when they are placed in a drawing or when an inline component is placed on a run. Note • Two settings. However. You do not have to update symbology for this drawing again. page 271 • Using Filters: An Overview. Click Tools > Update Symbology.dll. Notes • The line width and color symbology for your active drawing is changed to the most recent symbology defined in Options Manager.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Update Symbology 1. You must run this macro for every drawing individually. page 138. you can always override plant-wide symbology choices in your drawing by using drawing filters and choosing alternate symbology for items. The Update Symbology command makes it possible to override this constraint. Click Tools > Custom Commands. Open a drawing. Minimum Connector Segment and Routing Self-Avoidance. For more information. Once you load the current plant-wide symbology definitions into your drawing. but the new values only affect lines placed after the change. even if you end your design session. double-click ApplySettingsCmd. 2. see Customize a Filter Tab for the Drawing View. you cannot revert to previous definitions. On the Custom Commands dialog box. You can change these settings in Options Manager. page 130 • Update Line Settings 1. Tip • You can find this macro in \Program Files\Smartplant\P&ID Workstation\Program.

If you change the copied data. or you can insert a Microsoft Excel worksheet into a drawing. You can embed an entire document inside another document by inserting the information with the Insert > Object command on the Edit menu. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 273 . You can even create a drawing that contains another drawing. You can insert linked information with the Paste Special command on the Edit menu. You can link an entire document to another document by inserting the information with the Insert > Object command on the Edit menu. When you change the original data. This box displays the information that you pasted. You can embed information with the Paste Special command on the Edit menu. For example. or images between drawings or documents that were created with this software and other OLE applications. You can edit the linked information by opening the source document. and an Excel worksheet. numbers. You can move whole documents around or just parts of a document that you select. Embedding copies information and stores the information in another document that was created in a different application. When you change the original data. You can insert information created in another application with one of many methods: • You can cut and paste an item to delete it from one location and move it to another location. You can transfer text. You can link or embed information between drawings or documents that were created with this software and OLE software. the copy can be updated either automatically or manually. If you change the embedded object. The linked data is stored in the source document itself. You can copy and paste an item to duplicate it in another location. the original information does not change. The information that you move is an object. Linking stores data in one location and places a copy and a link in another location. and vice versa. When you paste the information in the destination document with the Paste Link option. Embedding copies data in one document and stores the information in another document.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Linking and Embedding Objects: An Overview This software is compatible with Object Linking and Embedding (OLE) software. you can use Microsoft Word to make a comment and then display the comment in your drawing. notes from Microsoft Word. Linking stores data in one location and places a copy with a link in another location. the original information does not change and vice versa. • • • Linking or Embedding An object is data from one application that you insert in a drawing. a reference point or box is inserted into the destination document. the pasted data is updated either automatically or manually.

• 274 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . On the dialog box. If document size is not an important factor. and not remove it from its original location.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview If you want to keep the document size small. The entire document is embedded into the drawing. you could link the drawing inside the documents that contained the reports. or browse to the document. select the Create From File option and then enter the name. On the Paste Special dialog box be sure that you select Paste and not Paste Link. Each report would automatically display the results of the drawing updates. Then. Embedding is useful when the person viewing the document with the embedded information does not have access to the software that created the object. You can then edit the embedded information with the software that created it. The person can still view the information if it is embedded in the document. • • Linking or Embedding an Object If you want to insert an existing document. If you cannot edit the information. not by the size of the data itself. and Paste commands on the Edit menu in any OLE software. the software automatically embeds the information in the document. select Link on the dialog box. later. For example. Embedded information is also a good choice if the information does not need updating. For example. if you want to display a drawing in several different reports that you created in Microsoft Word. then use embedding. select Paste Link on the dialog box. too. Copy. press Ctrl while dragging. the information appears as a static picture. you can use Edit > Insert > Object. Or if you want to link the object. If you copy or paste information into an application in which you cannot edit the information. Linking is also useful when you want to share information in many different places and set that information to update automatically. Notes • If you want to copy the information. you could embed each drawing into a Microsoft Word document and send the Microsoft Word document to each reviewer. Linked information increases the document size only by the size of the displayed image. if you wanted to send out several drawings for review. and Pasting The easiest way to embed an object is to use the Cut. make sure you have not selected Link on the dialog box. then link the data to another document. Embedded objects make the file size larger. Embedding by Cutting or Copying. you could update the drawing by editing it in this software. Notes • If you want to embed the existing object. If you want to link the existing object.

You can type an URL with http syntax in the Description dialog box to link World Wide Web documents to an item. page 277 • Link or Embed a Previously Existing Object. page 283 • Change a Link. you can correct this problem by using the CheckFilePathsCmd macro. where you can embed an image into a drawing. page 273 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 275 . page 283 • Edit an Embedded Object. right-click the embedded object. page 282 • Embed a New Object. page 282 • Check Symbol Paths. page 278 Image Command Edit > Insert > Image Opens the Insert Image dialog box. Important • • • Linked or embedded files are not transferred by workshare. The menus and toolbars of the current software are temporarily replaced by the menus and toolbars of the software that just opened. page 282 • Embed a New Object. Notes • You can click commands on a shortcut menu to activate the software that created the object. and they should be located in the same directory as the drawing files. If you do not have the source software installed. page 277 • Link or Embed a Previously Existing Object. See Related Topics for more information.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Editing a Linked or Embedded Object To edit an object. Related Topics • Break a Link. page 278 • Linking and Embedding Objects: An Overview. If items inadvertently point to the wrong catalog. Symbols in drawings usually point to the catalog associated with the current plant. Related Topics • Break a Link. you cannot edit the object. You must transfer those files manually. you can double-click the object to open the software that created the object. page 283 • Change a Link. To get the shortcut menu. You can edit the embedded image by double-clicking it.

You can edit a linked object by clicking Edit > Links and selecting Open Source. browse to the folder and image file that you want to embed in your drawing. You can edit an embedded object by double-clicking it. the software updates only the copy of the object stored in the drawing. 4. • Related Topics • Linking and Embedding Objects: An Overview. On the Insert Image dialog box. the drawing stores information about the location of the object. • The Insert Object command inserts any OLE-enabled object. Related Topics • Break a Link. Move the pointer to the location in the drawing where you want to place your image and click to place it. Tip A box that is the size of the image appears at the end of the pointer so that you know where the image fits in the drawing. but the object itself is not stored in the drawing. page 283 • Edit an Embedded Object. When you change a linked object. the software stores a copy of the object in the drawing. When you embed an object in a drawing.dwg drawing. Click OK. 2. • When you link an object to a drawing. page 273 276 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . or CAD drawing. page 273 Object Command Edit > Insert > Object Opens the Insert Object dialog box. page 278 • Linking and Embedding Objects: An Overview. Click Edit > Insert > Image. where you can insert objects into a drawing with linking or embedding. such as a . such as a Microsoft Word file. page 277 • Link or Embed a Previously Existing Object. The difference between linking and embedding is the method for storing and updating data.avi document. When you change an embedded object. .Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Embed an Image 1. page 282 • Embed a New Object. 3. all drawings that have links to that object are updated.

click the Create New option. For more information. If the software temporarily replaces some of the menus and toolbars. click the Yes button. serious problems result in the drawing. This behavior can cause the dimensions and text to appear very large or small in the drawing. • 5. the terminators. For more information. click anywhere outside the embedded object. If a message appears asking if you want to update the document. 4. see Paste an Item With a Different Format. which now includes a box the size of the object at its end. text. After you create the object in its separate window. and styles appear in paper units relative to the source document. Click the pointer. Use Catalog Manager to create. see Link or Embed a Previously Existing Object. With this procedure. click File > Exit or File > Update in the source application.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Embed a New Object 1. If you attempt to create a symbol source file. or update symbols. spaces. Caution • Do not use these procedures to create a symbol file. 2. page 219. On the Insert Object dialog box. • • • SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 277 . If you insert a document into the drawing. • Tip The contents of the list depend on the applications that are installed on your computer and that support linking and embedding. you cannot embed a selection in a document. page 280. change. 3. page 278. at the location in the drawing where you want to insert the object. For more information. page 218 or Move an Item Using the Move Button. you embed an entire document. Tip You can insert an object that already exists also. You can place an object on the Clipboard and then embed it by using Edit > Paste Special. 6. choose the software in which you want to create the object and then click OK. Click Edit > Insert > Object. In Object Type. Notes • You can move the embedded object again at any later time. see Move an Item With the Select Tool.

Important • • Linked or embedded files are not transferred by Workshare. Once you embed a border file into a drawing template and a drawing is created in Drawing Manager using that template. Click Edit > Insert > Object. the change does not appear in the drawing until it is closed and re-opened. Click the pointer. To change the way the software updates links. 3.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview • The software creates automatic links by default. Caution • Do not use these procedures to change a symbol file. click Edit > Links and specify automatic or manual update mode for each link. page 121. page 273 Link or Embed a Previously Existing Object 1. In the File box. Use Catalog Manager to change or update symbols. 4. you can type an URL with http syntax to link documents to an Internet item. and they should be located in the same directory as the drawing files. or open the symbol source file. break. If you attempt to update. or click Browse to find and choose the file. You must transfer those files manually. An automatic update occurs when the drawing is opened: if a change is made to the source document and the drawing is already open. If you want to embed the object. which now includes a box the size of the object at its end. Click the ellipses to open the Description dialog box. If you want to link this object to your drawing. change. 6. click Create From File. In the Description box in the Properties window. 5. select the Link box. see Create a Drawing Template. type the name and directory path of the document that you want to include in your drawing. do not select this option. 2. 278 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . any changes to the border file are not reflected in drawings created prior to the change. On the Insert Object dialog box. page 245 • Linking and Embedding Objects: An Overview. serious problems result in the drawing. The software updates manual links only at the time that you indicate. • Related Topics • Cutting or Deleting Items: An Overview. For more information about creating drawing templates. Click OK. at the location in the drawing where you want to insert the object.

You can link an OLE by dragging a document from the Windows environment onto the drawing also. An automatic update occurs when the drawing is opened: if a change is made to the source document and the drawing is already open. page 280. by dragging the file from Windows into a drawing. you can type an URL with http syntax to link documents to an Internet item. and they should be located in the same directory as the drawing files. page 273 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 279 . You can place an object on the Clipboard and then embed it by using Edit > Paste Special.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Notes • You can move the object at any time later. Important • • • • • • • Linked or embedded files are not transferred by Workshare. If you do not press these keys. see Move an Item With the Select Tool. You must press the Ctrl + Shift keys while dragging to link the information. page 245 • Linking and Embedding Objects: An Overview. the terminators. Click the ellipses to open the Description dialog box. With this procedure. page 218 or Move an Item Using the Move Button. The software creates automatic links by default. You must transfer those files manually. the information is embedded. You can embed an OLE object. you cannot link to a selection in a document. This behavior can cause the dimensions and text to appear very large or small in the drawing. The software updates manual links only at the time you indicate. click Edit > Links and specify automatic or manual update mode for each link. For more information. spaces. Related Topics • Cutting or Deleting Items: An Overview. too. page 219. and styles appear in paper units relative to the source document. see Paste an Item With a Different Format. In the Description box in the Properties window. the change does not appear in the drawing until it is closed and re-opened. you can create a link only to an entire document. text. For more information. If you insert a document into the drawing. To change the way the software updates links. such as a Microsoft Word document or Microsoft Excel workbook.

2. both options can be available. • • Related Topics Cutting or Deleting Items: An Overview. In the As list. Related Topics • Copy an Item. If you select an item for the insertion point and that item cannot be replaced. select the format that you want to use to paste the information from the list of available options. the Clipboard contents are not pasted over the selected item. page 280 Paste an Item With a Different Format 1.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Paste Special Command Edit > Paste Special Inserts the Clipboard contents into a drawing with the format that you select in the Paste Special dialog box. Notes • The contents of the Clipboard remain unchanged until you use the Cut or Copy command again. page 245 • Linking and Embedding Objects: An Overview. page 273 • Paste an Item With a Different Format. Click Edit > Paste Special. Pasted text and items remain selected after you use the Paste Special command until you select another item or click Esc. Choose the Paste command to embed the information or the Paste Link command to link the information. • 3. page 253 • Linking and Embedding Objects: An Overview. Depending on the type of information. Tip You cannot paste an item unless you have previously placed it on the Clipboard with the Copy or Cut commands. page 273 • 280 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Tip • The Results box gives an explanation of the outcome of your selection.

Make the changes that you want in the source file. and other OLE objects. Click the Open Source button. 3. Tip You must have the appropriate software installed on your computer in order to be able to edit the object in its source software. Caution • Do not use this command to change a symbol file. Click Edit > Links on the main menu bar. Click File > Save to save the changes in the source file. select the link that you want to edit.pid file to a MicroStation® or AutoCAD® file. If you attempt to update. page 273 • Working with Drawings: An Overview. Note • The software does not translate OLE objects that you have linked to your document when you export a . On the Links dialog box. Related Topics • Edit a Linked Object. • 5. page 102 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 281 . This command lets you manipulate Object Linking and Embedding (OLE) objects. The Links dialog box opens. Related Topics • Linking and Embedding Objects: An Overview. page 273 Edit a Linked Object 1. 2. serious problems result in the drawing.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Links Command Edit > Links Edits or updates links to objects in another document. 4. page 281 • Linking and Embedding Objects: An Overview. Excel workbooks. You can change links for Microsoft Word documents. change. Use Catalog Manager to change or update symbols. break or open the source file.

3. page 273 Change a Link 1. 2. Double-click the embedded object. Caution • Do not use these procedures to change a symbol file. If you attempt to update. In the File Name box. Select Edit > Links. Tip You must have the appropriate software installed on your computer in order to be able to edit the object in its source software. serious problems result in the drawing. 2. In the Links dialog box. If you are editing the object in software that temporarily replaces menus and toolbars. Do one of the following: • • If you are editing the object in a separate application window. Edit the object. • Related Topics • Linking and Embedding Objects: An Overview. Use Catalog Manager to change or update symbols. break. click either Exit or Update on the File menu to return to the design software. page 273 282 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Edit an Embedded Object 1. click the link that you want to change. make sure you update all links to the new source file. or open the symbol source file. Tip • If you do not see the file that you want to link to. browse to a different drive or folder. Click Change Source. Note • If you have other links to the same source file. click anywhere outside the embedded object to return to the design software. 4. Related Topics • Linking and Embedding Objects: An Overview. specify the file that you want to change the link to. 3. change.

Use Catalog Manager to change or update symbols. and it creates a log file that reports all symbols missing from the current catalog. • Related Topics Linking and Embedding Objects: An Overview. Click Edit > Links.dll. break. 2.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Break a Link 1.log. Click Close. When the software asks you to confirm that you want to break the link. serious problems result in the drawing. Tip • You can find this macro in \Program Files\Smartplant\P&ID Workstation\Program. Caution • Do not use this command to edit a symbol file. or open the symbol file. double-click CheckFilePathCmd. 5. page 273 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 283 . On the Custom Commands dialog box. If you attempt to update. change. page 273 Check Symbol Paths 1. 3. click Yes. Select the link or links that you want to break. Related Topics • Linking and Embedding Objects: An Overview. The log resides in your Temp directory and is named CheckFilePathsFor_yourplant. Click Break Link. 2. Notes • The CheckFilePathCmd macro checks the directory paths in the file names of all symbols used in the plant. Click Tools > Custom Commands. 4.

If you want to retrieve the assembly from the Catalog Explorer tree view. The assembly placement quits. An example of an assembly is a control valve with vents on both sides. page 286 • Place an Assembly. which is specified in Options Manager. the file structure and symbols must be identical. Assemblies cannot be placed inline. page 287 284 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . you get an error message that the software cannot find your reference files. You can create an assembly by selecting several items in a drawing and saving as an assembly. The information in each label remains intact when you place the assembly. Note • Assemblies can be created in one plant and used in another. You can delete just one item without concern that the software deletes the entire assembly. you select the assembly from Catalog Explorer and click a location in the drawing. and a piping bypass around the valve. Instead of copying and pasting each individual item into a drawing at several locations. However.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Working With Assemblies: An Overview An assembly is a group of items that you can place in a drawing at one time. Placing assemblies is like placing any other item from Catalog Explorer into a drawing. When you want to place an assembly into a drawing. you can drag the assembly into the drawing. if required. you can place the group of items: the assembly. an instrument loop that controls the valve. Move the symbols that cannot be found to the location indicated in the error message. The Save As Assembly command prompts you to save the assembly in the correct directory. You must place the assembly first and then route piping to it. After you have placed an assembly. Related Topics • Create an Assembly. you must save the assembly where the other symbols are located. If you try to place an assembly into a plant that uses a different file structure. which is the same file extension as a drawing. the items in the assembly are treated as separate items.pid. The file extension for an assembly is . Or. Assemblies can save time because you do not have to keep creating commonlyoccurring groups of items.

and you can name the assembly and place it in the proper directory. The Save Assembly dialog box opens after you specify the origin. you can use unattached ends of pipe runs. page 287 • Working With Assemblies: An Overview. Note • The Save As Assembly command does not constitute an undoable action.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Save As Assembly Command File > Save As Assembly Saves selected items as an assembly. This command is available only when items are selected in the drawing. A red target appears at the end of your pointer. page 284 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 285 . you cannot use labels. or child items. Assemblies are saved with the . however. pipe runs. You use this target to specify the origin of the assembly for placement. For example. page 286 • Place an Assembly. You can only use a standalone symbol as the origin of an assembly. Related Topics • Create an Assembly. therefore. it does not appear as a step available for the Undo command. signal runs.pid file extension.

Tip You can only use a standalone symbol as the origin of an assembly. Tips • You can select more than one item at once by dragging the pointer to fence objects. You can save an assembly in any directory that you want. Use the red target that appears at the end of your pointer to specify the origin of the assembly for placement. However. page 144 • Working With Assemblies: An Overview. Move the symbols that cannot be found to the location indicated in the error message. If you try to place an assembly into a plant that uses a different file structure. you get an error message that the software cannot find your reference files. however. To remove an item from the selection. In order to save assemblies. page 287 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview. The file extension for assemblies is . you can use unattached ends of pipe runs.pid. Assemblies can be created in one plant and used in another. Click Save. you must have write permissions to the folder defined in Options Manager. For example. but the default assembly path is specified in Options Manager. If you use the default folder. • 3. enter the file name. or child items. pipe runs. page 284 286 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . 4. Click File > Save As Assembly. signal runs. the file structure and symbols must be identical. • 5. then you can retrieve the assembly from Catalog Explorer. you cannot use labels. • • • Related Topics • Place an Assembly. click it while pressing Ctrl. Notes • Any graphics that have been band-aided should be deleted and replaced prior to using this command. Select several components in the drawing.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Create an Assembly 1. On the Save Assembly dialog box. 2. The assembly placement quits.

Assemblies can be created in one plant and used in another. Some assembly members also appear during placement to aid you. For example. Press Esc to quit placement mode. Modify or delete individual components in the assembly as necessary. click the assembly that you want to place. • • • Related Topics • Working With Assemblies: An Overview. or child items. page 249 Notes • Assemblies are stored in a specific folder. You can only use a standalone symbol as the origin of an assembly. in the Catalog Explorer tree view. the file structure and symbols must be identical. 4. however. 3. • Move an Item Using the Move Button. you can use unattached ends of pipe runs. You can save an assembly in any directory that you want. you get an error message that the software cannot find your reference files. If you use the default folder. pipe runs. page 244 Delete an Item from the Drawing. page 284 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 287 .Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Place an Assembly 1. then you can retrieve the assembly from Catalog Explorer. signal runs. The assembly placement quits. you cannot use labels. Move the symbols that cannot be found to the location indicated in the error message. • Tip You cannot place an assembly into a line that is already routed. but the default assembly path is specified in Options Manager. page 242 Rotate an Item About an Axis You Define. In the Catalog Explorer list view. If you try to place an assembly into a plant that uses a different file structure. or you can escape placement mode by right-clicking. Connect the pipe runs and instruments on either side of the assembly. Use the red target that appears at the end of your pointer to position the assembly appropriately. 2. However. page 219 Mirror an Item About an Existing Mirror Axis or Linear Element. Assemblies. Tips • The red target is the origin of the assembly.

Note • When you are using projects inside SmartPlant P&ID. Projects and Claiming One of the main capabilities associated with using projects in SmartPlant is the ability for a project to claim a drawing object. However. unless the drawing is either fetched or checked out to a project. actual design work is still accomplished in SmartPlant P&ID.Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview After enabling and creating projects in SmartPlant Engineering Manager and using Drawing Manager to manipulate the drawings. However. remember that the reference data belongs to the Plant and is used by projects of the Plant. the project controls modifications to that object. managing and meting out that work is largely controlled from the Drawing Manager interface. Related Topics • Claiming Items: An Overview. but the claim states of objects inside drawings do have ramifications for drawing manipulation and for completing projects. page 304 288 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . you can claim items on a fetched drawing. All the modifications and claiming of objects is carried out in the design software. All drawing versions in the Plant are read-only drawings when projects are enabled. Once projects are enabled in SmartPlant Engineering Manager. When a project claims an object. but the Plant can still delete these drawings. You do not need to check out a drawing to claim items on it. such as table layouts or formats or rules. page 289 • Comparing and Refreshing Versions: An Overview. check in. at the project level. You cannot change reference data. any drawings that might have existed in the Plant before projects were enabled remain in the Plant. A project cannot modify objects it has not claimed. drawings are created inside projects. the Plant can no longer create drawings. and check out drawings. Only the project can use the commands on the Project menu in Drawing Manager to fetch.

Since claiming makes it possible for a project to work on an itemby-item basis. The simplest way to create a new item is to drag a catalog item from the Catalog Explorer and drop it onto a drawing. nor are the mirror and rotate handles available when you select an item not claimed by your project. For example.Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview Claiming Items: An Overview A project in the Plant frequently deals with a subset of items within a drawing. No other explicit prompts let you know that you cannot edit an item that you have not claimed. requires that the affected items be claimed. Therefore. However. when an existing drawing is fetched or checked out to a project. If they are not claimed. Before you can modify or delete any of those items. The Properties window and the Engineering Data Editor do not allow editing of properties on items that are not claimed: the properties are read-only as if the drawing is in a read-only state. Any modification that changes the meaning of the schematic design. labels can be added or removed without claiming anything. the nozzles and the pipe runs must all be claimed before you delete the vessel. If they are not claimed. a symbol can be repositioned or the vertices of a connector can be moved. You cannot delete items that have not been claimed. you can delete it using the same methods that you would use in a green field plant. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 289 . However. a error message will be displayed. some of the piping components and inline instruments in that pipe run will be reassigned to the new pipe run. none of the items on that drawing are initially claimed. the vessel. For example. then those related items must also be claimed. Properties of items that are not claimed by the active project cannot be changed. you can modify it using the same methods that you would use in a plant that is not project enabled. you can manipulate the Drawing view properties so that the claim state of items is visually apparent. if you delete a vessel. a error message will be displayed. Therefore. A new item is created in a project in the same ways it can be created in a green field plant. if the deletion of an item would result in related items being deleted or modified. After you have claimed an item. you must claim them. however. the nozzles attached to it will be deleted and the pipe runs connected to the nozzles will be modified. claiming fosters an ability to define the scope of work as narrowly as necessary. the pipe run. However. if you break a pipe run. A new item in a drawing is automatically claimed to the project. Also. The Claim functionality provided by SmartPlant P&ID allows you to grant control of an item to a project. For example. Purely graphical modifications to drawing items are allowed without claiming those items. After you have claimed an item. the piping components and the instruments in that pipe run must all be claimed before you break it.

run Verify for Check In to resolve the situation. only one project can claim an item at any given time. You can determine the validity of a claim by using the Claim Status command. This process automatically sets the claim to valid and allows the check in to occur. and any new item created in a project is automatically claimed by that project. and on the Edit menu.Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview You do not need to check out a drawing to claim objects. Otherwise. however. If the Claim Mode is set to Shared. Claim commands appear on shortcut menus in the Drawing view. it must be consistent with the state of the item in the Plant. a drawing cannot be checked in if any objects that are not claimed differ from the Plant. Shared mode allows concurrent projects to overlap at the object level. Invalid claiming can happen only for Plants that support Shared claiming of database items. Claims are automatically released on all drawing items when that drawing is checked into the Plant. you can fetch a drawing with read/write permissions and claim its objects. an invalid claim exists. you can invoke a claim at any time to expand the scope of your project. If the Claim Mode is set to Exclusive. Invalid Claims When an item is claimed by a project. Claim Mode The Claim Mode can be set to either Exclusive or Shared by using the Settings option in SmartPlant P&ID Options Manager. If an invalid claim is found but the item in question matches the item in the Plant. Conflict resolution at check in time will be more complex. Invalidly claimed items can not be modified. but you cannot release the claim that is automatically created when your project creates a new item. Exclusive mode enforces the rule that concurrent projects do not overlap at the object level. in the Engineering Data Editor. a single item can be claimed to more than one project. the claims made by other projects to objects on that same drawing are now invalid if the project that checked in the drawing also changed an item claimed by a different project. Releasing Claims From inside a project. Invalidly claimed items differ from the Plant items in that you cannot modify them and check a drawing into the Plant without first establishing a valid claim. The Claim Mode controls how items are claimed by concurrent projects. 290 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . conflict resolution at check in time is simplified. This setting may be required for plants that have overlapping projects. You can also release a claim at any time. With this setting. When the Plant uses Shared claim mode and a project checks in a drawing.

it can be modified by anyone with the appropriate permissions in that project. page 301 Claim Command Engineering Data Editor > Edit > Claim Gives control of the selected items to the current active project. allowing you to confirm the "claim-ability" of the items and enter claim comments. • • • • • • Related Topics • Claim a Drawing Item. Claim commands are not available when you open a fetched drawing with read-only permissions. Once a project claims an item. page 292 • Display Claim Status in the Drawing Symbology. Claim comments can be viewed later by anyone in the Plant when the claim status is displayed. You must have full control user access permissions for P&ID Objects before you can claim objects. Remember that objects are claimed by the project. not by a single user.Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview Notes • A list of claimed items is automatically published to The Engineering Framework. page 292 • Claiming Items: An Overview. The Claim dialog box opens. Claiming items clears the Undo stack. Claiming of labels is ignored. For more information about setting user access permissions. Related Topics • Claim a Drawing Item. page 303 • Display the Claim Status of a Drawing Item. claim is not an undoable command. and fetching drawings. see SmartPlant Engineering Manager Help. page 289 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 291 . checking out. Drawing Manager is the only tool for checking in. page 302 • Release a Claim. Thus.

3. On the Claim dialog box. In this list. and fill in the Comments box. You can select multiple elements of this list and record comments for this claim operation. Comments . page 44 Claim a Drawing Item 1. In the Drawing view or Engineering Data Editor. record comments about this claim operation. not by a single user.Lists the items that are selected in the Drawing view or Engineering Data Editor and their details. Once a project claims an item. Remember that objects are claimed by the project. select the items that you want to claim. claim is not an undoable command. These are the items that you claim to your project when you click OK. Notes • • A newly placed item is automatically claimed by the project that placed it. The Claim command checks first if your project already has a valid claim on a selected item. page 289 292 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . select the item or items that you want to add comments to.Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview Claim Dialog Box Opens when you select an item and click Edit > Claim on the main menu bar and displays details of the items that you select for claiming. Click Edit > Claim. Related Topics • Claim a Drawing Item. You can discover if the selected items are already claimed by your project or another project. page 292 • Claim Command. Items to be claimed . you can also see if a selected item is already claimed or has any other claim errors or warnings associated with it. Finally the command compares the selected items against the same items in the Plant and displays a warning if an object either differs from that item in the Plant or if the object does not exist in the Plant. • Related Topics • Claiming Items: An Overview. this step can produce an error display on the Claim dialog box. it can be modified by anyone with the appropriate permissions in that project. and if the Plant uses exclusive sharing. In the Items to be claimed list. 2.Allows you to record comments for the claim operation that you are currently undertaking. Thus. Claiming items clears the Undo stack. Next it checks if the items are claimed by another project.

the properties are read-only. The following topics discuss some of the ways that claiming restricts your activities. When you select an item that has not been claimed. otherwise. claiming objects to your project involves many special relationships. When you select a line segment. the Properties window allows them to be modified. the Properties window displays the properties of the associated pipe or signal run. the software cannot prevent you from initiating a command. The properties of unclaimed items are read-only. When you claim an item. you can edit its properties through the EDE.Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview Enforcing Claims Whether you are using shared or exclusive claiming mode. You must have full control permissions on P&ID Objects before you can claim any drawing items. When you select multiple items. If any of the selected items are not claimed. the EDE treats the item properties as read-only. No items are ever claimed by the Plant. Note • Claim Mode is defined in Options Manager for the Plant and all its projects. see the User Access chapter in SmartPlant Engineering Manager Help. commands simply do not allow the operation to proceed if you do not have the necessary permissions. if they are all claimed. the Properties window allows the properties of that item to be viewed and modified. Controlling Access Each command in the software checks your permissions for the items that it modifies. otherwise. For more information. Properties Window When you select a claimed item. When possible. The EDE behaves similarly to the Properties window. but an error message is displayed. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 293 . it is claimed to your active project. If the run has been claimed. Modifying Properties Claiming impacts properties modifications in the following manner. the properties can be edited. In some cases. Engineering Data Editor (EDE) If the item has been claimed. the Properties window allows the properties to be viewed but not modified. the Properties window treats the whole group as read-only. such as when using the Delete command.

see Placement Rules. You can place a flow arrow label. however. if the flow direction is already defined.Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview Consistency Check Dialog Box The Solutions section of the Consistency Check dialog box allows you to copy property values from one item to another. the user cannot modify any of the implied items that the model item owns. Equipment Components. In some cases this results in resolving an inconsistency. When a relationship to an unclaimed item is created. The following list explains how the relationship between an object and its target effects claiming.A flow-oriented component sets the flow direction of the target pipe run. if the destination item is not claimed. or Instrument Components . • • • 294 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . The target pipe run must be claimed.The target item does not need to be claimed. page 294. such as when you place a nozzle on a vessel. Placing Piping Components or Instruments in Pipe or Signal Runs The target run must be claimed. In certain cases. Placing and Moving Drawing Items Sometimes the target item must be claimed. For the selected solution. if the rule calls for properties to be copied to an unclaimed item. placing a piping component or inline instrument causes a zero-length line segment to be created and automatic line connectivity causes it to be joined to an existing run. however. but other times it does not have to be claimed.A reducer is a "line-breaking component. the applicable rules copy property values across the relationship. The target of that zero-length line must be claimed. The Reapply Rules button executes the placement rules that copy property values across a relationship. For a description of how Reapply Rules can interact with claiming. Placing Reducers . Placement Rules When a new relationship is created. Placing Flow-Oriented Components . and the properties are not copied. the action is not allowed. If a model item is not claimed. the Apply button is not available. if it is not already set. • Placing Nozzles. An inconsistency indicator shows the inconsistency between the two related items. properties can be copied from that item without any problem." The target pipe run and all of its components must be claimed. it means that you can modify that model item and all of its implied items. Implied Items When a drawing item is claimed.

• • • If the target item needs to be claimed but is not claimed. and your item will not "snap" into position. when routing a line segment up to an existing inline component. If the lines are not claimed.Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview • Placing OPCs on Runs . Geometric Modifications Geometric operations include a geometric move. Rotation and Mirroring of Inline Components Rotations of 180 degrees and mirroring about the local y-axis for inline components are special geometric modifications cases because the lines are disconnected before and reconnected after the operations. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 295 . If no type of placement is allowed at that point. you are not allowed to connect to the target. the target will not highlight. The target run must be claimed. and a scale or parametric modification. automatic line connectivity will cause an existing zero length run to be joined to the new run. In most cases.The piping component or instrument does not have to be claimed. must be claimed before these operations are allowed.The OPC does not have to be claimed. None of the connected items have to be claimed either. In certain cases. Routing Lines up to OPCs .The piping component or instrument must be claimed since it will be adopted by the new run. as if you pressed the Alt key. the lines. The black connection handle does not appear at the required point. Routing Lines up to Another Pipe or Signal Run .The nozzles do not have to be claimed. sometimes not. the standard claim violation message displays. but not the selected symbol. then you cannot place your item onto the target. freestanding placement is still allowed. the move operation can become a geometric move. Here is a list of the cases where claiming plays a role: • • Routing Lines up to Nozzles . If the target item needs to be claimed but is not claimed. Placing and Modifying Lines Sometimes the target item must be claimed. Routing Lines up to Owned Piping Components or Instruments . Therefore. the "no place" indicator is displayed. If the required connected items are not all claimed. as described above. Rule-Based Moves All connected items must be claimed.The target run must be claimed. a mirroring. Routing Lines up to Freestanding Piping Components or Instruments . The selected symbol does not have to be claimed to perform these operations.The target connector must be claimed. with the Alt key pressed where necessary. a rotation.

you do not need to claim it.Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview Geometric Modification If you move a line segment or a line vertex that is internal to a line. Breaking and Joining Runs The Break Run command allows you to split one piping or signal run into two pieces. Placing Labels on Area Breaks . The target item may need to be claimed. then the run it belongs to must be claimed since the branch point is deleted and the adjacent line segments in the existing connected run are merged. Extreme End of a Run If you modify the start point of the first line segment in a run or the end point of the last line segment in a run. The target item may need to be claimed. you must claim the item. However. the area break must be claimed. unless the flow direction is already defined for the line. This includes flow arrow labels. claiming plays a role in the following cases: • Placing Driving Labels . consequently. 296 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .Placing a label on an area break causes a dynamic property to be added to the area break. • If you modify a label. then the piping or signal run that owns the selected segment does not have to be claimed. The target item must be claimed. 3. Internal Vertex of a Run Modification of an internal vertex can result in the run being split. Both of the runs and all components in both runs must be claimed. the following stipulations apply: 1. Placing and Modifying Labels The target item for a label usually does not need to be claimed. The run to be broken and all components within that run must be claimed. For this to happen. If a component is connected to the endpoint. Therefore. The selected run must be claimed. 2. 2. However. modifying a driving label modifies the labeled item. 4. The Join Runs command allows you to combine two connected piping or signal runs into a single run. The entire run and all components must be claimed. it does not need to be claimed. then the following stipulations apply: 1. If the existing connected item is a branch point for the run.A driving label sets one or more properties on the labeled item.

and so no claiming is required. page 154 Placing and Modifying Area Breaks The placement of an area break does not create any new relationships and therefore does not require any claiming. Related Topics • Place Multiple Representations. the target is not highlighted as a valid replacement target. If the target line run is not claimed. Modifying an area break allows the shape to be changed. If the target is not claimed. Placing Gaps Placing a gap symbol into a piping or signal line implies that the target line must be claimed. but they cannot be replaced. Replace Mode The claim status check takes place as you move the pointer over the target. You must claim the selected equipment item before this command is made available on the Stockpile menu in the EDE. This is a purely geometric modification. thus creating a multiple representation in the database. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 297 . The Replace button is not available if an unclaimed item is selected.Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview Placing Multiple Representations This stockpile command enables you to place an additional representation of an existing equipment item into the design in a different drawing. it is not highlighted as a valid target when you move the pointer over it. To replace an item using these commands. you must claim that item. Replacing Drawing Items The Replace and Replace Mode commands replace one item representation in the design with a different representation and change the value of the "type" attribute for the design item. Find and Replace Items that are not claimed can be found.

then the delete operation proceeds normally. functions. Item in Select Set Equipment • • Additional items that must be claimed for Delete All nozzles. All lines that are attached to selected items or are dependent on those items must be claimed. and so forth • Nozzle • • Equipment Component Line Segment • • • Branch Point • • Piping Component • • Instrument • 298 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . That is. all items that are deleted along with a selected item must be claimed. an error message appears. All dependent items must be claimed. and item notes All item notes on those equipment components and nozzles All runs with lines attached to those nozzles All item notes All runs with lines attached to the nozzle All item notes The pipe or signal run that owns the segment All components in that run All runs with lines that attach to that branch point All item notes All item notes All runs with lines that attach to that piping component All instrument components – actuators. The following table expands on this idea. If any of the items or the dependent items are not claimed. item type by item type. Drawing Items Drawing items are deleted from a design using three different commands: Delete. Delete From Model. If all of the selected items and all of the related items are claimed. and Cut. equipment components. All of these commands check if the selected items and some dependent items are claimed.Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview Deleting Items Claiming impacts item deletion in the following manner.

The selected model item must be claimed before you can use this command.Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview Item in Select Set Additional items that must be claimed for Delete • • All item notes All runs with lines that attach to the instrument All item notes All runs with lines that attach to the OPC The partner OPC must be claimed also OPC • • • Stockpile Items Most items in the stockpile do not have any relationships. the property can be changed. the property can not be changed. OPCs can be deleted from the stockpile only if both OPCs in a pair are in the stockpile and are deleted at the same time. Refer to the Extending the Capabilities of SmartPlant P&ID and Logical Model Automation Reference topics. Moving Between Stockpiles The Move to Different Stockpile command in the Engineering Data Editor allows you to move an item from one stockpile to a different stockpile. for example loops. The software checks the claim status before setting any values. When an OPC is in the stockpile. If the item is claimed. If the plant item group is claimed and all of its members are claimed. For more information about validating properties. then the plant item group can be deleted. select Start > Programs > Intergraph SmartPlant P&ID > Programming Help. the Delete command opens the standard claim violation message. If the item is not claimed. Plant item groups. exist in the stockpile and have relationships to member items on a drawing or in a stockpile. and so forth. If the plant item group or any of its members is not claimed. If the item is not claimed. For these items. the Delete command opens the standard claim violation message. packages. Validating Properties The software uses validation functions before setting properties on items. In a project context. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 299 . it maintains its relationship to the partner OPC. it can be deleted from the stockpile. if the item is claimed. both OPCs in a pair must be claimed before they can be deleted.

Related Topics • Deleting Items.The Framework > Correlate command correlates pipe runs to the same design basis as an existing pipe run that is already correlated. The new item is claimed automatically as soon as it is created. Properties are copied from the primary pipe run to the other pipe runs. You must claim the pipe runs to be modified. Claims must be released before projects can be completed or for other projects to be able to check in drawings with changes. Create Task . Update Task . A confirmation message is displayed so that you can confirm the release-claim action. Correlate Items . If all of the necessary items are not claimed.Running an update task sets or changes some properties of an existing item. The item to be updated must be claimed before it can be updated. Related Topics • Claiming Items: An Overview.Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview To Do List and Correlating Items Claiming impacts the To Do List and other TEF commands in the following manner.Running a delete task causes the target item to be deleted. page 301 300 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . If it is not claimed. the task status is set to Error and a note is added to the Notes area on the General tab of the Task Properties dialog box. they cannot be correlated. Delete Task . the task status is set to Error and a note is added to the Notes area on the General tab of the Task Properties dialog box. page 289 • Release a Claim. page 298 Release Claim Command Engineering Data Editor > Edit > Release Claim Allows you to relinquish control by your project of the selected items. The item to be deleted and possibly other related items must be claimed before the task can do its work. If they are not claimed.Running a create task creates a new item in the stockpile.

SP_ID. A confirmation message is displayed. Notes • You cannot release the claim on an item that is claimed to your project if it is a new item that was created in your project. select the items for which you want to release claims. Related Topics • Claiming Items: An Overview. • Claim Status Command Engineering Data Editor > Edit > Claim Status Opens the Claim Status dialog box. You must select the items in the Drawing view or the Engineering Data Editor before using this command. page 302 Claim Status Dialog Box Opens when you select and item or items and click Edit > Claim Status on the main menu bar. and discover other details of the claim status. An item claimed by your active project is denoted by an item with an invalid claim on it is denoted by any other state remains blank.Opens the Claim dialog box. In the Drawing view or Engineering Data Editor. You can also release claims on items when you display their claim status. Right-click the item or select set and click Release Claim. The actual status is displayed in the Claims column of the list. is displayed in the Item Tag column. see Display the Claim Status of a Drawing Item. release the claims to items.Releases the claim from your project. Release Claim . If a selected item that appears in this dialog box does not have an item tag. page 289 • Display the Claim Status of a Drawing Item. For more information. A selected item in the list is highlighted in the design window. In order to complete the claim release operation. 2. choose Yes to release the claim.Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview Release a Claim 1. release the claims to items. page 302. select Yes on the confirmation dialog box that opens. You can review the details of the claimed state of the selected items. claim items. and so forth. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 301 . then the SmartPlant ID. Claim . which displays the details of the claimed state of the selected items and enables you to claim items. and you can claim the item and record claim comments.

page 302 Display the Claim Status of a Drawing Item 1.Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview Details .Opens the Details dialog box. and you can discover what project has claimed the selected item. page 45 • Display the Claim Status of a Drawing Item. 2. 5. 4. This dialog box opens when you click Details on the Claim Status dialog box. and any claim comments that were entered when it was claimed. Related Topics • Claim a Drawing Item. New items are automatically claimed to the project that created them. 3. the user that claimed it. and clicking Ctrl + C makes the selected items available to paste into another document. the user who claimed it. You can select all the items in the list by using Ctrl + A. page 45 • Display the Claim Status of a Drawing Item. The New Item entry is automatically added to the comments for an item that is new to the drawing. On the Claim Status dialog box. and claim comments that were entered when the claim was made. review the information in the list of items. Since newly placed items are automatically claimed by the project that places them. and any related comments. page 301 Details Dialog Box Displays details about the claim status of the item that you selected in the Claim Status dialog box. 6. select an element in the list and click Details. page 292 • Claim Status Command. To claim the items to your project. select elements in the list and click Claim. Related Topics • Claim Status Command. select elements in the list and click Release Claim. You can discover the project that has the claim. To relinquish claims on those items by your project . select the items for which you want to display the claim status. their claim comments are always "New Item". the project that has claimed the item. page 302 • Release a Claim. the user that claimed the item. To see more detailed information about the claim status of that item. In the Drawing view or Engineering Data Editor. 302 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Click Edit > Claim Status.

Notes • You define the line color and weight used to designate claim status on the Claims tab of the View Properties dialog box. page 289 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 303 . You can use this command to switch the claim symbology on and off. 2. Click View > Show Claims. Click View > Show Claims again to turn off the display of claim status in the symbology of drawing items. page 303 • Display Claim Status in the Drawing Symbology 1.Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview Note • When you see the item tag listed for claimed items and an item tag is not defined for the selected items. GUIDs are automatically generated for every design item. not the line pattern. Related Topics • Claiming Items: An Overview. Using the options on the Claims tab causes only the color and line weight to change. the claim status will be plotted. the software displays the item tag in the Claim Status dialog box. page 289 Show Claims Command View > Show Claims Sets the appearance of drawing objects as it is specified in the Claims tab of the View Properties dialog box. Related Topics Display Claim Status in the Drawing Symbology. • Related Topics • Claiming Items: An Overview. When an item tag is defined for an item. the software displays the GUID for that item. then when you print the drawing. If you turn on the display of claim status in the drawing.

and the right-hand view is the newer version. Delete . or deletion of a property in the Properties window or Engineering Data Editor in SmartPlant P&ID or through automation. Differences between drawing versions are assigned to logical change groups. you can view two versions side-byside and examine their differences by using the Tools > Compare and Refresh command. Keep in mind that you can compare a drawing only against a version of itself. that is. which are listed on the Change groups area of the Compare and Refresh dialog box. • Add . Values for the Change details include the following. a change.Indicates the selected group will be modified on the version displaying on the right. You can compare two versions from inside your own Plant or project database. • Every change grouping and every changed item is assigned a category. Modify . they are displayed in time-order from left to right. if you move an item and change one of its properties). Data refers to a mismatch in the properties assigned to an item that exists in both drawings. 304 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . • • The two versions are displayed in two Drawing views.Indicates the selected group will be removed from the version displaying on the right. the item is moved or otherwise graphically manipulated in the drawing.The left-hand view is the older version. and if more than one category applies (for instance. • Graphic refers to an item that has changed only in its graphical representation in the design. Change details displays information about selected groups in the Change groups area. that is. The relationship between the two views depends on whether you are comparing two versions in your own database or comparing your version to a version in another database. described as left and right views.Indicates that the selected group will be added to the version displaying on the right. you cannot compare one drawing to another drawing. addition. then the highest priority category is displayed. or you can compare a version in your database to a version in the Plant or another project database. • Two versions are in the active database . Differences display in the following two categories.Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview Comparing and Refreshing Versions: An Overview When more than one version of a drawing exists. that is. That is.

If you accept the changes. You want to include these changes in your drawing so they will not be lost when you perform a check in. the drawing refreshes to display the changes. Change groups are marked if it affects items you have claimed. you must set the Action column to Refresh. Compare and Refresh Command Tools > Compare and Refresh Allows you to refresh the active drawing with data from another version of the drawing. To refresh any differences between these two versions. You want to include these changes in your drawing so they will not be lost when you perform a check in.Lists all the versions of the chosen drawing in the database you named in the Available Databases list. History . Compare With Dialog Box Opens when you click Tools > Compare and Refresh allowing you to select a drawing version to compare against the version that you currently have open and active. Be sure to refresh all of the changes that do not involve claimed items because these are the changes that have been checked in by other projects. and the left-hand view belongs to the version in another database because you cannot be assured that time-order is the logical order to display the versions. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 305 . Be sure to refresh all of the changes that do not involve claimed items because these are the changes that have been checked in by other projects.Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview • Two versions exist in different databases .The right-hand view is reserved for the version in your active Plant or project database. Change groups are marked if the changes affect items you have claimed. The differences display in what is known as a change group. you use the drawing in the plant.Lists all the different databases that currently have a version of the drawing you chose on the Show History dialog box. Available Databases . To refresh a project drawing.

Displays a report in Microsoft Excel.Defines which action is to be taken involving the selected change.Prints the entire Compare and Refresh dialog box contents. You must first select an item in either the Change groups or Change details area.Enlarges the selected area by allowing you to draw a fence around the area.Area that lists the changed items in groups.Displays modified properties. Alphabetic Categorized . Zoom In . Show Modified . Pan . Zoom Area . Allows you to customize the display colors for items that differ between the two drawing being compared.Zooms to the selected item.Displays the properties in either an alphabetic list or by specific category. Print .Displays the number assigned to each change group. Zoom Out . Checkbox column .Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview Compare and Refresh Dialog Box Compare Options . You must first select an item in a drawing.Allows you to move the display in any direction by dragging the pointer across the view. Options include: 306 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .Enlarges the selected area where you click.Displays colors in the drawings as defined using Compare Options.Reduces the display of the selected area where you click. A listed item contains all the items this change effects. The report contains the details of the compared drawings. Number . Generate Report . Find in Drawing . Change groups . If not selected.Displays the Compare Options dialog box. Select .Changes the pointer to an arrow allowing you to select an item. Find in List . Action . the Default items color displays. You can also specify to print either the right or left view by using the drop-down arrow to select either Right View or Left View.Highlights the line in the Change groups and Change details areas.

a vessel has been moved). a property value for a vessel). • Data . Category . a vessel has been moved).Removes the listed item from the version on the right. Result . • Claimed . Delete . Change . • Category .Changes the listed item in the version on the right. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 307 .Displays the specific type of item.Indicates if an item is a valid or invalid claim. Change details .Displays the category of the change. • Claimed .Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview • Validate . Graphic .Defines the results of the compare.Validates Invalid Claims for the selected group (no drawing changes are applied). Specific Item Type . Item Type .performs no action on the selected drawing group. a property value for a vessel). Refresh .Indicates that the items in the group have been claimed. Graphic .Describes the type of item.Indicates that a change has been made to an item in the drawing (for example. and No Action . The column indicates any differences in the two versions and which version contains the change.indicates that a change has been made to an item in the drawing (for example. Options include: • Data .Indicates that the claimed item is a valid claim.Area that lists the details of the item in each change group.Displays the category of the change. Valid Claim .Adds the listed item to the version on the right. Modify .Describes what action is required to make the drawing in the right frame match the drawing in the left frame. Actions include: • • • Add .Applies any drawing changes to the open drawing version.Indicates that a property value has changed (for example.Indicates that a property value has changed (for example.

308 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .Allows you to choose a color for the display of items that exist in both views but differ from each other for any number of reasons (for example. Blue is the default color for this option. modified properties). for added and deleted items. Compare Options Dialog Box Opens when you click Compare Options on the Compare dialog box toolbar and allows you to customize the colors that the various comparison states are displayed in. This button only applies to modified items that exist in both versions.Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview Compare and Refresh Dialog Box Properties Window Toolbar Allows you to customize the properties that are displayed in the Properties window of the Compare dialog box. for instance. Different items . Left-only . Identical items . Red is the default color for this option. The active color scheme is displayed in the Compare dialog box status bar. all properties are listed.Lists properties in alphabetical order.Allows you to choose a color for the display of objects that exist in the left-hand Drawing view only.Allows you to choose a color to denote items that are selected in one or both of the Drawing views.Allows you to choose a color for the display of drawing items that are identical in the two views. Selected items . Right-only . Categorized . Show Modified .Allows you to choose a color to denote that a drawing object is highlighted.Allows you to choose a color for the display of objects that exist in the right-hand Drawing view only.Displays properties grouped by specific categories. when an item is within your locate zone. Categories are defined and properties are assigned to those categories in Data Dictionary Manager. Black is the default color for this option. Alphabetical . Highlight items .Toggles the display of only those properties that are different between the properties that belong to a selected drawing item. Dark green is the default color for this option.

On the Compare With dialog box. 6. or Validate. select No Action. Your current drawing displays on the right side of the screen. 2. In the History list box. Click OK. The version you are comparing it to displays on the left. On the Compare and Refresh dialog box. Refresh. select the drawing you want to compare your current drawing with. select a database using the Available databases drop-down list box. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 309 . 5.Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview Compare and Refresh Drawing Versions 1. In the Change groups area. 3. Click OK to refresh the drawing and accept any changes or Cancel to dismiss the dialog box. Click Tools > Compare. 8. 4. Using the drop-down list. 7. review the information in the Change groups and Change details areas. click in the Action column. Validate will display as an option only if you have an Invalid Claim.

Clicking in the Action column of the Change groups allows you to take no action or refresh (accept the new property value). If you Refresh the version. a data change is found during the compare. Change groups indicates there is only one group and a data change was located. Data Example In this example. the property value will be modified as shown in the Change column. a jacketed tower exists in the version to be selected for the compare. All items in the group are valid claims. Change details indicates the compare located a different property value (Cleaning Requirement) in the current version. 310 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . The current version appears on the right and the version it is compared to appears on the left. When the current version is compared to the selected version. The current version contains the same jacketed tower but a change has been made to the Cleaning Requirements property.Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview Compare and Refresh Examples The following examples provide details for reconciling data and graphic differences between your current drawing and a previously created version of that drawing.

If you Refresh the version. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 311 . Change details indicates the compare located a graphic modification to a vessel (Jacketed Vessel) in the current version. the graphic modification will be accepted as shown in the Change column. a graphic change is found during the compare. When the current version is compared to the selected version. The setting are not applied to a version until you click OK. All items in the group are valid claims.Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview Graphic Example In this example. The current version contains the same jacketed tower but it has been moved to a new location. Clicking in the Action column of the Change groups allows you to take no action or refresh (accept the previous location of the vessel). Change groups indicates there is only one group and a graphic change was located. a jacketed tower exists in the version to be selected for the compare. The current version appears on the right and the version it is compared to appears on the left.

a jacketed tower with a nozzle exists in the version to be selected for the compare. The current drawing contains the same jacketed tower and nozzle.Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview Data and Graphic Example In this example. and a property for the jacketed tower has been changed. a new nozzle has been added. Clicking in the Action column of any of the three Change groups allows you to select either No Action or Refresh. Change details indicates the compare located an existing nozzle was moved (Graphic) and a property value change (Data) in the current drawing. a data and graphic change is found during the compare. If you select Refresh for any of the three groups. Change groups indicates there are three groups of differences. the action described in the Change column will be performed when you click OK. When the current drawing is compared to the selected version. All items in the groups are valid claims. The original nozzle has been moved. The current drawing appears on the right and the drawing it is compared to appears on the left. 312 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .

The software includes pre-defined standard industry design propagation: for example. Related Topics • Reapply Placement Rules to Resolve an Inconsistency. and offers hints. Additional consistency checking and design propagation are defined in Rule Manager. An approved warning accompanies the off-page connector (C). The software displays all the inconsistencies.Consistency Checking: An Overview Consistency Checking: An Overview Consistency checking verifies the suitability of work that a designer performs while creating the drawing. you can decide the best method to resolve an inconsistency. page 317 • Show Inconsistencies. Another solution is to reapply placement rules that normally copy properties from one side of a junction to another at the time of item placement. page 322 • Resolve an Inconsistency. describes specific problems. This illustration shows the inconsistency indicators that highlight incorrect relationships at a junction of items in a drawing. if the composition of a drawing and the underlying data model satisfy rules that your company has defined. pipe runs inherit properties from nozzles. One solution is to approve a warning and thereby remove the inconsistency from the drawing. Using these solutions. page 319 • Review an Inconsistency. The software verifies. An error appears where the pipe run connects to the pump nozzle (A). A warning appears at the point where the valve and pipe run intersect (B). page 314 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 313 . Consistency checking continuously monitors your work when you change or add items to a drawing. in real-time.

Select Show > Inconsistencies to toggle the display of inconsistencies off and on.Consistency Checking: An Overview Show Inconsistencies Command View > Show Inconsistencies Turns on or off the display of indicators that identify inconsistent relationships in the active view. The software does not mark consistent. If you do not want the inconsistencies to appear. When this option is selected. page 313 • Show Inconsistencies. Related Topics • Consistency Checking: An Overview. inconsistent relationship indicators appear in the drawing. page 314 Show Inconsistencies 1. click View > Show Inconsistencies again to clear the selection of the option. 2. Click View > Show Inconsistencies. you can right-click in an empty portion of the drawing in order to display a shortcut menu. Related Topics • Consistency Checking: An Overview. page 313 314 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . error-free relationships. Note • Also.

page 313 • Reapply Placement Rules to Resolve an Inconsistency. you can correct the problems by reviewing them on the Consistency Check dialog box. Related Topics • Consistency Checking: An Overview. page 317 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 315 . If a location in the drawing has only one or multiple inconsistencies. consistency checking monitors your drawing for design discrepancies. page 319 • Review an Inconsistency. page 322 • Resolve an Inconsistency.Consistency Checking: An Overview Properties Command Right-click an inconsistency indicator and choose Properties to display the Consistency Check dialog box. As you create a drawing.

When this dialog box first appears. A specific example of this type can involve data inconsistencies for nominal pipe diameter. their specific problem area.Consistency Checking: An Overview Consistency Check Dialog Box Opens when you display the properties of an inconsistency indicator. regardless of severity. Item 1 . normal operating temperature. and alternate design pressure between a piping component and pipe run — three different problems but at the same junction. When the Consistency Check dialog box first appears. and lists the inconsistencies.Displays the actual error or warning. Item 2 . You open this dialog box by right-clicking an inconsistency indicator and choosing Properties from the shortcut menu. When you select one of the inconsistencies in the list. 316 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . the software displays information specific to that inconsistency in the Solutions box. a ToolTip appears to reveal the entire description. Description . Other sections of the dialog box provide details that are specifically related to the selected inconsistency. When the Consistency Check dialog box first appears. are listed on the Consistency Check dialog box. all items involved in the inconsistency are selected. For a lengthy error or warning. All inconsistencies that occur at a junction.Allows the display of inconsistencies that pertain to the first item. the software automatically selects the first item in the list. and solutions for resolving the inconsistency. all items involved in the inconsistency are selected. Inconsistencies . which is provided for information only. You cannot change the inconsistency description.Lists all inconsistencies that exist at the selected junction.Allows the display of inconsistencies that pertain to the second item.

or you can click Reapply Rules to copy properties from one side of the indicator to the other according to placement rules. After selecting an inconsistency from the Inconsistencies list. Reapply Rules .Lists solutions for resolving the drawing inconsistency. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 317 . • Notes • The options for solving the inconsistency in Solutions vary depending on the type of inconsistency. Related Topics • Properties Command. page 317 Review an Inconsistency 1. Warnings. Apply . The inconsistencies are then re-evaluated and the dialog box is updated. the selected solution is performed. Consistency Check identifies the type of problem with these symbols: Errors. Note • Canceling selection of Item 1or Item 2 excludes the item from the select set in the drawing and thereby affects the display in the Properties window. 3. Approved warnings.Consistency Checking: An Overview Solutions . you can right-click an inconsistency indicator and select Properties.Copies properties from one side of the selected inconsistency to the other according to placement rules. Invoking the placement rules is not necessarily sufficient to resolve all inconsistencies at a junction. Double-click an inconsistency indicator.Performs the solution you choose from the Solutions box. you can select the correct solution from this list. On the Consistency Check dialog box. • • You can choose the appropriate solution in the Solutions list and click Apply in order to correct an inconsistency. and after clicking Apply. page 28 • Resolve an Inconsistency. review the list of possible problem areas at the junction. page 319 • Review an Inconsistency. Tip In addition. 2. Open a drawing.

Consistency Checking: An Overview • To alert you to possible problems. Related Topics • Consistency Checking: An Overview. Error in the Drawing view that warrants your inspection and correction. the Drawing view offers different inconsistency indicators: Warning for suspicious construction in the Drawing view. page 313 318 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .

2. Tips • Or you can right-click an inconsistency indicator to review its properties. Tip • An example of a solution is Copy property value Item 1 => Item 2. This action can correct the inconsistency.Consistency Checking: An Overview Resolve an Inconsistency 1. you can click the Reapply Rules button on the Consistency Check dialog box. If you determine that this solution is the best one. Open a drawing. Notes • Consistency Check identifies the type of problem with these symbols: Errors Warnings Approved warnings • A Drawing view also offers graphical symbols to alert you to possible problems: Warning for suspicious construction in the Drawing view Error in the Drawing view that warrants your inspection and correction SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 319 . Click Apply. which could involve inconsistent nominal diameters of a pipe and nozzle. • Tip • In addition. for example. 3. depending on the type of inconsistency. When you right-click the indicator. Chose the appropriate solution from the Solutions list. select the inconsistency that you want to correct in the list. On the Consistency Check dialog box. The options in the Solutions list vary. Changing the diameter confirms that the values are consistent with the information that exists in Rule Manager. you can select it and click Apply. • 4. 5. Double-click an inconsistency indicator. Or you can use the Properties window to change the nominal diameter of either the pipe or nozzle. you can choose the Reapply Rules command.

page 313 • Reapply Placement Rules to Resolve an Inconsistency. page 317 320 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .Consistency Checking: An Overview Related Topics • Consistency Checking: An Overview. page 322 • Review an Inconsistency.

Notes • The Reapply Rules button is available on the Consistency Check dialog box. An inconsistency indicator at the junction between the vessel and the nozzle is displayed for the mismatched cleaning requirements. then the cleaning requirement is copied to the nozzle at placement.Consistency Checking: An Overview Reapply Rules Command Available on the Inconsistency Indicator shortcut menu. if your vessel has a cleaning requirement assigned to it and you place a nozzle on the vessel. page 313 • Reapply Placement Rules to Resolve an Inconsistency. page 322 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 321 . rather than a single inconsistency. and on the Toolbars tab in the Tools category. This button is particularly useful when you want to reapply rules to a select set. and drag it to the main toolbar. the nozzle does not inherit that property. But if you place a nozzle on the vessel and then you assign a cleaning requirement to the vessel. choose the button for Reapply Rules Then you can reapply rules with one click. Frequently this command resolves the inconsistency in your drawing. invoking the placement rules is not necessarily sufficient to resolve all inconsistencies at a junction. however. choosing Reapply Rules causes properties to be copied from one side of the inconsistency to the other according to the same rules that govern copying properties at placement. this command reapplies the rules defined in Rule Manager for copying properties at placement. It is possible that you still need to choose Properties from the Inconsistency Indicator shortcut menu to open the Consistency Check dialog box and resolve any remaining inconsistencies there. Go to Tools > Customize. If you use Reapply Rules at this indicator. That is. You can add the Reapply Rules command to the main toolbar. then the rule that copies the cleaning requirement to the nozzle at placement is re-invoked and the inconsistency is resolved. too. For example. • Related Topics • Consistency Checking: An Overview.

rather than a single inconsistency. and on the Toolbars tab in the Tools category. It is possible that you need to choose the Properties command from the Inconsistency Indicator shortcut menu in order to open the Consistency Check dialog box and resolve or approve any remaining inconsistencies there. Notes • Invoking placement rules is not necessarily sufficient to resolve all inconsistencies at a junction. 2. Select Reapply Rules. This button is particularly useful when you want to reapply rules to a select set. Right-click the inconsistency indicator to display a shortcut menu. choose the button for Reapply Rules and drag it to the main toolbar. Then you can reapply rules with one click. • • • Related Topics • Consistency Checking: An Overview. too. Placement rules are defined in Rules Manager. Go to Tools > Customize. You can use the Reapply Rules command from the Consistency Check dialog box. page 313 322 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . You can add the Reapply Rules command to the main toolbar.Consistency Checking: An Overview Reapply Placement Rules to Resolve an Inconsistency 1.

you can assign the stream and its associated engineering data to the pipe run. page 13 • Import Aspen Zyqad Stream Data. SmartSketch files can be imported into SmartPlant P&ID using the SmartPlant Migrator wizard. You can import data and items into the database using reports and other files.Importing Drawing Data: An Overview Importing Drawing Data: An Overview There are several ways you can import data into SmartPlant P&ID. you can also populate or redefine pipe run properties by importing an Aspen Zyqad stream data file. Also. page 267 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 323 . page 329 • Populate the Stockpile from a Spreadsheet. Related Topics • Display Help for Programming With SmartPlant P&ID. During the import process.

log. page 267 • Using Reports to Import Items into the Stockpile. page 265 Import Log Dialog Box Shows the progress of the data importation process and allows you to review the log file. Related Topics • Import Data File Command. page 324 • Modify a Pump by Importing a SmartPlant P&ID Report into the Stockpile. Related Topics • Import Aspen Zyqad Stream Data. This dialog box opens when you use the Import > Data File command on the File menu.Importing Drawing Data: An Overview Import Data File Command File > Import > Data File Allows you to import data and items into the database from reports and other files. page 329 • Populate the Stockpile from a Spreadsheet. page 268 • Populate the Stockpile from a Spreadsheet. page 267 324 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .Lists the results of the file importing process. Import log . only items and their properties. which is saved to your local TEMP folder. These results are also available in SPImport. Note • Relationships between items cannot be imported.

To account for the rules in SmartPlant P&ID. Symbol placement is performed in this order: 1. SmartSketch graphics that are not recognized as symbols SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 325 . Certain symbols cannot be placed unless a rule has been met. Labels 7. Symbols attached to connectors or pipes 5. In order to import a SmartSketch drawing into SmartPlant P&ID.Importing Drawing Data: An Overview Import SmartSketch Command File > Import > SmartSketch Allows you to import data from SmartSketch into SmartPlant P&ID and starts the SmartPlant Migrator wizard. Related Topics • Import a SmartSketch File. the Migrator maintains graphic visual fidelity. The database does not contain any information for these unmapped objects. Stand-alone symbols 2. For example. you must have SmartSketch installed on your computer. Placement Order After the SmartSketch file is scanned and all its objects are mapped to SmartPlant P&ID objects. During processing. the Migrator scans the SmartSketch file and maps all the objects to SmartPlant P&ID equivalent objects. When migrating your SmartSketch file to SmartPlant P&ID. the Migrator looks at the SmartSketch symbols to determine what the symbols are attached to. the Migrator uses rules to determine the order in which to place the resulting symbols. a nozzle cannot be placed unless it is attached to a piece of equipment. Any graphics that cannot be mapped are placed in a SmartSketch file that is then placed as an inserted object in the SmartPlant P&ID file. SmartSketch does not have rule sets. Symbols attached to stand-alone symbols 3. Symbols attached to symbols that are attached to a connector or pipe 6. page 328 Using the SmartPlant Migrator The SmartPlant Migration Wizard is a data migration tool provided by SmartPlant P&ID for converting and importing process flow diagrams (PFDs) and preliminary process and instrumentation diagrams (P&IDs) from SmartSketch into SmartPlant P&ID. Connectors and pipes 4.

• Nozzles .csv. Non-Nozzle Connections . These attributes are the same as the SmartPlant P&ID properties for the same items.Importing Drawing Data: An Overview Rule Considerations Because the SmartPlant Migration Wizard cannot account for all the rule possibilities that are defined in the default SmartPlant P&ID rule set or a customized rule set.User-defined and default SmartSketch properties are mapped to an equivalent SmartPlant P&ID property. you must create your SmartSketch drawing with the SmartPlant P&ID rule set in mind. You define custom properties for SmartPlant P&ID symbols by using Catalog Manager. custom SmartSketch attributes can migrate into those properties. compressors. Nozzles are required in the SmartSketch document for connections to be established when converted to SmartPlant P&ID. This file is created during the migration process and you can open this file by using Microsoft Excel. 326 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . if given a value in SmartSketch.Appropriate flow direction is established based on the terminator of the connector.Nozzles are required for connection of piping in SmartPlant P&ID. for duplicate codes. Notes • The AABBCC code is not displayed in Catalog Explorer or the Properties window in SmartPlant P&ID. and if that same symbol with same properties is available in SmartPlant P&ID.Intergraph Process Flow and P&ID symbols map to the SmartPlant P&ID reference data included with the software. SmartSketch symbol attributes are conditionally migrated.Piping linear objects not connected to nozzles are placed in SmartPlant P&ID. You can check the symbol map file. Because SmartSketch is file-driven and SmartPlant P&ID is databasedriven. All of those attributes. or you can edit a symbol map file to equate the symbol names between SmartSketch and SmartPlant P&ID. but are not connected. To view the code. this means that the attribute must exist as a SmartPlant P&ID property for that symbol. symbol definitions and attributes migrated from a SmartSketch file are stored as properties in the SmartPlant P&ID database. therefore. Symbols . You have to make valid connections manually in SmartPlant P&ID. pumps. both products have independent sets of symbols.Delivered symbols with a matching AABBCC code are mapped intelligently to the equivalent SmartPlant P&ID symbol. migrate to the SmartPlant P&ID property database. Supported Templates . You can add your own unique attributes to a P&ID symbol in SmartSketch. Properties . SymbolMap. and shell and tube exchangers. Flow . you must open the item in Catalog Manager. SmartSketch has a default set of attributes for vessels.

Then the file you just created can migrate Notes • • In order to import a SmartSketch drawing into SmartPlant P&ID. This rule maintains visual fidelity even if there are items that could not be mapped intelligently. Any label placed in SmartSketch must have an equivalent label in SmartPlant P&ID before it can migrate. You can determine if all the graphics in your file migrated correctly by viewing the GetSmart. which are labels that are associated with one or more object properties. In the Value box. enter the appropriate AABBCC code. The properties of these smart labels are passed to the symbol to which they are attached and migrate to SmartPlant P&ID.log file in the Temp folder. • SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 327 . Right-click the symbol page in order to open the File Properties dialog box. SmartSketch does include a subset of the SmartPlant P&ID labels. select Text. for example.All unrecognized graphics are inserted in the SmartPlant P&ID drawing as embedded SmartSketch graphics. 1.Item tags and other single property labels are maintained intelligently. In the Type box. and any errors encountered during the migration. 1F6Y01. In the Name box. you must have SmartSketch installed on your computer. do the following. the symbols that were migrated. 5. the time that the migration started and stopped. and click the Symbol tab.The following list shows planned limitations of the Migrator: • • • Multiple iterations are not supported Flow direction that is indicated by using symbols is not understood The primary goal is not to take fully developed P&IDs into a data-centric environment The SmartSketch Migrator converts entire files only. Open the P&ID label in Catalog Manager. In order to assign an AABBCC code to a SmartPlant P&ID label so that it matches a SmartSketch label. and most of the common labels are smart labels.Importing Drawing Data: An Overview SmartLabels . Limitations . Notes • Labels in SmartSketch files are migrated very much like symbols. This file contains information about the migration such as the file that was migrated. • Unrecognized Graphics and Annotations . 4. type AABBCC_code. 2. If you want to migrate only a portion of a file. 3. select the geometry that you want to migrate and copy and paste it into another file.

This file contains information about the migration such as the file that was migrated.Importing Drawing Data: An Overview Related Topics • Import a SmartSketch File.log file in the Temp folder. and any errors encountered during the migration. • Tip You can create a new. Click File > Import > SmartSketch. Notes • The SmartSketch Migrator converts entire files only. 1. Tip • The Migrator allows you to browse in the file system for the SmartSketch drawing that you want to import. empty drawing in Drawing Manager. page 325 328 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Open the drawing that you want to import the SmartSketch objects into. page 328 Import a SmartSketch File Important In order to import a SmartSketch drawing into SmartPlant P&ID. you must have SmartSketch installed on your computer. • Related Topics • Using the SmartPlant Migrator. You can determine if all the graphics in your file migrated correctly by viewing the GetSmart. • 3. select the geometry that you want to migrate and copy and paste it into another file in SmartSketch. 2. Follow the instructions in the SmartSketch Migrator. Then the file you just created can migrate. the time the migration started and stopped. if you want to. the symbols that were migrated. If you want to migrate only a portion of a file.

SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 329 . modifications must be made to the import code to accommodate the changed report layout. whether they remain in the stockpile or have already been placed in the drawing. page 13 • Import Aspen Zyqad Stream Data. 4. Vessels. Pumps. You can easily update stockpile items that originate from importing Aspen Zyqad data by re-importing a data file.xls.txt. are updated with data from the newly imported file. Click OK to populate the Properties window with the selected stream ID. you can click Edit > Properties after you select the pipe run.Importing Drawing Data: An Overview Importing Aspen Zyqad Stream Data You can populate or redefine pipe run properties by importing an Aspen Zyqad stream data file. Important • If a format change is made to an exported Aspen Zyqad report. see the SmartPlant P&ID Programmer's Guide. 5. or . Click the Browse button and select the Aspen Zyqad stream data . Select a pipe run from the drawing to display the Properties window for the pipe run. Such spreadsheets include the Vessel Equipment List. Tip If the Properties window is not open. you can assign the stream and its associated engineering data to the pipe run. Aspen Zyqad spreadsheets in either Microsoft Excel or XML format are supported. • 3. cell to display the Stream Number dialog box.xml file from the appropriate folder. and Heat Exchanger Equipment List. Importing Aspen Zyqad XML data files allows greater flexibility when importing data into the design software. are included in a single XML report so that only one file has to be imported. . Related Topics • Display Help for Programming With SmartPlant P&ID. All three reports. Previously imported items. page 329 • Populate the Stockpile from a Spreadsheet. and Exchangers. For more information. Pump Equipment List. During the import process. page 267 Import Aspen Zyqad Stream Data 1. Click the Calculate button next to the Stream No. Click the Stream ID list and select a stream ID. 2.

Related Topics • Using Reports to Import Items into the Stockpile. page 265 330 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .Importing Drawing Data: An Overview Note • Existing values in the Properties window are redefined by importing Aspen Zyqad stream data.

reports are fully customizable.Generating Reports: An Overview Generating Reports: An Overview Reporting is the process of retrieving information from the database and displaying the information as formatted output. which describes the data to collect and how to organize the data in the workbook. You can create your own reports that contain the information that you want to see in a format you choose. When creating your report. you do not have to include every available property in your report if it is not appropriate. For example. if a nozzle is added as the toplevel item in the tree. and thereby how you can map the properties that you want into your report templates. 2. however. Each report consists of a Microsoft Excel workbook and a report definition. For example. Your report definition is retrieved from the Excel workbook. see the Properties Glossary. Each report contains at least one report item to define the item type of the report. Several default report templates already exist. only the information about nozzles that are associated with pumps is collected. Your report definition contains one or more report items organized in a tree hierarchy. You begin your reporting process by selecting a report template from the Reports menu and then selecting items in the drawing for inclusion in your report. At any time during the design creation process. nozzle. You can define additional report items to access more properties for more item types. you can create a report. and then the Excel workbook opens. only items that have a relationship with your selected item type can be used as input. Then the software performs the following tasks: 1. Microsoft Excel starts. This report item makes the properties associated with each piece of equipment available for inclusion in your report. The relationships that exist between the various item types constitute additional available information for a report. The report template is copied to the report output folder. a report based on the equipment item type contains a report item named Equipment. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 331 . Examples of item types include equipment. Each report that you create is based on an item type. all nozzles in the database are collected for your report. however. Each report item is based on an item type. 3. For example. For example. Your data is retrieved based on the report item definitions of the report template. In order to discover how items and their properties are related. This item type serves as the starting point for collecting data for your report. a nozzle report item can be added to access data about nozzles because nozzles and equipment are related. If the nozzle is added as a child of Equipment: Mechanical. instrument. a nozzle is related to the equipment with which it is grouped. The location of a report item in the tree hierarchy affects the properties that are collected for the associated item type. and pipe run. which is included in the glossaries attached to online Help.

page 334 332 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . The software stores the reports that you generate in your Windows directory under \Profiles\username. Notes • You must have installed Microsoft Excel on your computer to display reports. page 344 • Create a Report Template Based on an Existing Template. Data prints to the Microsoft Excel workbook using the cell mapping data in your report definition. page 349 • Display the Properties of a Report Template.Generating Reports: An Overview 4. • Related Topics • Create a New Blank Report Template. page 348 • Generate a Report. page 350 • Edit a Report Template.

Include items in drawing stockpile . This dialog box opens either when you click Reports > Plant Reports on the main toolbar or when you click View > Plant Reports on the Engineering Data Editor toolbar. use this command from the Reports menu. This command is available on the Reports menu on the main toolbar and also on the View menu in the Engineering Data Editor. Current Selection .Produces a report containing the contents of the entire drawing. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 333 . use the Reports menu. page 331 • Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview. use the Engineering Data Editor View menu. page 38 Plant Reports Dialog Box Allows you to choose a report and specify what items to report on.Produces a report containing the items currently selected in your drawing or table. The location of these report templates is defined in Options Manager. which displays a list of all plant-level reports associated with the current plant. You cannot choose the Include items in drawing stockpile option when you choose Current Selection.Generating Reports: An Overview Plant Reports Command Reports > Plant Reports Opens the Plant Reports dialog box.Allows you to specify whether or not you want items that reside in the drawing stockpile in your report. This option is available only when you use the Reports menu command. This option is not available if no drawing or table items are selected. if you want to run a report on table items. Note • The Engineering Data Editor is the area where you can view stockpile items. If you want to run a report based on items in your Engineering Data Editor. Selecting a plant report from this list and specifying the items that you want to report on generates the associated report in Microsoft Excel. This option is available only when you use the Reports menu command. If you have a drawing in the Design window and you want to report on items in that drawing. use this command from the Engineering Data Editor View menu. If you want to run a report on drawing items. This list is alphabetical. Entire drawing . Related Topics • Generating Reports: An Overview.

choose the items that you want to report on. page 333 • Select an Item. Before running the Line List report. 3. page 265 334 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Click Reports > Plant Reports. In the Report using area on the Plant Reports dialog box or the My Reports dialog box. • 4. page 331 • Using Reports to Import Items into the Stockpile. Tip If you select no items. • • Related Topics • Generating Reports: An Overview. verify that every line in the selection has an Item Tag. the software gives you the option to report on all items. The software stores the reports that you generate in your Windows directory under \Profiles\username. Using either of these options allows the software to ignore the 255 item limit. • Tip Or click Reports > My Reports to select a customized report that you defined already. select the items that you want to include in the report. In the Drawing view or Engineering Data Editor. page 334 • Plant Reports Command. Related Topics • Generate a Report. 2. Select the report that you want to generate. page 147 Generate a Report 1. Notes • You must have installed Microsoft Excel on your computer to display reports. You can include more items in your report by selecting Entire drawing.Generating Reports: An Overview Note • A report can contain up to the default value of 255 items.

Generating Reports: An Overview My Reports Command Reports > My Reports Opens the My Reports dialog box which lists all user-level reports. Include items in drawing stockpile . if you want to run a report based on table items. Report using .Produces a report containing the items currently selected in your drawing or table. If you want to run a report based on drawing items. access this command from the View menu on the Engineering Data Editor toolbar.Allows you to specify whether or not you want items that reside in the drawing stockpile in your report. page 334 • Generating Reports: An Overview. page 348 • Generate a Report. This list is alphabetical. if you want to run a report on table items. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 335 . Drawing view or Engineering Data Editor. that is active when you access this dialog box. use the Reports menu. access this command from the Reports menu on the main toolbar. Entire drawing .Displays options for specifying the scope of your report. Note • You can define the location for storing user-level report templates by clicking Tools > Options and then selecting the Files tab. They can be stored on your local workstation. The options that appear in this area depend on the view. This option is available only when you use the Reports menu command.Produces a report containing the contents of the entire drawing. You cannot choose the Include items in drawing stockpile option when you choose Current Selection. use the Engineering Data Editor menu. not the Engineering Data Editor command. This option is available only when you use the Reports menu command. Related Topics • Edit a Report Template. If you want to run a report on drawing items. Current Selection . page 331 My Reports Dialog Box Allows you to choose one of your custom reports and to specify what items to report on. This option is not available if no drawing or table items are selected. This dialog box opens either when you click Reports > My Reports on the main toolbar or when you click View > My Reports on the Engineering Data Editor toolbar.

page 334 • My Reports Command. page 335 • Select an Item. Using either of these options allows the software to ignore the 255 item limit. Related Topics • Generate a Report. You can include more items in your report by selecting the Entire drawing option.Generating Reports: An Overview Note • A report can contain up to the default value of 255 items. page 147 336 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .

see the Properties Glossary. which is included in the glossaries attached to online Help. and thereby how you can map the properties that you want into your report templates. Related Topics • Create a New Blank Report Template.Generating Reports: An Overview Creating and Editing Report Templates: An Overview Although the software includes several default report templates. and the properties that are associated with that item type are readily available to include in your report. page 338 • Edit a Report Template. Now the property name is mapped into the report template. the same report template is valid. the template file stores an internal identifier for that property. therefore. that report template is tightly linked to the plant that creates the property. as the name suggests. page 340 • Define the Layout of a Tabular Format Report Template. the properties of inline components and instruments can be used in a pipe run report because inline components are related to their pipe runs. You can create report templates in three different formats: • • • Tabular Fixed Composite Format Report The delivered report templates are all tabular format reports. as long as all plants use the same property name. Each report is based on a unique item type. such as Equipment List and Pipe Run List. page 348 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 337 . and composite report templates. page 344 • Define the Contents of Your Report Template. For instance. any item that is related in any way to the basic item type of your report makes its properties available to include in the definition of your template. In order to discover how items and their properties are related. too. you create your own custom report templates or modify the delivered templates in order to gather and display the specific information that you want. but you can control the content of the template also. Fixed format templates allow the greatest amount of freedom in formatting your report. when a property is mapped to a report template. In addition. thus. Portable report templates In previous versions of the software. page 357 • Define the Layout of a Composite Format Report Template. combine tabular and fixed formatting. Not only can you completely control the format of your report. So the software allows you to define report templates in several different formats and with all manner of information from the design database. page 341 • Define the Layout of a Fixed Format Report Template.

page 334 Define the Layout of a Tabular Format Report Template 1. page 350 • Edit a Report Template. the report template for an Equipment List can appear like this: Equipment Name Equipment Description Equipment Type #Equipment::Name# #Equipment::Description# #Equipment::Type# When the report is generated. such as Unit or Plant Name. Tips • The header is part of the tabular format report template where data is not mapped based on rows. page 338 • Display the Properties of a Report Template. Also. you are free to type a label and map report item properties anywhere in the lines that you designate for your header. The header is a good place to put information that applies to all the items in your report. On the Options dialog box. On the SmartPlant Reports toolbar. In other words. you can add graphics in your report header. For example. 2. click Options. tabular format reports are row-based. all properties populate the report by using the same format defined for the first row. page 357 • Define the Layout of a Tabular Format Report Template.Generating Reports: An Overview Tabular Format Report All the delivered report templates are tabular format reports. • • • 338 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . page 344 • Define the Contents of Your Report Template. Be sure to include space in your header for the labels of your columns. The Options command on the SmartPlant Reports toolbar is important for setting aside space for the header and empty rows between lines in the report because the placement of report item properties is restricted in the tabular format report template. When the report is generated. the output appears like this: Equipment Name Equipment Description Equipment Type D-100 T-100 Horizontal Drum 100 Potable Water Tank Horizontal Drum Vertical Tank Related Topics • Create a New Blank Report Template. choose the size of your report header. That is. page 348 • Generate a Report.

page 357. Properties for all the items follow the format you map for the first one. • • SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 339 . For more information. although the same property can be mapped to more than one cell. and the header is saved on the new sheet because the entire header no longer fits in the space allotted on the first sheet. • 10. • 5. You can customize the number of rows in the report header by using the Options command on the SmartPlant Reports toolbar and choosing a larger value in the Rows in report header option in the Options dialog box. Tip Some report templates. Choose the number of empty lines that you want between rows in your report. When you add any property value in the header. 4. Notes • Because the delivered report templates are tabular format. Choose the property that you want to map to your cell from the Map Properties menu. Save the template and quit Microsoft Excel. see Define the Contents of Your Report Template. for example the Line List. Each row is filled with properties for one item. 6. in your header. Select Blank as your source template if you want to create a fixed or composite format report template. a new Microsoft Excel worksheet is created. 7. The items on this menu are chosen when you define the contents of your template. Tip This cell can be either in the body of the report or in the header. The location of plant-level report templates is specified in Options Manager. the format of your report template is also tabular. Select a cell in your report template where you want to map a particular property. • Tips • You only have to map properties for one item.Generating Reports: An Overview 3. if needed. The location for user-level templates is defined on the Files tab of the Options dialog box (Tools > Options). 9. Repeat the previous steps until you have mapped all the properties that you want to map on this report template. Click OK to close the Options dialog box. if you create a template based on an existing template. 8. designate two rows of data for each report item and then an empty row. Complete column headings in the last row of your header. Only one property can be mapped to a given cell. Complete general labels and graphics.

Related Topics • Create a New Blank Report Template. and the layout for each worksheet matches the layout defined for the first worksheet. When defining the report template. page 348 Define the Layout of a Fixed Format Report Template 1. For more information. page 350 • Edit a Report Template. Choose a cell on your Microsoft Excel worksheet and type labeling information into it. the data for each report item appears in its own worksheet. The Options button on the SmartPlant Reports toolbar is not available for editing a fixed format report template because you are free to place headers and data anywhere you want on your worksheet. follow the format of the first Microsoft Excel worksheet. When you generate your report. page 340 • Tabular Format Report. you only edit the first worksheet. 4. 2. page 344 • Create a Report Template Based on an Existing Template.Generating Reports: An Overview Related Topics • Composite Format Report. You can simply map properties to cells without any labeling if you want. page 349 • Define the Layout of a Fixed Format Report Template. Tip A label is not a required feature of a fixed format report template. page 337 • Fixed Format Report. one for each item of the report item type. and from the menu select the property that you want to map to the cell you chose in the previous step. page 338 Fixed Format Report The fixed format report creates one Microsoft Excel worksheet for each item. all fixed format worksheets. Click Map Properties on the SmartPlant Reports toolbar. When you generate a fixed format report. • 3. • 340 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . page 340 • Display the Properties of a Report Template. Repeat the previous steps until you have labeled and mapped all the needed report item properties to the corresponding locations in your template. Tip The properties on the Map Properties menu are specified when you define the contents of your report. page 357. page 341 • Creating and Editing Report Templates: An Overview. Choose a cell where you want the property associated with the labeling to appear. see Define the Contents of Your Report Template.

Tips • Each item in the report has its own page. page 334 Define the Layout of a Composite Format Report Template 1. the first worksheet is automatically fixed format. Define the layout of the first Microsoft Excel worksheet. page 350 • Edit a Report Template. You choose your report format on the Report Properties dialog box. page 338 Composite Format Report The composite format report template is a combination of fixed and tabular format reports.Generating Reports: An Overview Note • You use the Options command on the SmartPlant Reports toolbar to designate space for your header and to specify the number of blank lines that you want between rows of data on your report. Note • Because the delivered report templates are tabular format. The Options command is not available for fixed format report templates because you are free to place headers and data anywhere on your worksheet. page 341 • Display the Properties of a Report Template. Related Topics • Composite Format Report. page 340 • Tabular Format Report. For more information about defining fixed format report templates. but the properties for subsequent items in the report are displayed starting with the third sheet because the second worksheet is tabular format. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 341 . page 344 • Define the Layout of a Composite Format Report Template. page 340. Related Topics • Create a New Blank Report Template. page 341 • Creating and Editing Report Templates: An Overview. The properties of the first item are displayed on the first worksheet. and the second sheet contains the tabular format report. page 337 • Fixed Format Report. choose Blank from the Source template list if you want to create a composite format template. In your Microsoft Excel workbook the first sheet contains the fixed format report. In a composite format report template. page 348 • Generate a Report. see Define the Layout of a Fixed Format Report Template.

and the header is saved on the new sheet because the entire header no longer fits in the space allotted on the first sheet.Generating Reports: An Overview You use the Options command on the SmartPlant Reports toolbar to designate space for your header and to specify the number of blank lines that you want between rows of data on your report. After you have defined the layout for the first and second worksheets in your report template. 2. a new Microsoft Excel worksheet is created. the Options command is available for you to use in the tabular portion of the composite report template. page 340 • Tabular Format Report. For more information about defining tabular format report templates. You can customize the number of rows in the report header by using the Options command on the SmartPlant Reports toolbar and choosing a larger value in the Rows in report header option. In a composite format report template. however. page 341 • Creating and Editing Report Templates: An Overview. The Options command is not available for fixed format report templates because you are free to place headers and data anywhere you want to on your worksheet. the second worksheet is automatically tabular format. Notes • You can map only one property into a given cell. When you add any property value in the header. • Related Topics Composite Format Report. page 338 • 342 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . although you can map the same property to more than one cell. see Define the Layout of a Tabular Format Report Template. page 337 • Fixed Format Report. • 3. save the template and quit Excel. page 338. Define the layout of the second Microsoft Excel worksheet.

This name matches your Microsoft Excel workbook.Defines the item properties available in your report. formats. names. This dialog box opens when you click Reports > New on the main menu bar.Generating Reports: An Overview New Command Reports > New Displays the New Report Template dialog box. page 344 • Create a Report Template Based on an Existing Template.Allows you to enter a meaningful name to describe the report that you are creating.xls to the name when you save the Excel workbook. All delivered report templates are tabular format. Fixed format . If you do not select a Blank source template type. then the Item type option automatically displays the item type that corresponds to your source template. whereas. Templates in this list appear in alphabetical order. one for each item of the report item type. You only edit the first worksheet. You do not have to edit the report template when you first create it. tabular. page 340 • Tabular Format Report. or Blank. follow the format of the first worksheet when you generate your report. and descriptions for your report template and define the item type upon which you base your report. and composite. but all fixed format worksheets. Item type .Creates one Microsoft Excel worksheet for each item. This dialog box provides options for defining plant-level and user-level templates. page 337 • Fixed Format Report. if you do not chose Blank. page 349 • Creating and Editing Report Templates: An Overview. You can assign source templates.Lists the names of all existing report templates and Blank.Specifies your report format. Report Type . You select a user-level template. Source template . Available options include fixed. the item type automatically displays the item type that corresponds to your source template. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 343 . Name . The Options button on the SmartPlant Reports toolbar is not available for editing a fixed format report template because you are free to place headers and data anywhere you want on your worksheet. plant-level template. Related Topics • Composite Format Report. The software appends . you must specify an item type. If you chose Blank. page 338 New Report Template Dialog Box Displays options for creating plant-level and user-level report templates. The Blank option creates a Microsoft Excel workbook with no predetermined formatting information. page 341 • Create a New Blank Report Template.

In the Item type box. or the template format is row-based. Since delivered reports are all in tabular format. • Tip This entry is the name of your Microsoft Excel workbook. In the Report type box. Subsequent fixed format worksheets are created after sheet two for each item of your report item type when you generate your report. page 350 • Edit a Report Template. On the New Report Template dialog box. 3. 344 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . The first sheet in the workbook is Fixed format. Description .xls to the name. • 5. 4. type a meaningful name to describe the report template you are creating. Related Topics • Create a New Blank Report Template. page 344 • Display the Properties of a Report Template.Generating Reports: An Overview Tabular format . Tips • You can create a new report template based on an existing template by specifying a source template also. For more information. select an item type. You can select Blank for a tabular format report template. select Blank from the Source template list. All delivered reports are tabular format.Formats your report in a table. When you save the template. 2. You can assign any description. page 349. That is. see Create a Report Template Based on an Existing Template. the properties of each item included in your report begin on a unique row. nonetheless.Formats your report in a combination of fixed and tabular formats. you must choose Blank if you want a fixed or composite format report template.Describes the report type that this template produces. Click Reports > New. the second sheet is Tabular format. the software appends . page 348 • Edit Command. Composite format . choose template format. page 345 • New Command. In the Name box. page 34 Create a New Blank Report Template 1. Tip • These options are only available when you choose Blank from the Source template list.

Related Topics • Creating and Editing Report Templates: An Overview. Tip You must have the appropriate permissions. Click OK to create the template. to create plant-level report templates. • 9. If you want this template to be available at the plant-level. page 340 Define the Layout of a Composite Format Report Template. granted in SmartPlant Engineering Manager. page 331 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 345 . 8. page 340 Edit Command Opens the Edit Report Template dialog box. page 357 Define the Layout of a Tabular Format Report Template. page 348 • Generating Reports: An Overview. You can select a template and view its properties and edit it in Microsoft Excel. select the Add to plant reports option. page 337 • Edit a Report Template. For more information on those procedures. This dialog box lists all the available report templates. click OK and define the layout and contents of the template. page 341 • Creating and Editing Report Templates: An Overview. 7. When the software gives you the option to edit your new template in Microsoft Excel. page 337 • Edit a Report Template. Note • You must have valid privileges to edit a report template. page 341 Related Topics • Composite Format Report. type a description for the template. page 348 • Fixed Format Report.Generating Reports: An Overview 6. In the Description box. see Define the Contents of Your Report Template. page 338 Define the Layout of a Fixed Format Report Template.

the Item type option is automatically specified with the item type that corresponds to your source template.Displays the selected template in Microsoft Excel. granted in SmartPlant Engineering Manager. Properties . whereas. Select a template from the list. page 348 • Edit Command. plant-level template. the software automatically specified the Item type option as the item type that corresponds to your source template. Click Properties to view and update properties for a report template. If you select a source template other than Blank.xls to the name when you save the Excel workbook. The name matches your Microsoft Excel workbook. Important • You must have the correct privileges. page 34 Report Properties Dialog Box Displays properties for plant-level and user-level report templates. you must specify an item type. Available options include fixed.Displays the names of all existing report templates and Blank. Name . or Blank. if you do not choose Blank. page 349 • Edit a Report Template. This dialog box opens when you click Properties on the Edit Report Template dialog box. page 345 • New Command. If you choose the Blank option.Specifies your report format. The software appends . You select a user-level template.Lists all report templates available to edit or customize. Templates in this list appear in alphabetically. tabular. Item type .Generating Reports: An Overview Edit Report Template Dialog Box Displays a list of available report templates and opens the selected report template in Microsoft Excel so that you can make changes to it. This dialog box opens when you click Reports > Edit on the main menu bar. Available reports . Related Topics • Create a Report Template Based on an Existing Template.Displays the Report Properties dialog box where you can modify the description and the report template format. The Blank option creates a Microsoft Excel workbook with no predetermined formatting information. Source template . 346 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .Defines the item properties available to populate your report.Allows you to enter a meaningful name to describe the report that you are creating. to edit plant-level report templates. Report Type . Open . and composite.

Composite format . the software creates subsequent fixed format worksheets after sheet two for each item that matches your report item type. page 344 • Display the Properties of a Report Template. page 34 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 347 . That is. one for each item of the report item type. page 348 • Edit Command. page 345 • New Command. follow the format of the first worksheet when you generate your report. You can assign any description. All delivered report templates are tabular. Tabular format .Formats your report in a table. The first sheet in the workbook is fixed format. the properties of each item included in your report begin on a unique row. The Options button on the SmartPlant Reports toolbar is not available for editing a fixed format report template because you are free to place headers and data anywhere you want on your worksheet. or the report format is row-based. Related Topics • Create a New Blank Report Template.Creates one Microsoft Excel worksheet for each item.Describes the report type that this template produces. You only edit the first worksheet. the second sheet is tabular format. When you generate your report.Formats your report in a combination of fixed and tabular styles. but all fixed format worksheets. page 350 • Edit a Report Template. Description .Generating Reports: An Overview Fixed format .

to edit a report template. page 341 Define the Contents of Your Report Template. Click Reports > Edit.CommandBars("SmartPlant Reports"). page 337 • Generating Reports: An Overview. changing the Report type option and the description are the only available actions on the Report Properties dialog box. 3. see • Define the Layout of a Tabular Format Report Template. granted in SmartPlant Engineering Manager.Application. select Tools > Macro > Visual Basic Editor and follow these steps: 1. Quit Excel. 4. page 357 Notes • If the SmartPlant Reports toolbar is missing when editing report templates in Microsoft Excel. 2. and the toolbar is displayed the next time a report is edited. • You must have the correct permissions. Select View > Immediate Window.Generating Reports: An Overview Edit a Report Template 1. On the Edit Report Template dialog box. Type Sheet1. 2. For more information about these procedures. then on the Excel menu bar. Click Open on the Edit Report Template dialog box to display the report in Microsoft Excel so that you can edit the layout and contents of your report template. Click Properties on the Edit Report Template dialog box in order to edit template properties on the Report Properties dialog box. Related Topics • Creating and Editing Report Templates: An Overview. page 331 348 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . page 338 Define the Layout of a Fixed Format Report Template. page 340 Define the Layout of a Composite Format Report Template. select a report from the Available reports list. Tip Because you are modifying a template that already is defined.Delete in the Immediate window. 3.

click OK to open Microsoft Excel and define the contents and layout of your report. 4. page 357 Define the Layout of a Tabular Format Report Template. type a description for the new report template. 6. In order to make all options available. if you create a template using an existing template. type a name for the new report template. Because you are creating a report based on an existing template. • Related Topics • Composite Format Report. For more information about those procedures. In the Name box. 5. choose Blank from the Source template list. page 341 • Creating and Editing Report Templates: An Overview. page 340 Define the Layout of a Composite Format Report Template. For more information. page 337 • Fixed Format Report. the format of your report template is tabular. page 331 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 349 . select an existing template from the Source template list. page 340 • Generating Reports: An Overview. In the Description box. see Create a New Blank Report Template. page 341 Notes • Because the delivered report templates are all in tabular format. When the software gives you the option to edit your template. page 344. Click OK. page 338 Define the Layout of a Fixed Format Report Template. 3. see Define the Contents of Your Report Template. 2. some options on the New Report Template dialog box are not available. Click Reports > New.Generating Reports: An Overview Create a Report Template Based on an Existing Template 1. On the New Report Template dialog box.

to delete a report template. which allows you to select and delete a report template. page 351 • Edit Command. Available Reports . Related Topics • Creating and Editing Report Templates: An Overview. Related Topics • Delete a Report Template. page 348 • Generating Reports: An Overview. granted in SmartPlant Engineering Manager. Note • You must have valid privileges. Select a report from the Available reports list on the Edit Report Template dialog box. page 34 350 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . 3. page 351 • Generating Reports: An Overview. 2. This dialog box opens when you click Reports > Delete on the main menu bar. page 346 Delete Command Reports > Delete Displays the Delete Report Template dialog box. page 345 • New Command. page 331 • Report Properties Dialog Box. page 331 Delete Report Template Dialog Box Displays a list of available report templates. Click Properties.Lists all available report templates.Generating Reports: An Overview Display the Properties of a Report Template 1. Select Reports > Edit. granted in SmartPlant Engineering Manager. You can delete a selected report template if you have the proper privileges. page 337 • Edit a Report Template. Related Topics • Delete a Report Template.

CommandBars("SmartPlant Reports"). page 331 SmartPlant Reports Toolbar Appears when you are editing or creating a report template in Microsoft Excel.Delete in the Immediate window. 2. granted in SmartPlant Engineering Manager. then click Tools > Macro > Visual Basic Editor in Excel and follow the steps below: 1. Click Close. page 352 • Define the Contents of Your Report Template.Generating Reports: An Overview Delete a Report Template 1. 4. page 348 • Map Properties Command.Application. page 360 • Options Command. 3. Related Topics • Edit a Report Template. page 348 • Generating Reports: An Overview. Quit Excel. 2. Important • You must have the correct privileges. to delete a report template. Select View > Immediate Window. 3. and the toolbar is displayed the next time a report is edited. page 357 • Edit a Report Template. Related Topics • Define Command. On the Delete Report Template dialog box. select a report from the Available reports list. Click OK to delete the report template. Type Sheet1. page 17 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 351 . Note • If the SmartPlant Reports toolbar is missing when editing report templates in Microsoft Excel. Click Reports > Delete on the main menu bar.

pipe run. Note • In order to generate From and To data for all Microsoft Excel worksheets. To create a report definition (a list of report item properties available to include in your template). are retrieved from the database. For the selected item in the Report on tree. and so forth) and controls how the properties of that item type. Choose the PrintFromToDataForActiveSheet macro to generate this data for only the active worksheet.Displays the Define Report Items dialog box. instrument. which opens when you click Define on the Define Reports Contents dialog box. use the Define Report Items dialog box. nozzle. This dialog box opens when you click Define on the SmartPlant Reports toolbar. Each report item is based on an item type (equipment. click Tools > Macro > Macros > PrintFromToDataForAllSheets in Excel. which allows you to define a report template specifying the layout and contents of your report. you define the properties that you want available for inclusion in your report template. page 348 Define Report Contents Dialog Box Defines new items to include in your report and selects the cells to include for the new items. Select the cell and then select the property from the Map Properties menu on the SmartPlant Reports toolbar. page 344 • Edit a Report Template. Use the Options command on the SmartPlant Reports toolbar to designate space for your header and to specify the number of blank lines that you want between rows of data on your report. The Options command is not available for fixed format report templates because you are free to place headers and data anywhere you want on the worksheet. you assign properties to particular cells. In order to define the layout of the report item properties. Related Topics • Create a New Blank Report Template. A report definition describes how to collect the properties data and how to format it in a report. or item types related to it. You map properties to the individual Microsoft Excel cells to define the content and layout of your report. Define . 352 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .Generating Reports: An Overview Define Command MS Excel > SmartPlant Reports Toolbar > Define Opens the Define Report Contents dialog box. This template is a Microsoft Excel workbook that contains cells and worksheets.

Displays the New Items dialog box.Adds the selected item type to the Report on tree on the Define Report Contents dialog box. if you add the equipment item type under nozzles. page 344 • Create a Report Template Based on an Existing Template. Its properties are no longer available for your report template. you must select an item from the Report on list and click Define. For instance. its properties are available for inclusion in your report template. a new item type added into the hierarchy under another item type does not give you access to the same properties that you have if the item type is higher in the hierarchy. Note • The level into which you add an item type affects the properties that you can access for your template. if you add the equipment item type under nozzles. the equipment item type only reports on equipment associated with a nozzle.Generating Reports: An Overview Delete .Removes an item from the tree view and from your report structure. Apply . For instance. The software adds this item type as a child of the item type selected on the Define Report Contents dialog box. and equipment without nozzles is not reported. page 349 • Define the Contents of Your Report Template. Related Topics • Create a New Blank Report Template. Select an item type to make its properties available to include in your report. If you add a new item type.Displays a tree view of item types the properties available for inclusion in your report template. Then you can map the properties that you select to cells in your report template. Report on . page 348 • New Command. That is. New . To include the properties. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 353 . That is. a new item type added into the hierarchy under another item type does not give you access to the same properties that you have if the item type is higher in the hierarchy. the equipment item type only reports on equipment associated with a nozzle. Note • The level into which you add an item type affects the properties that you can access for your template. and equipment without nozzles is not reported. You use this dialog box to specify new item types to include in the Report on tree. page 34 New Items Dialog Box Opens when you click New on the Define Report Contents dialog box and displays a list of items that are related to the item that you selected there. page 357 • Edit a Report Template.

page 34 Properties Tab (Define Report Items Dialog Box) Displays properties for a report item so you can select properties to use in your report template. Name .Displays the name of the selected item type. in turn. page 357 • Edit a Report Template. page 34 Define Report Items Dialog Box Specifies the report item properties available for your report. page 344 • Define Command. 2" nominal diameter. Select item types from this list to include in your report template.Automatically adds a special Report Item Group Total property to the Map Properties menu on the SmartPlant Reports toolbar. is accessed by clicking Define on the SmartPlant Reports toolbar. Related Topics • Create a New Blank Report Template. be sure not to map unique properties. This tab is part of the Define Report Items dialog box. page 348 • New Command. onto your report. you can use this feature to give you the total numbers of valves with 1" nominal diameter. You can rename the item. If you want to tally similar items in this way.Generating Reports: An Overview Items related to . Related Topics • Create a New Blank Report Template. page 348 • Edit Command.Displays a list of item types related to the item type that you selected in the Report on tree on the Define Report Contents dialog box. If you have duplicate item type names in your report item type hierarchy. page 345 • New Command. the software prompts you to rename the new item type uniquely. which opens when you click Define on the Define Report Contents dialog box. 1. The Report Item Group Total property displays the number of items that have identical reported properties. such as item tags. The properties of the new item types are then available to use in your report. which. For example. page 357 • Edit a Report Template. page 352 • Define the Contents of Your Report Template. Group by the selected property . 354 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .5" nominal diameter. Select the properties to include for each report item type and define sorting and filtering for those properties. page 344 • Define the Contents of Your Report Template. and so forth. This dialog box is accessed by clicking Define on the Define Report Contents dialog box. then items are never grouped together because a unique tag is a property that items never share. If you do.

page 348 • New Command. see SmartPlant Data Dictionary Manager Help. Right Arrow . Use short text . Related Topics Edit a Report Template. You can select more than one item by using the Shift and Ctrl keys and then clicking the right arrow. which is defined in SmartPlant Data Dictionary Manager. For more information about select lists and their values and indices. Also. Use select list index . In a few cases. Also. Left Arrow .Displays all properties for the report item you specified on the Define Report Contents dialog box.Generating Reports: An Overview Repeat parent data . page 34 • New Report Template Dialog Box. You can select more than one item by using the Shift and Ctrl keys and then clicking the left arrow. double-clicking an item in the Available properties list moves it to the Selected properties list. page 343 • SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 355 . the short value is longer than the regular value. if your report contains Unit then Drawing as a child of Unit.Lists the report item properties you have selected from the Available properties list that are consequently available for inclusion in your report. double-clicking an item in the Selected properties list moves it to the Available properties list. selecting this option for Drawing causes repetition of Unit cells on any line containing Drawing cells.Moves the selected item out of the Available properties list and into the Selected properties list. For example.Displays the short text value. Selected properties .Moves the selected item in the Selected properties list to the Available properties list.Displays the cells of parent item data in your report. Available properties .Includes the numerical index of the select entry along with either the short value or select list value for that property. Only select-listed properties can be displayed in their short value form.

which. double-clicking an item moves it to the Available properties list. Order .Displays the properties selected for sorting. Related Topics Define Command. page 357 • Edit a Report Template. Related Topics • Define the Contents of Your Report Template. Applied filter . Browse . which. Down Arrow .Moves the selected item in the Available properties list to the Sort properties list. opens when you click Define on the SmartPlant Reports toolbar. page 343 356 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .Moves the selected item up in sorting priority.Specifies the sorting order (ascending or descending) for the report data. double-clicking an item moves it to the Sort properties list. Right Arrow . page 352 • Define the Contents of Your Report Template. page 17 • Sort Tab (Define Report Items Dialog Box) Defines the cells that you use to sort the report items and how. Also. To select a new filter. Available properties . which allows you to choose or to further define item types for your report template. page 357 • Edit a Report Template. page 348 • Map Properties Command.Generating Reports: An Overview Filter Tab (Define Report Items Dialog Box) Defines the filter that you want to use for your report item. page 348 • New Report Template Dialog Box. which opens when you click Define on the Define Report Contents dialog box.Displays your selected filter.Moves the selected item down in sorting priority. This tab is part of the Define Report Items dialog box. type a valid filter name or click Browse to locate a filter. which opens when you click Define on the Define Report Contents dialog box. Up Arrow . You can select more than one item and then click this button. This tab is part of the Define Report Items dialog box.Moves the selected item in the Sort properties list to the Available properties list.Displays the Select Filter dialog box. You can select more than one item and then click this button. opens when you click Define on the SmartPlant Reports toolbar. page 360 • Options Command. in turn.Lists all the properties of your report item. Also. Sort properties . in turn. Left Arrow .

Click New. You can add items under any nodes subordinate to the main report item type as long as they have items related to them. 6. On the Define Report Contents dialog box. click Close. Tip If the item that you choose has the same name as an item elsewhere in the hierarchy. choose that node and repeat the previous steps. • Using the New command skillfully allows you to navigate in all directions in the plant hierarchy and gather properties from throughout the plant database. Tips • When you click New on the Define Report Contents dialog box. 10. you can choose from only those items that are related to the item you selected in the Report on hierarchy. you must type a different name for it in the Name box. On the Properties tab of the Define Report Items dialog box. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 357 . 8. • 7. 3. choose the properties that you want to map to your report template. Tip If you want to add more new items under another node in the hierarchy. Click Define. select the new item that you want to add to the hierarchy. Change the name of the item that appears in the hierarchy by typing text in the Name box. select an item with properties that you want for your report template. On the SmartPlant Reports toolbar in Microsoft Excel. On the New Items dialog box. 4. Click Apply. • 5. When you have added all the items that you want from this list.Generating Reports: An Overview Define the Contents of Your Report Template 1. The highest node in the Report on hierarchy under which you can add a new item is the node that belongs to the report item type that you base your template definition on. Select the node in the Report on hierarchy under which you want the new item type to appear to add a new report item type so that its properties are available to map onto your report template. • 9. click Define. 2.

11. page 348 • Generating Reports: An Overview. Related Topics • Define the Contents of Your Report Template. When you have selected all the properties that you want in your report. page 348 • Generating Reports: An Overview. you can switch from a filter that displays all pumps to a filter that displays only active pumps. • Tip The Define Report Contents dialog box remains open. Click OK. The Options button on the SmartPlant Reports toolbar is not available for editing a fixed format report template because you are free to place headers and data anywhere you want to on your worksheet. • Related Topics • Creating and Editing Report Templates: An Overview. click OK on the Define Report Contents dialog box. Choose the PrintFromToDataForActiveSheet macro to generate this data for only the active worksheet. use the Filter tab. page 337 • Edit a Report Template. 12. and so you can repeat the previous steps to continue adding more items and specifying their properties. which provides options for defining header and spacing details in your report template. In order to generate From and To data for all Microsoft Excel worksheets. • Notes • All the properties that you have made available to map into your template are now displayed when you click Map Properties on the SmartPlant Reports toolbar. click Tools > Macro > Macros > PrintFromToDataForAllSheets in Excel. page 331 Options Command MS Excel > SmartPlant Reports Toolbar > Options Opens the Report Options dialog box.Generating Reports: An Overview Tips • If you want to sort the order in which your items are listed when you generate a report. Now you can use the properties you have specified in the layout of your template. page 357 • Edit a Report Template. For instance. If you want to change the filter that finds your report items. choose the property or properties to sort on by using the Sort tab. page 331 358 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .

In fixed format report templates. page 338 • Edit a Report Template. Related Topics • Create a New Blank Report Template. page 349 • Define the Layout of a Composite Format Report Template. This dialog box opens when you click Options on the SmartPlant Reports toolbar in Microsoft Excel. page 348 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 359 . you are not constrained to have a header or rows at all. Note • The Options command is available for tabular and composite format report templates only. page 341 • Define the Layout of a Tabular Format Report Template. Rows in report header . You can enter a value in the box or use the scroll buttons to select a value. Skip lines between rows .Generating Reports: An Overview Report Options Dialog Box Specifies the number of empty rows between items in your report and the number of rows in your report header. The maximum value allowed is 1000.Specifies the number of rows in your report header.Defines the number of blank lines between each row in your report. It is not available for fixed format report templates because you are free to place captions and properties in any configuration that you want. page 344 • Create a Report Template Based on an Existing Template.

The software places the corresponding property in the selected cell. page 331 360 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . This menu is populated with the items that you define with the SmartPlant Reports toolbar Define command.Generating Reports: An Overview Map Properties Command MS Excel > SmartPlant Reports Toolbar > Map Properties Displays a menu of all properties associated with your report. page 344 • Create a Report Template Based on an Existing Template. You can select a cell in your report template and then assign a property from the Map Properties list. page 349 • Edit a Report Template. Note • The SmartPlant Reports toolbar appears in Microsoft Excel when you create or edit a report template. You do not have to map all the properties in the Map Properties menu. page 348 • Generating Reports: An Overview. The Map Properties menu contains a subset of all the properties in the plant database. Related Topics • Create a New Blank Report Template. and you can add properties to the menu by using the Define command again.

Before you print a drawing. see the documentation for your printer. You can click the Print command on the File menu to do the following: • • Print an entire drawing or specific views from a drawing. you must have a corresponding screen font and font size to display each font on the screen. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 361 . to make sure that what you see on the screen is what appears on the printed page. For example. inconsistency indicators. If you use printer fonts. Use scalable fonts. Note Zero length pipe runs will print. click the Print command on the File menu. or filtered items. For more information about installation. subject to the limitations of the device driver. and then click the printer you want to use. such as TrueType® fonts. It also supports pen plotters. Except for the color settings and a few special effects. Before you print. when a reducer is connected to a nozzle. or file. and screen fonts. This stipulation applies to special settings like the display of claimed items.Printing Drawings: An Overview Printing Drawings: An Overview You can print your drawings on many different devices ranging from dot matrix printers to laser printers and plotters. To set the print range and scale. If each screen font you use has a matching printer font. your drawing prints exactly as it appears in the Drawing view. The software supports plotting using standard Windows plotting capabilities. select a printer and the settings for it. Printing a Drawing As you work on a drawing. you can send a copy of it to a specified printer. printer fonts. plotter. Preparing to print The printer you use affects the way the current drawing prints and displays text on the screen. Items look the same on the screen and in the printed drawing. You can set properties for the printer by clicking the Properties button. Zero length pipe runs will not print if you print your drawing using Drawing Manager. the zero length pipe run between these symbols will print. such as the range of sheets or number of copies to print. the screen display of the drawing closely matches the printed drawing. To do this. However. click the Settings button. Three kinds of fonts affect your work: scalable fonts. Set printing options. the fonts you select can affect the match between what you see on the screen and what appears on the printed page. you must install and select the printer you want to use.

page 366 • Print to a File. page 368 362 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Related Topics • Print a Drawing.Printing Drawings: An Overview Printing Part of a Drawing You can print selected sheets in a drawing or a selected area. You can print all views or certain views. page 365 • Print a Selected Area. You can print not only drawing items that are selected. Printing Time Drawings can take some time to print. A DPR Windows printer driver extends the capabilities of File > Print to add drawings to the DPR. because they can make the necessary calculations faster. Some older versions of PostScript® printers are slower when compared to the newer ones. The type of controller boards and the amount of RAM in the printer also affect your printing times. Expect longer print times when you have drawings that contain a large number of the following items: • • • • Curved items Many fills that have complex colors. After you populate the DPR. but other items that are in the view with the select set print. PostScript® printers print faster than LaserJet printers. anyone with a Web browser can view the digital drawings online. This feature is handy if you are working on a complex drawing and you want to print only certain parts to proof them. patterns. Contact Intergraph for more information. Printing to a Digital Archive You can use a separate Intergraph software application to store drawings in a Web server-based digital archive called the Digital Print Room (DPR). or textures Large bitmaps Links to various drawings The type of printer you have also affects the printing time.

Opens the Printer Document Properties dialog box. Then you can print from a computer that does not have the application installed or print to a printer other than the one you currently have configured.Stores your drawing in a file with extension . The Print to File dialog box appears when you select the Print to file option on the Print dialog box and then click OK. Options are available for defining the printing area. This area is read-only. see the printer documentation.Printing Drawings: An Overview Print Command File > Print Sends a copy of the active drawing to a specified plotter. busy or idle.Displays the type of printer currently selected. or file. Selecting File > Print also opens the Print dialog box. range. such as. and other printing characteristics. Status .Specifies the printer you want to use. The information below the Name box applies to the selected printer. Name . page 367 • Working with Drawings: An Overview. Comment . Where . printer port. This dialog box opens when you click File > Print on the menu bar. which allows you to specify page setup and other printer settings. Before using this command. Print to file . This area is read-only. queue name.Identifies the printer path. or physical location of the currently selected printer. Related Topics • Printing Drawings: An Overview. Properties . SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 363 . page 361 • Set Print Options. Type . The printer you select in the Name box is the default printer for the rest of the current design session until you specify a different printer.Describes the state of the selected printer. you must install and select a printer. For help on installing a printer.Displays any comments you entered during printer configuration. printer. You select a file name and location for the print file in the Print to File dialog box. page 102 Print Dialog Box Controls how a drawing is printed. This area is read-only. You can select from a list of all the available configured printers. This area is read-only.pri instead of sending it to a printer. number of copies.

Prints your entire drawing on one page. page 363 • Print to a File. View . then the printed range appears to be 1 cm by 1 cm on the printer paper. Best fit . the Settings button at the bottom of the Print dialog box is unavailable.Prints each defined view associated with the drawing.Prints the user-defined area.Prints your entire drawing. Manual scale . if the print range is a rectangle at 12 cm by 12 cm and you set a manual scale of 1:12.Activates the All and Active check boxes so you can then define the view or views to print. All .Prints a faint graphic in the drawing background. Print watermark .Prints the drawing in black and white. Collate . Type the number or use the scroll buttons to specify a number. Active . Settings . Related Topics • Print a Drawing. For example.Prints the copies in proper binding order. If you want a 1:1 drawing of the current sheet scale. This button is disabled when the Selection option in the Print range group is selected. 364 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . page 368 • Set Print Options.Scales the selected drawing sheets or print area to fit the printer paper for the configured device.Displays the number of copies you want to print.Printing Drawings: An Overview Drawing . This dialog box opens when you click Settings on the Print dialog box. you can set the Paper length option to 1 and the Design length option to 1. Fit to page . page 367 Settings Dialog Box Specifies the area you want to print. When you select this option. Selection .Opens the Settings dialog box.Specifies the scale value to apply to the print range during printing. Number of copies . which allows you to view and edit the scale and origin of your print area. page 365 • Print Command.Prints only the active view. Print black and white .

Design length . Y. Y origin .Displays dynamically how the graphic prints on the sheet as you change other options on the dialog box. X origin . Preview . page 368 Print a Drawing 1. Design length. In the Print range box.Positions the print area center to the center of the printer paper. page 363 • Print to a File. then the paper positions at bottom left to bottom left. select the printer before you begin working on a drawing. 4. when you change an option. Related Topics • Print a Drawing. page 365 • Print a Selected Area.Sets a shift in the y-direction from the origin. Center . 2. • SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 365 . Because the fonts available on the selected printer affect both displaying and printing. you have a dynamic representation of how your graphic fills the printed sheet. If you do not set this option. Therefore.Specifies a design length (size of the printed graphic) with respect to the Paper length option.Sets a shift in the x-direction from the origin. Caution • It is a good idea to save your drawing before you print it so that a printer error or other problem does not cause you to lose any work completed since the last time you saved the drawing. Note • For many of the options on this dialog box such as. and so forth. specify the range of pages you want to print.Printing Drawings: An Overview Paper length . page 366 • Print Command. Select the printer that you want to use from the Name list. type the number of copies you want. 3. Paper length. the red. X.Specifies the paper length for the document you want to print with respect to the Design length option. Click Print on the Main toolbar. blue. In the Number of copies box. and black boxes in the Preview area change to reflect your new values.

page 366 • Print Command. choose Selection from the Printer Range area. install a printer driver. page 23. page 361 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview. On the Print dialog box. see Zoom In on an Area. • • • Related Topics • Print a Selected Area. Before you can print for the first time. On the General tab. Select the portion of the drawing for printing. see the printer documentation. • 3. page 144 366 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Related Topics • Printing Drawings: An Overview. For more information about how to install a printer.Printing Drawings: An Overview Notes • You can set other options for the printer by clicking the Properties button or the Settings button on the Print dialog box. Click Tools > Options. 2. page 368 Print a Selected Area 1. select the Display as printed option. You can display the drawing as it is to be printed. page 363 • Print to a File. you must connect the printer to the computer or network. Tip For more information on zooming in on an area of a drawing. Click File > Page Setup to specify the drawing size. Click File > Print. and select the printer to print the drawing.

and orientation. use SmartPlant P&ID Drawing Manager. Select Print to file on the Print dialog box. You can set the paper size. Arrange the views you want to print. enter a number of copies. Select the item or portion of the drawing that you want to print. The Print to File dialog box appears. Do one of the following. select Drawing. To sort the sheets by sheet number. select Collate. select View and All. • Related Topics • Printing Drawings: An Overview. and then on the Print dialog box. Tip • button on the Main toolbar. The active view A selected area To a file Select View and then Active. Multiple copies Drawing fit to 1 page Watermark Black and white Notes • You can set other options for the printer by clicking Properties or Settings on the Print dialog box. To print The entire drawing All defined views Do this Under the Print range option. Under Options. Under Options. In the Number of Copies box. which has multiple drawing printing functionality. Under Options. The Settings button becomes unavailable. page 361 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 367 . Click OK. You can create more than one Drawing view by selecting Window > New > Drawing and zooming or panning to the area of the Drawing view that you want to print.Printing Drawings: An Overview Set Print Options 1. select Fit to page. If you want to print more than one drawing. Click Selection. and you can enter the file name and select its location. Click OK on the Print dialog box. select Print watermark. select Print black and white. Click File > Print or the Print 2. source. The entire drawing is printed.

2. Scaling. On the Print to file dialog box. Paper Size options. picture. Click File > Print. On the Main toolbar. On the Print dialog box. Click Advanced on the Printer Document Properties dialog box to specify more printing options. such as. select the folder to which you want to print to.Printing Drawings: An Overview Change Printer Properties 1. 2. The file is saved with a . style. page 361 368 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . click Print 3. On the Paper/Quality tab. the Copy Count. 6. Related Topics • Printing Drawings: An Overview. On the Layout tab. Note Related Topics • Printing Drawings: An Overview. view or change the Paper Source option and color quality setting. 5. and type the name of the file. select Print to file. and so forth. Note • . On the Print dialog box. and so forth.prn extension. 4. view or change the Orientation option and choose the Duplex Printing option if necessary. 3. page 361 Print to a File 1. Click OK. Click Properties on the Print System Advanced Options dialog box to open the Halftone Color Adjustment dialog box and further specify color. click Properties. 4.

Orientation . Landscape . that is. Related Topics Creating Drawing Templates: An Overview. The size choices are more limited for an existing drawing than for a new template. page 102 • Page Setup Dialog Box Specifies information about the layout for the entire drawing.Defines the sheet size according to the recorded width (W) and height (H) values. and watermark.Displays the page so that the long edge is the top of the page. orientation. only for new templates. Custom . for example. Browse . The page orientation is displayed according to each option. Choose the template size from the list. you can change. page 119 • Save a Drawing or a Drawing Template. page 125 • Set Document Properties. page 370 • Working with Drawings: An Overview. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 369 . Click File > Page Setup to open this dialog box. page 116 • Set up a Page Layout. you must type custom W and H values. a B-size drawing to a C-size. you must type custom W and H values. H (Height) .Displays the page so that the short edge is the top of the page. Note • You can specify a new sheet size for an existing drawing.Displays the height of the custom sheet size. If you select Custom as the sheet size. Sheet Size .Printing Drawings: An Overview Page Setup Command File > Page Setup Opens the Page Setup dialog box.Click either the Portrait or Landscape option. If you select Custom as the sheet size. which allows you to specify information about the layout and size for the drawing or template. Show Watermark . You can set the sheet size. Portrait .Specifies when a watermark appears by selecting either the While working option or the While printing option. The Custom option is not available for existing drawings.Click this button to search for a watermark graphic.Sets the size of the sheet.

page 119 • Printing Drawings: An Overview. of the sheet. W. If you select Custom. If you select Standard. W (Width) . Watermark . a B-size drawing to a C-size. • 4. Specify a watermark if you want a watermark to be displayed. Select either Portrait or Landscape. 2.Displays the width of the custom sheet size. Related Topics • Page Setup Command. select either Standard or Custom sheet size.Printing Drawings: An Overview Standard . page 361 • Working With the Design Window: An Overview. for example. Choose the template size from the list. page 370 Set up a Page Layout 1. H.Allows you to choose a graphic that faintly appears in the background of the drawing. and height. On the Page Setup dialog box. Tip You can specify a new sheet size for an existing drawing. The size choices are more limited for an existing drawing than for a new template. you can change.Displays the watermark in the background while you are working within the drawing. While printing . specify a standard sheet size.Displays the watermark only when you are printing the drawing. Related Topics • Creating Drawing Templates: An Overview. Specify when you want the watermark to be displayed by selecting either the While working option or the While printing option. specify the width. The watermark also appears on any printed copies. that is. page 15 370 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . While working .Defines the sheet size from a list of standard ANSI and ISO paper sizes. Click File > Page Setup. page 369 • Set up a Page Layout. 3. and the Custom option is not available for an existing drawing.

such as Zyqad or INtools. Registering Tools with The Engineering Framework Before you can publish and retrieve documents from any of the other authoring tools. The software maps a plant and all its projects to a single SmartPlant Foundation URL. SmartPlant Foundation plant database and its projects. constructing. which points to one. The Framework menu commands are not available unless your plant is registered with the Framework. The connection allows SmartPlant P&ID to display The Engineering Framework (TEF) commands. see SmartPlant Engineering Manager Help and Related Topics. you must register each plant in SmartPlant P&ID with a SmartPlant Foundation database. and only one. and operating a plant. and Drawing Manager. For more information about TEF commands in SmartPlant P&ID Drawing Manager. retrieving PFDs. SmartPlant P&ID. Most of the commands that provide access to TEF functionality exist in the common user interface available on the Framework menu in SmartPlant Engineering Manager. this action takes place in SmartPlant Engineering Manager.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview The Engineering Framework (TEF) standardizes and improves the communication among the various authoring tools you use in the course of designing. access the SmartPlant Foundation Web Client in order to browse in TEF and subscribe to change notifications and compare documents. and the like from TEF. After the plant is registered. see the SmartPlant P&ID Drawing Manager Help. A SmartPlant Engineering Manager administrator typically registers a plant with TEF. INtools. you are registering an authoring tool plant with a SmartPlant Foundation URL and plant that you specify. In SmartPlant P&ID and Drawing Manager you can also use the Framework menu to publish drawings and retrieve data. and SmartPlant P&ID. such as Zyqad. and creating a set of tasks in the To Do List that you can run to update the plant database. Equipment Data sheets. For more information. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 371 . The system administrator must register each plant in the authoring tool with TEF once. When you use the Register command in any of the authoring tools. TEF acts as a repository for data and a medium through which information is shared among other tools. you can publish and retrieve documents. SmartPlant P&D interacts with TEF by correlating items between the plant database and the SmartPlant Foundation database.

page 378 • Retrieve a Document from TEF. page 380 • Publish a Document to TEF.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Related Topics • Access the SmartPlant Foundation Web Client. page 381 • Find a Document to Publish. page 386 372 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .

Changes in the document status of a related revision change the status of the subsequently published versions and revisions of the document. If the data is approved and loaded. called a RAD file. Users can review and edit the visual representation of the document using SmartPlant Markup. • • • For more information about revisions and versions. The published data is not enough to recreate the document in the original authoring tool. such as reports from authoring tools (for example.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Publishing to TEF: An Overview In The Engineering Framework (TEF). such as . the software also publishes the data that is associated with the document when you publish. this is an Intergraph proprietary file. Publishes a visual representation of the document that you can view without the authoring tool. For most documents.xml files to the SmartPlant Foundation database. see the SmartPlant Foundation Web Client User's Guide. the software creates new versions and revisions each time that you publish the document. the authoring tools share data and relationships when you publish documents containing the data and relationships. and specifying a version and revision of the document if specified in SmartPlant Foundation. it is used for reporting and subsequent retrieval by downstream applications.doc. When you publish documents. The authoring tools (SmartPlant P&ID or INtools. The document types and data that you can publish depend on the authoring tool that you use. For many applications.pdf or . The software the loads the data from the . assigning it to a workflow when necessary. The viewable file can also be an Excel workbook or another viewable file type. Publishes associated data into TEF. you can retrieve the data from TEF into other authoring tools. The publishing process involves selecting a document to publish. the software does the following things: • Creates a new master document and the first revision in SmartPlant Foundation the first time that you publish a particular document. line lists in P&ID).xml format. The software relates revisions to the master document. After the data is loaded into SmartPlant Foundation. You can publish subsequent revisions into a workflow. The software publishes some document types without the associated data. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 373 . which can be a different workflow from the original publish action. From that point on. depending on workflow approval. The software publishes only meaningful engineering data to TEF. You can submit documents published without data to workflows just like documents with data. for instance) publish data to TEF in .

INtools • • • • • Instrument Index documents and data.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Reasons to Publish You can publish documents and associated data into TEF for several reasons: • To exchange and enhance data among tools. you can publish a document to a For sharing workflow that has only a load step so that the data is loaded into SmartPlant Foundation as soon as you publish the document. Document Types for Publishing Each authoring tool publishes different documents and data. the Framework Loader loads the document into SmartPlant Foundation as soon as it reaches the top of the Loader queue. allowing users to avoid creating data multiple times in multiple authoring tools To report on common data that originates in multiple tools To provide enterprise-wide accessibility to published documents To manage change. The following list contains each authoring tool that is part of the Framework. limited Instrument Specification Sheet documents Instrument Process Data Sheet documents Instrument Loop Drawings I/O Assignment document Piping and Instrumentation Diagram (P&ID) documents and data Line List documents P&ID generated report documents PFD documents and data Equipment Data Sheet documents and data Summary Sheet documents and data SmartPlant P&ID • • • Zyqad • • • 374 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . and information about whether data is also published with each document type. When you do not select a workflow for a document during publishing. You can also publish a document by not assigning the document to a workflow but by using the default workflow from SmartPlant Foundation. the document types that each tool publishes. including workflow history and document revision management • • • You can also publish documents to share information with users in other tools without going through a formal workflow. To share data.

The PBS in the authoring tools must match the one in SmartPlant Foundation for publishing from the authoring tools and object correlation to work properly. page 380 Publish Command Framework > Publish Opens the Publish dialog box. The WBS document contains information about the project and its status in a plant/project/contract structure. When a PBS document is published from SmartPlant Foundation. in order to publish them.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview SmartPlant 3D • Orthographic Drawings Work Breakdown Structures (WBS) Plant Breakdown Structures (PBS) SmartPlant Foundation • • All Authoring Tools The PBS document contains information about the physical project with the following structure: plant/area/unit. or SmartSketch® files. page 373 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. and allows you to send the information of the documents that you have selected to The Engineering Framework (TEF). The WBS in the authoring tools must match the one in SmartPlant Foundation for publishing from the authoring tools and object correlation to work correctly. page 371 • SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 375 . the authoring tools are notified about the plant. When a WBS document is published from SmartPlant Foundation. areas. such as Microsoft Word or Excel files. Publishing Files without Data You can also browse to other file types on the file system. the authoring tools are notified of projects and contracts that need to be created in the authoring tools. Related Topics Publishing to TEF: An Overview. and units that need to be created in each authoring tool. Related Topics • Access the SmartPlant Foundation Web Client. The primary reasons to publish documents without data are that the SmartPlant Foundation Change Management functionality can manage document changes and reviews using workflows and that you can view the documents electronically. These documents are always published without data. page 381 • Find a Document to Publish.

and title of the document. description. Selected documents . Note • You may select rows that are in white on this dialog box. and the date that the document was last published. When you select a file in this dialog box. Rows that are gray are provided for viewing purposes only and cannot be selected. Advanced .Opens the Advanced Publish Options dialog box. the type of the document. the application which last published the document. the category.If applicable. Engineering Tool .Opens a tool-specific dialog box that allows you to select documents to add to the Selected documents list. This command is available only if it is defined by your project implementation team. the documents begin to be published as soon as you click OK. in the background). File System .Removes the selected file or files from the Selected documents list. opens the Contract dialog box. you open the Document Properties dialog box. You can populate this list by clicking the buttons in the Add area of this dialog box.Opens the Find Documents to Publish dialog box. Batch publish . Find . type.Displays a list of the documents selected for publishing. the revision and version numbers. For each document. You are notified by e-mail when the operation is complete. such as whether it is a new file or was previously published. Related Topics • Find a Document to Publish. Contract . page 380 • Publish a Document to TEF. page 378 • Publish Command. If this options is not selected. and you can specify information about the file. which allows you to search for files that are of a specific type and that have been updated since they were last published to TEF. and subtype of the document. This dialog box opens when you click Framework > Publish on the main menu bar. which allows you to search for documents to add to the Selected documents list.Indicates that the system publishes the selected documents in batch mode (that is.Opens the standard Microsoft Select File dialog box that allows you to select documents to add to the Selected documents list.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Publish Dialog Box Displays a list of documents to publish to The Engineering Framework (TEF). this list provides the name. page 375 376 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . and the name. Remove . the revision schedule.

Displays the name of the file that you selected on the Select File dialog box.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Advanced Publish Options Dialog Box Allows you to specify the type of files that you want to search for when you look for documents to publish. The options that appear in this list are determined by the selection you make in the Document category box.Indicates that the file has already been published to TEF at lease once before. Document subtype . Note • An asterisk * next to a box indicates that the information is mandatory. If applicable. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 377 .Allows you to select the type of the document. Selected file . Title . Document type .Lists the subtype of the document. page 378 • Publish Command. page 380 • Find Documents to Publish Command. This description appears later to help you recognize the file. New document . page 375 Document Properties Dialog Box Provides details about a new or existing document selected for publishing. Descriptions . select one. Name .Indicates that this document has not been published to The Engineering Framework (TEF) before. This dialog box opens when you click Advanced on the Publish dialog box.Allows you to enter a brief description of the file. page 379 • Publish a Document to TEF.Indicates the types of documents the software considers when selecting the documents to publish. Related Topics • Find a Document to Publish. Document type .Allows you to enter the name of the file as it is known in TEF. Published previously . The options that appear in this list are determined by the selection you make in the Document type box. This dialog box opens when you click File System on the Publish dialog box.Allows you to select a category to assign to the document. Document category .Allows you to enter the official title of the document.

For more information. page 381. page 379 • Publish a Document to TEF. page 378 • Publish Command. in the background). When you use this feature. Tips • This feature is also available through the SmartPlant Foundation Web Client. Related Topics • Publishing to TEF: An Overview. • Note • You can select the Batch publish option to indicate that the retrieval process is run in batch mode (that is. This command is available only if the active plant has been registered with The Engineering Framework (TEF). Click Framework > Publish. • The documents listed on the Publish dialog box when it first opens are documents that you selected in the authoring tool before you clicked the Publish command. see Access the SmartPlant Foundation Web Client. page 373 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. 2. page 375 Publish a Document to TEF 1. page 380 • Find Documents to Publish Command. page 371 378 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . the publishing process begins interactively as soon as you click OK. Add any additional documents to the Selected documents list on the Publish dialog box by using the buttons in the Add area. Otherwise. an e-mail message alerts you when the process is complete. see SmartPlant Engineering Manager Help and Related Topics. For more information.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Related Topics • Find a Document to Publish.

this list displays the name and type of the file and the date that the document was last published. page 373 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. If the file has not been published to TEF. For each file. Last search performed . the Last Published box for the document displays the value New. Update . Related Topics • Find a Document to Publish. The dialog box opens when you click Framework > Find Documents to Publish on the main menu bar. The information that appears in the lists on this dialog box were found on this date and time. for instance). Document types searched .Indicates what types of files were considered when the last search was conducted.Selects all the files in the Select documents to publish list.Displays a list of files that were either updated since they were last published to TEF or files that have not yet been published.Displays the date when the files were last searched. this list displays the name and type of the file and the date that it was last published. page 371 Find Documents to Publish Dialog Box Allows you to search for documents that have been updated since they were last published to The Engineering Framework (TEF) or that were previously published but no longer exist in your authoring tool (SmartPlant P&ID or INtools.Performs a new search for documents to publish. For each file.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Find Documents to Publish Command Framework > Find Documents to Publish Opens the Find Documents to Publish dialog box. have never been published. page 380 • Publish a Document to TEF.Displays a list of all the files that were previously published to TEF but were subsequently removed from the project. Select documents to publish . SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 379 . which helps you select the documents that you want to write to The Engineering Framework (TEF) and specifies those documents that have been published before. and need to be re-published. This list is specific to the authoring tool from which you used the command. Select documents to terminate . Select All . page 378 • Publishing to TEF: An Overview.

Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Clear All . When the results of this search are available. indicate the documents that you want to publish to TEF by clicking the corresponding check box. page 380 • Find Documents to Publish Command. page 375 Find a Document to Publish 1. Tips • This feature is also available by clicking the Find button on the Publish dialog box. indicate the documents that you want to remove from TEF. Click Framework > Find Documents to Publish. Related Topics • Find a Document to Publish. page 378 • Publish Command. page 379 • Publish a Document to TEF. but is still available in TEF. For more information. From the Select documents to terminate list.Cancels the selection of all the files in the Select documents to publish list. and you can publish them to TEF. • TEF communicates with the authoring tool to determine the documents that need to be published or re-published to TEF. This step is necessary only if a document was deleted from the authoring tool. This command is available only if the active plant has been registered with The Engineering Framework (TEF). For more information about publishing documents. page 378. 2. see Publish a Document to TEF. 3. • Tip You can quickly select the entire list by clicking Select All. • Tips • Documents in this list are in TEF but are no longer present in the authoring tool. From the Select documents to publish list on the Find Documents to Publish dialog box. • • 380 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . The selected documents now appear in the Documents to Publish list on the Publish dialog box. the documents appear in lists in the Find Documents to Publish dialog box. or you can clear the entire list by clicking Clear All. see SmartPlant Engineering Manager Help and Related Topics.

Related Topics • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. page 371 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 381 . Many of these tasks can be performed from the authoring tools. but this process can be time consuming. depending on the mode you are running the applications in: synchronous or asynchronous. and so forth. you can perform a number of tasks. such as SmartPlant P&ID or SmartPlant Electrical. such as publishing or retrieving documents. but the Web Client provides unique access to other features such as the Web Client To Do List and search capabilities. subscribing to document changes. such as browsing for documents that have been published to TEF. Related Topics • Publishing to TEF: An Overview. For more information. see SmartPlant Engineering Manager Help and Related Topics. Note • From the SmartPlant Foundation Web Client. you can perform a number of tasks. comparing TEF documents with the data in your authoring tool. comparing documents. page 371 Access the SmartPlant Foundation Web Client Click Framework > Browser. page 381 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. Related Topics • Access the SmartPlant Foundation Web Client. page 373 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. page 371 Browser Command Framework > Browser Opens a web-based user interface that allows you to interact with SmartPlant Foundation if the active plant is registered with The Engineering Framework (TEF).Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Note • The lists displayed on the Find Documents to Publish dialog box are compiled at the time indicated in the Last search performed box. Tip • This command is available only if the active plant has been registered with The Engineering Framework (TEF). and subscribing to documents in order to receive notification of changes to the documents. You can update the lists by clicking Update. using the SmartPlant Foundation To Do List to complete tasks. From this interface.

the software searches the SmartPlant Foundation project for documents to retrieve. The Web Client presents a list of documents that you can choose to retrieve. or you can find the document that you want to retrieve using the Web Client search capability. you can use the Framework > Retrieve command in the Web Client to start the retrieval process. the software retrieves the most current data in the SmartPlant Foundation database for those common objects. That is. The Framework > Retrieve command in an authoring tool is slightly different from the Retrieve command available in the SmartPlant Foundation Web Client. • 382 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . from INtools.Retrieves the latest data associated with the selected document in the SmartPlant Foundation database. Additionally. you can retrieve engineering information from a published SmartPlant P&ID. However. For example. when you use the command from an authoring tool. and these are presented in a list in the Retrieve dialog box. Retrieval States • As published .Retrieves only the data the authoring tool originally published with the selected revision and version of the document. The authoring tools provide commands that let you select a document and retrieve it into that tool. or with some authoring tools. After you select the documents that you want to retrieve. if another more recently published document contains updates to objects in the document that you selected. you can configure an automatic retrieval feature. You can use either the Framework > Retrieve command to open a wizard that assists you in retrieving applicable documents. With the latest data . such as SmartPlant P&ID or SmartPlant Electrical. without first selecting documents.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Retrieving from TEF: An Overview You can retrieve documents from The Engineering Framework (TEF) into an authoring tool for subsequent work. you can access the Web Client through the Framework > Browser command. and then you can select the document or documents that you want to retrieve from your Web Client To Do List or the tree view.

The following lists include the documents that each authoring tool can retrieve: SmartPlant P&ID • • • • • PFDs Equipment Data Sheets Instrument Index documents Instrument I/O Assignment documents P&IDs PFDs Equipment Data Sheets Summary Sheet documents and data P&IDs P&IDs Instrument Index documents P&IDs Zyqad • • • • INtools • • SmartPlant 3D • All Authoring Tools From most authoring tools. you can retrieve Plant Breakdown Structure (PBS) and Work Breakdown Structure (WBS) documents. When an authoring tool retrieves it. created in SmartPlant Foundation and published to TEF. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 383 . units. areas. The PBS and WBS. are retrieved by authoring tools in order to provide information about the plants. projects. The PBS contains information about the physical project with the following plant hierarchy: plant-area-unit. The WBS contains information about the concepts of the project in a plant-project-contract hierarchy. and contracts that need to be created in the authoring tool so that the information is consistent across all associated applications. the WBS communicates project status.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Retrieval Document Types The types of documents that you can retrieve depend on the authoring tool that you are using. Create the appropriate structures by running these tasks. Notes • Retrieving the WBS and PBS into SmartPlant Engineering Manager (SPEM) creates items in the SPEM To Do List.

you must create the PBS and WBS structures manually. These documents cannot be retrieved into that application. Design Basis Objects that tools retrieve from other authoring tools can become the design basis for objects downstream in the design process. You must create at least one unit before you can retrieve any documents from TEF. delete. and then it places tasks that instruct you to create. When using INtools. For example. • Data Handling After Retrieval The authoring tool that you use also determines how the software deals with changes in downstream data when you retrieve a document. deleting. you must create the plant-area-unit according to PBS information in SmartPlant Foundation before you retrieve either the PBS or the WBS. page 391 • Retrieve a Document from TEF. you do not have to define it. An object that becomes a design basis for another object can be a specific object that gets richer as it moves through the schematic or logical lifecycle of one application and evolves into a more detailed object downstream.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview • When using SmartPlant 3D. the authoring tool analyzes the impact of the newly retrieved data on the existing database. In SmartPlant 3D. a pump retrieved from a PFD becomes the design basis for a pump in the P&ID. The same process works for logical items that are a design basis for other items. When you change common properties for the pump and retrieve the changes into SmartPlant P&ID. which pulls the data and correlates items. you can view the Piping and Instrumentation Diagram (P&ID) by using the View > P&ID command. You are not required to accept or reject changes in Zyqad. tasks to update the pump automatically appear in the To Do List. or modify items at the appropriate time in the design process on the To Do List. page 386 384 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . such as a stream in Zyqad that results in multiple pipe runs in SmartPlant P&ID. The design basis is implied and based on retrieval. on the other hand automatically overwrites the existing database information when you retrieve data. or modifying those changes. In SmartPlant P&ID and INtools. Zyqad. Related Topics • Open the To Do List. The To Do List gives you the opportunity to view and understand potential changes before accepting.

Show . for instance). the documents are retrieved as soon as you click OK. Related Topics Retrieve a Document from TEF. the last retrieval date. the status of the document. page 382 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview.Indicates that the system retrieves the selected documents in batch mode. this list provides the name. page 385 • SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 385 .Cancels the selection of documents in the Documents to retrieve list. Clear All . Related Topics • Retrieve a Document from TEF. Batch retrieve . Document type .Displays a list of the documents to be retrieved from TEF. page 371 Retrieve Dialog Box Allows you to specify options for retrieving information from The Engineering Framework (TEF). you can indicate whether you want to retrieve the document as it was published or with the latest data. the revision and version numbers.Indicates the type of documents you can retrieve from TEF and changes the list view so that it displays only that document type.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Retrieve Command Framework > Retrieve Opens the Retrieve dialog box. and provides a list of the files that can be retrieved by the authoring tool (SmartPlant Electrical or SmartPlant P&ID. By using the Revision option. You are notified by e-mail when the operation is complete. and the Revision option. The dialog box opens when you click Framework > Retrieve on the main menu bar. You can select the documents that you want to retrieve and thereby bring in the information from the The Engineering Framework (TEF).Selects all the files in the Documents to retrieve list. page 386 • Retrieve Command. Documents to retrieve . page 386 • Retrieving from TEF: An Overview.Allows you to indicate whether you want to view a list of all of the latest documents available or of only those documents that need to be retrieved from TEF. Select All . If this option is not selected. For each document. the type of document.

When you use this feature. select the types of files that are displayed in the Documents to retrieve list by choosing either Only documents to be retrieved or All documents in the SmartPlant Foundation project or by using the Document type list.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Retrieve a Document from TEF 1. the retrieval process begins interactively as soon as you click OK. These documents can appear in the Documents to retrieve list. see SmartPlant Engineering Manager Help and Related Topics. or you can clear the entire list by clicking Clear All. • Notes • You can select the Batch retrieve option to indicate that the retrieval process is run in batch mode (that is. By using the Retrieve Option list for each document you are retrieving. From the Documents to retrieve list. TEF searches the SmartPlant Foundation project for documents that are ready to be retrieved into your tool. • 3. 4. page 382 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. in the background). Click Framework > Retrieve. page 371 386 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Otherwise. Tips • This command is available only if the active plant has been registered with The Engineering Framework (TEF). Tip You can quickly select the entire list by clicking Select All. Related Topics • Retrieving from TEF: An Overview. an e-mail message alerts you when the process is complete. For more information. select whether you want to retrieve each document by using the As published option or the With the latest data option. 2. On the Retrieve dialog box. select the documents you want to retrieve by clicking the corresponding check box.

Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Correlating Items: An Overview In many cases. This dialog box opens when you click Framework > Correlate on the main menu bar. For example. When you import a document into SmartPlant P&ID from The Engineering Framework (TEF). For example. Items in the active drawing are displayed in bold font style. page 387 • Remove the Correlation Between Added and Design Basis Items. For some types of piping. a single stream item in Zyqad normally maps to multiple pipe runs in SmartPlant P&ID. a piece of equipment defined in Zyqad usually maps to a single equipment item in SmartPlant P&ID. a single item in the external application is associated with multiple items within the drawing software. Related Topics • Correlate Additional Items with a Design Basis Item. page 389 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. The Correlate Items command allows you to review and manage these relationships within the drawing environment. Items . page 371 Correlate Items Dialog Box Allows you to review and edit the relationship between plant items and design basis items imported from external applications. page 389 Correlate Command Framework > Correlate Opens the Correlate Items dialog box and allows you to review and edit the correlation between plant items and design basis items. a one-to-one relationship exists between an item in an external application and an item or items in the drawing software. and when selected.Lists all the items associated with a single design basis item. Related Topics • Correlate Additional Items with a Design Basis Item. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 387 . each item that is created in a stockpile is automatically correlated to the design basis item from which it came. the item is highlighted in the drawing. page 389 • Remove the Correlation Between Added and Design Basis Items. page 389 • Correlating Items: An Overview. A single item can be selected from the list.

page 389 • Correlate Command. both are associated with the same design basis item. page 389 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. however. the drawing item is highlighted. When you click on a highlighted item.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Select . Right-clicking quits this command. As you move your pointer over an item in the drawing that is already correlated. Clicking this button clears the Items list.Allows you to review a different drawing item. and it is added to the list. a confirmation message appears. it is added to the Items list as a primary item. it is correlated with the same design basis item. As you move your pointer over an item in the drawing that has the same item type as the items in the list. page 371 388 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .Allows you to correlate an additional item to the same design basis item that the listed items are already correlated to. Then the application searches the database for all other items that are correlated to the same design basis item and adds them to the list as well. Remove . Related Topics • Correlate Additional Items with a Design Basis Item. page 387 • Remove the Correlation Between Added and Design Basis Items. the item is highlighted. When you click on a correlated item. This command is available only when one or more items already appear in the Items list. If you click on an item that is already correlated to some other design basis item. Add . the new item inherits the properties of the item that it is correlated to rather than the design basis item.Deletes the selected item from the Items list and cancels its correlation with the design basis item. If you correlate a new item with a previously correlated item.

3. a message appears to make sure that you want to change the existing correlation. click Add. When you click on a correlated item. you can highlight and select only items that were retrieved from TEF or native P&ID items that are already correlated. Select a item in the drawing that you want to correlate to the retrieved item. On the Correlate Items dialog box. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 389 . In the drawing. Related Topics • Correlating Items: An Overview. Tip • When the Correlate Items dialog box opens. page 387 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. the item is highlighted. • 4. Click Remove. 2. On the Correlate Items dialog box. Then the application searches the database for all other items that are correlated to the same design basis item and adds them to the list as well. select either an item that was retrieved using The Engineering Framework (TEF) and placed in the drawing or a previously correlated item. 3. Tip As you move your pointer over an item in the drawing that is already correlated. page 371 Remove the Correlation Between Added and Design Basis Items 1. Click Tools > Correlate Items. it is added to the Items list on the Correlate Items dialog box as a primary item. Note • When you import a document into SmartPlant P&ID from TEF.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Correlate Additional Items with a Design Basis Item 1. each item that is created in a stockpile is automatically correlated to the design basis item that it came from. 2. Click Framework > Correlate Items. select the item in the Items list whose correlation with the design basis you want to remove. Since items from TEF already have a correlation. The above procedure is to correlate additional drawing items to the design basis item.

You can view the entire To Do List and see the tasks that have been completed and those that are pending. If you successfully run the task. but certain information is provided for all types. Additionally. The units of measure used for properties in Create tasks are converted to the plant defaults when the task is run. If you attempt to run a task. the status is Open. You can change the order in which these columns appear in the Task List by right-clicking a column heading and choosing either Shift Left or Shift Right from the shortcut menu to move the column one place in either direction. Error status occurs.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Using the To Do List: An Overview The To Do List allows you to keep track of tasks required to keep P&IDs updated with information in The Engineering Framework (TEF). the status changes to Complete . you can view properties for each task in the To Do List.Updates the selected properties of the specified item Delete . By clicking the heading of columns on the To Do List. the units of measure used in properties are automatically converted to the defaults for the plant. deleted. for instance. You can also postpone running a task and change its status to Deferred . you sort the list by the values in that column. Notes • When an Update task is created in the To Do List. for example.Deletes the specified item from the plant Manual . Some types of tasks have associated code and you can run them thereby causing the database or drawings to be modified. this feature aids in retrieving data from TEF by providing a list of all the things that must be added. Initially. A single To Do List is shared by all the users of a plant database. or modified to bring the drawing into agreement with the newest information retrieved from TEF. or delete them altogether. if you attempt to run an Update task assigned to a drawing that is not currently open.Creates a new item in the stockpile Update .Creates and displays a reminder. From the To Do List. The available task types are • • • • Create . You can decide when a manual task is complete and set the status accordingly. but the process is not completed successfully. Specifically. the status is changed to Error . The information that is available is specific to the type of task that is selected: Create tasks and Update tasks. defer them. you can perform tasks. • 390 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Each task in the To Do List has a status.

Related Topics • Using the To Do List: An Overview. or delete tasks. Note • This command is available regardless of whether a drawing is open or not. From this dialog box. which lists tasks to be performed in SmartPlant P&ID. defer. page 390 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Related Topics • Add a New Manual Task to the To Do List. page 402 • Run a Task from the To Do List. page 394 • Remove a Task from the To Do List. page 401 • Update the To Do List Display. and you can organize your tasks. page 371 Open the To Do List Click Framework > To Do List on the main menu bar. page 390 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. page 371 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 391 . page 405 To Do List Command Framework > To Do List Opens the To Do List dialog box. page 396 • Defer a Task on the To Do List. you can run. page 402 • Open a Drawing from the To Do List. Related Topics • Using the To Do List: An Overview.

in other words. If multiple tasks are selected. If multiple tasks are selected. remain open. this command is available only if each of the tasks meets these criteria.Centers and zooms in on the drawing items associated with the selected task or tasks in the Drawing view. If multiple tasks are selected. Zoom In . This dialog box shows the detailed properties of the task. this command is available only if each of the tasks meets these criteria.Displays the Task Properties dialog box. but Update and Delete tasks that are already assigned to a drawing cannot be reassigned. Open Drawing . You can assign or reassign a Create task. This command is available when you select manually added tasks or tasks resulting from the Create command. This dialog box opens when you click Framework > To Do List on the main menu bar. If multiple tasks are selected. this command activates it. 392 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . and the status of the selected task is Open or Error. This command is available only when a single task is selected. Run Task . If the drawing is not active.Runs the task that you select from the Task list on the To Do List dialog box. The commands associated with the To Do List are all on the To Do List toolbar. This command is available when a drawing-specific task is selected and the drawing is not currently open or active.Creates an association between the selected task or tasks and a particular drawing. the command is only available for tasks generated automatically by integration with The Engineering Framework (TEF) and importing of data from TEF. You select the tasks from the Task list on the To Do List dialog box. this command is available only if each of the tasks meets these criteria. This command allows you to visually inspect the referenced objects in the context of the surrounding drawing and is available when the selected task is associated with graphics and the drawing that contains the object is open and active. This command is available when an executable task is selected. this command is available only if they are assigned to the same drawing.Opens the drawing associated with the selected task. the associated drawing is open and active. Any drawings that are currently open.Displays the Task Properties dialog box for the selected task. Assign Drawing . New Manual Task . and allows you to manually create a new task.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview To Do List Dialog Box Provides the ability to manage tasks that need to be run within a SmartPlant P&ID database to keep the plant current with information in The Engineering Framework (TEF). This command is not available for manually created tasks. The Assign Drawing dialog box opens and lists the available drawings. Properties .

you can select them and click Delete Task again on the To Do List toolbar. page 391 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 393 .Updates the information that is displayed in the To Do List. Defer Task . This command is only available from the To Do List toolbar.Populates automatically when you retrieve a document from TEF. Since only one To Do List is generated per plant. This list provides information about each task. You can use the Refresh command to stay up-to-date. By clicking the heading of any of these columns.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Note • When a task runs. but the report template. Report . you sort the list by the values in that column. and so the information can change at any time. and a timestamp and error message are added to the Notes area. Doubleclicking a task opens the Task Properties dialog box for that task. This command toggles this feature on and off. Delete Task . If the task runs successfully. If you wish to completely delete tasks from the list of deleted tasks. This command is available only when one or more tasks are selected. Refresh . the status is updated to Error . Task List .xls. This command is available only when the selected task or tasks have either Open. for example. Related Topics • Open the To Do List. the name of the task.Allows you to delete the selected task from the To Do List. or Deferred status. If there is a problem. page 391 • To Do List Command. multiple users can be working in the To Do List at the same time. produces reports much the same way other SmartPlant reports are produced. A confirmation dialog box appears to verify deletion of the selected task or tasks. a description of the task. including.Toggles the status of the selected tasks between Open and Deferred . the status of the task and the Run Date and Run By properties are updated. the status is updated to Completed . the status of the task. called To Do List. Error . the destination drawing. and so forth.Opens Excel and runs a report on the contents of the To Do List.Displays a list of tasks that have been deleted from the To Do List in the Task list on a gray background. View Deleted . You can change the order in which these columns appear in the Task List by right-clicking a column heading and choosing either Shift Left or Shift Right on the shortcut menu to move the column one place in either direction.

You select the tasks from the Task list on the To Do List dialog box. Related Topics Using the To Do List: An Overview. this command is available only if they are assigned to the same drawing. page 371 • Zoom In Command Framework > To Do List > Zoom In Centers and zooms in on the drawing items associated with the selected task or tasks in the Drawing view. Related Topics Open a Drawing from the To Do List. 2. 394 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . 3. This command is available when a drawing-specific task is selected and the drawing is not currently open or active. You can assign or reassign a Create task.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Open Drawing Command Framework > To Do List > Open Drawing Opens the drawing associated with the selected task. too. you can display drawing items from the To Do List. remain open. this command activates it. select a task that is assigned to a drawing. If multiple tasks are selected. page 371 • Open a Drawing from the To Do List 1. • Note • Once the drawing is open. page 390 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. but Update and Delete tasks that are already assigned to a drawing cannot be reassigned. page 394 • Using the To Do List: An Overview. Any drawings that are currently open. page 395. page 400. page 390 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. see Assign a Task to a Drawing. For more information. This command allows you to visually inspect the referenced objects in the context of the surrounding drawing and is available when the selected task is associated with graphics and the drawing that contains the object is open and active. Click Open Drawing . For more information. Click Framework > To Do List. see View a Drawing Item from the To Do List. Tip You can assign tasks to drawings by using commands on the To Do List. On the To Do List. If the drawing is not active.

page 396 • Using the To Do List: An Overview. 3. You can open a drawing from the To Do List. On the To Do List dialog box. page 390 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. The software opens a Drawing view with the drawing items that are associated with the task highlighted. page 371 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 395 . For more information. page 394. page 371 New Manual Task Command Framework > To Do List > New Manual Task Displays the Task Properties dialog box. 2. page 394 • Using the To Do List: An Overview. page 390 • View a Drawing Item from the To Do List. Related Topics • Open a Drawing from the To Do List. not for Create tasks. and only when the drawing that the item belongs to is already open. see Open a Drawing from the To Do List. • Related Topics • Using the To Do List: An Overview. click Zoom Tip • . page 371 View a Drawing Item from the To Do List 1. select a task or tasks. Related Topics • Add a New Manual Task to the To Do List. page 390 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview If multiple tasks are selected. this command is available only if each of the tasks meets these criteria. page 395 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. On the To Do List toolbar. and allows you to manually create a new task. Notes • The Zoom command is available only for Update and Delete tasks. Click Framework > To Do List.

5. In the Notes area. On the Task Properties dialog box. select the General tab. Manually created tasks are not executable tasks and cannot be run from the To Do List. page 390 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. 4. Related Topics • Modify To Do List Task Properties. Click Framework > To Do List. page 371 Task Properties Dialog Box Provides information about tasks that are defined in the task list of the To Do List dialog box. On the To Do List dialog box toolbar. page 399 • Using the To Do List: An Overview. 2. Update. There are three basis types of tasks: Create. The tabs that appear on this dialog box are determined by the type of task that you selected from the To Do List. enter comments if you want to. This dialog box shows the detailed properties of the task. This command is available only when a single task is selected. and Delete tasks. This dialog box opens when you click Properties on the To Do List dialog box. page 390 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. click New Manual Task 3. page 371 Properties Command Framework > To Do List > Properties Displays the Task Properties dialog box for the selected task.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Add a New Manual Task to the To Do List 1. Enter a name. page 28 396 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . description. and status for the new task. page 399 • Properties Command. Related Topics • Modify To Do List Task Properties. Note • . Related Topics • Using the To Do List: An Overview. You must select a task from the To Do List in order to open this dialog box.

such as the success of the procedure. This value is not a unique identifier for the task.Displays the name of the application that published the document from which this task originated. the status is set to Open. Information about the execution of the task. Document .Indicates the level of completion of the task. This information is read-only.For drawing-specific tasks. The following choices are available: Open.Displays the name of the document from which this task originated (for example. Notes .Provides a descriptive string that helps you identify the purpose of the task.Allows you to enter freeform text about the task. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 397 . Drawing . is added to the end of any existing notes for a task. This information cannot be directly edited on this tab. Engineering Tool . For Create tasks. but you can use the Assign Drawing command on the To Do List dialog box to change this value. You can also enter hyperlinks to other documents for more extensive information. Name . this box displays the item tag of an existing item. this box displays the name of the drawing to which the task is assigned.Displays the item tag of the drawing object from which this task originated. The Task Properties dialog box opens when you click Properties on the To Do List dialog box toolbar. The Task Properties dialog box opens when you click Properties on the To Do List dialog box toolbar. page 28 Details Tab (Task Properties Dialog Box) Provides information that is common to all types of tasks and that concerns the source and destination of the information being imported as part of the task. page 399 • Properties Command. which does not have an identifying icon in the Task list on the To Do List. Item Tag . Description .Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview General Tab (Task Properties Dialog Box) Displays properties that are common to all types of tasks.Displays a longer description of the purpose of the task. Status . a Zyqad equipment data sheet or an INtools instrument index). Deferred . When a task is created. Completed . For Update and Delete tasks. Related Topics • Modify To Do List Task Properties. and Error . this box displays the item tag of the item to be created.

Displays the date and time that the task was created. Modified By .Displays the date and time that the task was last run. The Task Properties dialog box opens when you click Properties on the To Do List dialog box toolbar. Related Topics • Modify To Do List Task Properties. Run By . turn off the property by selecting it in the list.Displays the user name that last ran the task. Deleted Date . and so forth. This information includes the user names and dates for the creation of an item. page 399 • Properties Command.Indicates the catalog item used to create the drawing item if the task is run.Displays the user name that removed the task. This information includes the type of item created and the names and values of the properties of the new item. Modified Date .Displays the user name of the task creator. or deleted the task.Displays the date and time that the task was removed.Displays the user name that last ran. The information on this tab is read-only. or deleted. modification of an item. page 399 • Properties Command. Created By . Item Type . Created Date . modified.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Related Topics • Modify To Do List Task Properties. Run Date . modified. Catalog item .Displays the type of item to be created. Deleted By .Displays the date and time that the task was last run. Item Properties . To prevent a value from being used if the Create task is run.Shows the name of each item property and its new value. page 28 Create Tab (Task Properties Dialog Box) Displays information specific to tasks that create new items in the drawing. page 28 History Tab (Task Properties Dialog Box) Provides information this is common to all types of tasks and that concerns the history of the task. 398 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . The Task Properties dialog box opens when you click Properties on the To Do List dialog box toolbar.

select the task or tasks that you want to edit. On the Properties dialog box. The Assign Drawing dialog box opens and lists the available drawings. change the properties as necessary. you can edit the name and notes for the task. On the toolbar. Note • The properties available for each task depend on the type of task. For Create tasks. • . Related Topics Assign a Task to a Drawing.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Related Topics • Modify To Do List Task Properties. page 390 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. page 371 Assign Drawing Command Framework > To Do List > Assign Drawing Creates an association between the selected task or tasks and a particular drawing. click Properties Tip You can also open the Properties dialog box by double-clicking a task in the To Do List. For all types. Related Topics • Using the To Do List: An Overview. If multiple tasks are selected. 2. This command is available when you select manually added tasks or tasks resulting from the Create command. page 399 • Properties Command. 3. page 400 • Using the To Do List: An Overview. page 371 • SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 399 . Click Framework > To Do List. you can turn off or on the new values assigned to properties for the item. this command is available only if each of the tasks meets these criteria. page 28 Modify To Do List Task Properties 1. For Update tasks. you can edit the catalog item being created and turn off or on the values assigned to different properties for that item. From the task list on the To Do List dialog box. 4. page 390 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview.

If multiple tasks are selected. This dialog box opens when you click Assign Drawing on the To Do List dialog box. This command is not available for manually created tasks. The Create tasks are not initially associated with a drawing. Related Topics • Assign a Task to a Drawing. 400 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . and the status of the selected task is Open or Error. 2. select the drawing that you want to assign these tasks to. Related Topics Using the To Do List: An Overview. page 371 • Run Task Command Framework > To Do List > Run Task Runs the task that you select from the Task list on the To Do List dialog box. When you select a drawing and click OK. Click Assign Drawing . the command is only available for tasks generated automatically by integration with The Engineering Framework (TEF) and importing of data from TEF. this command is available only if each of the tasks meets these criteria. Select the drawing that you want to associate with the task or tasks you selected on the To Do List dialog box.Lists all the drawings associated with the active plant. Drawings . page 400 • Assign Drawing Command. page 390 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. in other words.Removes the association between the selected task and a drawing. page 399 Assign a Task to a Drawing 1. the associated drawing is open and active. This command is available when an executable task is selected.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Assign Drawing Dialog Box Allows you to associate a task in the To Do List with a drawing assigned to the active plant structure. Clear . On the Assign Drawing dialog box. From the list on the To Do List dialog box. select the task or tasks that you want to assign to a particular drawing. Click Framework > To Do List. the selected tasks are assigned to that drawing. 4. 3. you can assign Create or Manual tasks using this dialog box.

the status is updated to Error . On the To Do List dialog box. page 390 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. page 402 • Using the To Do List: An Overview. page 394. • Related Topics • Using the To Do List: An Overview.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview When a task runs. the status of the task and the Run Date and Run By properties are updated. page 390 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. You can open a drawing from the To Do List. For more information. 2. the status is updated to Completed . If there is a problem. page 371 • Run a Task from the To Do List 1. Related Topics • Defer a Task on the To Do List. Click Framework > To Do List. that drawing must be open before you can run the task. page 401 • Using the To Do List: An Overview. If a task is assigned to a drawing. Manually created tasks are not executable tasks and cannot be run from the To Do List. This command is available only when the selected task or tasks have either Open. or Deferred status. select the task or tasks that you want to run. page 371 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 401 . Related Topics Run a Task from the To Do List. page 390 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. see Open a Drawing from the To Do List. If the task runs successfully. 3. and a timestamp and error message are added to the Notes area. Click Run Task Notes • . Error . page 371 Defer Task Command Framework > To Do List > Defer Task Toggles the status of the selected tasks between Open and Deferred .

page 403. Click Framework > To Do List. Click Framework > To Do List. On the toolbar. page 402 • Using the To Do List: An Overview. page 390 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. page 371 Remove a Task from the To Do List 1. page 390 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. On the toolbar. You can display deleted tasks in the To Do List. 2. see Display Deleted Tasks on the To Do List. Related Topics • Remove a Task from the To Do List. click Delete Task Note • . Related Topics • Using the To Do List: An Overview. click Defer Task .Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Defer a Task on the To Do List 1. For more information. select the task or tasks that you want to remove. page 371 402 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . 3. 2. This command is available only when one or more tasks are selected. page 371 Delete Task Command Framework > To Do List > Delete Task Allows you to delete the selected task from the To Do List. On the To Do List dialog box. 3. Related Topics • Using the To Do List: An Overview. page 390 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. On the To Do List dialog box. A confirmation dialog box appears to verify deletion of the selected task or tasks. select the task or tasks that you want to defer.

page 371 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 403 . page 371 Report Command Framework > To Do List > Report Opens Excel and runs a report on the contents of the To Do List. called To Do List. To return to the current task list. page 390 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. Related Topics • Run a To Do List Report. page 404 • Using the To Do List: An Overview. Related Topics • Using the To Do List: An Overview. Click Framework > To Do List. click View Deleted Tip • .xls. produces reports much the same way other SmartPlant reports are produced.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Display Deleted Tasks on the To Do List 1. click View Deleted again. page 390 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. 2. but the report template. This command is only available from the To Do List toolbar. On the To Do List dialog box toolbar.

For more information. Click Framework > To Do List on the main menu bar. Click Report Tip This command is only available from the To Do List toolbar. • on the toolbar. page 390 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. page 334. Since only one To Do List is generated per plant. 2. page 405 • Using the To Do List: An Overview.xls. page 390 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. Then the report opens in Excel. For more information on running reports. It is a tabular format report template. Related Topics • Update the To Do List Display. or you can sort the output in an appropriate order for your project). This To Do List report can be customized in the same ways that other reports can be customized (for instance. If a To Do List report has been generated previously. You can use the Refresh command to stay up-to-date. Note • The report template for this report that is included with the software is called To Do List. Related Topics Using the To Do List: An Overview. but the report is produced much the same way that other SmartPlant reports are produced. page 348. you must choose a name and location for the current report on the Save As Output dialog box. and so the information can change at any time. page 371 • Refresh Command Framework > To Do List > Refresh Updates the information that is displayed in the To Do List. see Edit a Report Template. multiple users can be working in the To Do List at the same time. 3. see Generate a Report. you can add a filter so that only tasks with particular properties are reported on.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Run a To Do List Report 1. page 371 404 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .

Related Topics • Using the To Do List: An Overview.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Update the To Do List Display On the To Do List dialog box toolbar. page 390 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. page 371 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 405 . click Refresh .

filters show certain parts of the drawing. Comparing Consistency Check to Propagation . see Comparing Graphics and Text in PDS 2D and SmartPlant P&ID. relationships between placed items. Future. Comparing Graphics and Text in PDS 2D and SmartPlant P&ID . and you can combine filters. graphics are called cells. they reside in a select list. see Comparing Consistency Check to Propagation. page 409 406 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . see Grouping Equipment in SmartPlant P&ID. page 407. you can set construction status before or after you place an item. page 407 • Comparing Consistency Check to Propagation. These values for SmartPlant P&ID properties are called select-listed values. page 409. you must identify the equipment group before adding equipment components to a piece of equipment.In PDS 2D. For more information. Setting Construction Status . see Setting Construction Status. In SmartPlant P&ID. graphics are called catalog items. In SmartPlant P&ID. For more information. Code Lists and Select Lists . When you place an item.In PDS 2D. the default construction status is New.Consistency Check in SmartPlant P&ID serves the same purpose as propagation in PDS 2D. such as only the equipment or only the piping. page 410 • Grouping Equipment in SmartPlant P&ID. Grouping Equipment in SmartPlant P&ID . piping.Comparing SmartPlant P&ID with PDS: An Overview Comparing SmartPlant P&ID with PDS: An Overview The are many functions that can be compared between SmartPlant P&ID and the PDS product. design file differences. consistency checking and propagation. tanks. the software automatically creates a group relationship among the equipment and its components. or Existing buttons on the Construction Status control. For more information. and other items. These graphics include pumps. see Using Filters Versus Levels.PDS 2D uses levels to separate data types in the Drawing view. an attribute that is restricted to pre-defined values is said to be code-listed. page 413.With PDS™ 2D. Using Filters Versus Levels . Related Topics • Comparing Code Lists and Select Lists. For more information. For more information. and using filters. code lists and select lists. With SmartPlant P&ID whenever you place a component on a piece of equipment. before you place an equipment group. page 408. They include attributes and properties. For more information. valves. construction status values. see Comparing Code Lists and Select Lists. page 410. page 412. page 408 • Setting Construction Status.In PDS. you set the construction status by clicking the New. In SmartPlant P&ID.

Comparing SmartPlant P&ID with PDS: An Overview Comparing Code Lists and Select Lists In PDS. the accepted values for the attribute are defined in a code list. For more information on defining select lists and entries. an attribute that is restricted to pre-defined values is said to be code-listed. Related Topics • Review and Edit Item Properties. they reside in a select list. to modify select lists in SmartPlant Data Dictionary Manager. frequently in the Short Value entry. Some code lists and select lists contain special. you should use caution when modifying any entries already included with the product when it is delivered to you. some properties are likewise restricted to preset values. Consequently. You must have special permissions. granted in SmartPlant Engineering Manager. restricted values. In SmartPlant P&ID. That is. Select lists and their select entries are defined in SmartPlant Data Dictionary Manager. see SmartPlant Data Dictionary Manager Help. such as PDS 3D and SmartPlant 3D. These values for SmartPlant P&ID properties are called select-listed values. Select entries are the individual members of a select list. page 87 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 407 . These special values help SmartPlant P&ID communicate information to other applications.

before you place an equipment group. This guideline also exists for placing equipment labels and equipment component labels. With SmartPlant P&ID whenever you place a component on a piece of equipment. Related Topics • Place Equipment. page 153 408 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Moving components from one equipment group to another also requires that you manually regroup components so that they belong to the destination equipment.Comparing SmartPlant P&ID with PDS: An Overview Grouping Equipment in SmartPlant P&ID With PDS™ 2D. the software automatically creates a group relationship among the equipment and its components. you must identify the equipment group before adding equipment components to a piece of equipment.

All items that are subsequently placed in the drawing are assigned this status. you set the construction status by clicking the New. • Related Topics • Customize the Software With the Options Command. Future. If you have already placed an item. In SmartPlant P&ID. click Tools > Options. you can set construction status before or after you place an item: • If you know the construction status before placing an item. When you place an item.Comparing SmartPlant P&ID with PDS: An Overview Setting Construction Status In PDS 2D. or Existing buttons on the Construction Status control. the default construction status is New. select the item in the drawing and change the status in the Properties window. and then set the status on the Placement tab. page 21 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 409 .

The designer places equipment. resolution can be time-consuming. consistency checking confirms that the created drawing agrees. routes lines between equipment. However. propagation checks for errors each time that the software populates the database. and the Consistency Check dialog box lists solutions to fix the errors. You can list the types of errors you want to detect. In SmartPlant P&ID. To check for errors in your design. or is consistent. SmartPlant P&ID continuously checks for design errors as you create the drawing. In the SmartPlant P&ID environment. However. The designer places the elements that compose the overall configuration of the design in a graphical mode. more so than the workflow associated with propagation. and it automatically reports in the graphical view on junctions that do not follow these rules. pinpointing the source of the inconsistency could require time. PDS 2D uses a process called propagation to verify the suitability of a design. according to settings in SmartPlant P&ID Rule Manager. and label items. places components on lines. SmartPlant P&ID uses predefined rules to establish relationships that verify the design. After the designer completes this work. PDS 2D uses propagation. Also. Propagation determines that a drawing is not ambiguous. because you do not receive a list of possible solutions. instead of waiting to check for errors until after the drawing is complete. For example.Comparing SmartPlant P&ID with PDS: An Overview Comparing Consistency Check to Propagation Consistency Check in SmartPlant P&ID serves the same purpose as propagation in PDS 2D. when you discover an error. Double-click an inconsistency in a Drawing view. In PDS 2D. and adds labels for accuracy. Available tools can help in the review of the report along with the drawing. the process populates the associated database if serious propagation errors do not exist. Also. Consistency Check starts when you place or modify an item. while SmartPlant P&ID uses consistency checking. route lines. with the design practices of the associated plant. tools or suggested error recoveries are not available. an inconsistency occurs if a designated material is connected to a different type of material. consistency checking occurs continuously as you place equipment. However. such as pipe and valve conflicts. Propagation produces a report with propagation exceptions. The software detects and reports the errors so you can correct them in the drawing. Consistency Check continuously blends into the software product. You must resolve them for an acceptable drawing. 410 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Errors occur when you violate the design practices for a plant. Consistency checking is an important function in producing a useful design.

page 319 • Review an Inconsistency. page 317 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 411 .Comparing SmartPlant P&ID with PDS: An Overview Related Topics • Reapply Placement Rules to Resolve an Inconsistency. page 322 • Resolve an Inconsistency.

which you can use to directly edit properties in the database by editing the properties of the label. and other items. labels play a different role than in PDS 2D. valves. SmartPlant P&ID supplies a pre-loaded set of symbols. Most labels show item properties.Comparing SmartPlant P&ID with PDS: An Overview Comparing Graphics and Text in PDS 2D and SmartPlant P&ID In PDS 2D. You can add and delete cells or place cells from a library into the design file. Then. tanks. which are stored in the database. page 184 412 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Plant administrators can create more symbols if needed. In PDS 2D. In SmartPlant P&ID. you propagate or write the information on the labels to the database. SmartPlant P&ID also provides "driving" labels. graphics are called catalog items." because they are updated as the property values of the item are updated. In SmartPlant P&ID. you can record text on a label. Related Topics • Place a Label from Catalog Explorer. see the SmartPlant Catalog Manager Help. These graphics include pumps. PDS 2D cells are grouped together in libraries. In SmartPlant P&ID. graphics are called cells. piping. and the software continuously writes this information to the database. For more information about creating symbols. at certain times. you add or edit properties information for each item in the Properties window. These labels are referred to as "driven.

Related Topics • Customize a Filter Tab for the Drawing View. The plant administrator defines project filters. You can even edit the individual properties of the filters. SmartPlant P&ID offers extensive flexibility in creating and editing filters. both 6-inch pipe and tanks over 5 feet in diameter are displayed. and you can combine them to view collective data sets. For example.Comparing SmartPlant P&ID with PDS: An Overview Using Filters Versus Levels PDS 2D uses levels to separate data types in the Drawing view. filters show certain parts of the drawing. The software automatically defines levels for the various parts of process systems. while each individual user defines personal filters. such as only the equipment or only the piping. Then. page 138 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 413 . In SmartPlant P&ID. SmartPlant P&ID filters fall into the following categories: • • Project filters Personal filters Project filters are stored in Project Folders. you can combine a filter that displays 6-inch pipe with a filter that displays tanks more than 5 feet in diameter. For more information about creating and editing filters. You can customize these levels. You can use filters along with rules to check for errors in certain filtered views. and you can combine filters. see SmartPlant Filter Manager Help. and personal filters are stored in My Folders.

a file name. annotations Dimensions. that locates a file. 2. A characteristic that all members of a class possess. A property or characteristic of a component. You measure angles in a clockwise or counterclockwise direction. Most databases represent an attribute by a column in a table. archive To copy a file to a specified storage location and then delete the file from the current location. for example.txt. angle key-in A number that you type to specify an active angle. append To add to the end of a file. Each property has an associated value that defines its current state. and so forth. text string. active placement point Coordinates that define the point where you place piping and instrumentation. beginning with the node name. 414 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . notes. numbers. alphanumeric Information in the form of letter. access Performing actions that are required to use the SmartPlant P&ID software. or reports that you place in a drawing to provide information or comments. angle Circular measurement of the intersection of two lines in degrees. symbols. and some special character and punctuation marks. attribute 1. angle bisector A line that divides an angle into two equal parts. \\MyPC\C:\temp\MyFile.Glossary Glossary A absolute path name Sequence of directories.

catalog A collection of catalog items. break label A graphic label placed at a point in a piping line at which any property can change value. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 415 . OR (either). bearing The acute horizontal angle of a line with respect to a reference line. category A grouping of items by description. and NOT (other than). y-. B batch A group of jobs to process on a computer at one time with the same program without user intervention. Boolean operator Syntax that defines logical relationships between expressions like AND (both). centerline Graphic representation of the central axis of an item. C cache A secure place of storage. and z-axis. character Data type that stores alphanumeric character data. Bill of Materials A detailed list of the items that you assemble. A set of filters can define the potential membership in a category.Glossary axis An imaginary line that defines the orientation of a system or item. which are blueprints or templates for creating an item within the model. branch point A point on a pipe run that separates piping segments for assignments with different segment parameters. A classification of items that share common values for specified properties. Most orientations use an x-.

commodity option A pre-defined exception to the default settings for a component definition in the Piping Job Specification. 416 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . and the database runs on the server. A component has database information associated with it. class Blueprint for creating an item. client In network operations. commodity item Standard component that you can find in a manufacturer catalog. concatenate To connect in a series. or select list. a node that accesses data or performs a function on the remote resource. to link or append. In this system. The class defines the properties and behaviors that an item can show. client/server database A database system in which the database engine and database applications reside on separate. that contains similar items. All network operations among two or more nodes establish a client/server relationship. component A catalog item that represents a part of the P&ID. concentric Having a common center or origin point with varying radii.Glossary check in Process of moving a file from a user location to a storage location and recording that location in the database. the processing power is split between the two CPUs. The workstation for the user is the client. usually a server. configuration Relative arrangement of parts or items. commodity code A code that you define that provides an index to material descriptions. collection An indexed group. intelligent computers that communicate with each other through a network.

Typical items in a data model are components. SmartPlant Data Dictionary Manager maintains this information. the origin of coordinate systems is 0. coordinate Location of a point along the x-. and other components to one another. cursor See pointer. y-. or use a cylindrical coordinate system to define points on a cylinder. consisting of database entries and select lists.Glossary connect point Active point item that is specially designated in a component.0. points are located by traversing the x-. y-. or z-axis. coordinates Ordered set of absolute or relative data values that specify a location in a coordinate system. a location for applying a relationship connectivity Linkage between items that relates because of their graphics. Other coordinate systems more easily express the coordinates of specific geometric entries. A connect point is a location at which you can connect lines. or delete. behavior of a connector relies on the two items that it connects. connector Item with multiple vertices. data dictionary The underlying data model of a plant. you can use a spherical coordinate system to define points on a sphere. The most common coordinate system is the rectangular coordinate system. Proper connectivity must exist to confirm valid data integrity. labels. Normally. data model Application items that populate a project. Also. For example. like a valve and a pipe run. coordinate system Geometric relation that denotes the location of points in the design cube. and labels. change. For example. D data Facts or raw material that you add. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 417 .0. context-sensitive help Display of help topics that are associated with a dialog box or command. lines. you can press F1 to learn about a dialog box. and z-axes.

or process these files. also called a drawing file.Glossary database Collection of files of comprehensive information that have predefined structure and organization. diameter A straight line passing through the origin of an arc or circle. Indicating the region. examples of devices are a tape drive. device Non-addressable component of a network. interpret. a closed shape exists. a specific program can communicate. database administrator The technical support person who assigns user IDs and data access permissions. along with an accompanying label that shows the property value. creates new databases. or floppy disk. disk drive. and monitors disk storage usage of the database and performance. a character or sequence of contiguous characters that mark the end of a string of characters. design database Database that contains the non-graphical data for the equipment and piping models. 418 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . ending at the points of intersection with that arc or circle. design session Elapsed time from when you open a design file until you close the design file. database table Part of the database consisting of rows and columns and containing information about the project and design elements. default Predetermined value of a parameter that the system or a program automatically supplies whenever the user does not specify a value. digits of accuracy Number of digits used after a decimal point to display the discharge dimensions. removes databases no longer in use. delimiter A separating mark or space. design file File containing graphics and text data. design-wide break A region of the drawing within which a single property value is defined for all the included components.

More colors are produced with loss of some detail. dithering Technique for achieving greater color resolution at the expense of spatial resolution. P&ID Graphics file that contains data about one unit. You can consider a drawing view like a window into a specified volume in the model. diversity Amount of deviation in airflow that a system encounters from the design conditions. driving label Graphics.Glossary directional Referring to items that depend on their orientations to directional flow for correct placement in a drawing. scaled view produced from the model graphics. directional items use the direction of the line in which you located them. or both with their own entities and properties that you place on the P&ID to define values for properties of the components and groups to which they apply. drawing. drawing file File in which you place items. difference in longitude. edge-edge model Model that represents connectivity entire by edges. also called a design file. drag To use the software functionality that attaches the pointer to an item so you can see the item move in dynamics. E easting Term used in plane surveying that describes an east. display-only annotation Feature that allows you to generate temporary annotation graphics for review without placing the graphics in a design file. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 419 . directory File or folder that stores the names of other files. Each drawing has a unique drawing number within the unit to which the drawing belongs. drawing view Specific. or positive. text.

such as a tray or nozzle. file specification Path name that instructs the software for the location of a file. such as nozzles and trays. the software automatically creates a group relationship between the equipment and the component.Glossary endpoint Data point that defines the end of a linear element. equipment group A single-name equipment body and any items within or attached to the body. the name should relate to the contents of the file. an instrument can belong only to one loop at a time. equipment components Items associated with pieces of equipment. F fences Temporary method of locating and grouping items that you need to change. field Interface component of a dialog box that displays information to you or allows you to type data to record. exit elevation Lowest downstream elevation point on the internal diameter of a pipe.that is. For easier identification. and assignment to unit. Examples of events are creation. file name Name that a user defines for an interactively created file. As a group. As you place equipment components. the components move along with the equipment. file Collection of logical records stored as a unit. event A status milestone that tracks the history of an item. exclusive database relationship Relationship that exists between any given instrument and the loop to which it belongs . name change. enumerated list See select list. 420 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .

or DIN. 2.Glossary filter Function that creates a subset of items. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 421 . fixed point A control point that usually is a locally known monument with known coordinates. a group number. grid Network of uniformly spaced horizontal and perpendicular lines that help to identify either 2-D or 3-D relationships.from which the software deduces the specific geometry of a commodity item. font Complete set and style of the characters and symbols of a typeface used for displaying text that you place in a drawing file. geometric industry standard A select-list property that identifies the source of the data . ISO. to reach a downstream point. This subset meets criteria that property values define. For SmartPlant P&ID. Icons that show the perpendicular or parallel relationships with other items in the drawing as you point over items in the drawing. group Set of components with physical boundaries and a single name . glyphs identify the relationships that you are creating.industry standard such as ANSI. glyphs 1. or company standard . See also relative path name. Icons attached to the pointer that provide feedback as you draw.that is. full path name Name of the entire path or directory hierarchy to a file. G gap Condition that exists when two lines intersect graphically on the P&ID but not physically in the plant. flow rate Quantity of fluid that flows per unit of time. flow time Required time for the flow. from the start of the piped system. including the filename.

horizontal angle Angle measured in the horizontal plane. refers to the relationships among groups. header First items of information in a file that precede any actual data. Horizontal angles are the basic measurements needed to determine bearings and azimuths. and labels. This property provides a method to represent a 3-D model when working in a 2-D drawing. or operating in a plane parallel to the horizon or to a base line. for grouping files or commands. hierarchical An ordered relationship from greatest to least.Glossary H handles Graphical indications that appear when you perform a valid change to an item. The header contains information on the structure and contents of the file. implied piping component Piping components that the software creates in the alphanumeric database. horizontal Parallel to. horizontal scale A scaling factor that exaggerates the horizontal scale as you draw graphics. or dependents. horizontal distance Distance between two points computed using only the northing and easting coordinates of the points. a symbol that graphically identifies a command or task. height property Distance between the base offset and the top of the item. 422 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . these components are not represented graphically. components. and subordinates. or roots. I icon A pictorial representation or image. hierarchy A classified structure with superiors. in the plane of.

a view in which the horizontal lines of an item are drawn at an angle to the horizontal and all verticals are projected at an angle from the base. isometric Relating to or concerning a drafting system characterized by three equal axes at right angles.Glossary import Process that transports or transfers data from one environment to another. or electrical switches. such as flow or temperature. instruments Devices that directly or indirectly measure or control a variable in a plant process. Two types of instruments exist: inline instruments and offline instruments. Instruments can be devices such as final control elements. integer A whole number with no fractional part. and other instrument components. instance A single allocation of an item class. such as butterfly valves and temperature regulator valves. In SmartPlant P&ID. instrument loops A group of one or more instruments or control functions arranged so that signals can pass from one function to the next for the purpose of measuring and controlling a process variable. inline Term used to refer to those piping or instrument components that you can insert in a piping segment. computing devices. you can create instrument loops containing any combination of inline and offline instruments. interference checking Process that identifies possible collisions or insufficient clearance between items in a drawing. inline instruments Components that you can insert into a piping segment. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 423 . such as orifice plates and flow controllers. input The data submitted to a computer for processing. import script File that the software uses to import or transfer data. Inline instruments include instrument valves.

a line route does not contain any branches. including vertices. layer A logical grouping of items on a drawing sheet. line route Collection of ordered line runs. item type Distinct objects that users can manipulate in SmartPlant P&ID. You can have several layers in a drawing sheet. such as a file in a catalog.that is. however. PDS 2D Intelligent graphics and text that identify a group or component. components. J justification Point of orientation for text placement. gaps.Glossary item Unit of storage within a larger unit. gaps. and safety classes. connect to the item. to which you can snap in the drawing . line style Collection of formats or properties that you name and store as a group to apply as a style of a line. such as equipment. and components that all share the same attribution. events. and properties. a single member in the P&ID. label. A line route contains line runs. K key Property or column in a table that is the access vehicle to individual rows of the table. keypoint Point on an item. L label A graphic representation that reflects the status or condition of an associated item. Each label is an entity with properties and provides the primary means of defining property values in the P&ID task. 424 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . line string A series of connected line segments.

and so forth. When you run the macro. Visual Basic. the software performs the actions or runs the commands. also called a Bill of Materials. linear Having a single dimension. Nominal Piping Diameter (NPD) The approximate diameter of a pipe. You can create the macros in Visual Basic or other OLE-aware programming applications. macro A sequence of actions or commands that can be named and stored. makeup air Air brought into a space from the outside to replace exhausted air.Glossary line width Thickness of a displayed item. mirror To create the reverse image of a display set through a plane or around a defined axis. The term has a dual meaning: network can refer to the devices that connect the system. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 425 . mirror handle Reflects an image about the horizontal and vertical axes. Visual C++ Delphi. N network Interconnection of host computers and workstations that allows them to share data and control. model A representation of graphics or a schema. Some of the OLE-aware programming applications are VBA. Point to the manipulation handle on upper corner of an item to display the mirror handle. or network can refer to the connected system. nozzle A special equipment item that contains the connection point to piping. collection of all items and their relationships to create a coherent description of a process plant. northing Term used to describe a north coordinate location in the plant coordinate system. a line. M MTO Material take-off.

regardless of the method or location that you used for placement. operator The part of the Structured Query Language (SQL) syntax that defines relationships between data. and z-axes intersect. orientation by user. You cannot change the orientation at placement time. y-. The default orientation of this item is identical to items that the software orients. 426 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . See also orientation by system. if you placed the item in a vertical line. origin In coordinate geometry. offline Term that refers to those instrument components that are not inserted in a pipe run. and system functions. the software automatically rotates the item 90 degrees counterclockwise from the orientation in which you created it. level gauges. and orientation fixed. Examples are equal to and greater than. See also orientation by system and orientation by user. You can change the default orientation at placement time. the point where the x-. if you place the items in free space or in a horizontal line. For example.Glossary O occurrence A row within a relational database table. such as digital control stations (DCS) or computers. these components are the instruments that monitor and control inline instruments. Offline instruments include temperature regulators. orientation by user A type of orientation in which you define the orientation of an item when you place it. Typically. orientation by system A type of orientation in which the software places items in the same orientation that you created them. orientation Position of items in the design plane relative to the origin. See also orientation by user. offline instruments Components that you do not insert into a piping segment. Oracle A relational database management system. orientation fixed A type of orientation in which the software places items in the same orientation in which you created them. See also orientation by system and orientation fixed.

the collection of pipe runs from all drawings in a project whose project-defined line property values are identical. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 427 . peak flow Maximum flow rate of water through a specific size pipe. and instrumentation. See also absolute path name and relative path name. parametric item Item that contains geometry constrained together using relationships. such as process conditions for temperatures and pressures. branch points and gap components. path name Sequence of directories leading to a file. P PFD Process Flow Diagram. The drawing relates critical processrelated information. with driving dimensions that are defined as adjustable parameters. a contiguous set of pipe run segments separated only by inline components. parameter A property with a value that determines the characteristics or behavior of an item. The P&ID includes three primary groups of items: equipment. piping. pipe run A line run that has piping properties. A pipe run segment may have identical properties as a pipe run from which it branches but is not considered part of the pipe run. It does not branch or contain spaces between components. pipeline Set of connected piping segments and their associated piping items. A pipe run has a beginning and an end. a drawing that serves as a start for a P&ID. P&ID See Piping and Instrumentation Diagram. Also. and identifies physical components in the plant. Piping and Instrumentation Diagram (P&ID) Primary drawing for maintaining a plant. The P&ID is the basis for both the construction of the physical plant and further specification of instrumentation components.Glossary orthogonal view A view that is a projection of the drawing onto a plane along lines that are orthogonal to the plane. Also.

a representation of the piping that transfers process fluid. primitive commands The most basic graphic command such as placing a line or placing a circle. piping components are connected with multiple line segments. as drawn through the anchor point. items with the same line number. position angle Defines the angle between the horizontal axis. that you place by a primitive command. and the rotate handle. process line Ordered collection of connectors and inline components with an equal set of core properties .for example. A network terminates at a nozzle. a drawing that serves as a start for a P&ID. Piping components include valves. and safety components. utility connector. reducers. flanges. 428 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Piping Materials Class (PMC) Classification of components by service or specification . or one-point piping component . In drawings. One company can have several plants located at different geographical locations. strainers. piping segment A line string with two or more vertices that defines the centerline geometry of the pipe run and contains the non-graphic data associated with the pipe run. primitive items An item. plant A group of facilities and equipment that performs one or more material processing functions within a given geographical area. pointer On-screen tool that allows you to indicate an item or area. PFD Process Flow Diagram. such as a line or circle. a pipe cap.Glossary piping components Graphic elements that represent processes or functions within a particular piping segment. a 150-pound carbon steel specification. piping network Series of connected pipe runs and inline components. off-page connector.typically.for example. Specifically.

R RAD 2D Draft Platform 2D graphic platform developed from the product core functionality of SmartSketch. relationship A condition that exists between items. and width. commodity libraries. graphics symbology. label descriptions. Other properties stored with the valve symbol can include the manufacturer. report formats. The properties of an item can include display properties and properties stored with the item. You can establish relationships as you place new items or between items already on the drawing sheet. property A unique characteristic of an object. density.Glossary process point A tool that defines the operating conditions at a particular place during a process. or document. Term used for convenient grouping of either all or part of the items that constitute a plant. For example. job specifications. Properties stored with the valve symbol are displayed in the Properties window when the valve symbol is selected. A project is not necessarily specific to an application. A directory file created in an application environment that contains design files and subprojects. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 429 . project 1. item. reference file A drawing file attached to another drawing file for reviewing reference. or material. a graphic representation attached to a drawing view. and other information of a similar theme. the properties of a valve symbol can include display properties such as color. Examples include defining temperature. and flow rate. cost. projection lines Witness lines. symbol. the project may contain design files from multiple applications. probably in separate geographical locations and having limited communication among them. 2. catalog data of vendors. lines extending from the boundaries of an item and between which dimensioning data for the area marked by the projection lines is placed. This connection indicates that some form of communication of behavior or state occurs. reference data A collection of information containing facts relative to industry design codes. Several projects can be under design at one time. line style.

report template An online outline for a new report that you need to define.Glossary relative mode A placement mode in which symbols respond to their orientation definition at creation time. rotation angle Defines the angle of change between the old and new positions of a rotated element. revision triangle A numbered triangle placed in the P&ID to indicate the drawing revision when the change occurred. and to the orientation of any graphic item to which they are attached at placement time. An item is required if the Tag Required Flag property is set to True for the item in the Properties window of Catalog Manager. row A unit of related information in a table. See also absolute path name and path name. If you delete a required item from a drawing. rule Standard mechanism for creating relationships. required item Item that the plant model needs. revision cloud A set or arcs used to enclose changes that have occurred since the last revision. orientation by system or orientation by user. but much more difficult to predict. rotate handle Turns a selected item around its anchor point. relative path name Sequence of directories leading from the current directory to a particular file. You can select a user-level or a project-level template to create a new report template. whether they are defined in the P&ID reference data as orientation fixed. A rule defines a valid context for two items to communicate their behavior or state. one collection of column values for a table. Point to the manipulation handle on either side of an item to display the rotate handle. it appears in the stockpile for later placement. 430 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . rubberbanding Animation dynamic that allows you to specify the position of a data point while the item changes as you move the pointer. Relative placement mode is more flexible then absolute.

segment Contiguous piping and piping components between two points in the network at which properties change value. Scale Handle Changes the size of a selected drawing item. the node that maintains common data or performs a common task that clients need. Specifically. signal run A line run with signal properties. server In network operations. and by the terminal ends of piping lines. Segments terminate by property break labels. and piping. schematic file Schematic drawing or diagram of a particular item in the plant. search criteria Set of values used to scan a database or object library. items that share the same line number. 2. off-pace and utility connectors. inline instruments. See also pipe run.Glossary S scale To enlarge or reduce the size of a defined item. select set A group of more than one drawing item. and inline components with an equal set of core properties: typically. a representation of the wiring used for transferring electrical or software signals. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 431 . An ordered collection of connectors. nozzles. A collection of signal runs from all drawings in a project whose project-defined line property values are identical. branches. modifying only the dimensions but not the ratio among the pieces. schema Description of the overall structure of the rulebase or database. 3. Intelligent line strings that connect offline instruments. All network operations between two or more nodes establish a client/server relationship. Point to the manipulation handle on any corner of the item to display the scale handle. signal lines 1.

line. Display style of an item. modifying. symbol name Descriptive phrase that names a symbol that resides in a folder. The appearance of geometry and annotations on the drawing sheet. line weight. displaying items that you have not yet placed in the graphic model. including color. and so forth. dimension. For example. symbology provides graphical clarity to a drawing by differentiating among various items by their appearance. surface of revolution Surface formed by the revolution of a curve about an axis in its plane. Standard Query Language (SQL) Language developed by IBM for creating. 432 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . The style types include: fill. style. When you apply a style to a selected item. style 1. and width. source file Uncompiled version of a parametric definition or other data table. symbology 1. 2. and text. the font used in a text box. and querying relational databases. symbol. Symbology refers to the color. A value of 0 degrees allows free rotation. 2. graphic Permanent association of items that you can store and place as a group but cannot manipulate as individual items. pattern. and style associated with items in a particular filter. relative to the anchor point of the item. specific energy Depth of flow plus velocity head. A collection of formats or properties that you name and store as a group. Usually. color and line weight of an element.Glossary slider Interface component of a dialog box that displays values along a range. stockpile View of the data model. the software applies all the formats or properties in the style to the element. In Options Manager. step angle Specifies the increment of rotation for a selected item. See also neutral file. The default Step Angle is 0 degrees. text libraries contain source files.

either you can enter this data or the software determines the value. task Grouping of related design activities.Glossary T table Collection of data for quick reference. either stored in sequential locations in memory or printed as an array of rows and columns of data items of the same type. used as a starting point or blueprint for a particular application so that the format does not have to be recreated each time it is used. The identifying number of the unit is unique within the project and within the plant. time stamping Process that prompts the software to generate a record when you change an property. tabular data Non-graphic. values Data stored in a property. but not all. deletions. utility Program that provides a commonly used service. In SmartPlant Engineering Manager. Same as username. Most companies. a template serves as an outline or blueprint for you to create a new drawing. data dictionaries or other database schemas. user name Name that provides access to an account on the system. U unit Group of parts of the schematic and individual worlds of a plant that together perform a given process function. and changes that you request during job posting activities. a file used to create roles. template A document or file having a preset format. a file used to create a drawing with a set of default parameters. alphanumeric information. transaction Nongraphic record of any additions. V validation program User program that verifies data integrity in the database. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 433 . use the concept of unit. In SmartPlant P&ID.

The visual contents of a window displaying an aspect of the application model. also called Z scale or Z factor. work session All operations performed in the period between opening and closing a database partition of the task. 434 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . W width Line thickness of a displayed item. z) represents a vector. vertical Located at a right angle to the plane of a supporting surface. You can manipulate vectors geometrically. vector A quantity that has both magnitude and direction. vertical angle Angle above or below a horizontal plane through the line of sight. and the measured angle. y. witness lines Dimensioning items that extend from the dimension points to the dimension line. constitute a unit. The format that you type for vertical angles is the occupied point. vertical scale Scaling factor that exaggerates the vertical scale of graphics when you draw. A work session is not limited to worth in the drawing file. when considered as a whole. the foresight point.Glossary variable Quantity that can assume any one of a set of values. generally represented as a line. view Defined area of vision on a screen or window. work area Individual parts of a single process function that. workflow Method of selecting processes and performing tasks. A coordinate triple (x. window A control in the software that is the physical outline that contains a view.

working units can be defined in terms of feet and inches. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 435 . For example.Glossary working units Real-world units that you can group into the design plane.

105 accessing Help. 285 assigning insulation specifications. 172. 343 shortcut buttons. 67. 262. 261 item tags. 95 filter tabs. 140 anchor point rotating. 322 approved warnings. 208 axes mirror. 161 piping specifications. 80 catalog items. 280 lines. 173 reports. 260. 28. 267. 287 saving. 95 items. 80 stockpile items. 121. 175 items. 169. 211 applying rules. 212 rectangular. 175. 210 placing. 281 Save As. 184 aligning labels. 131. 64 options. 76 actuators aligning. 172.Index Index AABBCC codes assigning. 138. 399. 113 AutoCAD exporting. 261 piping specifications. 329 assemblies creating. 297 multi-sided. 189 alter segment. 158 Alter Segment routing lines. 242 backgrounds customizing. 173 tasks to drawings. 60 tabular views. 88 attaching commands. 269 lines. 60 autogapping activate. 159 altering segment. 277 shortcut buttons. 265. 94. 182. 18 borders displaying. 212 arranging windows. 80 author documents. 27 affixing labels. 179 insulation specifications. 237 instruments. 126 OLE objects. 171. 241. 284. 30 embedding. 242 adding buttons. 247. 286 explained. 122 linking. 70 commands. 161 menus. 313. 400 associating plant groups. 111 Web Client. 329 tasks. 280 objects. 321. 169 access control. 141 placing. 260. 94. 269 using. 319 approving warnings. 122 sizes. 125 autofilter Engineering Data Editor. 102. 119 bounding box 436 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . 178. 12 recent drawings. 238 annotations labels. 267. 171. 132. 396 toolbars. 96 pipe runs. 66. 131 filters. 61 AutoFilter customizing. 317 area breaks claiming. 395. 162 alternate symbology. 270 automation item tag formats. 323. 133. 36 Aspen Zyqad importing. 316. 381 activating symbol toolbars. 169.

196. 258 relationship properties. 197 branches connecting. 412 CGM file format. 124 change details. 84. 76 command buttons. 319. 283 pipe runs. 156. 197. 78 navigating. 281. 36 case data. 198 Offset Distance property. 90 process. 197 removing items. 341. 75 cloning. 79. 396. 83. 76 catalog nodes. 273 cells graphic. 67 browsing for catalogs. 90 brief properties pasting. 88 bulk properties copying. 191 breaking lines. 325 unit of measure. 84. 368 pipe runs. 82 custom catalogs. 69 buttons. 54 tasks. 198 OPCs. 66 shortcut buttons. 238. 86. 165. 82 opening. 89 buttons adding. 78 page setups. 250 inserting objects. 165. 90 Catalog Explorer add to stockpile. 48. 212 labels. 282 list views. 246 deleting items. 398. 254. 69. 348 select set properties. 74 displaying. 78 catalog items cloning. 68. 166 links. 28. 48. 338. 412 symbols. 78. 281. 397. 87. 82 catalog items. 157 properties. 217. 79. 77. 256 branching lines. 69 bulk properties. 81. 82 toolbars. 72 overview. 182. 141 placing items. 216. 54. 89 browsing for catalogs. 82 finding items. 72 deleting items. 278 mirror items. 283 items. 80 View menu. 187. 65. 202 placing labels. 304 changing embedded objects. 75 deleting nodes. 33 checking inconsistencies. 399 view properties. 82 File menu. 72. 282 items. 187. 157 linked objects. 68. 276 links. 70 list view. 199 leader lines. 83 report templates. 156. 70. 304 change groups. 277 labels. 245 symbol properties. 14 Navigation menu. 283 catalogs cells and graphics. 73 closing. 83. 345. 73 cloning items. 134 cascading windows. 255 selecting. 114 update symbols. 82 views. 73 Catalog Manager Cut command. 197 brief properties. 83 sources. 248 lines. 188. 412 checking paths. 276. 80. 282 table properties. 65. 86 case data control. 199 linking objects. 66 displaying buttons. 84. 162 break labels.Index labels. 215. 68. 80 Catalog Explorer. 166 breaks area. 74. 94 calendar using. 410 child SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 437 .

188 piping. 166 to databases. 341 compound filters. 9 contents of reports. 205 consistency checking. 296 lines. 390 validating properties. 293 Compare and Refresh column headings. 297 claim mode. 289. 135. 301. 406 consulting services. 43 gaps. 238. 410 consistency check PDS 2D propagation. 207. 305 drawings. 381 connectors deleting. 291. 76 drawings. 137 configuration PickQuick tool. 21 Colors tab Options dialog box. 306 Engineering Data Editor. 73 catalog items. 293 items. 299 TEF. 18. 109 to TEF. 173 compare. 44. 409 construction status placed items. 297 area breaks. 292. 95 comments on documentation. 308. 256 connecting items. 293 releasing claims. 293. 206 open partner drawing. 124 P&IDs. 293. 293 and deleting. 19 setting. 309 versions. 308. 147 Clipboard copying. 406 constraints databases. 20 storing. 146 tool. 147. 105. 156. 305. 216 stockpile items. 303 exclusive. 250. 43. 293. 166 pipe runs. 309 options. 302. 289. 246 Paste an Item. 149 tools. 352 continuation 438 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . 289. 308 Compare and Refresh dialog. 148 connected items. 316. 310 version. 9 commodity codes adding. 293 shared. 241. 44. 42. 293. 313. 291. 301. 207 opening partner. 247 cloning Catalog Explorer. 295 multiple representations. 82 customizing. 251 moving. 202 stockpile. 300 To Do List. 118 code lists. 315. 300. 300 to do list. 304. 244 rotating using handles. 167 composite formats. 293. 297 related items. 280 pasting items. 289. 254. 45. 45. 154 claim modes. 251 labels. 298 and replacing items. 253 Cut command. 289. 117 SmartPlant P&ID. 109 to plant structures. 306 example. 28 inserting. 204. 32. 172 changing. 299 clearing selections. 143 construction status. 308. 304. 68. 32. 17 commands buttons. 293. 293. 292. 43. 247 pasting. 297 labels. 255 lines. 293 status. 309 component handles. 105. 238 components inline. 32. 303 access. 407 colors customizing. 206 placing. 305. 310 comparing. 297 invalid claims. 289.Index representations. 293. 293 claiming. 73 closing Catalog Explorer.

206 continuation drawings how to. 131 filters. 309 display options. 21 instrument loops. 17 display properties. 28. 273 inline component values. 254 labels. 284. 344. 91. 19. 343. 255. 81. 88. 17 setting. 21 buttons. 331. 90. 77. 91 cutting equipment components. 175 items. 175 properties. 254 copyrights software. 105. 53 deleting. 352. 212 assemblies. 409 Properties window. 131. 80. 68 compound filters. 102 drawing templates. 129 graphical operations. 95 with macros. 189 mirrored items. 396 toolbars. 340. 164 report contents. 216 inconsistencies. 138 formats. 141 packages. 387. 95 filter tabs. 133. 308. 92. 341. 217 error conditions. 360 report items. 93. 141 opening. 409 restoring. 395. 121. 137 custom catalogs. 322 using the select tool. 43. 72 documents. 351. 208 menus. 56. 96 Open dialog box.Index drawings. 92. 247 files. 389 correlations removing. 88. 207 copying bulk properties. 95. 64 toolbars. 13 correcting actions. 89 heat tracing. 18. 102. 338. 137. 93. 91 colors. 334. 89. 107. 293 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 439 . 83. 52. 27. 356. 130. 174 list views. 254. 120. 250 OPCs. 89 files. 340. 349. 138. 96 deferring tasks. 80 tables. 47. 90 bulk properties. 92. 321. 352 table layouts. 17 toolbars. 92 custom catalogs. 132. 237 item tags. 21 compare options. 245. 354. 346. 83. 91. 341 select sets. 29. 335. 82. 353. 357 reports. 136. 240 pipe run values. 119. 350 and claiming. 324 database connecting to. 91. 78. 86. 84 customizing appearance. 114 defaults construction status. 331. 102 filter tabs. 109 databases constraints. 245. 331. 94. 93. 46 tasks. 354. 213 report templates. 27. 337. 110 placement. 357 report template contents. 402 defining brief properties. 59. 14 data files importing. 354 report templates. 50. 21. 91 reports. 122 drawings. 246 Data Dictionary Manager customized properties. 253. 9 customization Options dialog box. 135. 35. 143 dates defining. 389 creating area breaks. 28 catalog nodes. 273 items. 96 P&IDs. 72 customer support. 30 environments. 134 decimal places. 28. 21. 356. 26. 256 shortcut buttons. 246. 78 menus. 401. 410 correlating items. 71. 286 buttons. 127. 331 tabular views. 91 Catalog Explorer.

207 creating. 104. 305. 15 Drawing Manager change drawing name. 90 buttons. 303 claims. 41. 197. 198 display filters. 207. 335 reports toolbar. 248. 86. 90 Catalog Explorer. 367 templates. 15. 119. 365 borders. 261 deselecting items. 363. 69 document properties. 35 new. 248 report templates. 21. 389 from model. 66 catalog items. 17 stockpile. 203 properties. 251 inline components. 64 distances offset. 246. 111 440 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . 94. 77 claim status. 284 catalog items. 14. 251 instruments. 259 OPCs. 30. 130 displaying about SmartPlant P&ID. 382. 249. 84. 30. 35 opening. 35 toolbars. 76 table views. 85. 147 Design window. 110 symbol toolbars. 180 items. 26 using zoom. 198 document properties. 115 Engineering Data Editor. 250. 403 views. 22. 34 Details command. 64 filters. 207. 351 select sets. 75 catalog nodes. 81 stockpile items. 42. 11 print options. 251 lines. 121. 110 printing. 48 tables. 13 inconsistencies. 131 properties. 122 views. 100 OPCs. 251 correlations. 112 recent. 86. 121 drawings comparing. 102. 207. 130 overview. 98. 65. 304. 207. 78 diagonal mode. 63 status bar. 29. 107. 41 subnodes. 214 templates. 32. 87. 251. 309 in use. 102 Engineering Framework. 13 as printed. 331. 130 using filters. 246. 57 descriptions adding. 371 filters. 402. 89 properties. 34 new views. 82 case data. 30. 350. 314 labels. 254 drawing revision clouds. 251 model orphan items. 367 properties. 30 leader lines. 108. 305. 301. 74. 28. 385. 218. 302. 95 connectors. 24 windows. 102 history. 99. 112. 105. 190 notes. 31 Help.Index assembly items. 30 nulls. 32 customizing. 245. 115 documentation comments. 309 continuation. 348 settings. 26 displays customizing. 9 documents retrieving. 45. 386 dragging items. 162 Digital Print Room driver. 250 shortcut buttons. 23. 304. 106. 81. 30 different symbols. 263 tabular views. 30 tabular views. 62. 17. 30 brief properties. 333. 361 Disable Flip Text labels. 80. 308. 62 grids. 89 reports. 57 tasks. 28. 74 commands. 59. 250.

35. 386 retrieving files. 118. 254 editing drawing templates. 261 items. 43 removing views. 45. 129 errors checking. 353. 391. 313 resolving inconsistencies. 41 table layouts. 87. 68 P&IDs. 337. 408 placing. 249 error conditions. 46 tasks. 375. 317. 153 erasing items. 258 properties of pipe runs. 38 filters. 54. 122 documents. 220. 237 insulation specifications. 387. 260. 188 duplicating items. 121. 395. 282 pipe run properties. 55. 47 pasting. 34. 43 editing items. 41 editing. 263 Stockpile. 102. 44 shortcut menu. 267. 356. 354. 350. 129 recreating errors. 276. 101 tasks. 217 labels. 345. 399 embedding borders. 349. 111 exiting Catalog Explorer. 395 assigning tasks. 83 report templates. 385 running a task. 381 adding tasks. 278 URLs. 394. 38 tabular views. 34 displaying. 380 refresh. 122 drawings. 20. 341. 34. 97. 405 reporting. 398 creating tasks. 152 groups. 305 saving. 371 zooming. 392. 402 deleting tasks. 396. 276. 396. 43. 87. 221 relationship properties. 396. 129 refreshing. 397. 394 entering free text. 276 items. 124. 319 Excel. 127. 400 To Do List. 214 embedded objects. 216. 40. 282 table items. 400 Browser. 389 correlations. 15 display. 47 views. 404 refreshing. 134. 331 importing. 275. 43 defining. 273 Engineering Data Editor. 398 publishing. 221 properties. 51. 400. 401. 346. 120 views. 381 correlating items. 273. 280 objects. 401 existing drawings. 118 exploring SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 441 . 281. 398. 127. 87 equipment components. 329 executing macros. 34. 379. 399. 119. 402 using. 83 sources. 276 links. 40 autofilter. 403. 273 editing. 48 copying. 389 creating properties. 345 select set properties. 378. 357 reports. 131. 125 templates. 403 modifying properties. 397. 376. 404 retrieving documents. 282 filters. 129 consistency checking. 382. 277. 397 opening drawings. 273 images. 57 selecting items. 338.Index recreating. 373. 396 deferring tasks. 46 table views. 50 table properties. 117 SmartPlant P&ID. 181. 152. 181 linked objects. 377. 60 caption. 390. 220. 39 stockpiles. 394 properties. 282 hyperlinks. 127. 316 conditions. 58 Engineering Framework accessing Web. 348. 84. 35 driving labels.

403 modifying properties. 131. 377. 24. 270 lines. 329 fabrication categories. 401. 379. 404 refreshing. 400 To Do List. 376. 379. 138. 394 freezing panes. 29 filtering. 226. 397 opening drawings. 377 checking paths. 382. 25 fixed format. 340. 137. 335 reports. 379. 387. 375. 405 reporting. 237 customizing. 385 running a task. 136. 390. 131 displays. 381 adding tasks. 64. 385 retrieving documents. 371 zooming. 341 report templates. 338. 225. 281 stockpile items. 234. 340 flow arrows. 54 tabular views. 381 Framework accessing Web. 69 documents to publish. 375. 380 drawing items. 396. 376. 356 rules. 52. 403. 133. 373. 234 replacing. 269 Gap Now. 380 retrieving. 396. 136. 389 correlations. 340. 361 formats fixed. 139. 394 properties. 69. 132 tables. 69 exporting drawings.Index elsewhere. 375. 47 Filter Manager Add Filter command. 91 defining. 402 using. 21 Filter tab. 378. 169 fields reports. 391. 352. 135. 395. 352 files. 373. 29. 392. 60. 235 fitting views. 402 deleting tasks. 396 deferring tasks. 60 filters autofilter. 51. 381 correlating items. 46. 226. 343. 341 Foundation SmartPlant. 377. 225. 283 manipulating. 70 catalogs. 173 fabrication categories assigning. 64 finding catalog items. 22 stockpile. 201 fluids code values. 61 compound. 172 relationships. 131 Design window. 138 Paste. 131 tabular views. 386 Files tab Options dialog box. 386 retrieving files. 126 objects. 398 publishing. 273 opening. 131 Filter tab customize. 378. 15 definition. 140 finding items. 226. 138. 229. 231. 64 from and to data reports. 380 refresh. 357 gapping AutoGap. 376. 398 creating tasks. 234. 228. 215 fonts printing. 399. 346 reports. 229. 136 properties. 186. 400 Browser. 139 Properties. 132. 395 assigning tasks. 378. 110. 137 creating. 130 drawings. 230 new. 377. 228. 47. 404 Retrieve command. 17 report templates. 227. 382. 197 connectors. 354. 394. 413 display. 130 setting. 131. 389 creating properties. 397. 258 reports. 267. 130 tab. 191. 194. 104 publishing to TEF. 385. 237 inconsistencies. 269 442 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . 68. 230. 373.

78 large. 33 snapping. 244 mirror. 267. 280 lines. 304. 273 images. 335. 315 resolving. 178. 31 tabs. 333. 226. 13 support. 410 display. 324 drawings. 322 inconsistency indicators. 262. 265. 18 component. 31 displaying. 17 generating item tags. 177 height printing. 321. 240. 323. 12 programming. 18 hints consistency check. 324. 30. 161 objects. 31 placing. 340 reports. 412 grids densities. 319.Index manually. 95 documents. 275. 175. 144 using. 305 hyperlinks adding. 247. 261 heat tracing inline instrument. 12 World Wide Web. 268 pumps. 30. 150 grouping equipment. 273 inserting. 277. 238 rotate. 268 inconsistencies checking. 151 spacing. 358. 163 tools. 270 General tab. 208 reports. 265. 323 pipe runs. 248 vertex. 78 displaying small. 314 finding. 276 inserting. 328 items. 17. 156 headers defining for reports. 273. 325 stream data. 30 indices. 359. 276. 238. 341 graphics cells. 234 inconsistency indicators. 273 hyperlinks. 94. 334. 179 items. 329 using reports. 20. 88 handles colors. 141 properties. 370 Help accessing. 270 using. 13 hiding toolbars. 331. 242 parametric. 67. 316 errors. 325. 244 scale. 276 instruments into loops. 324 overview. 273 from reports. 313 histories. 316 correcting. 28 commands. 241. 238. 216 displaying. 31 styles. 164. 268 SmartSketch files. 408 groups equipment. 175 inserting buttons. 150 properties. 351. 31. 324 from SmartSketch. 313 overview. 239 selecting items. 32. 278 icons customizing. 338. 329 log. 238. 12 user's guides. 238. 78 display. 276 importing data. 325 files. 112 General tab Options dialog box. 278 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 443 . 175 offline instruments. 360 heat tracing. 317 inline components and validation. 259 defining. 26 highlights colors. 275. 77 images embedding. 31 views. 152 plants. 157.

32. 300. 30 driven. 198 title blocks. 187 placements. 265 offline. 141 invalid claims. 181. 46 setting. 194. 260 Insulation Manager overview. 338. 157. 256 correlating. 161. 44. 201 descriptions. 189 displaying. 125 exporting. 406 using filters. 197 types of terminators. 267. 201. 198. 198 one-point placements. 191. 233 selecting. 161 viewing items. 340. 341 reports. 199 displaying. 289. 182. 196 moving. 48 Page Setup. 197 terminator types. 184. 190 placing. 164. 182. 191. 300. 369 report templates. 291. 338 saving. 301. 182 placement. 180 loops. 11 integration Aspen Zyqad. 197 Catalog Manager. 125 PDS 2D. 50 options. 42 implied. 30 Installation Guide overview. 188. 175. 197 copying. 196. 11 instruments inline. 80 stockpile items. 182. 262 revisions. 186. 259. 190. 273 vertices. 189 annotations. 174 loop. 199 targeting. 197. 32. 175. 188 placing. 195. 188 types. 389 deleting. 303 connected. 197 item types. 198 offset source. 389 replacing. 194. 197 components. 198 flow arrows. 190 labels. 182. 156. 293. 186. 211 properties. 166 pipe runs. 254. 412 fitting text. 186. 196 rotatable. 329 Internet viewing drawings. 302. 303 item tags. 47. 198 modifying. 199 aligning. 188. 13 levels exporting. 255. 329 using Aspen Zyqad. 293 removing correlations. 54 leader lines connectors. 186 legal notices. 208 validation. 200 updating. 44 joining lines. 387. 302. 182. 178. 182. 292. 199 mirrorable.Index pipe runs. 302 generating. 177 properties. 291. 156. 197 leader lines. 186 OPCs. 262 insulation heat tracing. 199 flipped text. 184. 179. 44. 45. 174. 166 labels. 161 shortcut buttons. 178. 51. 67 URLs. 126 MicroStation. 261 specifications. 45. 370 layers AutoCAD. 197 two-point placements. 126 layouts default. 191. 188. 179. 191. 200 text display. 22 tables. 258 offset distance. 190 landscape printing. 182. 208 items claiming. 329 with Aspen Zyqad. 412 driving. 292. 413 libraries 444 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . 301. 124 intranet bypassing. 161. 202 piping. 199 property breaks. 188. 191. 186. 53. 232. 323 importing. 210 breaks. 175. 165. 182.

157. 281 links breaking. 52 Match All filters. 273 lines. 93. 83 report templates. 241 modeler displaying windows. 256 starting. 135 maximum units. 190 lines. 95. 65. 100 modifying claimed items. 96 shortcuts. 98. 218. 345 select set properties. 45. 217. 160. 240. 258. 282 table properties. 328 mirror axes. 221 views. 272 linking assemblies. 407 views. 207. 272 line settings updating. 87. 91. 97. 161. 271 lines branching. 281 editing. 158. 159. 54. 96 default. 77 tags. 52 Match Any filters. 131 shortcut buttons. 302. 15 models orphan items. 248. 68 inconsistencies. 160. 238. 220 selecting. 145. 44. 284 borders. 357. 91 executing. 265 links. 281 pipe runs. 255. 165 deleting. 282 properties. 162 routing ribbon. 360 Match all defining filters. 287 equipment. 238. 156 weight and color. 198. 125 migration rules. 165. 121. 300. 92 customizing. 180 macros adding. 132 items. 96 restoring. 13 line routing ribbon. 226 loops instrument. 166 objects. 351. 83 sources. 240. 242 handles. 101 making buttons. 271. 15 MicroStation exporting. 25 mapping attributes. 153 items. 325 SmartSketch. 80 manipulating assemblies. 156. 216. 281. 338. 92. 146. 166 routing. 78 lists select.Index cells. 135 Match any defining filters. 159 update settings. 179. 241 items. 276. 412 licenses notices. 242 items. 219. 202 pipe runs. 78 locating catalog items. 281 Save As. 145. 278. 242 mirroring axes. 166 properties. 99. 119. 341. 175. 282 list views. 221 OPCs. 241. 265 stockpile. 169 menus creating. 238 leader lines. 28 filter tabs. 281 files. 174. 54 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 445 . 102. 283 changing. 162 breaking. 254. 282 filters. 251 gapping. 122 changing. 163 joining. 301. 292. 166 updating. 325 migrator importing. 265 relationship properties. 126 OLE objects. 25 windows. 303 embedded objects. 178. 84.

220. 72 renaming. 110. 223 multiple drawings printing. 343. 215. 156. 14 rename. 190 lines. 408 items. 207. 153 null property value. 79 networks connecting. 186 properties. 169 defining. 202 off-page connectors.Index tabular views. 273 insert an object. 216. 108. 218. 108. 104. 344 toolbars. 106. 182 one-point placement. 223 stockpile items. 121 features. 156. 97. 216 window. 184 labels. 201 OLE files. 206 placing. 136 report items. 186 how to. 75 nominal diameters assigning. 331 report templates. 138 report items. 46 tasks. 27 views. 51 templates. 204 storing partner. 188. 107. 202. 154 naming catalog nodes. 177 off-page connectors. 206. 396. 120 toolbars. 186 labels. 343 tables. 136. 12 macros. 222 moving partners. 105. 222. 381 options codes. 12 Web Client. 42. 184. 75 compound filters. 46 user's guides. 222 pipe runs. 101 new drawings. 261 nozzles placing internally. 217. 72 continuation drawings. 205. 105. 220. 216. 367 multiple representations child and parent. 137 drawings. 104 Help. 219. 204. 121 plant structures. 223. 35. 27 Navigation Catalog Explorer. 137 drawing views. 102. 167 select sets. 187. 206 opening Catalog Explorer. 205. 34 nodes Catalog Explorer. 255 creating. 105. 265 to another drawing. 12 filters. 30 properties. 398. 221 OPCs. 111. 186. 69 tables. 399 title blocks. 109 drawing views. 206. 251 matching OPC label. 35 drawings. 205 open partner drawing. 111 symbol set. 207 databases. 201. 182 moving. 394 files. 184. 184. 204 properties. 206. 195 OPCs deleting. 263. 198 source. 238. 204 equipment. 204. 353 report templates. 207 opening partner OPC. 265. 35. 109 recent drawings. 277 one-point placement. 268 moving. 254 selecting. 222. 65 navigating. 198. 20. 197. 172 notes displaying. 256 new compound filters. 173 defning. 189. 397. 186. 222. 221 piping components. 35 drawings. 264. 201 offset distance. 173 446 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . 20. 190 leader lines. 194 using reports. 89 setting to display. 253 labels. 126 filters. 203 storing. 132. 86 offline instruments placing.

268 joining. 256 specifications. 369 printing. 166 selecting. 77. 181 one-point. 141 database. 161 joining. 89 files. 412 comparing to SmartPlant. 247. 42. 413 PickQuick configuration tool. 273 PDS 2D cells. 167 inserting vertices. 162 breaking runs. 17 Options dialog box. 175 placing items.Index colors. 272 overview. 410 using filters. 313 solving inconsistencies. 408 errors. 391 orientations drawings. 186 tolerances. 15 drawings. 149 selecting items. 121 Page Setup. 370 orphan items deleting. 370 templates. 43 special. 409 labels. 166 properties. 239 parent representations. 287 catalog items. 181 reports. 165. 280 properties. 159. 245 report templates. 166 routing. 141 design window. 62 panning views. 172. 283 linking files. 331 P2C2 Web forum. 171. 333 symbology. 17 placements construction status. 147. 188 placing annotations. 409 setting. 182. 255 PipeSpec assigning. 211 area breaks. 278. 284. 169 piping branches. 272 update symbology. 130 labels. 102 filters. 167. 162. 159. 182. 409 equipment groups. 250 line settings. 10 overviews creating a drawing. 13 packages creating. 172. 273 items. 256 selecting runs. 254. 406 construction status. 369 printing. 368 layouts. 277. 66 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 447 . 173 selecting. 212 assemblies. 246. 271 organizing tasks. 173 Placement tab Options dialog box. 154 pasting bulk properties. 146 placement. 215. 271 symbology changes. 238 parametrics resizing. 17 Options Manager connectors. 169. 25 parametric handles. 246 default units. 265 page setups changing. 122 panes freezing. 280 objects. 253. 19 two-point. 98 overview SmartPlant P&ID. 165 components. 160 runs. 363. 88. 175 item tag. 156. 202 Cut command. 365. 171 using. 148 pipe runs inline components and validation. 280 paths checking. 158. 369 Page Setup. 11 removing items. 18 construction status. 184. 213 stockpile. 114 deleting items.

365. 259 and claiming. 149. 12 printing copies. 90 bulk. 175 internal nozzles. 363. 258 explained. 43. 150 labels. 169 printable user's guides. 114. 367 setting options. 296. 367 origin. 321. 86 displaying categorially. 284 catalog items. 171 using.Index component labels. 363. 367 drawings. 91 importing. 363 overview. 42. 300 prompts status bar. 84. 144. 30. 116 drawings. 177 instruments with heat tracing. 33. 89 copying. 221 multiple representations. 146. 370 positioning assemblies. 299 break labels. 141 Page Setup. 101 projects. 333 plant item groups examples. 292. 402 precision units. 248 labels. 89. 186. 131. 90 displaying. 232. 204 equipment. 153 flow arrows. 211 lines. 45. 144 portable reports. 300 enabling. 363 scale. 172. 162. 48. 109 plants groups. 195 connectors. 158. 194 heat tracing. 112. 368 range. 369 page setups. 169 programming customization. 237 formatted. 90 display. 300. 368. 288 overview. 293. 17 propagation comparing. 361 to a file. 264 items on a grid. 84. 264 title blocks. 297. 141 files. 112 editing. 213 pipe runs. 302. 112. 361. 364. 153 items. 113. 291. 368 fonts. 158. 299. 289. 361. 288 to do list. 87. 97. 187. 215. 88 PMC assigning. 196 brief. 173 property. 361 multiple drawings. 363 selected areas. 114 filters. 233. 401. 366. 87 448 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . 221 piping components. 214 stockpile items. 288 statuses. 66 equipment. 361. 204 packages. 84. 265 plant structures opening. 406 PDS 2D. 86. 201. 175 in stockpile. 298. 44. 66. 202. 367 documents. 141. 86 documents. 367. 48. 87 displaying alphabetically. 32. 84. 363. 88. 195 OPCs. 84 adding descriptions. 77 inline instruments. 194 plant reports. 177 OPCs. 144 end. 169 points center. 370 settings. 363. 337 portrait printing. 114 pressure maximum. 329 macros. 295. 322 customizing. 294. 303 claiming items. 28. 370 files. 154 offline instruments. 88. 88. 105. 410 properties. 85. 152. 367 process case data assigning. 66. 162. 184. 175. 263. 175 instruments. 182. 201 postponing tasks. 361. 153 items. 367 time. 301. 84. 182. 167 revision clouds. 188. 115.

118 reapplying rules. 76 catalog nodes. 358 reporting contents. 306 example. 250. 74 commands. 346 formats. 335. 354 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 449 . 167 printers. 293 items. 28. 403. 81 stockpile items. 350. 180 items. 292. 341 defining template layouts. 379. 341 creating templates. 375. 94. 310 To Do List. 68. 89 OPCs. 165. 380 files. 58 To Do List. 42 tasks. 333 to do list. 251 instruments. 166. 331. 99. 98. 350 editing. 40 quitting Catalog Explorer.Index grids. 373. 28. 352 creating. 338. 102 Replace Mode catalog items. 159. 29. 232 replacing and claiming. 368 relationship. 58 refreshing. 350 shortcut buttons. 235. 340 headers. 333 creating. 404 reports changing templates. 68. 233 report templates contents. 354 deleting. 51. 341 contents. 225. 341 deleting templates. 354 options. 268 lengths. 303 removing assembly items. 83 report templates. 335. 403 views. 232. 199 lines. 351 displaying. 45. 334. 141 publishing documents. 399 validating. 284 buttons. 354. 221 notes. 379. 389 inline components. 371 with SmartPlant Foundation. 262 labels. 345 editing items. 343. 248. 83 releasing claims. 378. 57 renaming catalog items. 233. 345 composite. 90 tasks. 398. 373. 337 defining items. 230. 305 tabular views. 396. 89 proxy server. 215. 75. 245. 377. 246. 201. 376. 377. 376. 76 SmartPlant P&ID. 340. 321 recreating drawings. 221 piping components. 299 views. 356 defining contents. 305 registering projects. 237 mode. 198. 402. 380 to TEF. 405 versions. 43 pipe runs. 331 editing. 229. 248 report templates. 68. 74. 350 table. 310 views. 127. 397. 251 OPCs. 88. 378. 377. 404 version. 203 pasting. 166. 375. 259. 378. 261 nulls. 234. 357 defining layouts. 44. 302. 344. 379. 337. 35. 129 reflecting items. 159. 228. 43 releasing claims. 14. 333 importing items. 95 correlations. 315. 358 including select lists. 175. 376. 100. 354. 300. 380 queries Engineering Data Editor. 319 instruments. 80 catalog items. 358 spacings. 375. 220. 346. 31 inconsistencies. 371 relationships using. 301. 240 refresh Compare and Refresh dialog. 373. 75 drawings. 75 catalog nodes. 46. 151 Properties window. 249. 165. 231. 305 drawings.

238 rotating handles. 265 items. 322. 20 handles. 337. 239 parametrics. 21 fixed formats. 227. 340. 125. 359. 220. 216. 360 toolbars. 154 required items. 322 running macros. 214 revisions text. 145. 55 scale handles. 237 for items. 341 template formats. 159. 244 routing lines. 157. 11 rules inconsistencies. 154 multiple. 28 resizing drawings. 315. 226. 162. 160. 341. 349. 325 reapplying. 96 toolbars. 251 resetting toolbars. 37 tabular views. 358 template properties. 386 from TEF. 359 importing items. 346. 124. 284. 161 rotation. 356. 356 layouts. 102. 352 filters. 154 parent. 162. 256 450 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . 239 resolving inconsistencies.Index editing templates. 345 naming templates. 218 piping. 220. 157 select sets. 87 revising drawings. 352. 346. 282 revision clouds. 340 template items. 386 files. 146 rotate handles. 255. 28 views. 157. 350 templates. 244 items. 370 parametrics. 285. 56 templates. 343 headers. 385. 221 mirror. 338. 337 sort orders. 42. 242. 254. 352. 157 insert. 160. 410 restoring menus. 313 filters. 144 selecting all. 221 pipe runs. 351. 141 portable. 156. 22. 228 segment alter. 286 drawings. 42. 354. 344. 344 spacings. 22 retrieving documents. 156. 148. 348. 343 options. 359 overview. 319. 382. 159. 241 move. 217. 118 settings. 101 tasks. 158. 360 types. 335 modifying. 385. 243. 353 template options. 321. 338 lengths. 32 migration. 214 links. 348. 354. 317. 243 select tool. 147. 157. 345. 118. 369. 225. 37. 345 sources. 282 report templates. 343 new. 248 connected items. 221 Rule Manager consistency checking. 239 searching for drawing items. 42. 220. 341. 130 overview. 262 ribbons line routing. 340. 351. 352 source templates. 161. 358 fields. 343. 357. 385. 400 saving assemblies. 44. 126 P&IDs. 352. 340. 240. 382. 338. 117. 321. 160. 341 formats. 156. 350. 124. 238 scaling drawing items. 382. 199. 125 views. 386 reviewing properties. 352 find directory. 217. 130. 343 representations child. 359 tabular. 239 embedded objects.

32. 325. 223 spreadsheets adding items. 265 OPCs. 271. 263. 20 stockpiles adding items. 215. 146. 82. 158. 410 sorting report items. 261 splitting drawings. 10 Rule Manager. 254 selection criteria. 109 Open Site Server. 371 SmartPlant Migrator importing. 256 sets. 237 inline components. 255. 201 Cut items. 265 placing items. 335 selections colors. 44 runs. 333. 254. 17 showing brief properties. 141 pipe runs. 369. 222. 65 menus. 223. 409 status bar prompts. 256 properties. 11 overview. 15. 265. 91 Catalog Explorer. 218. 109 Open Site Server. 370 SmartPlant Engineering Manager using. 84. 329 moving items. 325 SmartPlant P&ID Drawing Manager. 17 stockpile claiming items. 112 properties. 114 for a drawing. 190 sites open server. 145. 255. 11 Insulation Manager. 198. 159 P&IDs. 67 Aspen Zyqad. 46 drawings. 178. 11 Options Manager. 148. 255. 201 report templates. 22 tabular views. 63 shortcuts buttons. 105 settings labels. 145. 256 lists. 86. 62. 179. 146. 319. 256 inserted items. 256 lines. 101 networks. 30 items. 122. 86. 43. 250 displayed items. 329 importing. 65. 11 SmartSketch migration. 254. 77 Engineering Data Editor. 190 lines. 344 symbol file. 81 case data. 18 servers open site server. 254. 86. 67 adding to. 293. 255. 105 sizing drawings. 317.Index entries. 255. 80. 90 buttons. 248. 407 macros. 277. 66. 121. 83. 53 sources offset. 43. 329 starting lines. 245 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 451 . 42. 222. 267. 287 SP_ID. 371 SmartPlant Foundation interfacing with. 151 solving inconsistencies. 328 snapping grids. 41 filters. 248. 141 packages. 144. 367 saving. 314 leader lines. 272 printing. 264 removing items. 159 statistics current document. 302 specifications insulation. 255. 381 using. 283. 112 setting options. 147. 407 filters. 260. 264. 281. 246 deleted items. 248 deleting items. 202 overview. 79. 77 connectors. 282 symbols. 256 tool. 356 tables. 299 setting partner locations. 44. 254. 254. 254. 130 importing. 116 status construction. 97. 158. 248. 131. 90 inconsistencies. 81. 278.

45 modifying. 14 viewing. 395. 38 editing properties. 303 updating. 385 running a task. 381 adding tasks. 394. 400 To Do List. 391. 38. 48. 246. 46. 400 creating. 292. 401 To Do List. 394 types. 56 stockpiles. 60. 289. 405 reporting. 373. 400. 57. 36 symbol sources. 394 properties. 20. 47 tabular views editing. 38 items. 404 refreshing. 55. 140 claims. 293. 54 new. 54. 401 modifying. 395 technical support. 301 accessing Web. 376. 35. 396. 61 format reports. 60. 390. 404. 272 symbols displaying. 399. 400. 403 reporting. 403. 32. 287 toolbars. 399 refreshing. 9 TEF. 387 modifying properties. 44. 396. 277. 397 opening drawings. 278. 76 tables bold items. 375. 263 tools. 35. 392. 46. 38 layouts. 262. 396. 404 running. 46. 112 setting options. 52. 401. 371 zooming. 292. 390. 15. 47. 271. 46. 205 stream data importing. 51 properties. 71. 395. 245. 396 deferring. 12 switching drawings. 394 properties. 402 executing. 403. 34. 64 deleting. 43. 396 deferring tasks. 46 view layouts. 39. 46 view settings.Index reporting. 391. 208 XML. 204. 90 tabs customizing. 390 updating. 248 validation. 399. 396. 258 filters. 382. 398 publishing. 333 saving. 338 freezing panes. 50. 397. 12 World Wide Web. 76 symbology alternate. 40. 35. 63 view filters. 53. 404. 402 using. 395 assigning tasks. 281 toolbars. 47. 111 windows. 57 displaying views. 54 italic items. 396 assigning to drawings. 397. 397. 386 retrieving files. 402. 63 views. 329 summaries current document. 265 tasks adding. 63 Tabular Editor filters. 41 storing partner OPCs. 333 view. 389 creating properties. 400 Browser. 138 tabular customizing views. 381 correlating items. 111 views. 392. 47 table views. 402 ing items. 398. 377. 116 support Help. 62 updating views. 378 refresh. 394 452 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . 387. 404 retrieving documents. 58. 395. 401. 399 opening drawings. 405 zooming. 113 for a drawing. 405 removing. 398. 69. 69 sources. 46 reporting. 389 correlations. 59. 41. 62 filters. 38 editing items. 301. 398 creating tasks. 45 tags required. 58 view displays. 62.

395 assign drawing. 394. 130. 92 customizing. 340. 346. 216 assemblies. 352. 403. 94. 394 modifying properties. 121. 200 testing databases. 272 links. 343. 357 to do list tasks. 202. 341. 344. 27. 76 To Do List. 404. 401 deferring tasks. 359. 195 undoing actions. 188. 399 refresh. 394 properties. 329 symbol toolbars. 83. 102 drawings. 71 tools Customize. 396. 270 General tab. 17 PickQuick. 345. 254 tree views. 12 utility connectors. 271. 93. 96 customizing. 390 To Do List adding tasks. 392 how to. 17. 400 creating properties. 402 reporting. 405 zooming. 402 deleted tasks. 169 templates creating. 119. 91. 26. 391 opening drawings. 360 symbol. 281 properties. 350 saving. 112 precision.Index temperature maximum. 217 units for a drawing. 28 creating. 405 user access. 58 to do list. 267. 84 reports. 390 updating drawings. 392 user specific. 28. 285 changes. 397 opening. 36 title blocks. 122 included sizes. 272 tabular views. 369. 92. 404 running a task. 403 dialog box. 13 versions compare. 184. 402 removing tasks. 95 default. 146 reports. 114 To Do List. 208 piperun and inline components. 399 assigning tasks. 143 tiling windows. 197 placing. 329 label settings. 190 line settings. 397. 21 Select Tool. 353. 20. 19 pointer. 121. 175 values dates. 71. 398 creating tasks. 194 to and from data reports. 271. 65 two-point placement. 120 creating for drawing. 134 short. 105 user's guides printable. 169 version numbers. 119 reports. 398. 125 sizes. 204 validation item tags. 400 updating. 182 two-point placement labels. 26 project specific. 191 title blocks labels. 404 remove a task. 348. 76 symbology. 122. 391. 310 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 453 . 71 Properties window. 349. 19 toolbars adding buttons. 187. 214 items. 396 deferring items. 21 gapping. 354. 395 tolerances placement. 370 terminators types of. 338. 28 displaying. 351. 27.

258 warnings approve. 190 properties. 34 fitting. 23. 36 overview. 35 tabular. 35 document properties. 150 inconsistencies. 51. 335 settings. 36 panning. 314 leader lines. 22 saving. 308. 367. 161 viewing about SmartPlant P&ID. 313 resolving inconsistencies. 88. 30 grids. 41. 304. 32 lists. 325 World Wide Web forum. 124 XML tags. 78 manipulating. 47. 36 cascading. 84. 317. 89. 394. 29. 14. 305 vertices. 23 windows. 36 wizards migration. 26. 15 drawing. 14. 28. 25 properties. 13 links to. 24 tasks. 22 Engineering Data Editor. 319 watermarks Page Setup. 34 displaying. 115 report templates. 350 reports. 83 switching. 15 drawing views. 34. 381 What's New for this release. 35 using zoom. 24 using zooming. 78 changing properties. 131. 22. 22 printing. 15.Index comparing. 333. 367 properties. 22. 35 General tab. 102 list. 17. 303 deleting. 85. 161 inserting. 141 panning. 36 displaying. 55 settings. 151 restoring. 46. 22 table layouts. 52 Design view. 33 claims. 66 catalog items. 237 properties of documents. 35 drawings. 39. 36 views arranging. 305. 12 viewing drawings. 32 consistency checking. 115 drawing. 12 width printing. 310 refreshing. 35. 111 tabular. 395 Zyqad importing. 23 in. 13 Web Client accessing. 77. 258 Engineering Data Editor. 22. 370 Web forum. 25 grids. 24. 90. 15. 23 out. 13 Catalog Explorer. 25 previous. 37 stockpile. 370 windows arranging. 31 inconsistencies. 309 refresh. 34 drawings. 329 454 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . 57 Design. 48. 77 defining filters. 369 printing. 259 support. 36 Catalog Explorer. 53 tables. 265 zooming areas. 54. 39 switching.

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful